Fix cross-references between different manuals
[bpt/emacs.git] / doc / lispintro / emacs-lisp-intro.texi
1 \input texinfo @c -*-texinfo-*-
2 @comment %**start of header
3 @setfilename ../../info/eintr
4 @c setfilename emacs-lisp-intro.info
5 @c sethtmlfilename emacs-lisp-intro.html
6 @settitle Programming in Emacs Lisp
7 @syncodeindex vr cp
8 @syncodeindex fn cp
9 @finalout
10
11 @c ---------
12 @c <<<< For hard copy printing, this file is now
13 @c set for smallbook, which works for all sizes
14 @c of paper, and with PostScript figures >>>>
15 @set smallbook
16 @ifset smallbook
17 @smallbook
18 @clear largebook
19 @end ifset
20 @set print-postscript-figures
21 @c set largebook
22 @c clear print-postscript-figures
23 @c ---------
24
25 @comment %**end of header
26
27 @c per rms and peterb, use 10pt fonts for the main text, mostly to
28 @c save on paper cost.
29 @c Do this inside @tex for now, so current makeinfo does not complain.
30 @tex
31 @ifset smallbook
32 @fonttextsize 10
33
34 @end ifset
35 \global\hbadness=6666 % don't worry about not-too-underfull boxes
36 @end tex
37
38 @set edition-number 3.10
39 @set update-date 28 October 2009
40
41 @ignore
42 ## Summary of shell commands to create various output formats:
43
44 pushd /usr/local/src/emacs/lispintro/
45 ## pushd /u/intro/
46
47 ## Info output
48 makeinfo --paragraph-indent=0 --verbose emacs-lisp-intro.texi
49
50 ## ;; (progn (when (bufferp (get-buffer "*info*")) (kill-buffer "*info*")) (info "/usr/local/src/emacs/info/eintr"))
51
52 ## DVI output
53 texi2dvi emacs-lisp-intro.texi
54
55 ## xdvi -margins 24pt -topmargin 4pt -offsets 24pt -geometry 760x1140 -s 5 -useTeXpages -mousemode 1 emacs-lisp-intro.dvi &
56
57 ## HTML output
58 makeinfo --html --no-split --verbose emacs-lisp-intro.texi
59
60 ## galeon emacs-lisp-intro.html
61
62 ## Plain text output
63 makeinfo --fill-column=70 --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
64 --verbose --no-headers --output=emacs-lisp-intro.txt emacs-lisp-intro.texi
65
66 popd
67
68 # as user `root'
69 # insert thumbdrive
70 mtusb # mount -v -t ext3 /dev/sda /mnt
71 cp -v /u/intro/emacs-lisp-intro.texi /mnt/backup/intro/emacs-lisp-intro.texi
72 umtusb # umount -v /mnt
73 # remove thumbdrive
74
75 ## Other shell commands
76
77 pushd /usr/local/src/emacs/lispintro/
78 ## pushd /u/intro/
79
80 ## PDF
81 texi2dvi --pdf emacs-lisp-intro.texi
82 # xpdf emacs-lisp-intro.pdf &
83
84 ## DocBook -- note file extension
85 makeinfo --docbook --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
86 --verbose --output=emacs-lisp-intro.docbook emacs-lisp-intro.texi
87
88 ## XML with a Texinfo DTD -- note file extension
89 makeinfo --xml --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
90 --verbose --output=emacs-lisp-intro.texinfoxml emacs-lisp-intro.texi
91
92 ## PostScript (needs DVI)
93 # gv emacs-lisp-intro.ps &
94 # Create DVI if we lack it
95 # texi2dvi emacs-lisp-intro.texi
96 dvips emacs-lisp-intro.dvi -o emacs-lisp-intro.ps
97
98 ## RTF (needs HTML)
99 # Use OpenOffice to view RTF
100 # Create HTML if we lack it
101 # makeinfo --no-split --html emacs-lisp-intro.texi
102 /usr/local/src/html2rtf.pl emacs-lisp-intro.html
103
104 ## LaTeX (needs RTF)
105 /usr/bin/rtf2latex emacs-lisp-intro.rtf
106
107 popd
108
109 @end ignore
110
111 @c ================ Included Figures ================
112
113 @c Set print-postscript-figures if you print PostScript figures.
114 @c If you clear this, the ten figures will be printed as ASCII diagrams.
115 @c (This is not relevant to Info, since Info only handles ASCII.)
116 @c Your site may require editing changes to print PostScript; in this
117 @c case, search for `print-postscript-figures' and make appropriate changes.
118
119 @c ================ How to Create an Info file ================
120
121 @c If you have `makeinfo' installed, run the following command
122
123 @c makeinfo emacs-lisp-intro.texi
124
125 @c or, if you want a single, large Info file, and no paragraph indents:
126 @c makeinfo --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 --verbose emacs-lisp-intro.texi
127
128 @c After creating the Info file, edit your Info `dir' file, if the
129 @c `dircategory' section below does not enable your system to
130 @c install the manual automatically.
131 @c (The `dir' file is often in the `/usr/local/share/info/' directory.)
132
133 @c ================ How to Create an HTML file ================
134
135 @c To convert to HTML format
136 @c makeinfo --html --no-split --verbose emacs-lisp-intro.texi
137
138 @c ================ How to Print a Book in Various Sizes ================
139
140 @c This book can be printed in any of three different sizes.
141 @c In the above header, set @-commands appropriately.
142
143 @c 7 by 9.25 inches:
144 @c @smallbook
145 @c @clear largebook
146
147 @c 8.5 by 11 inches:
148 @c @c smallbook
149 @c @set largebook
150
151 @c European A4 size paper:
152 @c @c smallbook
153 @c @afourpaper
154 @c @set largebook
155
156 @c ================ How to Typeset and Print ================
157
158 @c If you do not include PostScript figures, run either of the
159 @c following command sequences, or similar commands suited to your
160 @c system:
161
162 @c texi2dvi emacs-lisp-intro.texi
163 @c lpr -d emacs-lisp-intro.dvi
164
165 @c or else:
166
167 @c tex emacs-lisp-intro.texi
168 @c texindex emacs-lisp-intro.??
169 @c tex emacs-lisp-intro.texi
170 @c lpr -d emacs-lisp-intro.dvi
171
172 @c If you include the PostScript figures, and you have old software,
173 @c you may need to convert the .dvi file to a .ps file before
174 @c printing. Run either of the following command sequences, or one
175 @c similar:
176 @c
177 @c dvips -f < emacs-lisp-intro.dvi > emacs-lisp-intro.ps
178 @c
179 @c or else:
180 @c
181 @c postscript -p < emacs-lisp-intro.dvi > emacs-lisp-intro.ps
182 @c
183
184 @c (Note: if you edit the book so as to change the length of the
185 @c table of contents, you may have to change the value of `pageno' below.)
186
187 @c ================ End of Formatting Sections ================
188
189 @c For next or subsequent edition:
190 @c create function using with-output-to-temp-buffer
191 @c create a major mode, with keymaps
192 @c run an asynchronous process, like grep or diff
193
194 @c For 8.5 by 11 inch format: do not use such a small amount of
195 @c whitespace between paragraphs as smallbook format
196 @ifset largebook
197 @tex
198 \global\parskip 6pt plus 1pt
199 @end tex
200 @end ifset
201
202 @c For all sized formats: print within-book cross
203 @c reference with ``...'' rather than [...]
204
205 @c This works with the texinfo.tex file, version 2003-05-04.08,
206 @c in the Texinfo version 4.6 of the 2003 Jun 13 distribution.
207
208 @tex
209 \if \xrefprintnodename
210 \global\def\xrefprintnodename#1{\unskip, ``#1''}
211 \else
212 \global\def\xrefprintnodename#1{ ``#1''}
213 \fi
214 % \global\def\xrefprintnodename#1{, ``#1''}
215 @end tex
216
217 @c ----------------------------------------------------
218
219 @dircategory GNU Emacs Lisp
220 @direntry
221 * Emacs Lisp Intro: (eintr).
222 A simple introduction to Emacs Lisp programming.
223 @end direntry
224
225 @copying
226 This is an @cite{Introduction to Programming in Emacs Lisp}, for
227 people who are not programmers.
228 @sp 1
229 Edition @value{edition-number}, @value{update-date}
230 @sp 1
231 Copyright @copyright{} 1990-1995, 1997, 2001-2012 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
232 @sp 1
233
234 @iftex
235 Published by the:@*
236
237 GNU Press, @hfill @uref{http://www.gnupress.org}@*
238 a division of the @hfill General: @email{press@@gnu.org}@*
239 Free Software Foundation, Inc. @hfill Orders:@w{ } @email{sales@@gnu.org}@*
240 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor @hfill Tel: +1 (617) 542-5942@*
241 Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA @hfill Fax: +1 (617) 542-2652@*
242 @end iftex
243
244 @ifnottex
245 Published by the:
246
247 @example
248 GNU Press, Website: http://www.gnupress.org
249 a division of the General: press@@gnu.org
250 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Orders: sales@@gnu.org
251 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor Tel: +1 (617) 542-5942
252 Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA Fax: +1 (617) 542-2652
253 @end example
254 @end ifnottex
255
256 @sp 1
257 @c Printed copies are available for $30 each.@*
258 ISBN 1-882114-43-4
259
260 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
261 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or
262 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; there
263 being no Invariant Section, with the Front-Cover Texts being ``A GNU
264 Manual'', and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below. A copy of
265 the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU Free
266 Documentation License''.
267
268 (a) The FSF's Back-Cover Text is: ``You have the freedom to
269 copy and modify this GNU manual. Buying copies from the FSF
270 supports it in developing GNU and promoting software freedom.''
271 @end copying
272
273 @c half title; two lines here, so do not use `shorttitlepage'
274 @tex
275 {\begingroup%
276 \hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{An Introduction to}%
277 \endgroup}%
278 {\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 0.25in \chaprm%
279 \centerline{Programming in Emacs Lisp}%
280 \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
281 @end tex
282
283 @titlepage
284 @sp 6
285 @center @titlefont{An Introduction to}
286 @sp 2
287 @center @titlefont{Programming in Emacs Lisp}
288 @sp 2
289 @center Revised Third Edition
290 @sp 4
291 @center by Robert J. Chassell
292
293 @page
294 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
295 @insertcopying
296 @end titlepage
297
298 @iftex
299 @headings off
300 @evenheading @thispage @| @| @thischapter
301 @oddheading @thissection @| @| @thispage
302 @end iftex
303
304 @ifnothtml
305 @c Keep T.O.C. short by tightening up for largebook
306 @ifset largebook
307 @tex
308 \global\parskip 2pt plus 1pt
309 \global\advance\baselineskip by -1pt
310 @end tex
311 @end ifset
312 @end ifnothtml
313
314 @shortcontents
315 @contents
316
317 @ifnottex
318 @node Top, Preface, (dir), (dir)
319 @top An Introduction to Programming in Emacs Lisp
320
321 @insertcopying
322
323 This master menu first lists each chapter and index; then it lists
324 every node in every chapter.
325 @end ifnottex
326
327 @c >>>> Set pageno appropriately <<<<
328
329 @c The first page of the Preface is a roman numeral; it is the first
330 @c right handed page after the Table of Contents; hence the following
331 @c setting must be for an odd negative number.
332
333 @c iftex
334 @c global@pageno = -11
335 @c end iftex
336
337 @set COUNT-WORDS count-words-example
338 @c Length of variable name chosen so that things still line up when expanded.
339
340 @menu
341 * Preface:: What to look for.
342 * List Processing:: What is Lisp?
343 * Practicing Evaluation:: Running several programs.
344 * Writing Defuns:: How to write function definitions.
345 * Buffer Walk Through:: Exploring a few buffer-related functions.
346 * More Complex:: A few, even more complex functions.
347 * Narrowing & Widening:: Restricting your and Emacs attention to
348 a region.
349 * car cdr & cons:: Fundamental functions in Lisp.
350 * Cutting & Storing Text:: Removing text and saving it.
351 * List Implementation:: How lists are implemented in the computer.
352 * Yanking:: Pasting stored text.
353 * Loops & Recursion:: How to repeat a process.
354 * Regexp Search:: Regular expression searches.
355 * Counting Words:: A review of repetition and regexps.
356 * Words in a defun:: Counting words in a @code{defun}.
357 * Readying a Graph:: A prototype graph printing function.
358 * Emacs Initialization:: How to write a @file{.emacs} file.
359 * Debugging:: How to run the Emacs Lisp debuggers.
360 * Conclusion:: Now you have the basics.
361 * the-the:: An appendix: how to find reduplicated words.
362 * Kill Ring:: An appendix: how the kill ring works.
363 * Full Graph:: How to create a graph with labeled axes.
364 * Free Software and Free Manuals::
365 * GNU Free Documentation License::
366 * Index::
367 * About the Author::
368
369 @detailmenu
370 --- The Detailed Node Listing ---
371
372 Preface
373
374 * Why:: Why learn Emacs Lisp?
375 * On Reading this Text:: Read, gain familiarity, pick up habits....
376 * Who You Are:: For whom this is written.
377 * Lisp History::
378 * Note for Novices:: You can read this as a novice.
379 * Thank You::
380
381 List Processing
382
383 * Lisp Lists:: What are lists?
384 * Run a Program:: Any list in Lisp is a program ready to run.
385 * Making Errors:: Generating an error message.
386 * Names & Definitions:: Names of symbols and function definitions.
387 * Lisp Interpreter:: What the Lisp interpreter does.
388 * Evaluation:: Running a program.
389 * Variables:: Returning a value from a variable.
390 * Arguments:: Passing information to a function.
391 * set & setq:: Setting the value of a variable.
392 * Summary:: The major points.
393 * Error Message Exercises::
394
395 Lisp Lists
396
397 * Numbers Lists:: List have numbers, other lists, in them.
398 * Lisp Atoms:: Elemental entities.
399 * Whitespace in Lists:: Formatting lists to be readable.
400 * Typing Lists:: How GNU Emacs helps you type lists.
401
402 The Lisp Interpreter
403
404 * Complications:: Variables, Special forms, Lists within.
405 * Byte Compiling:: Specially processing code for speed.
406
407 Evaluation
408
409 * How the Interpreter Acts:: Returns and Side Effects...
410 * Evaluating Inner Lists:: Lists within lists...
411
412 Variables
413
414 * fill-column Example::
415 * Void Function:: The error message for a symbol
416 without a function.
417 * Void Variable:: The error message for a symbol without a value.
418
419 Arguments
420
421 * Data types:: Types of data passed to a function.
422 * Args as Variable or List:: An argument can be the value
423 of a variable or list.
424 * Variable Number of Arguments:: Some functions may take a
425 variable number of arguments.
426 * Wrong Type of Argument:: Passing an argument of the wrong type
427 to a function.
428 * message:: A useful function for sending messages.
429
430 Setting the Value of a Variable
431
432 * Using set:: Setting values.
433 * Using setq:: Setting a quoted value.
434 * Counting:: Using @code{setq} to count.
435
436 Practicing Evaluation
437
438 * How to Evaluate:: Typing editing commands or @kbd{C-x C-e}
439 causes evaluation.
440 * Buffer Names:: Buffers and files are different.
441 * Getting Buffers:: Getting a buffer itself, not merely its name.
442 * Switching Buffers:: How to change to another buffer.
443 * Buffer Size & Locations:: Where point is located and the size of
444 the buffer.
445 * Evaluation Exercise::
446
447 How To Write Function Definitions
448
449 * Primitive Functions::
450 * defun:: The @code{defun} special form.
451 * Install:: Install a function definition.
452 * Interactive:: Making a function interactive.
453 * Interactive Options:: Different options for @code{interactive}.
454 * Permanent Installation:: Installing code permanently.
455 * let:: Creating and initializing local variables.
456 * if:: What if?
457 * else:: If--then--else expressions.
458 * Truth & Falsehood:: What Lisp considers false and true.
459 * save-excursion:: Keeping track of point, mark, and buffer.
460 * Review::
461 * defun Exercises::
462
463 Install a Function Definition
464
465 * Effect of installation::
466 * Change a defun:: How to change a function definition.
467
468 Make a Function Interactive
469
470 * Interactive multiply-by-seven:: An overview.
471 * multiply-by-seven in detail:: The interactive version.
472
473 @code{let}
474
475 * Prevent confusion::
476 * Parts of let Expression::
477 * Sample let Expression::
478 * Uninitialized let Variables::
479
480 The @code{if} Special Form
481
482 * if in more detail::
483 * type-of-animal in detail:: An example of an @code{if} expression.
484
485 Truth and Falsehood in Emacs Lisp
486
487 * nil explained:: @code{nil} has two meanings.
488
489 @code{save-excursion}
490
491 * Point and mark:: A review of various locations.
492 * Template for save-excursion::
493
494 A Few Buffer--Related Functions
495
496 * Finding More:: How to find more information.
497 * simplified-beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
498 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
499 * mark-whole-buffer:: Almost the same as @code{beginning-of-buffer}.
500 * append-to-buffer:: Uses @code{save-excursion} and
501 @code{insert-buffer-substring}.
502 * Buffer Related Review:: Review.
503 * Buffer Exercises::
504
505 The Definition of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
506
507 * mark-whole-buffer overview::
508 * Body of mark-whole-buffer:: Only three lines of code.
509
510 The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}
511
512 * append-to-buffer overview::
513 * append interactive:: A two part interactive expression.
514 * append-to-buffer body:: Incorporates a @code{let} expression.
515 * append save-excursion:: How the @code{save-excursion} works.
516
517 A Few More Complex Functions
518
519 * copy-to-buffer:: With @code{set-buffer}, @code{get-buffer-create}.
520 * insert-buffer:: Read-only, and with @code{or}.
521 * beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
522 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
523 * Second Buffer Related Review::
524 * optional Exercise::
525
526 The Definition of @code{insert-buffer}
527
528 * insert-buffer code::
529 * insert-buffer interactive:: When you can read, but not write.
530 * insert-buffer body:: The body has an @code{or} and a @code{let}.
531 * if & or:: Using an @code{if} instead of an @code{or}.
532 * Insert or:: How the @code{or} expression works.
533 * Insert let:: Two @code{save-excursion} expressions.
534 * New insert-buffer::
535
536 The Interactive Expression in @code{insert-buffer}
537
538 * Read-only buffer:: When a buffer cannot be modified.
539 * b for interactive:: An existing buffer or else its name.
540
541 Complete Definition of @code{beginning-of-buffer}
542
543 * Optional Arguments::
544 * beginning-of-buffer opt arg:: Example with optional argument.
545 * beginning-of-buffer complete::
546
547 @code{beginning-of-buffer} with an Argument
548
549 * Disentangle beginning-of-buffer::
550 * Large buffer case::
551 * Small buffer case::
552
553 Narrowing and Widening
554
555 * Narrowing advantages:: The advantages of narrowing
556 * save-restriction:: The @code{save-restriction} special form.
557 * what-line:: The number of the line that point is on.
558 * narrow Exercise::
559
560 @code{car}, @code{cdr}, @code{cons}: Fundamental Functions
561
562 * Strange Names:: An historical aside: why the strange names?
563 * car & cdr:: Functions for extracting part of a list.
564 * cons:: Constructing a list.
565 * nthcdr:: Calling @code{cdr} repeatedly.
566 * nth::
567 * setcar:: Changing the first element of a list.
568 * setcdr:: Changing the rest of a list.
569 * cons Exercise::
570
571 @code{cons}
572
573 * Build a list::
574 * length:: How to find the length of a list.
575
576 Cutting and Storing Text
577
578 * Storing Text:: Text is stored in a list.
579 * zap-to-char:: Cutting out text up to a character.
580 * kill-region:: Cutting text out of a region.
581 * copy-region-as-kill:: A definition for copying text.
582 * Digression into C:: Minor note on C programming language macros.
583 * defvar:: How to give a variable an initial value.
584 * cons & search-fwd Review::
585 * search Exercises::
586
587 @code{zap-to-char}
588
589 * Complete zap-to-char:: The complete implementation.
590 * zap-to-char interactive:: A three part interactive expression.
591 * zap-to-char body:: A short overview.
592 * search-forward:: How to search for a string.
593 * progn:: The @code{progn} special form.
594 * Summing up zap-to-char:: Using @code{point} and @code{search-forward}.
595
596 @code{kill-region}
597
598 * Complete kill-region:: The function definition.
599 * condition-case:: Dealing with a problem.
600 * Lisp macro::
601
602 @code{copy-region-as-kill}
603
604 * Complete copy-region-as-kill:: The complete function definition.
605 * copy-region-as-kill body:: The body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}.
606
607 The Body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}
608
609 * last-command & this-command::
610 * kill-append function::
611 * kill-new function::
612
613 Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
614
615 * See variable current value::
616 * defvar and asterisk::
617
618 How Lists are Implemented
619
620 * Lists diagrammed::
621 * Symbols as Chest:: Exploring a powerful metaphor.
622 * List Exercise::
623
624 Yanking Text Back
625
626 * Kill Ring Overview::
627 * kill-ring-yank-pointer:: The kill ring is a list.
628 * yank nthcdr Exercises:: The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
629
630 Loops and Recursion
631
632 * while:: Causing a stretch of code to repeat.
633 * dolist dotimes::
634 * Recursion:: Causing a function to call itself.
635 * Looping exercise::
636
637 @code{while}
638
639 * Looping with while:: Repeat so long as test returns true.
640 * Loop Example:: A @code{while} loop that uses a list.
641 * print-elements-of-list:: Uses @code{while}, @code{car}, @code{cdr}.
642 * Incrementing Loop:: A loop with an incrementing counter.
643 * Incrementing Loop Details::
644 * Decrementing Loop:: A loop with a decrementing counter.
645
646 Details of an Incrementing Loop
647
648 * Incrementing Example:: Counting pebbles in a triangle.
649 * Inc Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
650 * Inc Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
651
652 Loop with a Decrementing Counter
653
654 * Decrementing Example:: More pebbles on the beach.
655 * Dec Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
656 * Dec Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
657
658 Save your time: @code{dolist} and @code{dotimes}
659
660 * dolist::
661 * dotimes::
662
663 Recursion
664
665 * Building Robots:: Same model, different serial number ...
666 * Recursive Definition Parts:: Walk until you stop ...
667 * Recursion with list:: Using a list as the test whether to recurse.
668 * Recursive triangle function::
669 * Recursion with cond::
670 * Recursive Patterns:: Often used templates.
671 * No Deferment:: Don't store up work ...
672 * No deferment solution::
673
674 Recursion in Place of a Counter
675
676 * Recursive Example arg of 1 or 2::
677 * Recursive Example arg of 3 or 4::
678
679 Recursive Patterns
680
681 * Every::
682 * Accumulate::
683 * Keep::
684
685 Regular Expression Searches
686
687 * sentence-end:: The regular expression for @code{sentence-end}.
688 * re-search-forward:: Very similar to @code{search-forward}.
689 * forward-sentence:: A straightforward example of regexp search.
690 * forward-paragraph:: A somewhat complex example.
691 * etags:: How to create your own @file{TAGS} table.
692 * Regexp Review::
693 * re-search Exercises::
694
695 @code{forward-sentence}
696
697 * Complete forward-sentence::
698 * fwd-sentence while loops:: Two @code{while} loops.
699 * fwd-sentence re-search:: A regular expression search.
700
701 @code{forward-paragraph}: a Goldmine of Functions
702
703 * forward-paragraph in brief:: Key parts of the function definition.
704 * fwd-para let:: The @code{let*} expression.
705 * fwd-para while:: The forward motion @code{while} loop.
706
707 Counting: Repetition and Regexps
708
709 * Why Count Words::
710 * @value{COUNT-WORDS}:: Use a regexp, but find a problem.
711 * recursive-count-words:: Start with case of no words in region.
712 * Counting Exercise::
713
714 The @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} Function
715
716 * Design @value{COUNT-WORDS}:: The definition using a @code{while} loop.
717 * Whitespace Bug:: The Whitespace Bug in @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
718
719 Counting Words in a @code{defun}
720
721 * Divide and Conquer::
722 * Words and Symbols:: What to count?
723 * Syntax:: What constitutes a word or symbol?
724 * count-words-in-defun:: Very like @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
725 * Several defuns:: Counting several defuns in a file.
726 * Find a File:: Do you want to look at a file?
727 * lengths-list-file:: A list of the lengths of many definitions.
728 * Several files:: Counting in definitions in different files.
729 * Several files recursively:: Recursively counting in different files.
730 * Prepare the data:: Prepare the data for display in a graph.
731
732 Count Words in @code{defuns} in Different Files
733
734 * lengths-list-many-files:: Return a list of the lengths of defuns.
735 * append:: Attach one list to another.
736
737 Prepare the Data for Display in a Graph
738
739 * Data for Display in Detail::
740 * Sorting:: Sorting lists.
741 * Files List:: Making a list of files.
742 * Counting function definitions::
743
744 Readying a Graph
745
746 * Columns of a graph::
747 * graph-body-print:: How to print the body of a graph.
748 * recursive-graph-body-print::
749 * Printed Axes::
750 * Line Graph Exercise::
751
752 Your @file{.emacs} File
753
754 * Default Configuration::
755 * Site-wide Init:: You can write site-wide init files.
756 * defcustom:: Emacs will write code for you.
757 * Beginning a .emacs File:: How to write a @code{.emacs file}.
758 * Text and Auto-fill:: Automatically wrap lines.
759 * Mail Aliases:: Use abbreviations for email addresses.
760 * Indent Tabs Mode:: Don't use tabs with @TeX{}
761 * Keybindings:: Create some personal keybindings.
762 * Keymaps:: More about key binding.
763 * Loading Files:: Load (i.e., evaluate) files automatically.
764 * Autoload:: Make functions available.
765 * Simple Extension:: Define a function; bind it to a key.
766 * X11 Colors:: Colors in X.
767 * Miscellaneous::
768 * Mode Line:: How to customize your mode line.
769
770 Debugging
771
772 * debug:: How to use the built-in debugger.
773 * debug-on-entry:: Start debugging when you call a function.
774 * debug-on-quit:: Start debugging when you quit with @kbd{C-g}.
775 * edebug:: How to use Edebug, a source level debugger.
776 * Debugging Exercises::
777
778 Handling the Kill Ring
779
780 * What the Kill Ring Does::
781 * current-kill::
782 * yank:: Paste a copy of a clipped element.
783 * yank-pop:: Insert element pointed to.
784 * ring file::
785
786 The @code{current-kill} Function
787
788 * Code for current-kill::
789 * Understanding current-kill::
790
791 @code{current-kill} in Outline
792
793 * Body of current-kill::
794 * Digression concerning error:: How to mislead humans, but not computers.
795 * Determining the Element::
796
797 A Graph with Labeled Axes
798
799 * Labeled Example::
800 * print-graph Varlist:: @code{let} expression in @code{print-graph}.
801 * print-Y-axis:: Print a label for the vertical axis.
802 * print-X-axis:: Print a horizontal label.
803 * Print Whole Graph:: The function to print a complete graph.
804
805 The @code{print-Y-axis} Function
806
807 * print-Y-axis in Detail::
808 * Height of label:: What height for the Y axis?
809 * Compute a Remainder:: How to compute the remainder of a division.
810 * Y Axis Element:: Construct a line for the Y axis.
811 * Y-axis-column:: Generate a list of Y axis labels.
812 * print-Y-axis Penultimate:: A not quite final version.
813
814 The @code{print-X-axis} Function
815
816 * Similarities differences:: Much like @code{print-Y-axis}, but not exactly.
817 * X Axis Tic Marks:: Create tic marks for the horizontal axis.
818
819 Printing the Whole Graph
820
821 * The final version:: A few changes.
822 * Test print-graph:: Run a short test.
823 * Graphing words in defuns:: Executing the final code.
824 * lambda:: How to write an anonymous function.
825 * mapcar:: Apply a function to elements of a list.
826 * Another Bug:: Yet another bug @dots{} most insidious.
827 * Final printed graph:: The graph itself!
828
829 @end detailmenu
830 @end menu
831
832 @node Preface, List Processing, Top, Top
833 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
834 @unnumbered Preface
835
836 Most of the GNU Emacs integrated environment is written in the programming
837 language called Emacs Lisp. The code written in this programming
838 language is the software---the sets of instructions---that tell the
839 computer what to do when you give it commands. Emacs is designed so
840 that you can write new code in Emacs Lisp and easily install it as an
841 extension to the editor.
842
843 (GNU Emacs is sometimes called an ``extensible editor'', but it does
844 much more than provide editing capabilities. It is better to refer to
845 Emacs as an ``extensible computing environment''. However, that
846 phrase is quite a mouthful. It is easier to refer to Emacs simply as
847 an editor. Moreover, everything you do in Emacs---find the Mayan date
848 and phases of the moon, simplify polynomials, debug code, manage
849 files, read letters, write books---all these activities are kinds of
850 editing in the most general sense of the word.)
851
852 @menu
853 * Why:: Why learn Emacs Lisp?
854 * On Reading this Text:: Read, gain familiarity, pick up habits....
855 * Who You Are:: For whom this is written.
856 * Lisp History::
857 * Note for Novices:: You can read this as a novice.
858 * Thank You::
859 @end menu
860
861 @node Why, On Reading this Text, Preface, Preface
862 @ifnottex
863 @unnumberedsec Why Study Emacs Lisp?
864 @end ifnottex
865
866 Although Emacs Lisp is usually thought of in association only with Emacs,
867 it is a full computer programming language. You can use Emacs Lisp as
868 you would any other programming language.
869
870 Perhaps you want to understand programming; perhaps you want to extend
871 Emacs; or perhaps you want to become a programmer. This introduction to
872 Emacs Lisp is designed to get you started: to guide you in learning the
873 fundamentals of programming, and more importantly, to show you how you
874 can teach yourself to go further.
875
876 @node On Reading this Text, Who You Are, Why, Preface
877 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
878 @unnumberedsec On Reading this Text
879
880 All through this document, you will see little sample programs you can
881 run inside of Emacs. If you read this document in Info inside of GNU
882 Emacs, you can run the programs as they appear. (This is easy to do and
883 is explained when the examples are presented.) Alternatively, you can
884 read this introduction as a printed book while sitting beside a computer
885 running Emacs. (This is what I like to do; I like printed books.) If
886 you don't have a running Emacs beside you, you can still read this book,
887 but in this case, it is best to treat it as a novel or as a travel guide
888 to a country not yet visited: interesting, but not the same as being
889 there.
890
891 Much of this introduction is dedicated to walkthroughs or guided tours
892 of code used in GNU Emacs. These tours are designed for two purposes:
893 first, to give you familiarity with real, working code (code you use
894 every day); and, second, to give you familiarity with the way Emacs
895 works. It is interesting to see how a working environment is
896 implemented.
897 Also, I
898 hope that you will pick up the habit of browsing through source code.
899 You can learn from it and mine it for ideas. Having GNU Emacs is like
900 having a dragon's cave of treasures.
901
902 In addition to learning about Emacs as an editor and Emacs Lisp as a
903 programming language, the examples and guided tours will give you an
904 opportunity to get acquainted with Emacs as a Lisp programming
905 environment. GNU Emacs supports programming and provides tools that
906 you will want to become comfortable using, such as @kbd{M-.} (the key
907 which invokes the @code{find-tag} command). You will also learn about
908 buffers and other objects that are part of the environment.
909 Learning about these features of Emacs is like learning new routes
910 around your home town.
911
912 @ignore
913 In addition, I have written several programs as extended examples.
914 Although these are examples, the programs are real. I use them.
915 Other people use them. You may use them. Beyond the fragments of
916 programs used for illustrations, there is very little in here that is
917 `just for teaching purposes'; what you see is used. This is a great
918 advantage of Emacs Lisp: it is easy to learn to use it for work.
919 @end ignore
920
921 Finally, I hope to convey some of the skills for using Emacs to
922 learn aspects of programming that you don't know. You can often use
923 Emacs to help you understand what puzzles you or to find out how to do
924 something new. This self-reliance is not only a pleasure, but an
925 advantage.
926
927 @node Who You Are, Lisp History, On Reading this Text, Preface
928 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
929 @unnumberedsec For Whom This is Written
930
931 This text is written as an elementary introduction for people who are
932 not programmers. If you are a programmer, you may not be satisfied with
933 this primer. The reason is that you may have become expert at reading
934 reference manuals and be put off by the way this text is organized.
935
936 An expert programmer who reviewed this text said to me:
937
938 @quotation
939 @i{I prefer to learn from reference manuals. I ``dive into'' each
940 paragraph, and ``come up for air'' between paragraphs.}
941
942 @i{When I get to the end of a paragraph, I assume that that subject is
943 done, finished, that I know everything I need (with the
944 possible exception of the case when the next paragraph starts talking
945 about it in more detail). I expect that a well written reference manual
946 will not have a lot of redundancy, and that it will have excellent
947 pointers to the (one) place where the information I want is.}
948 @end quotation
949
950 This introduction is not written for this person!
951
952 Firstly, I try to say everything at least three times: first, to
953 introduce it; second, to show it in context; and third, to show it in a
954 different context, or to review it.
955
956 Secondly, I hardly ever put all the information about a subject in one
957 place, much less in one paragraph. To my way of thinking, that imposes
958 too heavy a burden on the reader. Instead I try to explain only what
959 you need to know at the time. (Sometimes I include a little extra
960 information so you won't be surprised later when the additional
961 information is formally introduced.)
962
963 When you read this text, you are not expected to learn everything the
964 first time. Frequently, you need only make, as it were, a `nodding
965 acquaintance' with some of the items mentioned. My hope is that I have
966 structured the text and given you enough hints that you will be alert to
967 what is important, and concentrate on it.
968
969 You will need to ``dive into'' some paragraphs; there is no other way
970 to read them. But I have tried to keep down the number of such
971 paragraphs. This book is intended as an approachable hill, rather than
972 as a daunting mountain.
973
974 This introduction to @cite{Programming in Emacs Lisp} has a companion
975 document,
976 @iftex
977 @cite{The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
978 @end iftex
979 @ifnottex
980 @ref{Top, , The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual, elisp, The GNU
981 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
982 @end ifnottex
983 The reference manual has more detail than this introduction. In the
984 reference manual, all the information about one topic is concentrated
985 in one place. You should turn to it if you are like the programmer
986 quoted above. And, of course, after you have read this
987 @cite{Introduction}, you will find the @cite{Reference Manual} useful
988 when you are writing your own programs.
989
990 @node Lisp History, Note for Novices, Who You Are, Preface
991 @unnumberedsec Lisp History
992 @cindex Lisp history
993
994 Lisp was first developed in the late 1950s at the Massachusetts
995 Institute of Technology for research in artificial intelligence. The
996 great power of the Lisp language makes it superior for other purposes as
997 well, such as writing editor commands and integrated environments.
998
999 @cindex Maclisp
1000 @cindex Common Lisp
1001 GNU Emacs Lisp is largely inspired by Maclisp, which was written at MIT
1002 in the 1960s. It is somewhat inspired by Common Lisp, which became a
1003 standard in the 1980s. However, Emacs Lisp is much simpler than Common
1004 Lisp. (The standard Emacs distribution contains an optional extensions
1005 file, @file{cl.el}, that adds many Common Lisp features to Emacs Lisp.)
1006
1007 @node Note for Novices, Thank You, Lisp History, Preface
1008 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1009 @unnumberedsec A Note for Novices
1010
1011 If you don't know GNU Emacs, you can still read this document
1012 profitably. However, I recommend you learn Emacs, if only to learn to
1013 move around your computer screen. You can teach yourself how to use
1014 Emacs with the on-line tutorial. To use it, type @kbd{C-h t}. (This
1015 means you press and release the @key{CTRL} key and the @kbd{h} at the
1016 same time, and then press and release @kbd{t}.)
1017
1018 Also, I often refer to one of Emacs' standard commands by listing the
1019 keys which you press to invoke the command and then giving the name of
1020 the command in parentheses, like this: @kbd{M-C-\}
1021 (@code{indent-region}). What this means is that the
1022 @code{indent-region} command is customarily invoked by typing
1023 @kbd{M-C-\}. (You can, if you wish, change the keys that are typed to
1024 invoke the command; this is called @dfn{rebinding}. @xref{Keymaps, ,
1025 Keymaps}.) The abbreviation @kbd{M-C-\} means that you type your
1026 @key{META} key, @key{CTRL} key and @key{\} key all at the same time.
1027 (On many modern keyboards the @key{META} key is labeled
1028 @key{ALT}.)
1029 Sometimes a combination like this is called a keychord, since it is
1030 similar to the way you play a chord on a piano. If your keyboard does
1031 not have a @key{META} key, the @key{ESC} key prefix is used in place
1032 of it. In this case, @kbd{M-C-\} means that you press and release your
1033 @key{ESC} key and then type the @key{CTRL} key and the @key{\} key at
1034 the same time. But usually @kbd{M-C-\} means press the @key{CTRL} key
1035 along with the key that is labeled @key{ALT} and, at the same time,
1036 press the @key{\} key.
1037
1038 In addition to typing a lone keychord, you can prefix what you type
1039 with @kbd{C-u}, which is called the `universal argument'. The
1040 @kbd{C-u} keychord passes an argument to the subsequent command.
1041 Thus, to indent a region of plain text by 6 spaces, mark the region,
1042 and then type @w{@kbd{C-u 6 M-C-\}}. (If you do not specify a number,
1043 Emacs either passes the number 4 to the command or otherwise runs the
1044 command differently than it would otherwise.) @xref{Arguments, ,
1045 Numeric Arguments, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
1046
1047 If you are reading this in Info using GNU Emacs, you can read through
1048 this whole document just by pressing the space bar, @key{SPC}.
1049 (To learn about Info, type @kbd{C-h i} and then select Info.)
1050
1051 A note on terminology: when I use the word Lisp alone, I often am
1052 referring to the various dialects of Lisp in general, but when I speak
1053 of Emacs Lisp, I am referring to GNU Emacs Lisp in particular.
1054
1055 @node Thank You, , Note for Novices, Preface
1056 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1057 @unnumberedsec Thank You
1058
1059 My thanks to all who helped me with this book. My especial thanks to
1060 @r{Jim Blandy}, @r{Noah Friedman}, @w{Jim Kingdon}, @r{Roland
1061 McGrath}, @w{Frank Ritter}, @w{Randy Smith}, @w{Richard M.@:
1062 Stallman}, and @w{Melissa Weisshaus}. My thanks also go to both
1063 @w{Philip Johnson} and @w{David Stampe} for their patient
1064 encouragement. My mistakes are my own.
1065
1066 @flushright
1067 Robert J. Chassell
1068 @email{bob@@gnu.org}
1069 @end flushright
1070
1071 @c ================ Beginning of main text ================
1072
1073 @c Start main text on right-hand (verso) page
1074
1075 @tex
1076 \par\vfill\supereject
1077 \headings off
1078 \ifodd\pageno
1079 \par\vfill\supereject
1080 \else
1081 \par\vfill\supereject
1082 \page\hbox{}\page
1083 \par\vfill\supereject
1084 \fi
1085 @end tex
1086
1087 @iftex
1088 @headings off
1089 @evenheading @thispage @| @| @thischapter
1090 @oddheading @thissection @| @| @thispage
1091 @global@pageno = 1
1092 @end iftex
1093
1094 @node List Processing, Practicing Evaluation, Preface, Top
1095 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1096 @chapter List Processing
1097
1098 To the untutored eye, Lisp is a strange programming language. In Lisp
1099 code there are parentheses everywhere. Some people even claim that
1100 the name stands for `Lots of Isolated Silly Parentheses'. But the
1101 claim is unwarranted. Lisp stands for LISt Processing, and the
1102 programming language handles @emph{lists} (and lists of lists) by
1103 putting them between parentheses. The parentheses mark the boundaries
1104 of the list. Sometimes a list is preceded by a single apostrophe or
1105 quotation mark, @samp{'}@footnote{The single apostrophe or quotation
1106 mark is an abbreviation for the function @code{quote}; you need not
1107 think about functions now; functions are defined in @ref{Making
1108 Errors, , Generate an Error Message}.} Lists are the basis of Lisp.
1109
1110 @menu
1111 * Lisp Lists:: What are lists?
1112 * Run a Program:: Any list in Lisp is a program ready to run.
1113 * Making Errors:: Generating an error message.
1114 * Names & Definitions:: Names of symbols and function definitions.
1115 * Lisp Interpreter:: What the Lisp interpreter does.
1116 * Evaluation:: Running a program.
1117 * Variables:: Returning a value from a variable.
1118 * Arguments:: Passing information to a function.
1119 * set & setq:: Setting the value of a variable.
1120 * Summary:: The major points.
1121 * Error Message Exercises::
1122 @end menu
1123
1124 @node Lisp Lists, Run a Program, List Processing, List Processing
1125 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1126 @section Lisp Lists
1127 @cindex Lisp Lists
1128
1129 In Lisp, a list looks like this: @code{'(rose violet daisy buttercup)}.
1130 This list is preceded by a single apostrophe. It could just as well be
1131 written as follows, which looks more like the kind of list you are likely
1132 to be familiar with:
1133
1134 @smallexample
1135 @group
1136 '(rose
1137 violet
1138 daisy
1139 buttercup)
1140 @end group
1141 @end smallexample
1142
1143 @noindent
1144 The elements of this list are the names of the four different flowers,
1145 separated from each other by whitespace and surrounded by parentheses,
1146 like flowers in a field with a stone wall around them.
1147 @cindex Flowers in a field
1148
1149 @menu
1150 * Numbers Lists:: List have numbers, other lists, in them.
1151 * Lisp Atoms:: Elemental entities.
1152 * Whitespace in Lists:: Formatting lists to be readable.
1153 * Typing Lists:: How GNU Emacs helps you type lists.
1154 @end menu
1155
1156 @node Numbers Lists, Lisp Atoms, Lisp Lists, Lisp Lists
1157 @ifnottex
1158 @unnumberedsubsec Numbers, Lists inside of Lists
1159 @end ifnottex
1160
1161 Lists can also have numbers in them, as in this list: @code{(+ 2 2)}.
1162 This list has a plus-sign, @samp{+}, followed by two @samp{2}s, each
1163 separated by whitespace.
1164
1165 In Lisp, both data and programs are represented the same way; that is,
1166 they are both lists of words, numbers, or other lists, separated by
1167 whitespace and surrounded by parentheses. (Since a program looks like
1168 data, one program may easily serve as data for another; this is a very
1169 powerful feature of Lisp.) (Incidentally, these two parenthetical
1170 remarks are @emph{not} Lisp lists, because they contain @samp{;} and
1171 @samp{.} as punctuation marks.)
1172
1173 @need 1200
1174 Here is another list, this time with a list inside of it:
1175
1176 @smallexample
1177 '(this list has (a list inside of it))
1178 @end smallexample
1179
1180 The components of this list are the words @samp{this}, @samp{list},
1181 @samp{has}, and the list @samp{(a list inside of it)}. The interior
1182 list is made up of the words @samp{a}, @samp{list}, @samp{inside},
1183 @samp{of}, @samp{it}.
1184
1185 @node Lisp Atoms, Whitespace in Lists, Numbers Lists, Lisp Lists
1186 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1187 @subsection Lisp Atoms
1188 @cindex Lisp Atoms
1189
1190 In Lisp, what we have been calling words are called @dfn{atoms}. This
1191 term comes from the historical meaning of the word atom, which means
1192 `indivisible'. As far as Lisp is concerned, the words we have been
1193 using in the lists cannot be divided into any smaller parts and still
1194 mean the same thing as part of a program; likewise with numbers and
1195 single character symbols like @samp{+}. On the other hand, unlike an
1196 ancient atom, a list can be split into parts. (@xref{car cdr & cons,
1197 , @code{car} @code{cdr} & @code{cons} Fundamental Functions}.)
1198
1199 In a list, atoms are separated from each other by whitespace. They can be
1200 right next to a parenthesis.
1201
1202 @cindex @samp{empty list} defined
1203 Technically speaking, a list in Lisp consists of parentheses surrounding
1204 atoms separated by whitespace or surrounding other lists or surrounding
1205 both atoms and other lists. A list can have just one atom in it or
1206 have nothing in it at all. A list with nothing in it looks like this:
1207 @code{()}, and is called the @dfn{empty list}. Unlike anything else, an
1208 empty list is considered both an atom and a list at the same time.
1209
1210 @cindex Symbolic expressions, introduced
1211 @cindex @samp{expression} defined
1212 @cindex @samp{form} defined
1213 The printed representation of both atoms and lists are called
1214 @dfn{symbolic expressions} or, more concisely, @dfn{s-expressions}.
1215 The word @dfn{expression} by itself can refer to either the printed
1216 representation, or to the atom or list as it is held internally in the
1217 computer. Often, people use the term @dfn{expression}
1218 indiscriminately. (Also, in many texts, the word @dfn{form} is used
1219 as a synonym for expression.)
1220
1221 Incidentally, the atoms that make up our universe were named such when
1222 they were thought to be indivisible; but it has been found that physical
1223 atoms are not indivisible. Parts can split off an atom or it can
1224 fission into two parts of roughly equal size. Physical atoms were named
1225 prematurely, before their truer nature was found. In Lisp, certain
1226 kinds of atom, such as an array, can be separated into parts; but the
1227 mechanism for doing this is different from the mechanism for splitting a
1228 list. As far as list operations are concerned, the atoms of a list are
1229 unsplittable.
1230
1231 As in English, the meanings of the component letters of a Lisp atom
1232 are different from the meaning the letters make as a word. For
1233 example, the word for the South American sloth, the @samp{ai}, is
1234 completely different from the two words, @samp{a}, and @samp{i}.
1235
1236 There are many kinds of atom in nature but only a few in Lisp: for
1237 example, @dfn{numbers}, such as 37, 511, or 1729, and @dfn{symbols}, such
1238 as @samp{+}, @samp{foo}, or @samp{forward-line}. The words we have
1239 listed in the examples above are all symbols. In everyday Lisp
1240 conversation, the word ``atom'' is not often used, because programmers
1241 usually try to be more specific about what kind of atom they are dealing
1242 with. Lisp programming is mostly about symbols (and sometimes numbers)
1243 within lists. (Incidentally, the preceding three word parenthetical
1244 remark is a proper list in Lisp, since it consists of atoms, which in
1245 this case are symbols, separated by whitespace and enclosed by
1246 parentheses, without any non-Lisp punctuation.)
1247
1248 @need 1250
1249 Text between double quotation marks---even sentences or
1250 paragraphs---is also an atom. Here is an example:
1251 @cindex Text between double quotation marks
1252
1253 @smallexample
1254 '(this list includes "text between quotation marks.")
1255 @end smallexample
1256
1257 @cindex @samp{string} defined
1258 @noindent
1259 In Lisp, all of the quoted text including the punctuation mark and the
1260 blank spaces is a single atom. This kind of atom is called a
1261 @dfn{string} (for `string of characters') and is the sort of thing that
1262 is used for messages that a computer can print for a human to read.
1263 Strings are a different kind of atom than numbers or symbols and are
1264 used differently.
1265
1266 @node Whitespace in Lists, Typing Lists, Lisp Atoms, Lisp Lists
1267 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1268 @subsection Whitespace in Lists
1269 @cindex Whitespace in lists
1270
1271 @need 1200
1272 The amount of whitespace in a list does not matter. From the point of view
1273 of the Lisp language,
1274
1275 @smallexample
1276 @group
1277 '(this list
1278 looks like this)
1279 @end group
1280 @end smallexample
1281
1282 @need 800
1283 @noindent
1284 is exactly the same as this:
1285
1286 @smallexample
1287 '(this list looks like this)
1288 @end smallexample
1289
1290 Both examples show what to Lisp is the same list, the list made up of
1291 the symbols @samp{this}, @samp{list}, @samp{looks}, @samp{like}, and
1292 @samp{this} in that order.
1293
1294 Extra whitespace and newlines are designed to make a list more readable
1295 by humans. When Lisp reads the expression, it gets rid of all the extra
1296 whitespace (but it needs to have at least one space between atoms in
1297 order to tell them apart.)
1298
1299 Odd as it seems, the examples we have seen cover almost all of what Lisp
1300 lists look like! Every other list in Lisp looks more or less like one
1301 of these examples, except that the list may be longer and more complex.
1302 In brief, a list is between parentheses, a string is between quotation
1303 marks, a symbol looks like a word, and a number looks like a number.
1304 (For certain situations, square brackets, dots and a few other special
1305 characters may be used; however, we will go quite far without them.)
1306
1307 @node Typing Lists, , Whitespace in Lists, Lisp Lists
1308 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1309 @subsection GNU Emacs Helps You Type Lists
1310 @cindex Help typing lists
1311 @cindex Formatting help
1312
1313 When you type a Lisp expression in GNU Emacs using either Lisp
1314 Interaction mode or Emacs Lisp mode, you have available to you several
1315 commands to format the Lisp expression so it is easy to read. For
1316 example, pressing the @key{TAB} key automatically indents the line the
1317 cursor is on by the right amount. A command to properly indent the
1318 code in a region is customarily bound to @kbd{M-C-\}. Indentation is
1319 designed so that you can see which elements of a list belong to which
1320 list---elements of a sub-list are indented more than the elements of
1321 the enclosing list.
1322
1323 In addition, when you type a closing parenthesis, Emacs momentarily
1324 jumps the cursor back to the matching opening parenthesis, so you can
1325 see which one it is. This is very useful, since every list you type
1326 in Lisp must have its closing parenthesis match its opening
1327 parenthesis. (@xref{Major Modes, , Major Modes, emacs, The GNU Emacs
1328 Manual}, for more information about Emacs' modes.)
1329
1330 @node Run a Program, Making Errors, Lisp Lists, List Processing
1331 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1332 @section Run a Program
1333 @cindex Run a program
1334 @cindex Program, running one
1335
1336 @cindex @samp{evaluate} defined
1337 A list in Lisp---any list---is a program ready to run. If you run it
1338 (for which the Lisp jargon is @dfn{evaluate}), the computer will do one
1339 of three things: do nothing except return to you the list itself; send
1340 you an error message; or, treat the first symbol in the list as a
1341 command to do something. (Usually, of course, it is the last of these
1342 three things that you really want!)
1343
1344 @c use code for the single apostrophe, not samp.
1345 The single apostrophe, @code{'}, that I put in front of some of the
1346 example lists in preceding sections is called a @dfn{quote}; when it
1347 precedes a list, it tells Lisp to do nothing with the list, other than
1348 take it as it is written. But if there is no quote preceding a list,
1349 the first item of the list is special: it is a command for the computer
1350 to obey. (In Lisp, these commands are called @emph{functions}.) The list
1351 @code{(+ 2 2)} shown above did not have a quote in front of it, so Lisp
1352 understands that the @code{+} is an instruction to do something with the
1353 rest of the list: add the numbers that follow.
1354
1355 @need 1250
1356 If you are reading this inside of GNU Emacs in Info, here is how you can
1357 evaluate such a list: place your cursor immediately after the right
1358 hand parenthesis of the following list and then type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1359
1360 @smallexample
1361 (+ 2 2)
1362 @end smallexample
1363
1364 @c use code for the number four, not samp.
1365 @noindent
1366 You will see the number @code{4} appear in the echo area. (In the
1367 jargon, what you have just done is ``evaluate the list.'' The echo area
1368 is the line at the bottom of the screen that displays or ``echoes''
1369 text.) Now try the same thing with a quoted list: place the cursor
1370 right after the following list and type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1371
1372 @smallexample
1373 '(this is a quoted list)
1374 @end smallexample
1375
1376 @noindent
1377 You will see @code{(this is a quoted list)} appear in the echo area.
1378
1379 @cindex Lisp interpreter, explained
1380 @cindex Interpreter, Lisp, explained
1381 In both cases, what you are doing is giving a command to the program
1382 inside of GNU Emacs called the @dfn{Lisp interpreter}---giving the
1383 interpreter a command to evaluate the expression. The name of the Lisp
1384 interpreter comes from the word for the task done by a human who comes
1385 up with the meaning of an expression---who ``interprets'' it.
1386
1387 You can also evaluate an atom that is not part of a list---one that is
1388 not surrounded by parentheses; again, the Lisp interpreter translates
1389 from the humanly readable expression to the language of the computer.
1390 But before discussing this (@pxref{Variables}), we will discuss what the
1391 Lisp interpreter does when you make an error.
1392
1393 @node Making Errors, Names & Definitions, Run a Program, List Processing
1394 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1395 @section Generate an Error Message
1396 @cindex Generate an error message
1397 @cindex Error message generation
1398
1399 Partly so you won't worry if you do it accidentally, we will now give
1400 a command to the Lisp interpreter that generates an error message.
1401 This is a harmless activity; and indeed, we will often try to generate
1402 error messages intentionally. Once you understand the jargon, error
1403 messages can be informative. Instead of being called ``error''
1404 messages, they should be called ``help'' messages. They are like
1405 signposts to a traveler in a strange country; deciphering them can be
1406 hard, but once understood, they can point the way.
1407
1408 The error message is generated by a built-in GNU Emacs debugger. We
1409 will `enter the debugger'. You get out of the debugger by typing @code{q}.
1410
1411 What we will do is evaluate a list that is not quoted and does not
1412 have a meaningful command as its first element. Here is a list almost
1413 exactly the same as the one we just used, but without the single-quote
1414 in front of it. Position the cursor right after it and type @kbd{C-x
1415 C-e}:
1416
1417 @smallexample
1418 (this is an unquoted list)
1419 @end smallexample
1420
1421 @noindent
1422 What you see depends on which version of Emacs you are running. GNU
1423 Emacs version 22 provides more information than version 20 and before.
1424 First, the more recent result of generating an error; then the
1425 earlier, version 20 result.
1426
1427 @need 1250
1428 @noindent
1429 In GNU Emacs version 22, a @file{*Backtrace*} window will open up and
1430 you will see the following in it:
1431
1432 @smallexample
1433 @group
1434 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1435 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function this)
1436 (this is an unquoted list)
1437 eval((this is an unquoted list))
1438 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
1439 eval-last-sexp(nil)
1440 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
1441 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1442 @end group
1443 @end smallexample
1444
1445 @need 1200
1446 @noindent
1447 Your cursor will be in this window (you may have to wait a few seconds
1448 before it becomes visible). To quit the debugger and make the
1449 debugger window go away, type:
1450
1451 @smallexample
1452 q
1453 @end smallexample
1454
1455 @noindent
1456 Please type @kbd{q} right now, so you become confident that you can
1457 get out of the debugger. Then, type @kbd{C-x C-e} again to re-enter
1458 it.
1459
1460 @cindex @samp{function} defined
1461 Based on what we already know, we can almost read this error message.
1462
1463 You read the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer from the bottom up; it tells
1464 you what Emacs did. When you typed @kbd{C-x C-e}, you made an
1465 interactive call to the command @code{eval-last-sexp}. @code{eval} is
1466 an abbreviation for `evaluate' and @code{sexp} is an abbreviation for
1467 `symbolic expression'. The command means `evaluate last symbolic
1468 expression', which is the expression just before your cursor.
1469
1470 Each line above tells you what the Lisp interpreter evaluated next.
1471 The most recent action is at the top. The buffer is called the
1472 @file{*Backtrace*} buffer because it enables you to track Emacs
1473 backwards.
1474
1475 @need 800
1476 At the top of the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer, you see the line:
1477
1478 @smallexample
1479 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function this)
1480 @end smallexample
1481
1482 @noindent
1483 The Lisp interpreter tried to evaluate the first atom of the list, the
1484 word @samp{this}. It is this action that generated the error message
1485 @samp{void-function this}.
1486
1487 The message contains the words @samp{void-function} and @samp{this}.
1488
1489 @cindex @samp{function} defined
1490 The word @samp{function} was mentioned once before. It is a very
1491 important word. For our purposes, we can define it by saying that a
1492 @dfn{function} is a set of instructions to the computer that tell the
1493 computer to do something.
1494
1495 Now we can begin to understand the error message: @samp{void-function
1496 this}. The function (that is, the word @samp{this}) does not have a
1497 definition of any set of instructions for the computer to carry out.
1498
1499 The slightly odd word, @samp{void-function}, is designed to cover the
1500 way Emacs Lisp is implemented, which is that when a symbol does not
1501 have a function definition attached to it, the place that should
1502 contain the instructions is `void'.
1503
1504 On the other hand, since we were able to add 2 plus 2 successfully, by
1505 evaluating @code{(+ 2 2)}, we can infer that the symbol @code{+} must
1506 have a set of instructions for the computer to obey and those
1507 instructions must be to add the numbers that follow the @code{+}.
1508
1509 @need 1250
1510 In GNU Emacs version 20, and in earlier versions, you will see only
1511 one line of error message; it will appear in the echo area and look
1512 like this:
1513
1514 @smallexample
1515 Symbol's function definition is void:@: this
1516 @end smallexample
1517
1518 @noindent
1519 (Also, your terminal may beep at you---some do, some don't; and others
1520 blink. This is just a device to get your attention.) The message goes
1521 away as soon as you type another key, even just to move the cursor.
1522
1523 We know the meaning of the word @samp{Symbol}. It refers to the first
1524 atom of the list, the word @samp{this}. The word @samp{function}
1525 refers to the instructions that tell the computer what to do.
1526 (Technically, the symbol tells the computer where to find the
1527 instructions, but this is a complication we can ignore for the
1528 moment.)
1529
1530 The error message can be understood: @samp{Symbol's function
1531 definition is void:@: this}. The symbol (that is, the word
1532 @samp{this}) lacks instructions for the computer to carry out.
1533
1534 @node Names & Definitions, Lisp Interpreter, Making Errors, List Processing
1535 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1536 @section Symbol Names and Function Definitions
1537 @cindex Symbol names
1538
1539 We can articulate another characteristic of Lisp based on what we have
1540 discussed so far---an important characteristic: a symbol, like
1541 @code{+}, is not itself the set of instructions for the computer to
1542 carry out. Instead, the symbol is used, perhaps temporarily, as a way
1543 of locating the definition or set of instructions. What we see is the
1544 name through which the instructions can be found. Names of people
1545 work the same way. I can be referred to as @samp{Bob}; however, I am
1546 not the letters @samp{B}, @samp{o}, @samp{b} but am, or was, the
1547 consciousness consistently associated with a particular life-form.
1548 The name is not me, but it can be used to refer to me.
1549
1550 In Lisp, one set of instructions can be attached to several names.
1551 For example, the computer instructions for adding numbers can be
1552 linked to the symbol @code{plus} as well as to the symbol @code{+}
1553 (and are in some dialects of Lisp). Among humans, I can be referred
1554 to as @samp{Robert} as well as @samp{Bob} and by other words as well.
1555
1556 On the other hand, a symbol can have only one function definition
1557 attached to it at a time. Otherwise, the computer would be confused as
1558 to which definition to use. If this were the case among people, only
1559 one person in the world could be named @samp{Bob}. However, the function
1560 definition to which the name refers can be changed readily.
1561 (@xref{Install, , Install a Function Definition}.)
1562
1563 Since Emacs Lisp is large, it is customary to name symbols in a way
1564 that identifies the part of Emacs to which the function belongs.
1565 Thus, all the names for functions that deal with Texinfo start with
1566 @samp{texinfo-} and those for functions that deal with reading mail
1567 start with @samp{rmail-}.
1568
1569 @node Lisp Interpreter, Evaluation, Names & Definitions, List Processing
1570 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1571 @section The Lisp Interpreter
1572 @cindex Lisp interpreter, what it does
1573 @cindex Interpreter, what it does
1574
1575 Based on what we have seen, we can now start to figure out what the
1576 Lisp interpreter does when we command it to evaluate a list.
1577 First, it looks to see whether there is a quote before the list; if
1578 there is, the interpreter just gives us the list. On the other
1579 hand, if there is no quote, the interpreter looks at the first element
1580 in the list and sees whether it has a function definition. If it does,
1581 the interpreter carries out the instructions in the function definition.
1582 Otherwise, the interpreter prints an error message.
1583
1584 This is how Lisp works. Simple. There are added complications which we
1585 will get to in a minute, but these are the fundamentals. Of course, to
1586 write Lisp programs, you need to know how to write function definitions
1587 and attach them to names, and how to do this without confusing either
1588 yourself or the computer.
1589
1590 @menu
1591 * Complications:: Variables, Special forms, Lists within.
1592 * Byte Compiling:: Specially processing code for speed.
1593 @end menu
1594
1595 @node Complications, Byte Compiling, Lisp Interpreter, Lisp Interpreter
1596 @ifnottex
1597 @unnumberedsubsec Complications
1598 @end ifnottex
1599
1600 Now, for the first complication. In addition to lists, the Lisp
1601 interpreter can evaluate a symbol that is not quoted and does not have
1602 parentheses around it. The Lisp interpreter will attempt to determine
1603 the symbol's value as a @dfn{variable}. This situation is described
1604 in the section on variables. (@xref{Variables}.)
1605
1606 @cindex Special form
1607 The second complication occurs because some functions are unusual and do
1608 not work in the usual manner. Those that don't are called @dfn{special
1609 forms}. They are used for special jobs, like defining a function, and
1610 there are not many of them. In the next few chapters, you will be
1611 introduced to several of the more important special forms.
1612
1613 The third and final complication is this: if the function that the
1614 Lisp interpreter is looking at is not a special form, and if it is part
1615 of a list, the Lisp interpreter looks to see whether the list has a list
1616 inside of it. If there is an inner list, the Lisp interpreter first
1617 figures out what it should do with the inside list, and then it works on
1618 the outside list. If there is yet another list embedded inside the
1619 inner list, it works on that one first, and so on. It always works on
1620 the innermost list first. The interpreter works on the innermost list
1621 first, to evaluate the result of that list. The result may be
1622 used by the enclosing expression.
1623
1624 Otherwise, the interpreter works left to right, from one expression to
1625 the next.
1626
1627 @node Byte Compiling, , Complications, Lisp Interpreter
1628 @subsection Byte Compiling
1629 @cindex Byte compiling
1630
1631 One other aspect of interpreting: the Lisp interpreter is able to
1632 interpret two kinds of entity: humanly readable code, on which we will
1633 focus exclusively, and specially processed code, called @dfn{byte
1634 compiled} code, which is not humanly readable. Byte compiled code
1635 runs faster than humanly readable code.
1636
1637 You can transform humanly readable code into byte compiled code by
1638 running one of the compile commands such as @code{byte-compile-file}.
1639 Byte compiled code is usually stored in a file that ends with a
1640 @file{.elc} extension rather than a @file{.el} extension. You will
1641 see both kinds of file in the @file{emacs/lisp} directory; the files
1642 to read are those with @file{.el} extensions.
1643
1644 As a practical matter, for most things you might do to customize or
1645 extend Emacs, you do not need to byte compile; and I will not discuss
1646 the topic here. @xref{Byte Compilation, , Byte Compilation, elisp,
1647 The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a full description of byte
1648 compilation.
1649
1650 @node Evaluation, Variables, Lisp Interpreter, List Processing
1651 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1652 @section Evaluation
1653 @cindex Evaluation
1654
1655 When the Lisp interpreter works on an expression, the term for the
1656 activity is called @dfn{evaluation}. We say that the interpreter
1657 `evaluates the expression'. I've used this term several times before.
1658 The word comes from its use in everyday language, `to ascertain the
1659 value or amount of; to appraise', according to @cite{Webster's New
1660 Collegiate Dictionary}.
1661
1662 @menu
1663 * How the Interpreter Acts:: Returns and Side Effects...
1664 * Evaluating Inner Lists:: Lists within lists...
1665 @end menu
1666
1667 @node How the Interpreter Acts, Evaluating Inner Lists, Evaluation, Evaluation
1668 @ifnottex
1669 @unnumberedsubsec How the Lisp Interpreter Acts
1670 @end ifnottex
1671
1672 @cindex @samp{returned value} explained
1673 After evaluating an expression, the Lisp interpreter will most likely
1674 @dfn{return} the value that the computer produces by carrying out the
1675 instructions it found in the function definition, or perhaps it will
1676 give up on that function and produce an error message. (The interpreter
1677 may also find itself tossed, so to speak, to a different function or it
1678 may attempt to repeat continually what it is doing for ever and ever in
1679 what is called an `infinite loop'. These actions are less common; and
1680 we can ignore them.) Most frequently, the interpreter returns a value.
1681
1682 @cindex @samp{side effect} defined
1683 At the same time the interpreter returns a value, it may do something
1684 else as well, such as move a cursor or copy a file; this other kind of
1685 action is called a @dfn{side effect}. Actions that we humans think are
1686 important, such as printing results, are often ``side effects'' to the
1687 Lisp interpreter. The jargon can sound peculiar, but it turns out that
1688 it is fairly easy to learn to use side effects.
1689
1690 In summary, evaluating a symbolic expression most commonly causes the
1691 Lisp interpreter to return a value and perhaps carry out a side effect;
1692 or else produce an error.
1693
1694 @node Evaluating Inner Lists, , How the Interpreter Acts, Evaluation
1695 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1696 @subsection Evaluating Inner Lists
1697 @cindex Inner list evaluation
1698 @cindex Evaluating inner lists
1699
1700 If evaluation applies to a list that is inside another list, the outer
1701 list may use the value returned by the first evaluation as information
1702 when the outer list is evaluated. This explains why inner expressions
1703 are evaluated first: the values they return are used by the outer
1704 expressions.
1705
1706 @need 1250
1707 We can investigate this process by evaluating another addition example.
1708 Place your cursor after the following expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1709
1710 @smallexample
1711 (+ 2 (+ 3 3))
1712 @end smallexample
1713
1714 @noindent
1715 The number 8 will appear in the echo area.
1716
1717 What happens is that the Lisp interpreter first evaluates the inner
1718 expression, @code{(+ 3 3)}, for which the value 6 is returned; then it
1719 evaluates the outer expression as if it were written @code{(+ 2 6)}, which
1720 returns the value 8. Since there are no more enclosing expressions to
1721 evaluate, the interpreter prints that value in the echo area.
1722
1723 Now it is easy to understand the name of the command invoked by the
1724 keystrokes @kbd{C-x C-e}: the name is @code{eval-last-sexp}. The
1725 letters @code{sexp} are an abbreviation for `symbolic expression', and
1726 @code{eval} is an abbreviation for `evaluate'. The command means
1727 `evaluate last symbolic expression'.
1728
1729 As an experiment, you can try evaluating the expression by putting the
1730 cursor at the beginning of the next line immediately following the
1731 expression, or inside the expression.
1732
1733 @need 800
1734 Here is another copy of the expression:
1735
1736 @smallexample
1737 (+ 2 (+ 3 3))
1738 @end smallexample
1739
1740 @noindent
1741 If you place the cursor at the beginning of the blank line that
1742 immediately follows the expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}, you will
1743 still get the value 8 printed in the echo area. Now try putting the
1744 cursor inside the expression. If you put it right after the next to
1745 last parenthesis (so it appears to sit on top of the last parenthesis),
1746 you will get a 6 printed in the echo area! This is because the command
1747 evaluates the expression @code{(+ 3 3)}.
1748
1749 Now put the cursor immediately after a number. Type @kbd{C-x C-e} and
1750 you will get the number itself. In Lisp, if you evaluate a number, you
1751 get the number itself---this is how numbers differ from symbols. If you
1752 evaluate a list starting with a symbol like @code{+}, you will get a
1753 value returned that is the result of the computer carrying out the
1754 instructions in the function definition attached to that name. If a
1755 symbol by itself is evaluated, something different happens, as we will
1756 see in the next section.
1757
1758 @node Variables, Arguments, Evaluation, List Processing
1759 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1760 @section Variables
1761 @cindex Variables
1762
1763 In Emacs Lisp, a symbol can have a value attached to it just as it can
1764 have a function definition attached to it. The two are different.
1765 The function definition is a set of instructions that a computer will
1766 obey. A value, on the other hand, is something, such as number or a
1767 name, that can vary (which is why such a symbol is called a variable).
1768 The value of a symbol can be any expression in Lisp, such as a symbol,
1769 number, list, or string. A symbol that has a value is often called a
1770 @dfn{variable}.
1771
1772 A symbol can have both a function definition and a value attached to
1773 it at the same time. Or it can have just one or the other.
1774 The two are separate. This is somewhat similar
1775 to the way the name Cambridge can refer to the city in Massachusetts
1776 and have some information attached to the name as well, such as
1777 ``great programming center''.
1778
1779 @ignore
1780 (Incidentally, in Emacs Lisp, a symbol can have two
1781 other things attached to it, too: a property list and a documentation
1782 string; these are discussed later.)
1783 @end ignore
1784
1785 Another way to think about this is to imagine a symbol as being a chest
1786 of drawers. The function definition is put in one drawer, the value in
1787 another, and so on. What is put in the drawer holding the value can be
1788 changed without affecting the contents of the drawer holding the
1789 function definition, and vice-verse.
1790
1791 @menu
1792 * fill-column Example::
1793 * Void Function:: The error message for a symbol
1794 without a function.
1795 * Void Variable:: The error message for a symbol without a value.
1796 @end menu
1797
1798 @node fill-column Example, Void Function, Variables, Variables
1799 @ifnottex
1800 @unnumberedsubsec @code{fill-column}, an Example Variable
1801 @end ifnottex
1802
1803 @findex fill-column, @r{an example variable}
1804 @cindex Example variable, @code{fill-column}
1805 @cindex Variable, example of, @code{fill-column}
1806 The variable @code{fill-column} illustrates a symbol with a value
1807 attached to it: in every GNU Emacs buffer, this symbol is set to some
1808 value, usually 72 or 70, but sometimes to some other value. To find the
1809 value of this symbol, evaluate it by itself. If you are reading this in
1810 Info inside of GNU Emacs, you can do this by putting the cursor after
1811 the symbol and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1812
1813 @smallexample
1814 fill-column
1815 @end smallexample
1816
1817 @noindent
1818 After I typed @kbd{C-x C-e}, Emacs printed the number 72 in my echo
1819 area. This is the value for which @code{fill-column} is set for me as I
1820 write this. It may be different for you in your Info buffer. Notice
1821 that the value returned as a variable is printed in exactly the same way
1822 as the value returned by a function carrying out its instructions. From
1823 the point of view of the Lisp interpreter, a value returned is a value
1824 returned. What kind of expression it came from ceases to matter once
1825 the value is known.
1826
1827 A symbol can have any value attached to it or, to use the jargon, we can
1828 @dfn{bind} the variable to a value: to a number, such as 72; to a
1829 string, @code{"such as this"}; to a list, such as @code{(spruce pine
1830 oak)}; we can even bind a variable to a function definition.
1831
1832 A symbol can be bound to a value in several ways. @xref{set & setq, ,
1833 Setting the Value of a Variable}, for information about one way to do
1834 this.
1835
1836 @node Void Function, Void Variable, fill-column Example, Variables
1837 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1838 @subsection Error Message for a Symbol Without a Function
1839 @cindex Symbol without function error
1840 @cindex Error for symbol without function
1841
1842 When we evaluated @code{fill-column} to find its value as a variable,
1843 we did not place parentheses around the word. This is because we did
1844 not intend to use it as a function name.
1845
1846 If @code{fill-column} were the first or only element of a list, the
1847 Lisp interpreter would attempt to find the function definition
1848 attached to it. But @code{fill-column} has no function definition.
1849 Try evaluating this:
1850
1851 @smallexample
1852 (fill-column)
1853 @end smallexample
1854
1855 @need 1250
1856 @noindent
1857 In GNU Emacs version 22, you will create a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer
1858 that says:
1859
1860 @smallexample
1861 @group
1862 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1863 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function fill-column)
1864 (fill-column)
1865 eval((fill-column))
1866 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
1867 eval-last-sexp(nil)
1868 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
1869 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1870 @end group
1871 @end smallexample
1872
1873 @noindent
1874 (Remember, to quit the debugger and make the debugger window go away,
1875 type @kbd{q} in the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.)
1876
1877 @ignore
1878 @need 800
1879 In GNU Emacs 20 and before, you will produce an error message that says:
1880
1881 @smallexample
1882 Symbol's function definition is void:@: fill-column
1883 @end smallexample
1884
1885 @noindent
1886 (The message will go away as soon as you move the cursor or type
1887 another key.)
1888 @end ignore
1889
1890 @node Void Variable, , Void Function, Variables
1891 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1892 @subsection Error Message for a Symbol Without a Value
1893 @cindex Symbol without value error
1894 @cindex Error for symbol without value
1895
1896 If you attempt to evaluate a symbol that does not have a value bound to
1897 it, you will receive an error message. You can see this by
1898 experimenting with our 2 plus 2 addition. In the following expression,
1899 put your cursor right after the @code{+}, before the first number 2,
1900 type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1901
1902 @smallexample
1903 (+ 2 2)
1904 @end smallexample
1905
1906 @need 1500
1907 @noindent
1908 In GNU Emacs 22, you will create a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer that
1909 says:
1910
1911 @smallexample
1912 @group
1913 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1914 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-variable +)
1915 eval(+)
1916 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
1917 eval-last-sexp(nil)
1918 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
1919 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1920 @end group
1921 @end smallexample
1922
1923 @noindent
1924 (As with the other times we entered the debugger, you can quit by
1925 typing @kbd{q} in the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.)
1926
1927 This backtrace is different from the very first error message we saw,
1928 which said, @samp{Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function this)}.
1929 In this case, the function does not have a value as a variable; while
1930 in the other error message, the function (the word `this') did not
1931 have a definition.
1932
1933 In this experiment with the @code{+}, what we did was cause the Lisp
1934 interpreter to evaluate the @code{+} and look for the value of the
1935 variable instead of the function definition. We did this by placing the
1936 cursor right after the symbol rather than after the parenthesis of the
1937 enclosing list as we did before. As a consequence, the Lisp interpreter
1938 evaluated the preceding s-expression, which in this case was the
1939 @code{+} by itself.
1940
1941 Since @code{+} does not have a value bound to it, just the function
1942 definition, the error message reported that the symbol's value as a
1943 variable was void.
1944
1945 @ignore
1946 @need 800
1947 In GNU Emacs version 20 and before, your error message will say:
1948
1949 @example
1950 Symbol's value as variable is void:@: +
1951 @end example
1952
1953 @noindent
1954 The meaning is the same as in GNU Emacs 22.
1955 @end ignore
1956
1957 @node Arguments, set & setq, Variables, List Processing
1958 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1959 @section Arguments
1960 @cindex Arguments
1961 @cindex Passing information to functions
1962
1963 To see how information is passed to functions, let's look again at
1964 our old standby, the addition of two plus two. In Lisp, this is written
1965 as follows:
1966
1967 @smallexample
1968 (+ 2 2)
1969 @end smallexample
1970
1971 If you evaluate this expression, the number 4 will appear in your echo
1972 area. What the Lisp interpreter does is add the numbers that follow
1973 the @code{+}.
1974
1975 @cindex @samp{argument} defined
1976 The numbers added by @code{+} are called the @dfn{arguments} of the
1977 function @code{+}. These numbers are the information that is given to
1978 or @dfn{passed} to the function.
1979
1980 The word `argument' comes from the way it is used in mathematics and
1981 does not refer to a disputation between two people; instead it refers to
1982 the information presented to the function, in this case, to the
1983 @code{+}. In Lisp, the arguments to a function are the atoms or lists
1984 that follow the function. The values returned by the evaluation of
1985 these atoms or lists are passed to the function. Different functions
1986 require different numbers of arguments; some functions require none at
1987 all.@footnote{It is curious to track the path by which the word `argument'
1988 came to have two different meanings, one in mathematics and the other in
1989 everyday English. According to the @cite{Oxford English Dictionary},
1990 the word derives from the Latin for @samp{to make clear, prove}; thus it
1991 came to mean, by one thread of derivation, `the evidence offered as
1992 proof', which is to say, `the information offered', which led to its
1993 meaning in Lisp. But in the other thread of derivation, it came to mean
1994 `to assert in a manner against which others may make counter
1995 assertions', which led to the meaning of the word as a disputation.
1996 (Note here that the English word has two different definitions attached
1997 to it at the same time. By contrast, in Emacs Lisp, a symbol cannot
1998 have two different function definitions at the same time.)}
1999
2000 @menu
2001 * Data types:: Types of data passed to a function.
2002 * Args as Variable or List:: An argument can be the value
2003 of a variable or list.
2004 * Variable Number of Arguments:: Some functions may take a
2005 variable number of arguments.
2006 * Wrong Type of Argument:: Passing an argument of the wrong type
2007 to a function.
2008 * message:: A useful function for sending messages.
2009 @end menu
2010
2011 @node Data types, Args as Variable or List, Arguments, Arguments
2012 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2013 @subsection Arguments' Data Types
2014 @cindex Data types
2015 @cindex Types of data
2016 @cindex Arguments' data types
2017
2018 The type of data that should be passed to a function depends on what
2019 kind of information it uses. The arguments to a function such as
2020 @code{+} must have values that are numbers, since @code{+} adds numbers.
2021 Other functions use different kinds of data for their arguments.
2022
2023 @need 1250
2024 @findex concat
2025 For example, the @code{concat} function links together or unites two or
2026 more strings of text to produce a string. The arguments are strings.
2027 Concatenating the two character strings @code{abc}, @code{def} produces
2028 the single string @code{abcdef}. This can be seen by evaluating the
2029 following:
2030
2031 @smallexample
2032 (concat "abc" "def")
2033 @end smallexample
2034
2035 @noindent
2036 The value produced by evaluating this expression is @code{"abcdef"}.
2037
2038 A function such as @code{substring} uses both a string and numbers as
2039 arguments. The function returns a part of the string, a substring of
2040 the first argument. This function takes three arguments. Its first
2041 argument is the string of characters, the second and third arguments are
2042 numbers that indicate the beginning and end of the substring. The
2043 numbers are a count of the number of characters (including spaces and
2044 punctuation) from the beginning of the string.
2045
2046 @need 800
2047 For example, if you evaluate the following:
2048
2049 @smallexample
2050 (substring "The quick brown fox jumped." 16 19)
2051 @end smallexample
2052
2053 @noindent
2054 you will see @code{"fox"} appear in the echo area. The arguments are the
2055 string and the two numbers.
2056
2057 Note that the string passed to @code{substring} is a single atom even
2058 though it is made up of several words separated by spaces. Lisp counts
2059 everything between the two quotation marks as part of the string,
2060 including the spaces. You can think of the @code{substring} function as
2061 a kind of `atom smasher' since it takes an otherwise indivisible atom
2062 and extracts a part. However, @code{substring} is only able to extract
2063 a substring from an argument that is a string, not from another type of
2064 atom such as a number or symbol.
2065
2066 @node Args as Variable or List, Variable Number of Arguments, Data types, Arguments
2067 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2068 @subsection An Argument as the Value of a Variable or List
2069
2070 An argument can be a symbol that returns a value when it is evaluated.
2071 For example, when the symbol @code{fill-column} by itself is evaluated,
2072 it returns a number. This number can be used in an addition.
2073
2074 @need 1250
2075 Position the cursor after the following expression and type @kbd{C-x
2076 C-e}:
2077
2078 @smallexample
2079 (+ 2 fill-column)
2080 @end smallexample
2081
2082 @noindent
2083 The value will be a number two more than what you get by evaluating
2084 @code{fill-column} alone. For me, this is 74, because my value of
2085 @code{fill-column} is 72.
2086
2087 As we have just seen, an argument can be a symbol that returns a value
2088 when evaluated. In addition, an argument can be a list that returns a
2089 value when it is evaluated. For example, in the following expression,
2090 the arguments to the function @code{concat} are the strings
2091 @w{@code{"The "}} and @w{@code{" red foxes."}} and the list
2092 @code{(number-to-string (+ 2 fill-column))}.
2093
2094 @c For GNU Emacs 22, need number-to-string
2095 @smallexample
2096 (concat "The " (number-to-string (+ 2 fill-column)) " red foxes.")
2097 @end smallexample
2098
2099 @noindent
2100 If you evaluate this expression---and if, as with my Emacs,
2101 @code{fill-column} evaluates to 72---@code{"The 74 red foxes."} will
2102 appear in the echo area. (Note that you must put spaces after the
2103 word @samp{The} and before the word @samp{red} so they will appear in
2104 the final string. The function @code{number-to-string} converts the
2105 integer that the addition function returns to a string.
2106 @code{number-to-string} is also known as @code{int-to-string}.)
2107
2108 @node Variable Number of Arguments, Wrong Type of Argument, Args as Variable or List, Arguments
2109 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2110 @subsection Variable Number of Arguments
2111 @cindex Variable number of arguments
2112 @cindex Arguments, variable number of
2113
2114 Some functions, such as @code{concat}, @code{+} or @code{*}, take any
2115 number of arguments. (The @code{*} is the symbol for multiplication.)
2116 This can be seen by evaluating each of the following expressions in
2117 the usual way. What you will see in the echo area is printed in this
2118 text after @samp{@result{}}, which you may read as `evaluates to'.
2119
2120 @need 1250
2121 In the first set, the functions have no arguments:
2122
2123 @smallexample
2124 @group
2125 (+) @result{} 0
2126
2127 (*) @result{} 1
2128 @end group
2129 @end smallexample
2130
2131 @need 1250
2132 In this set, the functions have one argument each:
2133
2134 @smallexample
2135 @group
2136 (+ 3) @result{} 3
2137
2138 (* 3) @result{} 3
2139 @end group
2140 @end smallexample
2141
2142 @need 1250
2143 In this set, the functions have three arguments each:
2144
2145 @smallexample
2146 @group
2147 (+ 3 4 5) @result{} 12
2148
2149 (* 3 4 5) @result{} 60
2150 @end group
2151 @end smallexample
2152
2153 @node Wrong Type of Argument, message, Variable Number of Arguments, Arguments
2154 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2155 @subsection Using the Wrong Type Object as an Argument
2156 @cindex Wrong type of argument
2157 @cindex Argument, wrong type of
2158
2159 When a function is passed an argument of the wrong type, the Lisp
2160 interpreter produces an error message. For example, the @code{+}
2161 function expects the values of its arguments to be numbers. As an
2162 experiment we can pass it the quoted symbol @code{hello} instead of a
2163 number. Position the cursor after the following expression and type
2164 @kbd{C-x C-e}:
2165
2166 @smallexample
2167 (+ 2 'hello)
2168 @end smallexample
2169
2170 @noindent
2171 When you do this you will generate an error message. What has happened
2172 is that @code{+} has tried to add the 2 to the value returned by
2173 @code{'hello}, but the value returned by @code{'hello} is the symbol
2174 @code{hello}, not a number. Only numbers can be added. So @code{+}
2175 could not carry out its addition.
2176
2177 @need 1250
2178 In GNU Emacs version 22, you will create and enter a
2179 @file{*Backtrace*} buffer that says:
2180
2181 @noindent
2182 @smallexample
2183 @group
2184 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
2185 Debugger entered--Lisp error:
2186 (wrong-type-argument number-or-marker-p hello)
2187 +(2 hello)
2188 eval((+ 2 (quote hello)))
2189 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
2190 eval-last-sexp(nil)
2191 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
2192 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
2193 @end group
2194 @end smallexample
2195
2196 @need 1250
2197 As usual, the error message tries to be helpful and makes sense after you
2198 learn how to read it.@footnote{@code{(quote hello)} is an expansion of
2199 the abbreviation @code{'hello}.}
2200
2201 The first part of the error message is straightforward; it says
2202 @samp{wrong type argument}. Next comes the mysterious jargon word
2203 @w{@samp{number-or-marker-p}}. This word is trying to tell you what
2204 kind of argument the @code{+} expected.
2205
2206 The symbol @code{number-or-marker-p} says that the Lisp interpreter is
2207 trying to determine whether the information presented it (the value of
2208 the argument) is a number or a marker (a special object representing a
2209 buffer position). What it does is test to see whether the @code{+} is
2210 being given numbers to add. It also tests to see whether the
2211 argument is something called a marker, which is a specific feature of
2212 Emacs Lisp. (In Emacs, locations in a buffer are recorded as markers.
2213 When the mark is set with the @kbd{C-@@} or @kbd{C-@key{SPC}} command,
2214 its position is kept as a marker. The mark can be considered a
2215 number---the number of characters the location is from the beginning
2216 of the buffer.) In Emacs Lisp, @code{+} can be used to add the
2217 numeric value of marker positions as numbers.
2218
2219 The @samp{p} of @code{number-or-marker-p} is the embodiment of a
2220 practice started in the early days of Lisp programming. The @samp{p}
2221 stands for `predicate'. In the jargon used by the early Lisp
2222 researchers, a predicate refers to a function to determine whether some
2223 property is true or false. So the @samp{p} tells us that
2224 @code{number-or-marker-p} is the name of a function that determines
2225 whether it is true or false that the argument supplied is a number or
2226 a marker. Other Lisp symbols that end in @samp{p} include @code{zerop},
2227 a function that tests whether its argument has the value of zero, and
2228 @code{listp}, a function that tests whether its argument is a list.
2229
2230 Finally, the last part of the error message is the symbol @code{hello}.
2231 This is the value of the argument that was passed to @code{+}. If the
2232 addition had been passed the correct type of object, the value passed
2233 would have been a number, such as 37, rather than a symbol like
2234 @code{hello}. But then you would not have got the error message.
2235
2236 @ignore
2237 @need 1250
2238 In GNU Emacs version 20 and before, the echo area displays an error
2239 message that says:
2240
2241 @smallexample
2242 Wrong type argument:@: number-or-marker-p, hello
2243 @end smallexample
2244
2245 This says, in different words, the same as the top line of the
2246 @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.
2247 @end ignore
2248
2249 @node message, , Wrong Type of Argument, Arguments
2250 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2251 @subsection The @code{message} Function
2252 @findex message
2253
2254 Like @code{+}, the @code{message} function takes a variable number of
2255 arguments. It is used to send messages to the user and is so useful
2256 that we will describe it here.
2257
2258 @need 1250
2259 A message is printed in the echo area. For example, you can print a
2260 message in your echo area by evaluating the following list:
2261
2262 @smallexample
2263 (message "This message appears in the echo area!")
2264 @end smallexample
2265
2266 The whole string between double quotation marks is a single argument
2267 and is printed @i{in toto}. (Note that in this example, the message
2268 itself will appear in the echo area within double quotes; that is
2269 because you see the value returned by the @code{message} function. In
2270 most uses of @code{message} in programs that you write, the text will
2271 be printed in the echo area as a side-effect, without the quotes.
2272 @xref{multiply-by-seven in detail, , @code{multiply-by-seven} in
2273 detail}, for an example of this.)
2274
2275 However, if there is a @samp{%s} in the quoted string of characters, the
2276 @code{message} function does not print the @samp{%s} as such, but looks
2277 to the argument that follows the string. It evaluates the second
2278 argument and prints the value at the location in the string where the
2279 @samp{%s} is.
2280
2281 @need 1250
2282 You can see this by positioning the cursor after the following
2283 expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}:
2284
2285 @smallexample
2286 (message "The name of this buffer is: %s." (buffer-name))
2287 @end smallexample
2288
2289 @noindent
2290 In Info, @code{"The name of this buffer is: *info*."} will appear in the
2291 echo area. The function @code{buffer-name} returns the name of the
2292 buffer as a string, which the @code{message} function inserts in place
2293 of @code{%s}.
2294
2295 To print a value as an integer, use @samp{%d} in the same way as
2296 @samp{%s}. For example, to print a message in the echo area that
2297 states the value of the @code{fill-column}, evaluate the following:
2298
2299 @smallexample
2300 (message "The value of fill-column is %d." fill-column)
2301 @end smallexample
2302
2303 @noindent
2304 On my system, when I evaluate this list, @code{"The value of
2305 fill-column is 72."} appears in my echo area@footnote{Actually, you
2306 can use @code{%s} to print a number. It is non-specific. @code{%d}
2307 prints only the part of a number left of a decimal point, and not
2308 anything that is not a number.}.
2309
2310 If there is more than one @samp{%s} in the quoted string, the value of
2311 the first argument following the quoted string is printed at the
2312 location of the first @samp{%s} and the value of the second argument is
2313 printed at the location of the second @samp{%s}, and so on.
2314
2315 @need 1250
2316 For example, if you evaluate the following,
2317
2318 @smallexample
2319 @group
2320 (message "There are %d %s in the office!"
2321 (- fill-column 14) "pink elephants")
2322 @end group
2323 @end smallexample
2324
2325 @noindent
2326 a rather whimsical message will appear in your echo area. On my system
2327 it says, @code{"There are 58 pink elephants in the office!"}.
2328
2329 The expression @code{(- fill-column 14)} is evaluated and the resulting
2330 number is inserted in place of the @samp{%d}; and the string in double
2331 quotes, @code{"pink elephants"}, is treated as a single argument and
2332 inserted in place of the @samp{%s}. (That is to say, a string between
2333 double quotes evaluates to itself, like a number.)
2334
2335 Finally, here is a somewhat complex example that not only illustrates
2336 the computation of a number, but also shows how you can use an
2337 expression within an expression to generate the text that is substituted
2338 for @samp{%s}:
2339
2340 @smallexample
2341 @group
2342 (message "He saw %d %s"
2343 (- fill-column 32)
2344 (concat "red "
2345 (substring
2346 "The quick brown foxes jumped." 16 21)
2347 " leaping."))
2348 @end group
2349 @end smallexample
2350
2351 In this example, @code{message} has three arguments: the string,
2352 @code{"He saw %d %s"}, the expression, @code{(- fill-column 32)}, and
2353 the expression beginning with the function @code{concat}. The value
2354 resulting from the evaluation of @code{(- fill-column 32)} is inserted
2355 in place of the @samp{%d}; and the value returned by the expression
2356 beginning with @code{concat} is inserted in place of the @samp{%s}.
2357
2358 When your fill column is 70 and you evaluate the expression, the
2359 message @code{"He saw 38 red foxes leaping."} appears in your echo
2360 area.
2361
2362 @node set & setq, Summary, Arguments, List Processing
2363 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2364 @section Setting the Value of a Variable
2365 @cindex Variable, setting value
2366 @cindex Setting value of variable
2367
2368 @cindex @samp{bind} defined
2369 There are several ways by which a variable can be given a value. One of
2370 the ways is to use either the function @code{set} or the function
2371 @code{setq}. Another way is to use @code{let} (@pxref{let}). (The
2372 jargon for this process is to @dfn{bind} a variable to a value.)
2373
2374 The following sections not only describe how @code{set} and @code{setq}
2375 work but also illustrate how arguments are passed.
2376
2377 @menu
2378 * Using set:: Setting values.
2379 * Using setq:: Setting a quoted value.
2380 * Counting:: Using @code{setq} to count.
2381 @end menu
2382
2383 @node Using set, Using setq, set & setq, set & setq
2384 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2385 @subsection Using @code{set}
2386 @findex set
2387
2388 To set the value of the symbol @code{flowers} to the list @code{'(rose
2389 violet daisy buttercup)}, evaluate the following expression by
2390 positioning the cursor after the expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}.
2391
2392 @smallexample
2393 (set 'flowers '(rose violet daisy buttercup))
2394 @end smallexample
2395
2396 @noindent
2397 The list @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)} will appear in the echo
2398 area. This is what is @emph{returned} by the @code{set} function. As a
2399 side effect, the symbol @code{flowers} is bound to the list; that is,
2400 the symbol @code{flowers}, which can be viewed as a variable, is given
2401 the list as its value. (This process, by the way, illustrates how a
2402 side effect to the Lisp interpreter, setting the value, can be the
2403 primary effect that we humans are interested in. This is because every
2404 Lisp function must return a value if it does not get an error, but it
2405 will only have a side effect if it is designed to have one.)
2406
2407 After evaluating the @code{set} expression, you can evaluate the symbol
2408 @code{flowers} and it will return the value you just set. Here is the
2409 symbol. Place your cursor after it and type @kbd{C-x C-e}.
2410
2411 @smallexample
2412 flowers
2413 @end smallexample
2414
2415 @noindent
2416 When you evaluate @code{flowers}, the list
2417 @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)} appears in the echo area.
2418
2419 Incidentally, if you evaluate @code{'flowers}, the variable with a quote
2420 in front of it, what you will see in the echo area is the symbol itself,
2421 @code{flowers}. Here is the quoted symbol, so you can try this:
2422
2423 @smallexample
2424 'flowers
2425 @end smallexample
2426
2427 Note also, that when you use @code{set}, you need to quote both
2428 arguments to @code{set}, unless you want them evaluated. Since we do
2429 not want either argument evaluated, neither the variable
2430 @code{flowers} nor the list @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)}, both
2431 are quoted. (When you use @code{set} without quoting its first
2432 argument, the first argument is evaluated before anything else is
2433 done. If you did this and @code{flowers} did not have a value
2434 already, you would get an error message that the @samp{Symbol's value
2435 as variable is void}; on the other hand, if @code{flowers} did return
2436 a value after it was evaluated, the @code{set} would attempt to set
2437 the value that was returned. There are situations where this is the
2438 right thing for the function to do; but such situations are rare.)
2439
2440 @node Using setq, Counting, Using set, set & setq
2441 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2442 @subsection Using @code{setq}
2443 @findex setq
2444
2445 As a practical matter, you almost always quote the first argument to
2446 @code{set}. The combination of @code{set} and a quoted first argument
2447 is so common that it has its own name: the special form @code{setq}.
2448 This special form is just like @code{set} except that the first argument
2449 is quoted automatically, so you don't need to type the quote mark
2450 yourself. Also, as an added convenience, @code{setq} permits you to set
2451 several different variables to different values, all in one expression.
2452
2453 To set the value of the variable @code{carnivores} to the list
2454 @code{'(lion tiger leopard)} using @code{setq}, the following expression
2455 is used:
2456
2457 @smallexample
2458 (setq carnivores '(lion tiger leopard))
2459 @end smallexample
2460
2461 @noindent
2462 This is exactly the same as using @code{set} except the first argument
2463 is automatically quoted by @code{setq}. (The @samp{q} in @code{setq}
2464 means @code{quote}.)
2465
2466 @need 1250
2467 With @code{set}, the expression would look like this:
2468
2469 @smallexample
2470 (set 'carnivores '(lion tiger leopard))
2471 @end smallexample
2472
2473 Also, @code{setq} can be used to assign different values to
2474 different variables. The first argument is bound to the value
2475 of the second argument, the third argument is bound to the value of the
2476 fourth argument, and so on. For example, you could use the following to
2477 assign a list of trees to the symbol @code{trees} and a list of herbivores
2478 to the symbol @code{herbivores}:
2479
2480 @smallexample
2481 @group
2482 (setq trees '(pine fir oak maple)
2483 herbivores '(gazelle antelope zebra))
2484 @end group
2485 @end smallexample
2486
2487 @noindent
2488 (The expression could just as well have been on one line, but it might
2489 not have fit on a page; and humans find it easier to read nicely
2490 formatted lists.)
2491
2492 Although I have been using the term `assign', there is another way of
2493 thinking about the workings of @code{set} and @code{setq}; and that is to
2494 say that @code{set} and @code{setq} make the symbol @emph{point} to the
2495 list. This latter way of thinking is very common and in forthcoming
2496 chapters we shall come upon at least one symbol that has `pointer' as
2497 part of its name. The name is chosen because the symbol has a value,
2498 specifically a list, attached to it; or, expressed another way,
2499 the symbol is set to ``point'' to the list.
2500
2501 @node Counting, , Using setq, set & setq
2502 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2503 @subsection Counting
2504 @cindex Counting
2505
2506 Here is an example that shows how to use @code{setq} in a counter. You
2507 might use this to count how many times a part of your program repeats
2508 itself. First set a variable to zero; then add one to the number each
2509 time the program repeats itself. To do this, you need a variable that
2510 serves as a counter, and two expressions: an initial @code{setq}
2511 expression that sets the counter variable to zero; and a second
2512 @code{setq} expression that increments the counter each time it is
2513 evaluated.
2514
2515 @smallexample
2516 @group
2517 (setq counter 0) ; @r{Let's call this the initializer.}
2518
2519 (setq counter (+ counter 1)) ; @r{This is the incrementer.}
2520
2521 counter ; @r{This is the counter.}
2522 @end group
2523 @end smallexample
2524
2525 @noindent
2526 (The text following the @samp{;} are comments. @xref{Change a
2527 defun, , Change a Function Definition}.)
2528
2529 If you evaluate the first of these expressions, the initializer,
2530 @code{(setq counter 0)}, and then evaluate the third expression,
2531 @code{counter}, the number @code{0} will appear in the echo area. If
2532 you then evaluate the second expression, the incrementer, @code{(setq
2533 counter (+ counter 1))}, the counter will get the value 1. So if you
2534 again evaluate @code{counter}, the number @code{1} will appear in the
2535 echo area. Each time you evaluate the second expression, the value of
2536 the counter will be incremented.
2537
2538 When you evaluate the incrementer, @code{(setq counter (+ counter 1))},
2539 the Lisp interpreter first evaluates the innermost list; this is the
2540 addition. In order to evaluate this list, it must evaluate the variable
2541 @code{counter} and the number @code{1}. When it evaluates the variable
2542 @code{counter}, it receives its current value. It passes this value and
2543 the number @code{1} to the @code{+} which adds them together. The sum
2544 is then returned as the value of the inner list and passed to the
2545 @code{setq} which sets the variable @code{counter} to this new value.
2546 Thus, the value of the variable, @code{counter}, is changed.
2547
2548 @node Summary, Error Message Exercises, set & setq, List Processing
2549 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2550 @section Summary
2551
2552 Learning Lisp is like climbing a hill in which the first part is the
2553 steepest. You have now climbed the most difficult part; what remains
2554 becomes easier as you progress onwards.
2555
2556 @need 1000
2557 In summary,
2558
2559 @itemize @bullet
2560
2561 @item
2562 Lisp programs are made up of expressions, which are lists or single atoms.
2563
2564 @item
2565 Lists are made up of zero or more atoms or inner lists, separated by whitespace and
2566 surrounded by parentheses. A list can be empty.
2567
2568 @item
2569 Atoms are multi-character symbols, like @code{forward-paragraph}, single
2570 character symbols like @code{+}, strings of characters between double
2571 quotation marks, or numbers.
2572
2573 @item
2574 A number evaluates to itself.
2575
2576 @item
2577 A string between double quotes also evaluates to itself.
2578
2579 @item
2580 When you evaluate a symbol by itself, its value is returned.
2581
2582 @item
2583 When you evaluate a list, the Lisp interpreter looks at the first symbol
2584 in the list and then at the function definition bound to that symbol.
2585 Then the instructions in the function definition are carried out.
2586
2587 @item
2588 A single quotation mark,
2589 @ifinfo
2590 '
2591 @end ifinfo
2592 @ifnotinfo
2593 @code{'}
2594 @end ifnotinfo
2595 , tells the Lisp interpreter that it should
2596 return the following expression as written, and not evaluate it as it
2597 would if the quote were not there.
2598
2599 @item
2600 Arguments are the information passed to a function. The arguments to a
2601 function are computed by evaluating the rest of the elements of the list
2602 of which the function is the first element.
2603
2604 @item
2605 A function always returns a value when it is evaluated (unless it gets
2606 an error); in addition, it may also carry out some action called a
2607 ``side effect''. In many cases, a function's primary purpose is to
2608 create a side effect.
2609 @end itemize
2610
2611 @node Error Message Exercises, , Summary, List Processing
2612 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2613 @section Exercises
2614
2615 A few simple exercises:
2616
2617 @itemize @bullet
2618 @item
2619 Generate an error message by evaluating an appropriate symbol that is
2620 not within parentheses.
2621
2622 @item
2623 Generate an error message by evaluating an appropriate symbol that is
2624 between parentheses.
2625
2626 @item
2627 Create a counter that increments by two rather than one.
2628
2629 @item
2630 Write an expression that prints a message in the echo area when
2631 evaluated.
2632 @end itemize
2633
2634 @node Practicing Evaluation, Writing Defuns, List Processing, Top
2635 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2636 @chapter Practicing Evaluation
2637 @cindex Practicing evaluation
2638 @cindex Evaluation practice
2639
2640 Before learning how to write a function definition in Emacs Lisp, it is
2641 useful to spend a little time evaluating various expressions that have
2642 already been written. These expressions will be lists with the
2643 functions as their first (and often only) element. Since some of the
2644 functions associated with buffers are both simple and interesting, we
2645 will start with those. In this section, we will evaluate a few of
2646 these. In another section, we will study the code of several other
2647 buffer-related functions, to see how they were written.
2648
2649 @menu
2650 * How to Evaluate:: Typing editing commands or @kbd{C-x C-e}
2651 causes evaluation.
2652 * Buffer Names:: Buffers and files are different.
2653 * Getting Buffers:: Getting a buffer itself, not merely its name.
2654 * Switching Buffers:: How to change to another buffer.
2655 * Buffer Size & Locations:: Where point is located and the size of
2656 the buffer.
2657 * Evaluation Exercise::
2658 @end menu
2659
2660 @node How to Evaluate, Buffer Names, Practicing Evaluation, Practicing Evaluation
2661 @ifnottex
2662 @unnumberedsec How to Evaluate
2663 @end ifnottex
2664
2665 @i{Whenever you give an editing command} to Emacs Lisp, such as the
2666 command to move the cursor or to scroll the screen, @i{you are evaluating
2667 an expression,} the first element of which is a function. @i{This is
2668 how Emacs works.}
2669
2670 @cindex @samp{interactive function} defined
2671 @cindex @samp{command} defined
2672 When you type keys, you cause the Lisp interpreter to evaluate an
2673 expression and that is how you get your results. Even typing plain text
2674 involves evaluating an Emacs Lisp function, in this case, one that uses
2675 @code{self-insert-command}, which simply inserts the character you
2676 typed. The functions you evaluate by typing keystrokes are called
2677 @dfn{interactive} functions, or @dfn{commands}; how you make a function
2678 interactive will be illustrated in the chapter on how to write function
2679 definitions. @xref{Interactive, , Making a Function Interactive}.
2680
2681 In addition to typing keyboard commands, we have seen a second way to
2682 evaluate an expression: by positioning the cursor after a list and
2683 typing @kbd{C-x C-e}. This is what we will do in the rest of this
2684 section. There are other ways to evaluate an expression as well; these
2685 will be described as we come to them.
2686
2687 Besides being used for practicing evaluation, the functions shown in the
2688 next few sections are important in their own right. A study of these
2689 functions makes clear the distinction between buffers and files, how to
2690 switch to a buffer, and how to determine a location within it.
2691
2692 @node Buffer Names, Getting Buffers, How to Evaluate, Practicing Evaluation
2693 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2694 @section Buffer Names
2695 @findex buffer-name
2696 @findex buffer-file-name
2697
2698 The two functions, @code{buffer-name} and @code{buffer-file-name}, show
2699 the difference between a file and a buffer. When you evaluate the
2700 following expression, @code{(buffer-name)}, the name of the buffer
2701 appears in the echo area. When you evaluate @code{(buffer-file-name)},
2702 the name of the file to which the buffer refers appears in the echo
2703 area. Usually, the name returned by @code{(buffer-name)} is the same as
2704 the name of the file to which it refers, and the name returned by
2705 @code{(buffer-file-name)} is the full path-name of the file.
2706
2707 A file and a buffer are two different entities. A file is information
2708 recorded permanently in the computer (unless you delete it). A buffer,
2709 on the other hand, is information inside of Emacs that will vanish at
2710 the end of the editing session (or when you kill the buffer). Usually,
2711 a buffer contains information that you have copied from a file; we say
2712 the buffer is @dfn{visiting} that file. This copy is what you work on
2713 and modify. Changes to the buffer do not change the file, until you
2714 save the buffer. When you save the buffer, the buffer is copied to the file
2715 and is thus saved permanently.
2716
2717 @need 1250
2718 If you are reading this in Info inside of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate
2719 each of the following expressions by positioning the cursor after it and
2720 typing @kbd{C-x C-e}.
2721
2722 @example
2723 @group
2724 (buffer-name)
2725
2726 (buffer-file-name)
2727 @end group
2728 @end example
2729
2730 @noindent
2731 When I do this in Info, the value returned by evaluating
2732 @code{(buffer-name)} is @file{"*info*"}, and the value returned by
2733 evaluating @code{(buffer-file-name)} is @file{nil}.
2734
2735 On the other hand, while I am writing this document, the value
2736 returned by evaluating @code{(buffer-name)} is
2737 @file{"introduction.texinfo"}, and the value returned by evaluating
2738 @code{(buffer-file-name)} is
2739 @file{"/gnu/work/intro/introduction.texinfo"}.
2740
2741 @cindex @code{nil}, history of word
2742 The former is the name of the buffer and the latter is the name of the
2743 file. In Info, the buffer name is @file{"*info*"}. Info does not
2744 point to any file, so the result of evaluating
2745 @code{(buffer-file-name)} is @file{nil}. The symbol @code{nil} is
2746 from the Latin word for `nothing'; in this case, it means that the
2747 buffer is not associated with any file. (In Lisp, @code{nil} is also
2748 used to mean `false' and is a synonym for the empty list, @code{()}.)
2749
2750 When I am writing, the name of my buffer is
2751 @file{"introduction.texinfo"}. The name of the file to which it
2752 points is @file{"/gnu/work/intro/introduction.texinfo"}.
2753
2754 (In the expressions, the parentheses tell the Lisp interpreter to
2755 treat @w{@code{buffer-name}} and @w{@code{buffer-file-name}} as
2756 functions; without the parentheses, the interpreter would attempt to
2757 evaluate the symbols as variables. @xref{Variables}.)
2758
2759 In spite of the distinction between files and buffers, you will often
2760 find that people refer to a file when they mean a buffer and vice-verse.
2761 Indeed, most people say, ``I am editing a file,'' rather than saying,
2762 ``I am editing a buffer which I will soon save to a file.'' It is
2763 almost always clear from context what people mean. When dealing with
2764 computer programs, however, it is important to keep the distinction in mind,
2765 since the computer is not as smart as a person.
2766
2767 @cindex Buffer, history of word
2768 The word `buffer', by the way, comes from the meaning of the word as a
2769 cushion that deadens the force of a collision. In early computers, a
2770 buffer cushioned the interaction between files and the computer's
2771 central processing unit. The drums or tapes that held a file and the
2772 central processing unit were pieces of equipment that were very
2773 different from each other, working at their own speeds, in spurts. The
2774 buffer made it possible for them to work together effectively.
2775 Eventually, the buffer grew from being an intermediary, a temporary
2776 holding place, to being the place where work is done. This
2777 transformation is rather like that of a small seaport that grew into a
2778 great city: once it was merely the place where cargo was warehoused
2779 temporarily before being loaded onto ships; then it became a business
2780 and cultural center in its own right.
2781
2782 Not all buffers are associated with files. For example, a
2783 @file{*scratch*} buffer does not visit any file. Similarly, a
2784 @file{*Help*} buffer is not associated with any file.
2785
2786 In the old days, when you lacked a @file{~/.emacs} file and started an
2787 Emacs session by typing the command @code{emacs} alone, without naming
2788 any files, Emacs started with the @file{*scratch*} buffer visible.
2789 Nowadays, you will see a splash screen. You can follow one of the
2790 commands suggested on the splash screen, visit a file, or press the
2791 spacebar to reach the @file{*scratch*} buffer.
2792
2793 If you switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer, type
2794 @code{(buffer-name)}, position the cursor after it, and then type
2795 @kbd{C-x C-e} to evaluate the expression. The name @code{"*scratch*"}
2796 will be returned and will appear in the echo area. @code{"*scratch*"}
2797 is the name of the buffer. When you type @code{(buffer-file-name)} in
2798 the @file{*scratch*} buffer and evaluate that, @code{nil} will appear
2799 in the echo area, just as it does when you evaluate
2800 @code{(buffer-file-name)} in Info.
2801
2802 Incidentally, if you are in the @file{*scratch*} buffer and want the
2803 value returned by an expression to appear in the @file{*scratch*}
2804 buffer itself rather than in the echo area, type @kbd{C-u C-x C-e}
2805 instead of @kbd{C-x C-e}. This causes the value returned to appear
2806 after the expression. The buffer will look like this:
2807
2808 @smallexample
2809 (buffer-name)"*scratch*"
2810 @end smallexample
2811
2812 @noindent
2813 You cannot do this in Info since Info is read-only and it will not allow
2814 you to change the contents of the buffer. But you can do this in any
2815 buffer you can edit; and when you write code or documentation (such as
2816 this book), this feature is very useful.
2817
2818 @node Getting Buffers, Switching Buffers, Buffer Names, Practicing Evaluation
2819 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2820 @section Getting Buffers
2821 @findex current-buffer
2822 @findex other-buffer
2823 @cindex Getting a buffer
2824
2825 The @code{buffer-name} function returns the @emph{name} of the buffer;
2826 to get the buffer @emph{itself}, a different function is needed: the
2827 @code{current-buffer} function. If you use this function in code, what
2828 you get is the buffer itself.
2829
2830 A name and the object or entity to which the name refers are different
2831 from each other. You are not your name. You are a person to whom
2832 others refer by name. If you ask to speak to George and someone hands you
2833 a card with the letters @samp{G}, @samp{e}, @samp{o}, @samp{r},
2834 @samp{g}, and @samp{e} written on it, you might be amused, but you would
2835 not be satisfied. You do not want to speak to the name, but to the
2836 person to whom the name refers. A buffer is similar: the name of the
2837 scratch buffer is @file{*scratch*}, but the name is not the buffer. To
2838 get a buffer itself, you need to use a function such as
2839 @code{current-buffer}.
2840
2841 However, there is a slight complication: if you evaluate
2842 @code{current-buffer} in an expression on its own, as we will do here,
2843 what you see is a printed representation of the name of the buffer
2844 without the contents of the buffer. Emacs works this way for two
2845 reasons: the buffer may be thousands of lines long---too long to be
2846 conveniently displayed; and, another buffer may have the same contents
2847 but a different name, and it is important to distinguish between them.
2848
2849 @need 800
2850 Here is an expression containing the function:
2851
2852 @smallexample
2853 (current-buffer)
2854 @end smallexample
2855
2856 @noindent
2857 If you evaluate this expression in Info in Emacs in the usual way,
2858 @file{#<buffer *info*>} will appear in the echo area. The special
2859 format indicates that the buffer itself is being returned, rather than
2860 just its name.
2861
2862 Incidentally, while you can type a number or symbol into a program, you
2863 cannot do that with the printed representation of a buffer: the only way
2864 to get a buffer itself is with a function such as @code{current-buffer}.
2865
2866 A related function is @code{other-buffer}. This returns the most
2867 recently selected buffer other than the one you are in currently, not
2868 a printed representation of its name. If you have recently switched
2869 back and forth from the @file{*scratch*} buffer, @code{other-buffer}
2870 will return that buffer.
2871
2872 @need 800
2873 You can see this by evaluating the expression:
2874
2875 @smallexample
2876 (other-buffer)
2877 @end smallexample
2878
2879 @noindent
2880 You should see @file{#<buffer *scratch*>} appear in the echo area, or
2881 the name of whatever other buffer you switched back from most
2882 recently@footnote{Actually, by default, if the buffer from which you
2883 just switched is visible to you in another window, @code{other-buffer}
2884 will choose the most recent buffer that you cannot see; this is a
2885 subtlety that I often forget.}.
2886
2887 @node Switching Buffers, Buffer Size & Locations, Getting Buffers, Practicing Evaluation
2888 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2889 @section Switching Buffers
2890 @findex switch-to-buffer
2891 @findex set-buffer
2892 @cindex Switching to a buffer
2893
2894 The @code{other-buffer} function actually provides a buffer when it is
2895 used as an argument to a function that requires one. We can see this
2896 by using @code{other-buffer} and @code{switch-to-buffer} to switch to a
2897 different buffer.
2898
2899 But first, a brief introduction to the @code{switch-to-buffer}
2900 function. When you switched back and forth from Info to the
2901 @file{*scratch*} buffer to evaluate @code{(buffer-name)}, you most
2902 likely typed @kbd{C-x b} and then typed @file{*scratch*}@footnote{Or
2903 rather, to save typing, you probably only typed @kbd{RET} if the
2904 default buffer was @file{*scratch*}, or if it was different, then you
2905 typed just part of the name, such as @code{*sc}, pressed your
2906 @kbd{TAB} key to cause it to expand to the full name, and then typed
2907 your @kbd{RET} key.} when prompted in the minibuffer for the name of
2908 the buffer to which you wanted to switch. The keystrokes, @kbd{C-x
2909 b}, cause the Lisp interpreter to evaluate the interactive function
2910 @code{switch-to-buffer}. As we said before, this is how Emacs works:
2911 different keystrokes call or run different functions. For example,
2912 @kbd{C-f} calls @code{forward-char}, @kbd{M-e} calls
2913 @code{forward-sentence}, and so on.
2914
2915 By writing @code{switch-to-buffer} in an expression, and giving it a
2916 buffer to switch to, we can switch buffers just the way @kbd{C-x b}
2917 does.
2918
2919 @need 1000
2920 Here is the Lisp expression:
2921
2922 @smallexample
2923 (switch-to-buffer (other-buffer))
2924 @end smallexample
2925
2926 @noindent
2927 The symbol @code{switch-to-buffer} is the first element of the list,
2928 so the Lisp interpreter will treat it as a function and carry out the
2929 instructions that are attached to it. But before doing that, the
2930 interpreter will note that @code{other-buffer} is inside parentheses
2931 and work on that symbol first. @code{other-buffer} is the first (and
2932 in this case, the only) element of this list, so the Lisp interpreter
2933 calls or runs the function. It returns another buffer. Next, the
2934 interpreter runs @code{switch-to-buffer}, passing to it, as an
2935 argument, the other buffer, which is what Emacs will switch to. If
2936 you are reading this in Info, try this now. Evaluate the expression.
2937 (To get back, type @kbd{C-x b @key{RET}}.)@footnote{Remember, this
2938 expression will move you to your most recent other buffer that you
2939 cannot see. If you really want to go to your most recently selected
2940 buffer, even if you can still see it, you need to evaluate the
2941 following more complex expression:
2942
2943 @smallexample
2944 (switch-to-buffer (other-buffer (current-buffer) t))
2945 @end smallexample
2946
2947 @c noindent
2948 In this case, the first argument to @code{other-buffer} tells it which
2949 buffer to skip---the current one---and the second argument tells
2950 @code{other-buffer} it is OK to switch to a visible buffer.
2951 In regular use, @code{switch-to-buffer} takes you to an invisible
2952 window since you would most likely use @kbd{C-x o} (@code{other-window})
2953 to go to another visible buffer.}
2954
2955 In the programming examples in later sections of this document, you will
2956 see the function @code{set-buffer} more often than
2957 @code{switch-to-buffer}. This is because of a difference between
2958 computer programs and humans: humans have eyes and expect to see the
2959 buffer on which they are working on their computer terminals. This is
2960 so obvious, it almost goes without saying. However, programs do not
2961 have eyes. When a computer program works on a buffer, that buffer does
2962 not need to be visible on the screen.
2963
2964 @code{switch-to-buffer} is designed for humans and does two different
2965 things: it switches the buffer to which Emacs' attention is directed; and
2966 it switches the buffer displayed in the window to the new buffer.
2967 @code{set-buffer}, on the other hand, does only one thing: it switches
2968 the attention of the computer program to a different buffer. The buffer
2969 on the screen remains unchanged (of course, normally nothing happens
2970 there until the command finishes running).
2971
2972 @cindex @samp{call} defined
2973 Also, we have just introduced another jargon term, the word @dfn{call}.
2974 When you evaluate a list in which the first symbol is a function, you
2975 are calling that function. The use of the term comes from the notion of
2976 the function as an entity that can do something for you if you `call'
2977 it---just as a plumber is an entity who can fix a leak if you call him
2978 or her.
2979
2980 @node Buffer Size & Locations, Evaluation Exercise, Switching Buffers, Practicing Evaluation
2981 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2982 @section Buffer Size and the Location of Point
2983 @cindex Size of buffer
2984 @cindex Buffer size
2985 @cindex Point location
2986 @cindex Location of point
2987
2988 Finally, let's look at several rather simple functions,
2989 @code{buffer-size}, @code{point}, @code{point-min}, and
2990 @code{point-max}. These give information about the size of a buffer and
2991 the location of point within it.
2992
2993 The function @code{buffer-size} tells you the size of the current
2994 buffer; that is, the function returns a count of the number of
2995 characters in the buffer.
2996
2997 @smallexample
2998 (buffer-size)
2999 @end smallexample
3000
3001 @noindent
3002 You can evaluate this in the usual way, by positioning the
3003 cursor after the expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}.
3004
3005 @cindex @samp{point} defined
3006 In Emacs, the current position of the cursor is called @dfn{point}.
3007 The expression @code{(point)} returns a number that tells you where the
3008 cursor is located as a count of the number of characters from the
3009 beginning of the buffer up to point.
3010
3011 @need 1250
3012 You can see the character count for point in this buffer by evaluating
3013 the following expression in the usual way:
3014
3015 @smallexample
3016 (point)
3017 @end smallexample
3018
3019 @noindent
3020 As I write this, the value of @code{point} is 65724. The @code{point}
3021 function is frequently used in some of the examples later in this
3022 book.
3023
3024 @need 1250
3025 The value of point depends, of course, on its location within the
3026 buffer. If you evaluate point in this spot, the number will be larger:
3027
3028 @smallexample
3029 (point)
3030 @end smallexample
3031
3032 @noindent
3033 For me, the value of point in this location is 66043, which means that
3034 there are 319 characters (including spaces) between the two
3035 expressions. (Doubtless, you will see different numbers, since I will
3036 have edited this since I first evaluated point.)
3037
3038 @cindex @samp{narrowing} defined
3039 The function @code{point-min} is somewhat similar to @code{point}, but
3040 it returns the value of the minimum permissible value of point in the
3041 current buffer. This is the number 1 unless @dfn{narrowing} is in
3042 effect. (Narrowing is a mechanism whereby you can restrict yourself,
3043 or a program, to operations on just a part of a buffer.
3044 @xref{Narrowing & Widening, , Narrowing and Widening}.) Likewise, the
3045 function @code{point-max} returns the value of the maximum permissible
3046 value of point in the current buffer.
3047
3048 @node Evaluation Exercise, , Buffer Size & Locations, Practicing Evaluation
3049 @section Exercise
3050
3051 Find a file with which you are working and move towards its middle.
3052 Find its buffer name, file name, length, and your position in the file.
3053
3054 @node Writing Defuns, Buffer Walk Through, Practicing Evaluation, Top
3055 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3056 @chapter How To Write Function Definitions
3057 @cindex Definition writing
3058 @cindex Function definition writing
3059 @cindex Writing a function definition
3060
3061 When the Lisp interpreter evaluates a list, it looks to see whether the
3062 first symbol on the list has a function definition attached to it; or,
3063 put another way, whether the symbol points to a function definition. If
3064 it does, the computer carries out the instructions in the definition. A
3065 symbol that has a function definition is called, simply, a function
3066 (although, properly speaking, the definition is the function and the
3067 symbol refers to it.)
3068
3069 @menu
3070 * Primitive Functions::
3071 * defun:: The @code{defun} special form.
3072 * Install:: Install a function definition.
3073 * Interactive:: Making a function interactive.
3074 * Interactive Options:: Different options for @code{interactive}.
3075 * Permanent Installation:: Installing code permanently.
3076 * let:: Creating and initializing local variables.
3077 * if:: What if?
3078 * else:: If--then--else expressions.
3079 * Truth & Falsehood:: What Lisp considers false and true.
3080 * save-excursion:: Keeping track of point, mark, and buffer.
3081 * Review::
3082 * defun Exercises::
3083 @end menu
3084
3085 @node Primitive Functions, defun, Writing Defuns, Writing Defuns
3086 @ifnottex
3087 @unnumberedsec An Aside about Primitive Functions
3088 @end ifnottex
3089 @cindex Primitive functions
3090 @cindex Functions, primitive
3091
3092 @cindex C language primitives
3093 @cindex Primitives written in C
3094 All functions are defined in terms of other functions, except for a few
3095 @dfn{primitive} functions that are written in the C programming
3096 language. When you write functions' definitions, you will write them in
3097 Emacs Lisp and use other functions as your building blocks. Some of the
3098 functions you will use will themselves be written in Emacs Lisp (perhaps
3099 by you) and some will be primitives written in C. The primitive
3100 functions are used exactly like those written in Emacs Lisp and behave
3101 like them. They are written in C so we can easily run GNU Emacs on any
3102 computer that has sufficient power and can run C.
3103
3104 Let me re-emphasize this: when you write code in Emacs Lisp, you do not
3105 distinguish between the use of functions written in C and the use of
3106 functions written in Emacs Lisp. The difference is irrelevant. I
3107 mention the distinction only because it is interesting to know. Indeed,
3108 unless you investigate, you won't know whether an already-written
3109 function is written in Emacs Lisp or C.
3110
3111 @node defun, Install, Primitive Functions, Writing Defuns
3112 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3113 @section The @code{defun} Special Form
3114 @findex defun
3115 @cindex Special form of @code{defun}
3116
3117 @cindex @samp{function definition} defined
3118 In Lisp, a symbol such as @code{mark-whole-buffer} has code attached to
3119 it that tells the computer what to do when the function is called.
3120 This code is called the @dfn{function definition} and is created by
3121 evaluating a Lisp expression that starts with the symbol @code{defun}
3122 (which is an abbreviation for @emph{define function}). Because
3123 @code{defun} does not evaluate its arguments in the usual way, it is
3124 called a @dfn{special form}.
3125
3126 In subsequent sections, we will look at function definitions from the
3127 Emacs source code, such as @code{mark-whole-buffer}. In this section,
3128 we will describe a simple function definition so you can see how it
3129 looks. This function definition uses arithmetic because it makes for a
3130 simple example. Some people dislike examples using arithmetic; however,
3131 if you are such a person, do not despair. Hardly any of the code we
3132 will study in the remainder of this introduction involves arithmetic or
3133 mathematics. The examples mostly involve text in one way or another.
3134
3135 A function definition has up to five parts following the word
3136 @code{defun}:
3137
3138 @enumerate
3139 @item
3140 The name of the symbol to which the function definition should be
3141 attached.
3142
3143 @item
3144 A list of the arguments that will be passed to the function. If no
3145 arguments will be passed to the function, this is an empty list,
3146 @code{()}.
3147
3148 @item
3149 Documentation describing the function. (Technically optional, but
3150 strongly recommended.)
3151
3152 @item
3153 Optionally, an expression to make the function interactive so you can
3154 use it by typing @kbd{M-x} and then the name of the function; or by
3155 typing an appropriate key or keychord.
3156
3157 @cindex @samp{body} defined
3158 @item
3159 The code that instructs the computer what to do: the @dfn{body} of the
3160 function definition.
3161 @end enumerate
3162
3163 It is helpful to think of the five parts of a function definition as
3164 being organized in a template, with slots for each part:
3165
3166 @smallexample
3167 @group
3168 (defun @var{function-name} (@var{arguments}@dots{})
3169 "@var{optional-documentation}@dots{}"
3170 (interactive @var{argument-passing-info}) ; @r{optional}
3171 @var{body}@dots{})
3172 @end group
3173 @end smallexample
3174
3175 As an example, here is the code for a function that multiplies its
3176 argument by 7. (This example is not interactive. @xref{Interactive,
3177 , Making a Function Interactive}, for that information.)
3178
3179 @smallexample
3180 @group
3181 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
3182 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3183 (* 7 number))
3184 @end group
3185 @end smallexample
3186
3187 This definition begins with a parenthesis and the symbol @code{defun},
3188 followed by the name of the function.
3189
3190 @cindex @samp{argument list} defined
3191 The name of the function is followed by a list that contains the
3192 arguments that will be passed to the function. This list is called
3193 the @dfn{argument list}. In this example, the list has only one
3194 element, the symbol, @code{number}. When the function is used, the
3195 symbol will be bound to the value that is used as the argument to the
3196 function.
3197
3198 Instead of choosing the word @code{number} for the name of the argument,
3199 I could have picked any other name. For example, I could have chosen
3200 the word @code{multiplicand}. I picked the word `number' because it
3201 tells what kind of value is intended for this slot; but I could just as
3202 well have chosen the word `multiplicand' to indicate the role that the
3203 value placed in this slot will play in the workings of the function. I
3204 could have called it @code{foogle}, but that would have been a bad
3205 choice because it would not tell humans what it means. The choice of
3206 name is up to the programmer and should be chosen to make the meaning of
3207 the function clear.
3208
3209 Indeed, you can choose any name you wish for a symbol in an argument
3210 list, even the name of a symbol used in some other function: the name
3211 you use in an argument list is private to that particular definition.
3212 In that definition, the name refers to a different entity than any use
3213 of the same name outside the function definition. Suppose you have a
3214 nick-name `Shorty' in your family; when your family members refer to
3215 `Shorty', they mean you. But outside your family, in a movie, for
3216 example, the name `Shorty' refers to someone else. Because a name in an
3217 argument list is private to the function definition, you can change the
3218 value of such a symbol inside the body of a function without changing
3219 its value outside the function. The effect is similar to that produced
3220 by a @code{let} expression. (@xref{let, , @code{let}}.)
3221
3222 @ignore
3223 Note also that we discuss the word `number' in two different ways: as a
3224 symbol that appears in the code, and as the name of something that will
3225 be replaced by a something else during the evaluation of the function.
3226 In the first case, @code{number} is a symbol, not a number; it happens
3227 that within the function, it is a variable who value is the number in
3228 question, but our primary interest in it is as a symbol. On the other
3229 hand, when we are talking about the function, our interest is that we
3230 will substitute a number for the word @var{number}. To keep this
3231 distinction clear, we use different typography for the two
3232 circumstances. When we talk about this function, or about how it works,
3233 we refer to this number by writing @var{number}. In the function
3234 itself, we refer to it by writing @code{number}.
3235 @end ignore
3236
3237 The argument list is followed by the documentation string that
3238 describes the function. This is what you see when you type
3239 @w{@kbd{C-h f}} and the name of a function. Incidentally, when you
3240 write a documentation string like this, you should make the first line
3241 a complete sentence since some commands, such as @code{apropos}, print
3242 only the first line of a multi-line documentation string. Also, you
3243 should not indent the second line of a documentation string, if you
3244 have one, because that looks odd when you use @kbd{C-h f}
3245 (@code{describe-function}). The documentation string is optional, but
3246 it is so useful, it should be included in almost every function you
3247 write.
3248
3249 @findex * @r{(multiplication)}
3250 The third line of the example consists of the body of the function
3251 definition. (Most functions' definitions, of course, are longer than
3252 this.) In this function, the body is the list, @code{(* 7 number)}, which
3253 says to multiply the value of @var{number} by 7. (In Emacs Lisp,
3254 @code{*} is the function for multiplication, just as @code{+} is the
3255 function for addition.)
3256
3257 When you use the @code{multiply-by-seven} function, the argument
3258 @code{number} evaluates to the actual number you want used. Here is an
3259 example that shows how @code{multiply-by-seven} is used; but don't try
3260 to evaluate this yet!
3261
3262 @smallexample
3263 (multiply-by-seven 3)
3264 @end smallexample
3265
3266 @noindent
3267 The symbol @code{number}, specified in the function definition in the
3268 next section, is given or ``bound to'' the value 3 in the actual use of
3269 the function. Note that although @code{number} was inside parentheses
3270 in the function definition, the argument passed to the
3271 @code{multiply-by-seven} function is not in parentheses. The
3272 parentheses are written in the function definition so the computer can
3273 figure out where the argument list ends and the rest of the function
3274 definition begins.
3275
3276 If you evaluate this example, you are likely to get an error message.
3277 (Go ahead, try it!) This is because we have written the function
3278 definition, but not yet told the computer about the definition---we have
3279 not yet installed (or `loaded') the function definition in Emacs.
3280 Installing a function is the process that tells the Lisp interpreter the
3281 definition of the function. Installation is described in the next
3282 section.
3283
3284 @node Install, Interactive, defun, Writing Defuns
3285 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3286 @section Install a Function Definition
3287 @cindex Install a Function Definition
3288 @cindex Definition installation
3289 @cindex Function definition installation
3290
3291 If you are reading this inside of Info in Emacs, you can try out the
3292 @code{multiply-by-seven} function by first evaluating the function
3293 definition and then evaluating @code{(multiply-by-seven 3)}. A copy of
3294 the function definition follows. Place the cursor after the last
3295 parenthesis of the function definition and type @kbd{C-x C-e}. When you
3296 do this, @code{multiply-by-seven} will appear in the echo area. (What
3297 this means is that when a function definition is evaluated, the value it
3298 returns is the name of the defined function.) At the same time, this
3299 action installs the function definition.
3300
3301 @smallexample
3302 @group
3303 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
3304 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3305 (* 7 number))
3306 @end group
3307 @end smallexample
3308
3309 @noindent
3310 By evaluating this @code{defun}, you have just installed
3311 @code{multiply-by-seven} in Emacs. The function is now just as much a
3312 part of Emacs as @code{forward-word} or any other editing function you
3313 use. (@code{multiply-by-seven} will stay installed until you quit
3314 Emacs. To reload code automatically whenever you start Emacs, see
3315 @ref{Permanent Installation, , Installing Code Permanently}.)
3316
3317 @menu
3318 * Effect of installation::
3319 * Change a defun:: How to change a function definition.
3320 @end menu
3321
3322 @node Effect of installation, Change a defun, Install, Install
3323 @ifnottex
3324 @unnumberedsubsec The effect of installation
3325 @end ifnottex
3326
3327 You can see the effect of installing @code{multiply-by-seven} by
3328 evaluating the following sample. Place the cursor after the following
3329 expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}. The number 21 will appear in the
3330 echo area.
3331
3332 @smallexample
3333 (multiply-by-seven 3)
3334 @end smallexample
3335
3336 If you wish, you can read the documentation for the function by typing
3337 @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}) and then the name of the
3338 function, @code{multiply-by-seven}. When you do this, a
3339 @file{*Help*} window will appear on your screen that says:
3340
3341 @smallexample
3342 @group
3343 multiply-by-seven is a Lisp function.
3344 (multiply-by-seven NUMBER)
3345
3346 Multiply NUMBER by seven.
3347 @end group
3348 @end smallexample
3349
3350 @noindent
3351 (To return to a single window on your screen, type @kbd{C-x 1}.)
3352
3353 @node Change a defun, , Effect of installation, Install
3354 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3355 @subsection Change a Function Definition
3356 @cindex Changing a function definition
3357 @cindex Function definition, how to change
3358 @cindex Definition, how to change
3359
3360 If you want to change the code in @code{multiply-by-seven}, just rewrite
3361 it. To install the new version in place of the old one, evaluate the
3362 function definition again. This is how you modify code in Emacs. It is
3363 very simple.
3364
3365 As an example, you can change the @code{multiply-by-seven} function to
3366 add the number to itself seven times instead of multiplying the number
3367 by seven. It produces the same answer, but by a different path. At
3368 the same time, we will add a comment to the code; a comment is text
3369 that the Lisp interpreter ignores, but that a human reader may find
3370 useful or enlightening. The comment is that this is the ``second
3371 version''.
3372
3373 @smallexample
3374 @group
3375 (defun multiply-by-seven (number) ; @r{Second version.}
3376 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3377 (+ number number number number number number number))
3378 @end group
3379 @end smallexample
3380
3381 @cindex Comments in Lisp code
3382 The comment follows a semicolon, @samp{;}. In Lisp, everything on a
3383 line that follows a semicolon is a comment. The end of the line is the
3384 end of the comment. To stretch a comment over two or more lines, begin
3385 each line with a semicolon.
3386
3387 @xref{Beginning a .emacs File, , Beginning a @file{.emacs}
3388 File}, and @ref{Comments, , Comments, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
3389 Reference Manual}, for more about comments.
3390
3391 You can install this version of the @code{multiply-by-seven} function by
3392 evaluating it in the same way you evaluated the first function: place
3393 the cursor after the last parenthesis and type @kbd{C-x C-e}.
3394
3395 In summary, this is how you write code in Emacs Lisp: you write a
3396 function; install it; test it; and then make fixes or enhancements and
3397 install it again.
3398
3399 @node Interactive, Interactive Options, Install, Writing Defuns
3400 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3401 @section Make a Function Interactive
3402 @cindex Interactive functions
3403 @findex interactive
3404
3405 You make a function interactive by placing a list that begins with
3406 the special form @code{interactive} immediately after the
3407 documentation. A user can invoke an interactive function by typing
3408 @kbd{M-x} and then the name of the function; or by typing the keys to
3409 which it is bound, for example, by typing @kbd{C-n} for
3410 @code{next-line} or @kbd{C-x h} for @code{mark-whole-buffer}.
3411
3412 Interestingly, when you call an interactive function interactively,
3413 the value returned is not automatically displayed in the echo area.
3414 This is because you often call an interactive function for its side
3415 effects, such as moving forward by a word or line, and not for the
3416 value returned. If the returned value were displayed in the echo area
3417 each time you typed a key, it would be very distracting.
3418
3419 @menu
3420 * Interactive multiply-by-seven:: An overview.
3421 * multiply-by-seven in detail:: The interactive version.
3422 @end menu
3423
3424 @node Interactive multiply-by-seven, multiply-by-seven in detail, Interactive, Interactive
3425 @ifnottex
3426 @unnumberedsubsec An Interactive @code{multiply-by-seven}, An Overview
3427 @end ifnottex
3428
3429 Both the use of the special form @code{interactive} and one way to
3430 display a value in the echo area can be illustrated by creating an
3431 interactive version of @code{multiply-by-seven}.
3432
3433 @need 1250
3434 Here is the code:
3435
3436 @smallexample
3437 @group
3438 (defun multiply-by-seven (number) ; @r{Interactive version.}
3439 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3440 (interactive "p")
3441 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 number)))
3442 @end group
3443 @end smallexample
3444
3445 @noindent
3446 You can install this code by placing your cursor after it and typing
3447 @kbd{C-x C-e}. The name of the function will appear in your echo area.
3448 Then, you can use this code by typing @kbd{C-u} and a number and then
3449 typing @kbd{M-x multiply-by-seven} and pressing @key{RET}. The phrase
3450 @samp{The result is @dots{}} followed by the product will appear in the
3451 echo area.
3452
3453 Speaking more generally, you invoke a function like this in either of two
3454 ways:
3455
3456 @enumerate
3457 @item
3458 By typing a prefix argument that contains the number to be passed, and
3459 then typing @kbd{M-x} and the name of the function, as with
3460 @kbd{C-u 3 M-x forward-sentence}; or,
3461
3462 @item
3463 By typing whatever key or keychord the function is bound to, as with
3464 @kbd{C-u 3 M-e}.
3465 @end enumerate
3466
3467 @noindent
3468 Both the examples just mentioned work identically to move point forward
3469 three sentences. (Since @code{multiply-by-seven} is not bound to a key,
3470 it could not be used as an example of key binding.)
3471
3472 (@xref{Keybindings, , Some Keybindings}, to learn how to bind a command
3473 to a key.)
3474
3475 A prefix argument is passed to an interactive function by typing the
3476 @key{META} key followed by a number, for example, @kbd{M-3 M-e}, or by
3477 typing @kbd{C-u} and then a number, for example, @kbd{C-u 3 M-e} (if you
3478 type @kbd{C-u} without a number, it defaults to 4).
3479
3480 @node multiply-by-seven in detail, , Interactive multiply-by-seven, Interactive
3481 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3482 @subsection An Interactive @code{multiply-by-seven}
3483
3484 Let's look at the use of the special form @code{interactive} and then at
3485 the function @code{message} in the interactive version of
3486 @code{multiply-by-seven}. You will recall that the function definition
3487 looks like this:
3488
3489 @smallexample
3490 @group
3491 (defun multiply-by-seven (number) ; @r{Interactive version.}
3492 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3493 (interactive "p")
3494 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 number)))
3495 @end group
3496 @end smallexample
3497
3498 In this function, the expression, @code{(interactive "p")}, is a list of
3499 two elements. The @code{"p"} tells Emacs to pass the prefix argument to
3500 the function and use its value for the argument of the function.
3501
3502 @need 1000
3503 The argument will be a number. This means that the symbol
3504 @code{number} will be bound to a number in the line:
3505
3506 @smallexample
3507 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 number))
3508 @end smallexample
3509
3510 @need 1250
3511 @noindent
3512 For example, if your prefix argument is 5, the Lisp interpreter will
3513 evaluate the line as if it were:
3514
3515 @smallexample
3516 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 5))
3517 @end smallexample
3518
3519 @noindent
3520 (If you are reading this in GNU Emacs, you can evaluate this expression
3521 yourself.) First, the interpreter will evaluate the inner list, which
3522 is @code{(* 7 5)}. This returns a value of 35. Next, it
3523 will evaluate the outer list, passing the values of the second and
3524 subsequent elements of the list to the function @code{message}.
3525
3526 As we have seen, @code{message} is an Emacs Lisp function especially
3527 designed for sending a one line message to a user. (@xref{message, ,
3528 The @code{message} function}.) In summary, the @code{message}
3529 function prints its first argument in the echo area as is, except for
3530 occurrences of @samp{%d} or @samp{%s} (and various other %-sequences
3531 which we have not mentioned). When it sees a control sequence, the
3532 function looks to the second or subsequent arguments and prints the
3533 value of the argument in the location in the string where the control
3534 sequence is located.
3535
3536 In the interactive @code{multiply-by-seven} function, the control string
3537 is @samp{%d}, which requires a number, and the value returned by
3538 evaluating @code{(* 7 5)} is the number 35. Consequently, the number 35
3539 is printed in place of the @samp{%d} and the message is @samp{The result
3540 is 35}.
3541
3542 (Note that when you call the function @code{multiply-by-seven}, the
3543 message is printed without quotes, but when you call @code{message}, the
3544 text is printed in double quotes. This is because the value returned by
3545 @code{message} is what appears in the echo area when you evaluate an
3546 expression whose first element is @code{message}; but when embedded in a
3547 function, @code{message} prints the text as a side effect without
3548 quotes.)
3549
3550 @node Interactive Options, Permanent Installation, Interactive, Writing Defuns
3551 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3552 @section Different Options for @code{interactive}
3553 @cindex Options for @code{interactive}
3554 @cindex Interactive options
3555
3556 In the example, @code{multiply-by-seven} used @code{"p"} as the
3557 argument to @code{interactive}. This argument told Emacs to interpret
3558 your typing either @kbd{C-u} followed by a number or @key{META}
3559 followed by a number as a command to pass that number to the function
3560 as its argument. Emacs has more than twenty characters predefined for
3561 use with @code{interactive}. In almost every case, one of these
3562 options will enable you to pass the right information interactively to
3563 a function. (@xref{Interactive Codes, , Code Characters for
3564 @code{interactive}, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
3565
3566 @need 1250
3567 Consider the function @code{zap-to-char}. Its interactive expression
3568 is
3569
3570 @smallexample
3571 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
3572 @end smallexample
3573
3574 The first part of the argument to @code{interactive} is @samp{p}, with
3575 which you are already familiar. This argument tells Emacs to
3576 interpret a `prefix', as a number to be passed to the function. You
3577 can specify a prefix either by typing @kbd{C-u} followed by a number
3578 or by typing @key{META} followed by a number. The prefix is the
3579 number of specified characters. Thus, if your prefix is three and the
3580 specified character is @samp{x}, then you will delete all the text up
3581 to and including the third next @samp{x}. If you do not set a prefix,
3582 then you delete all the text up to and including the specified
3583 character, but no more.
3584
3585 The @samp{c} tells the function the name of the character to which to delete.
3586
3587 More formally, a function with two or more arguments can have
3588 information passed to each argument by adding parts to the string that
3589 follows @code{interactive}. When you do this, the information is
3590 passed to each argument in the same order it is specified in the
3591 @code{interactive} list. In the string, each part is separated from
3592 the next part by a @samp{\n}, which is a newline. For example, you
3593 can follow @samp{p} with a @samp{\n} and an @samp{cZap to char:@: }.
3594 This causes Emacs to pass the value of the prefix argument (if there
3595 is one) and the character.
3596
3597 In this case, the function definition looks like the following, where
3598 @code{arg} and @code{char} are the symbols to which @code{interactive}
3599 binds the prefix argument and the specified character:
3600
3601 @smallexample
3602 @group
3603 (defun @var{name-of-function} (arg char)
3604 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
3605 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
3606 @var{body-of-function}@dots{})
3607 @end group
3608 @end smallexample
3609
3610 @noindent
3611 (The space after the colon in the prompt makes it look better when you
3612 are prompted. @xref{copy-to-buffer, , The Definition of
3613 @code{copy-to-buffer}}, for an example.)
3614
3615 When a function does not take arguments, @code{interactive} does not
3616 require any. Such a function contains the simple expression
3617 @code{(interactive)}. The @code{mark-whole-buffer} function is like
3618 this.
3619
3620 Alternatively, if the special letter-codes are not right for your
3621 application, you can pass your own arguments to @code{interactive} as
3622 a list.
3623
3624 @xref{append-to-buffer, , The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}},
3625 for an example. @xref{Using Interactive, , Using @code{Interactive},
3626 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a more complete
3627 explanation about this technique.
3628
3629 @node Permanent Installation, let, Interactive Options, Writing Defuns
3630 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3631 @section Install Code Permanently
3632 @cindex Install code permanently
3633 @cindex Permanent code installation
3634 @cindex Code installation
3635
3636 When you install a function definition by evaluating it, it will stay
3637 installed until you quit Emacs. The next time you start a new session
3638 of Emacs, the function will not be installed unless you evaluate the
3639 function definition again.
3640
3641 At some point, you may want to have code installed automatically
3642 whenever you start a new session of Emacs. There are several ways of
3643 doing this:
3644
3645 @itemize @bullet
3646 @item
3647 If you have code that is just for yourself, you can put the code for the
3648 function definition in your @file{.emacs} initialization file. When you
3649 start Emacs, your @file{.emacs} file is automatically evaluated and all
3650 the function definitions within it are installed.
3651 @xref{Emacs Initialization, , Your @file{.emacs} File}.
3652
3653 @item
3654 Alternatively, you can put the function definitions that you want
3655 installed in one or more files of their own and use the @code{load}
3656 function to cause Emacs to evaluate and thereby install each of the
3657 functions in the files.
3658 @xref{Loading Files, , Loading Files}.
3659
3660 @item
3661 Thirdly, if you have code that your whole site will use, it is usual
3662 to put it in a file called @file{site-init.el} that is loaded when
3663 Emacs is built. This makes the code available to everyone who uses
3664 your machine. (See the @file{INSTALL} file that is part of the Emacs
3665 distribution.)
3666 @end itemize
3667
3668 Finally, if you have code that everyone who uses Emacs may want, you
3669 can post it on a computer network or send a copy to the Free Software
3670 Foundation. (When you do this, please license the code and its
3671 documentation under a license that permits other people to run, copy,
3672 study, modify, and redistribute the code and which protects you from
3673 having your work taken from you.) If you send a copy of your code to
3674 the Free Software Foundation, and properly protect yourself and
3675 others, it may be included in the next release of Emacs. In large
3676 part, this is how Emacs has grown over the past years, by donations.
3677
3678 @node let, if, Permanent Installation, Writing Defuns
3679 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3680 @section @code{let}
3681 @findex let
3682
3683 The @code{let} expression is a special form in Lisp that you will need
3684 to use in most function definitions.
3685
3686 @code{let} is used to attach or bind a symbol to a value in such a way
3687 that the Lisp interpreter will not confuse the variable with a
3688 variable of the same name that is not part of the function.
3689
3690 To understand why the @code{let} special form is necessary, consider
3691 the situation in which you own a home that you generally refer to as
3692 `the house', as in the sentence, ``The house needs painting.'' If you
3693 are visiting a friend and your host refers to `the house', he is
3694 likely to be referring to @emph{his} house, not yours, that is, to a
3695 different house.
3696
3697 If your friend is referring to his house and you think he is referring
3698 to your house, you may be in for some confusion. The same thing could
3699 happen in Lisp if a variable that is used inside of one function has
3700 the same name as a variable that is used inside of another function,
3701 and the two are not intended to refer to the same value. The
3702 @code{let} special form prevents this kind of confusion.
3703
3704 @menu
3705 * Prevent confusion::
3706 * Parts of let Expression::
3707 * Sample let Expression::
3708 * Uninitialized let Variables::
3709 @end menu
3710
3711 @node Prevent confusion, Parts of let Expression, let, let
3712 @ifnottex
3713 @unnumberedsubsec @code{let} Prevents Confusion
3714 @end ifnottex
3715
3716 @cindex @samp{local variable} defined
3717 @cindex @samp{variable, local}, defined
3718 The @code{let} special form prevents confusion. @code{let} creates a
3719 name for a @dfn{local variable} that overshadows any use of the same
3720 name outside the @code{let} expression. This is like understanding
3721 that whenever your host refers to `the house', he means his house, not
3722 yours. (Symbols used in argument lists work the same way.
3723 @xref{defun, , The @code{defun} Special Form}.)
3724
3725 Local variables created by a @code{let} expression retain their value
3726 @emph{only} within the @code{let} expression itself (and within
3727 expressions called within the @code{let} expression); the local
3728 variables have no effect outside the @code{let} expression.
3729
3730 Another way to think about @code{let} is that it is like a @code{setq}
3731 that is temporary and local. The values set by @code{let} are
3732 automatically undone when the @code{let} is finished. The setting
3733 only affects expressions that are inside the bounds of the @code{let}
3734 expression. In computer science jargon, we would say ``the binding of
3735 a symbol is visible only in functions called in the @code{let} form;
3736 in Emacs Lisp, scoping is dynamic, not lexical.''
3737
3738 @code{let} can create more than one variable at once. Also,
3739 @code{let} gives each variable it creates an initial value, either a
3740 value specified by you, or @code{nil}. (In the jargon, this is called
3741 `binding the variable to the value'.) After @code{let} has created
3742 and bound the variables, it executes the code in the body of the
3743 @code{let}, and returns the value of the last expression in the body,
3744 as the value of the whole @code{let} expression. (`Execute' is a jargon
3745 term that means to evaluate a list; it comes from the use of the word
3746 meaning `to give practical effect to' (@cite{Oxford English
3747 Dictionary}). Since you evaluate an expression to perform an action,
3748 `execute' has evolved as a synonym to `evaluate'.)
3749
3750 @node Parts of let Expression, Sample let Expression, Prevent confusion, let
3751 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3752 @subsection The Parts of a @code{let} Expression
3753 @cindex @code{let} expression, parts of
3754 @cindex Parts of @code{let} expression
3755
3756 @cindex @samp{varlist} defined
3757 A @code{let} expression is a list of three parts. The first part is
3758 the symbol @code{let}. The second part is a list, called a
3759 @dfn{varlist}, each element of which is either a symbol by itself or a
3760 two-element list, the first element of which is a symbol. The third
3761 part of the @code{let} expression is the body of the @code{let}. The
3762 body usually consists of one or more lists.
3763
3764 @need 800
3765 A template for a @code{let} expression looks like this:
3766
3767 @smallexample
3768 (let @var{varlist} @var{body}@dots{})
3769 @end smallexample
3770
3771 @noindent
3772 The symbols in the varlist are the variables that are given initial
3773 values by the @code{let} special form. Symbols by themselves are given
3774 the initial value of @code{nil}; and each symbol that is the first
3775 element of a two-element list is bound to the value that is returned
3776 when the Lisp interpreter evaluates the second element.
3777
3778 Thus, a varlist might look like this: @code{(thread (needles 3))}. In
3779 this case, in a @code{let} expression, Emacs binds the symbol
3780 @code{thread} to an initial value of @code{nil}, and binds the symbol
3781 @code{needles} to an initial value of 3.
3782
3783 When you write a @code{let} expression, what you do is put the
3784 appropriate expressions in the slots of the @code{let} expression
3785 template.
3786
3787 If the varlist is composed of two-element lists, as is often the case,
3788 the template for the @code{let} expression looks like this:
3789
3790 @smallexample
3791 @group
3792 (let ((@var{variable} @var{value})
3793 (@var{variable} @var{value})
3794 @dots{})
3795 @var{body}@dots{})
3796 @end group
3797 @end smallexample
3798
3799 @node Sample let Expression, Uninitialized let Variables, Parts of let Expression, let
3800 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3801 @subsection Sample @code{let} Expression
3802 @cindex Sample @code{let} expression
3803 @cindex @code{let} expression sample
3804
3805 The following expression creates and gives initial values
3806 to the two variables @code{zebra} and @code{tiger}. The body of the
3807 @code{let} expression is a list which calls the @code{message} function.
3808
3809 @smallexample
3810 @group
3811 (let ((zebra 'stripes)
3812 (tiger 'fierce))
3813 (message "One kind of animal has %s and another is %s."
3814 zebra tiger))
3815 @end group
3816 @end smallexample
3817
3818 Here, the varlist is @code{((zebra 'stripes) (tiger 'fierce))}.
3819
3820 The two variables are @code{zebra} and @code{tiger}. Each variable is
3821 the first element of a two-element list and each value is the second
3822 element of its two-element list. In the varlist, Emacs binds the
3823 variable @code{zebra} to the value @code{stripes}@footnote{According
3824 to Jared Diamond in @cite{Guns, Germs, and Steel}, ``@dots{} zebras
3825 become impossibly dangerous as they grow older'' but the claim here is
3826 that they do not become fierce like a tiger. (1997, W. W. Norton and
3827 Co., ISBN 0-393-03894-2, page 171)}, and binds the
3828 variable @code{tiger} to the value @code{fierce}. In this example,
3829 both values are symbols preceded by a quote. The values could just as
3830 well have been another list or a string. The body of the @code{let}
3831 follows after the list holding the variables. In this example, the
3832 body is a list that uses the @code{message} function to print a string
3833 in the echo area.
3834
3835 @need 1500
3836 You may evaluate the example in the usual fashion, by placing the
3837 cursor after the last parenthesis and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}. When you do
3838 this, the following will appear in the echo area:
3839
3840 @smallexample
3841 "One kind of animal has stripes and another is fierce."
3842 @end smallexample
3843
3844 As we have seen before, the @code{message} function prints its first
3845 argument, except for @samp{%s}. In this example, the value of the variable
3846 @code{zebra} is printed at the location of the first @samp{%s} and the
3847 value of the variable @code{tiger} is printed at the location of the
3848 second @samp{%s}.
3849
3850 @node Uninitialized let Variables, , Sample let Expression, let
3851 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3852 @subsection Uninitialized Variables in a @code{let} Statement
3853 @cindex Uninitialized @code{let} variables
3854 @cindex @code{let} variables uninitialized
3855
3856 If you do not bind the variables in a @code{let} statement to specific
3857 initial values, they will automatically be bound to an initial value of
3858 @code{nil}, as in the following expression:
3859
3860 @smallexample
3861 @group
3862 (let ((birch 3)
3863 pine
3864 fir
3865 (oak 'some))
3866 (message
3867 "Here are %d variables with %s, %s, and %s value."
3868 birch pine fir oak))
3869 @end group
3870 @end smallexample
3871
3872 @noindent
3873 Here, the varlist is @code{((birch 3) pine fir (oak 'some))}.
3874
3875 @need 1250
3876 If you evaluate this expression in the usual way, the following will
3877 appear in your echo area:
3878
3879 @smallexample
3880 "Here are 3 variables with nil, nil, and some value."
3881 @end smallexample
3882
3883 @noindent
3884 In this example, Emacs binds the symbol @code{birch} to the number 3,
3885 binds the symbols @code{pine} and @code{fir} to @code{nil}, and binds
3886 the symbol @code{oak} to the value @code{some}.
3887
3888 Note that in the first part of the @code{let}, the variables @code{pine}
3889 and @code{fir} stand alone as atoms that are not surrounded by
3890 parentheses; this is because they are being bound to @code{nil}, the
3891 empty list. But @code{oak} is bound to @code{some} and so is a part of
3892 the list @code{(oak 'some)}. Similarly, @code{birch} is bound to the
3893 number 3 and so is in a list with that number. (Since a number
3894 evaluates to itself, the number does not need to be quoted. Also, the
3895 number is printed in the message using a @samp{%d} rather than a
3896 @samp{%s}.) The four variables as a group are put into a list to
3897 delimit them from the body of the @code{let}.
3898
3899 @node if, else, let, Writing Defuns
3900 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3901 @section The @code{if} Special Form
3902 @findex if
3903 @cindex Conditional with @code{if}
3904
3905 A third special form, in addition to @code{defun} and @code{let}, is the
3906 conditional @code{if}. This form is used to instruct the computer to
3907 make decisions. You can write function definitions without using
3908 @code{if}, but it is used often enough, and is important enough, to be
3909 included here. It is used, for example, in the code for the
3910 function @code{beginning-of-buffer}.
3911
3912 The basic idea behind an @code{if}, is that ``@emph{if} a test is true,
3913 @emph{then} an expression is evaluated.'' If the test is not true, the
3914 expression is not evaluated. For example, you might make a decision
3915 such as, ``if it is warm and sunny, then go to the beach!''
3916
3917 @menu
3918 * if in more detail::
3919 * type-of-animal in detail:: An example of an @code{if} expression.
3920 @end menu
3921
3922 @node if in more detail, type-of-animal in detail, if, if
3923 @ifnottex
3924 @unnumberedsubsec @code{if} in more detail
3925 @end ifnottex
3926
3927 @cindex @samp{if-part} defined
3928 @cindex @samp{then-part} defined
3929 An @code{if} expression written in Lisp does not use the word `then';
3930 the test and the action are the second and third elements of the list
3931 whose first element is @code{if}. Nonetheless, the test part of an
3932 @code{if} expression is often called the @dfn{if-part} and the second
3933 argument is often called the @dfn{then-part}.
3934
3935 Also, when an @code{if} expression is written, the true-or-false-test
3936 is usually written on the same line as the symbol @code{if}, but the
3937 action to carry out if the test is true, the ``then-part'', is written
3938 on the second and subsequent lines. This makes the @code{if}
3939 expression easier to read.
3940
3941 @smallexample
3942 @group
3943 (if @var{true-or-false-test}
3944 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-test-is-true})
3945 @end group
3946 @end smallexample
3947
3948 @noindent
3949 The true-or-false-test will be an expression that
3950 is evaluated by the Lisp interpreter.
3951
3952 Here is an example that you can evaluate in the usual manner. The test
3953 is whether the number 5 is greater than the number 4. Since it is, the
3954 message @samp{5 is greater than 4!} will be printed.
3955
3956 @smallexample
3957 @group
3958 (if (> 5 4) ; @r{if-part}
3959 (message "5 is greater than 4!")) ; @r{then-part}
3960 @end group
3961 @end smallexample
3962
3963 @noindent
3964 (The function @code{>} tests whether its first argument is greater than
3965 its second argument and returns true if it is.)
3966 @findex > (greater than)
3967
3968 Of course, in actual use, the test in an @code{if} expression will not
3969 be fixed for all time as it is by the expression @code{(> 5 4)}.
3970 Instead, at least one of the variables used in the test will be bound to
3971 a value that is not known ahead of time. (If the value were known ahead
3972 of time, we would not need to run the test!)
3973
3974 For example, the value may be bound to an argument of a function
3975 definition. In the following function definition, the character of the
3976 animal is a value that is passed to the function. If the value bound to
3977 @code{characteristic} is @code{fierce}, then the message, @samp{It's a
3978 tiger!} will be printed; otherwise, @code{nil} will be returned.
3979
3980 @smallexample
3981 @group
3982 (defun type-of-animal (characteristic)
3983 "Print message in echo area depending on CHARACTERISTIC.
3984 If the CHARACTERISTIC is the symbol `fierce',
3985 then warn of a tiger."
3986 (if (equal characteristic 'fierce)
3987 (message "It's a tiger!")))
3988 @end group
3989 @end smallexample
3990
3991 @need 1500
3992 @noindent
3993 If you are reading this inside of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate the
3994 function definition in the usual way to install it in Emacs, and then you
3995 can evaluate the following two expressions to see the results:
3996
3997 @smallexample
3998 @group
3999 (type-of-animal 'fierce)
4000
4001 (type-of-animal 'zebra)
4002
4003 @end group
4004 @end smallexample
4005
4006 @c Following sentences rewritten to prevent overfull hbox.
4007 @noindent
4008 When you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal 'fierce)}, you will see the
4009 following message printed in the echo area: @code{"It's a tiger!"}; and
4010 when you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal 'zebra)} you will see @code{nil}
4011 printed in the echo area.
4012
4013 @node type-of-animal in detail, , if in more detail, if
4014 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4015 @subsection The @code{type-of-animal} Function in Detail
4016
4017 Let's look at the @code{type-of-animal} function in detail.
4018
4019 The function definition for @code{type-of-animal} was written by filling
4020 the slots of two templates, one for a function definition as a whole, and
4021 a second for an @code{if} expression.
4022
4023 @need 1250
4024 The template for every function that is not interactive is:
4025
4026 @smallexample
4027 @group
4028 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
4029 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
4030 @var{body}@dots{})
4031 @end group
4032 @end smallexample
4033
4034 @need 800
4035 The parts of the function that match this template look like this:
4036
4037 @smallexample
4038 @group
4039 (defun type-of-animal (characteristic)
4040 "Print message in echo area depending on CHARACTERISTIC.
4041 If the CHARACTERISTIC is the symbol `fierce',
4042 then warn of a tiger."
4043 @var{body: the} @code{if} @var{expression})
4044 @end group
4045 @end smallexample
4046
4047 The name of function is @code{type-of-animal}; it is passed the value
4048 of one argument. The argument list is followed by a multi-line
4049 documentation string. The documentation string is included in the
4050 example because it is a good habit to write documentation string for
4051 every function definition. The body of the function definition
4052 consists of the @code{if} expression.
4053
4054 @need 800
4055 The template for an @code{if} expression looks like this:
4056
4057 @smallexample
4058 @group
4059 (if @var{true-or-false-test}
4060 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-the-test-returns-true})
4061 @end group
4062 @end smallexample
4063
4064 @need 1250
4065 In the @code{type-of-animal} function, the code for the @code{if}
4066 looks like this:
4067
4068 @smallexample
4069 @group
4070 (if (equal characteristic 'fierce)
4071 (message "It's a tiger!")))
4072 @end group
4073 @end smallexample
4074
4075 @need 800
4076 Here, the true-or-false-test is the expression:
4077
4078 @smallexample
4079 (equal characteristic 'fierce)
4080 @end smallexample
4081
4082 @noindent
4083 In Lisp, @code{equal} is a function that determines whether its first
4084 argument is equal to its second argument. The second argument is the
4085 quoted symbol @code{'fierce} and the first argument is the value of the
4086 symbol @code{characteristic}---in other words, the argument passed to
4087 this function.
4088
4089 In the first exercise of @code{type-of-animal}, the argument
4090 @code{fierce} is passed to @code{type-of-animal}. Since @code{fierce}
4091 is equal to @code{fierce}, the expression, @code{(equal characteristic
4092 'fierce)}, returns a value of true. When this happens, the @code{if}
4093 evaluates the second argument or then-part of the @code{if}:
4094 @code{(message "It's tiger!")}.
4095
4096 On the other hand, in the second exercise of @code{type-of-animal}, the
4097 argument @code{zebra} is passed to @code{type-of-animal}. @code{zebra}
4098 is not equal to @code{fierce}, so the then-part is not evaluated and
4099 @code{nil} is returned by the @code{if} expression.
4100
4101 @node else, Truth & Falsehood, if, Writing Defuns
4102 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4103 @section If--then--else Expressions
4104 @cindex Else
4105
4106 An @code{if} expression may have an optional third argument, called
4107 the @dfn{else-part}, for the case when the true-or-false-test returns
4108 false. When this happens, the second argument or then-part of the
4109 overall @code{if} expression is @emph{not} evaluated, but the third or
4110 else-part @emph{is} evaluated. You might think of this as the cloudy
4111 day alternative for the decision ``if it is warm and sunny, then go to
4112 the beach, else read a book!''.
4113
4114 The word ``else'' is not written in the Lisp code; the else-part of an
4115 @code{if} expression comes after the then-part. In the written Lisp, the
4116 else-part is usually written to start on a line of its own and is
4117 indented less than the then-part:
4118
4119 @smallexample
4120 @group
4121 (if @var{true-or-false-test}
4122 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-the-test-returns-true}
4123 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-the-test-returns-false})
4124 @end group
4125 @end smallexample
4126
4127 For example, the following @code{if} expression prints the message @samp{4
4128 is not greater than 5!} when you evaluate it in the usual way:
4129
4130 @smallexample
4131 @group
4132 (if (> 4 5) ; @r{if-part}
4133 (message "4 falsely greater than 5!") ; @r{then-part}
4134 (message "4 is not greater than 5!")) ; @r{else-part}
4135 @end group
4136 @end smallexample
4137
4138 @noindent
4139 Note that the different levels of indentation make it easy to
4140 distinguish the then-part from the else-part. (GNU Emacs has several
4141 commands that automatically indent @code{if} expressions correctly.
4142 @xref{Typing Lists, , GNU Emacs Helps You Type Lists}.)
4143
4144 We can extend the @code{type-of-animal} function to include an
4145 else-part by simply incorporating an additional part to the @code{if}
4146 expression.
4147
4148 @need 1500
4149 You can see the consequences of doing this if you evaluate the following
4150 version of the @code{type-of-animal} function definition to install it
4151 and then evaluate the two subsequent expressions to pass different
4152 arguments to the function.
4153
4154 @smallexample
4155 @group
4156 (defun type-of-animal (characteristic) ; @r{Second version.}
4157 "Print message in echo area depending on CHARACTERISTIC.
4158 If the CHARACTERISTIC is the symbol `fierce',
4159 then warn of a tiger;
4160 else say it's not fierce."
4161 (if (equal characteristic 'fierce)
4162 (message "It's a tiger!")
4163 (message "It's not fierce!")))
4164 @end group
4165 @end smallexample
4166 @sp 1
4167
4168 @smallexample
4169 @group
4170 (type-of-animal 'fierce)
4171
4172 (type-of-animal 'zebra)
4173
4174 @end group
4175 @end smallexample
4176
4177 @c Following sentence rewritten to prevent overfull hbox.
4178 @noindent
4179 When you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal 'fierce)}, you will see the
4180 following message printed in the echo area: @code{"It's a tiger!"}; but
4181 when you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal 'zebra)}, you will see
4182 @code{"It's not fierce!"}.
4183
4184 (Of course, if the @var{characteristic} were @code{ferocious}, the
4185 message @code{"It's not fierce!"} would be printed; and it would be
4186 misleading! When you write code, you need to take into account the
4187 possibility that some such argument will be tested by the @code{if}
4188 and write your program accordingly.)
4189
4190 @node Truth & Falsehood, save-excursion, else, Writing Defuns
4191 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4192 @section Truth and Falsehood in Emacs Lisp
4193 @cindex Truth and falsehood in Emacs Lisp
4194 @cindex Falsehood and truth in Emacs Lisp
4195 @findex nil
4196
4197 There is an important aspect to the truth test in an @code{if}
4198 expression. So far, we have spoken of `true' and `false' as values of
4199 predicates as if they were new kinds of Emacs Lisp objects. In fact,
4200 `false' is just our old friend @code{nil}. Anything else---anything
4201 at all---is `true'.
4202
4203 The expression that tests for truth is interpreted as @dfn{true}
4204 if the result of evaluating it is a value that is not @code{nil}. In
4205 other words, the result of the test is considered true if the value
4206 returned is a number such as 47, a string such as @code{"hello"}, or a
4207 symbol (other than @code{nil}) such as @code{flowers}, or a list (so
4208 long as it is not empty), or even a buffer!
4209
4210 @menu
4211 * nil explained:: @code{nil} has two meanings.
4212 @end menu
4213
4214 @node nil explained, , Truth & Falsehood, Truth & Falsehood
4215 @ifnottex
4216 @unnumberedsubsec An explanation of @code{nil}
4217 @end ifnottex
4218
4219 Before illustrating a test for truth, we need an explanation of @code{nil}.
4220
4221 In Emacs Lisp, the symbol @code{nil} has two meanings. First, it means the
4222 empty list. Second, it means false and is the value returned when a
4223 true-or-false-test tests false. @code{nil} can be written as an empty
4224 list, @code{()}, or as @code{nil}. As far as the Lisp interpreter is
4225 concerned, @code{()} and @code{nil} are the same. Humans, however, tend
4226 to use @code{nil} for false and @code{()} for the empty list.
4227
4228 In Emacs Lisp, any value that is not @code{nil}---is not the empty
4229 list---is considered true. This means that if an evaluation returns
4230 something that is not an empty list, an @code{if} expression will test
4231 true. For example, if a number is put in the slot for the test, it
4232 will be evaluated and will return itself, since that is what numbers
4233 do when evaluated. In this conditional, the @code{if} expression will
4234 test true. The expression tests false only when @code{nil}, an empty
4235 list, is returned by evaluating the expression.
4236
4237 You can see this by evaluating the two expressions in the following examples.
4238
4239 In the first example, the number 4 is evaluated as the test in the
4240 @code{if} expression and returns itself; consequently, the then-part
4241 of the expression is evaluated and returned: @samp{true} appears in
4242 the echo area. In the second example, the @code{nil} indicates false;
4243 consequently, the else-part of the expression is evaluated and
4244 returned: @samp{false} appears in the echo area.
4245
4246 @smallexample
4247 @group
4248 (if 4
4249 'true
4250 'false)
4251 @end group
4252
4253 @group
4254 (if nil
4255 'true
4256 'false)
4257 @end group
4258 @end smallexample
4259
4260 @need 1250
4261 Incidentally, if some other useful value is not available for a test that
4262 returns true, then the Lisp interpreter will return the symbol @code{t}
4263 for true. For example, the expression @code{(> 5 4)} returns @code{t}
4264 when evaluated, as you can see by evaluating it in the usual way:
4265
4266 @smallexample
4267 (> 5 4)
4268 @end smallexample
4269
4270 @need 1250
4271 @noindent
4272 On the other hand, this function returns @code{nil} if the test is false.
4273
4274 @smallexample
4275 (> 4 5)
4276 @end smallexample
4277
4278 @node save-excursion, Review, Truth & Falsehood, Writing Defuns
4279 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4280 @section @code{save-excursion}
4281 @findex save-excursion
4282 @cindex Region, what it is
4283 @cindex Preserving point, mark, and buffer
4284 @cindex Point, mark, buffer preservation
4285 @findex point
4286 @findex mark
4287
4288 The @code{save-excursion} function is the fourth and final special form
4289 that we will discuss in this chapter.
4290
4291 In Emacs Lisp programs used for editing, the @code{save-excursion}
4292 function is very common. It saves the location of point and mark,
4293 executes the body of the function, and then restores point and mark to
4294 their previous positions if their locations were changed. Its primary
4295 purpose is to keep the user from being surprised and disturbed by
4296 unexpected movement of point or mark.
4297
4298 @menu
4299 * Point and mark:: A review of various locations.
4300 * Template for save-excursion::
4301 @end menu
4302
4303 @node Point and mark, Template for save-excursion, save-excursion, save-excursion
4304 @ifnottex
4305 @unnumberedsubsec Point and Mark
4306 @end ifnottex
4307
4308 Before discussing @code{save-excursion}, however, it may be useful
4309 first to review what point and mark are in GNU Emacs. @dfn{Point} is
4310 the current location of the cursor. Wherever the cursor
4311 is, that is point. More precisely, on terminals where the cursor
4312 appears to be on top of a character, point is immediately before the
4313 character. In Emacs Lisp, point is an integer. The first character in
4314 a buffer is number one, the second is number two, and so on. The
4315 function @code{point} returns the current position of the cursor as a
4316 number. Each buffer has its own value for point.
4317
4318 The @dfn{mark} is another position in the buffer; its value can be set
4319 with a command such as @kbd{C-@key{SPC}} (@code{set-mark-command}). If
4320 a mark has been set, you can use the command @kbd{C-x C-x}
4321 (@code{exchange-point-and-mark}) to cause the cursor to jump to the mark
4322 and set the mark to be the previous position of point. In addition, if
4323 you set another mark, the position of the previous mark is saved in the
4324 mark ring. Many mark positions can be saved this way. You can jump the
4325 cursor to a saved mark by typing @kbd{C-u C-@key{SPC}} one or more
4326 times.
4327
4328 The part of the buffer between point and mark is called @dfn{the
4329 region}. Numerous commands work on the region, including
4330 @code{center-region}, @code{count-lines-region}, @code{kill-region}, and
4331 @code{print-region}.
4332
4333 The @code{save-excursion} special form saves the locations of point and
4334 mark and restores those positions after the code within the body of the
4335 special form is evaluated by the Lisp interpreter. Thus, if point were
4336 in the beginning of a piece of text and some code moved point to the end
4337 of the buffer, the @code{save-excursion} would put point back to where
4338 it was before, after the expressions in the body of the function were
4339 evaluated.
4340
4341 In Emacs, a function frequently moves point as part of its internal
4342 workings even though a user would not expect this. For example,
4343 @code{count-lines-region} moves point. To prevent the user from being
4344 bothered by jumps that are both unexpected and (from the user's point of
4345 view) unnecessary, @code{save-excursion} is often used to keep point and
4346 mark in the location expected by the user. The use of
4347 @code{save-excursion} is good housekeeping.
4348
4349 To make sure the house stays clean, @code{save-excursion} restores the
4350 values of point and mark even if something goes wrong in the code inside
4351 of it (or, to be more precise and to use the proper jargon, ``in case of
4352 abnormal exit''). This feature is very helpful.
4353
4354 In addition to recording the values of point and mark,
4355 @code{save-excursion} keeps track of the current buffer, and restores
4356 it, too. This means you can write code that will change the buffer and
4357 have @code{save-excursion} switch you back to the original buffer.
4358 This is how @code{save-excursion} is used in @code{append-to-buffer}.
4359 (@xref{append-to-buffer, , The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}}.)
4360
4361 @node Template for save-excursion, , Point and mark, save-excursion
4362 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4363 @subsection Template for a @code{save-excursion} Expression
4364
4365 @need 800
4366 The template for code using @code{save-excursion} is simple:
4367
4368 @smallexample
4369 @group
4370 (save-excursion
4371 @var{body}@dots{})
4372 @end group
4373 @end smallexample
4374
4375 @noindent
4376 The body of the function is one or more expressions that will be
4377 evaluated in sequence by the Lisp interpreter. If there is more than
4378 one expression in the body, the value of the last one will be returned
4379 as the value of the @code{save-excursion} function. The other
4380 expressions in the body are evaluated only for their side effects; and
4381 @code{save-excursion} itself is used only for its side effect (which
4382 is restoring the positions of point and mark).
4383
4384 @need 1250
4385 In more detail, the template for a @code{save-excursion} expression
4386 looks like this:
4387
4388 @smallexample
4389 @group
4390 (save-excursion
4391 @var{first-expression-in-body}
4392 @var{second-expression-in-body}
4393 @var{third-expression-in-body}
4394 @dots{}
4395 @var{last-expression-in-body})
4396 @end group
4397 @end smallexample
4398
4399 @noindent
4400 An expression, of course, may be a symbol on its own or a list.
4401
4402 In Emacs Lisp code, a @code{save-excursion} expression often occurs
4403 within the body of a @code{let} expression. It looks like this:
4404
4405 @smallexample
4406 @group
4407 (let @var{varlist}
4408 (save-excursion
4409 @var{body}@dots{}))
4410 @end group
4411 @end smallexample
4412
4413 @node Review, defun Exercises, save-excursion, Writing Defuns
4414 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4415 @section Review
4416
4417 In the last few chapters we have introduced a fair number of functions
4418 and special forms. Here they are described in brief, along with a few
4419 similar functions that have not been mentioned yet.
4420
4421 @table @code
4422 @item eval-last-sexp
4423 Evaluate the last symbolic expression before the current location of
4424 point. The value is printed in the echo area unless the function is
4425 invoked with an argument; in that case, the output is printed in the
4426 current buffer. This command is normally bound to @kbd{C-x C-e}.
4427
4428 @item defun
4429 Define function. This special form has up to five parts: the name,
4430 a template for the arguments that will be passed to the function,
4431 documentation, an optional interactive declaration, and the body of the
4432 definition.
4433
4434 @need 1250
4435 For example, in an early version of Emacs, the function definition was
4436 as follows. (It is slightly more complex now that it seeks the first
4437 non-whitespace character rather than the first visible character.)
4438
4439 @smallexample
4440 @group
4441 (defun back-to-indentation ()
4442 "Move point to first visible character on line."
4443 (interactive)
4444 (beginning-of-line 1)
4445 (skip-chars-forward " \t"))
4446 @end group
4447 @end smallexample
4448
4449 @ignore
4450 In GNU Emacs 22,
4451
4452 (defun backward-to-indentation (&optional arg)
4453 "Move backward ARG lines and position at first nonblank character."
4454 (interactive "p")
4455 (forward-line (- (or arg 1)))
4456 (skip-chars-forward " \t"))
4457
4458 (defun back-to-indentation ()
4459 "Move point to the first non-whitespace character on this line."
4460 (interactive)
4461 (beginning-of-line 1)
4462 (skip-syntax-forward " " (line-end-position))
4463 ;; Move back over chars that have whitespace syntax but have the p flag.
4464 (backward-prefix-chars))
4465 @end ignore
4466
4467 @item interactive
4468 Declare to the interpreter that the function can be used
4469 interactively. This special form may be followed by a string with one
4470 or more parts that pass the information to the arguments of the
4471 function, in sequence. These parts may also tell the interpreter to
4472 prompt for information. Parts of the string are separated by
4473 newlines, @samp{\n}.
4474
4475 @need 1000
4476 Common code characters are:
4477
4478 @table @code
4479 @item b
4480 The name of an existing buffer.
4481
4482 @item f
4483 The name of an existing file.
4484
4485 @item p
4486 The numeric prefix argument. (Note that this `p' is lower case.)
4487
4488 @item r
4489 Point and the mark, as two numeric arguments, smallest first. This
4490 is the only code letter that specifies two successive arguments
4491 rather than one.
4492 @end table
4493
4494 @xref{Interactive Codes, , Code Characters for @samp{interactive},
4495 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a complete list of
4496 code characters.
4497
4498 @item let
4499 Declare that a list of variables is for use within the body of the
4500 @code{let} and give them an initial value, either @code{nil} or a
4501 specified value; then evaluate the rest of the expressions in the body
4502 of the @code{let} and return the value of the last one. Inside the
4503 body of the @code{let}, the Lisp interpreter does not see the values of
4504 the variables of the same names that are bound outside of the
4505 @code{let}.
4506
4507 @need 1250
4508 For example,
4509
4510 @smallexample
4511 @group
4512 (let ((foo (buffer-name))
4513 (bar (buffer-size)))
4514 (message
4515 "This buffer is %s and has %d characters."
4516 foo bar))
4517 @end group
4518 @end smallexample
4519
4520 @item save-excursion
4521 Record the values of point and mark and the current buffer before
4522 evaluating the body of this special form. Restore the values of point
4523 and mark and buffer afterward.
4524
4525 @need 1250
4526 For example,
4527
4528 @smallexample
4529 @group
4530 (message "We are %d characters into this buffer."
4531 (- (point)
4532 (save-excursion
4533 (goto-char (point-min)) (point))))
4534 @end group
4535 @end smallexample
4536
4537 @item if
4538 Evaluate the first argument to the function; if it is true, evaluate
4539 the second argument; else evaluate the third argument, if there is one.
4540
4541 The @code{if} special form is called a @dfn{conditional}. There are
4542 other conditionals in Emacs Lisp, but @code{if} is perhaps the most
4543 commonly used.
4544
4545 @need 1250
4546 For example,
4547
4548 @smallexample
4549 @group
4550 (if (= 22 emacs-major-version)
4551 (message "This is version 22 Emacs")
4552 (message "This is not version 22 Emacs"))
4553 @end group
4554 @end smallexample
4555
4556 @need 1250
4557 @item <
4558 @itemx >
4559 @itemx <=
4560 @itemx >=
4561 The @code{<} function tests whether its first argument is smaller than
4562 its second argument. A corresponding function, @code{>}, tests whether
4563 the first argument is greater than the second. Likewise, @code{<=}
4564 tests whether the first argument is less than or equal to the second and
4565 @code{>=} tests whether the first argument is greater than or equal to
4566 the second. In all cases, both arguments must be numbers or markers
4567 (markers indicate positions in buffers).
4568
4569 @need 800
4570 @item =
4571 The @code{=} function tests whether two arguments, both numbers or
4572 markers, are equal.
4573
4574 @need 1250
4575 @item equal
4576 @itemx eq
4577 Test whether two objects are the same. @code{equal} uses one meaning
4578 of the word `same' and @code{eq} uses another: @code{equal} returns
4579 true if the two objects have a similar structure and contents, such as
4580 two copies of the same book. On the other hand, @code{eq}, returns
4581 true if both arguments are actually the same object.
4582 @findex equal
4583 @findex eq
4584
4585 @need 1250
4586 @item string<
4587 @itemx string-lessp
4588 @itemx string=
4589 @itemx string-equal
4590 The @code{string-lessp} function tests whether its first argument is
4591 smaller than the second argument. A shorter, alternative name for the
4592 same function (a @code{defalias}) is @code{string<}.
4593
4594 The arguments to @code{string-lessp} must be strings or symbols; the
4595 ordering is lexicographic, so case is significant. The print names of
4596 symbols are used instead of the symbols themselves.
4597
4598 @cindex @samp{empty string} defined
4599 An empty string, @samp{""}, a string with no characters in it, is
4600 smaller than any string of characters.
4601
4602 @code{string-equal} provides the corresponding test for equality. Its
4603 shorter, alternative name is @code{string=}. There are no string test
4604 functions that correspond to @var{>}, @code{>=}, or @code{<=}.
4605
4606 @item message
4607 Print a message in the echo area. The first argument is a string that
4608 can contain @samp{%s}, @samp{%d}, or @samp{%c} to print the value of
4609 arguments that follow the string. The argument used by @samp{%s} must
4610 be a string or a symbol; the argument used by @samp{%d} must be a
4611 number. The argument used by @samp{%c} must be an @sc{ascii} code
4612 number; it will be printed as the character with that @sc{ascii} code.
4613 (Various other %-sequences have not been mentioned.)
4614
4615 @item setq
4616 @itemx set
4617 The @code{setq} function sets the value of its first argument to the
4618 value of the second argument. The first argument is automatically
4619 quoted by @code{setq}. It does the same for succeeding pairs of
4620 arguments. Another function, @code{set}, takes only two arguments and
4621 evaluates both of them before setting the value returned by its first
4622 argument to the value returned by its second argument.
4623
4624 @item buffer-name
4625 Without an argument, return the name of the buffer, as a string.
4626
4627 @itemx buffer-file-name
4628 Without an argument, return the name of the file the buffer is
4629 visiting.
4630
4631 @item current-buffer
4632 Return the buffer in which Emacs is active; it may not be
4633 the buffer that is visible on the screen.
4634
4635 @item other-buffer
4636 Return the most recently selected buffer (other than the buffer passed
4637 to @code{other-buffer} as an argument and other than the current
4638 buffer).
4639
4640 @item switch-to-buffer
4641 Select a buffer for Emacs to be active in and display it in the current
4642 window so users can look at it. Usually bound to @kbd{C-x b}.
4643
4644 @item set-buffer
4645 Switch Emacs' attention to a buffer on which programs will run. Don't
4646 alter what the window is showing.
4647
4648 @item buffer-size
4649 Return the number of characters in the current buffer.
4650
4651 @item point
4652 Return the value of the current position of the cursor, as an
4653 integer counting the number of characters from the beginning of the
4654 buffer.
4655
4656 @item point-min
4657 Return the minimum permissible value of point in
4658 the current buffer. This is 1, unless narrowing is in effect.
4659
4660 @item point-max
4661 Return the value of the maximum permissible value of point in the
4662 current buffer. This is the end of the buffer, unless narrowing is in
4663 effect.
4664 @end table
4665
4666 @need 1500
4667 @node defun Exercises, , Review, Writing Defuns
4668 @section Exercises
4669
4670 @itemize @bullet
4671 @item
4672 Write a non-interactive function that doubles the value of its
4673 argument, a number. Make that function interactive.
4674
4675 @item
4676 Write a function that tests whether the current value of
4677 @code{fill-column} is greater than the argument passed to the function,
4678 and if so, prints an appropriate message.
4679 @end itemize
4680
4681 @node Buffer Walk Through, More Complex, Writing Defuns, Top
4682 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4683 @chapter A Few Buffer--Related Functions
4684
4685 In this chapter we study in detail several of the functions used in GNU
4686 Emacs. This is called a ``walk-through''. These functions are used as
4687 examples of Lisp code, but are not imaginary examples; with the
4688 exception of the first, simplified function definition, these functions
4689 show the actual code used in GNU Emacs. You can learn a great deal from
4690 these definitions. The functions described here are all related to
4691 buffers. Later, we will study other functions.
4692
4693 @menu
4694 * Finding More:: How to find more information.
4695 * simplified-beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
4696 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
4697 * mark-whole-buffer:: Almost the same as @code{beginning-of-buffer}.
4698 * append-to-buffer:: Uses @code{save-excursion} and
4699 @code{insert-buffer-substring}.
4700 * Buffer Related Review:: Review.
4701 * Buffer Exercises::
4702 @end menu
4703
4704 @node Finding More, simplified-beginning-of-buffer, Buffer Walk Through, Buffer Walk Through
4705 @section Finding More Information
4706
4707 @findex describe-function, @r{introduced}
4708 @cindex Find function documentation
4709 In this walk-through, I will describe each new function as we come to
4710 it, sometimes in detail and sometimes briefly. If you are interested,
4711 you can get the full documentation of any Emacs Lisp function at any
4712 time by typing @kbd{C-h f} and then the name of the function (and then
4713 @key{RET}). Similarly, you can get the full documentation for a
4714 variable by typing @kbd{C-h v} and then the name of the variable (and
4715 then @key{RET}).
4716
4717 @cindex Find source of function
4718 @c In version 22, tells location both of C and of Emacs Lisp
4719 Also, @code{describe-function} will tell you the location of the
4720 function definition.
4721
4722 Put point into the name of the file that contains the function and
4723 press the @key{RET} key. In this case, @key{RET} means
4724 @code{push-button} rather than `return' or `enter'. Emacs will take
4725 you directly to the function definition.
4726
4727 @ignore
4728 Not In version 22
4729
4730 If you move point over the file name and press
4731 the @key{RET} key, which in this case means @code{help-follow} rather
4732 than `return' or `enter', Emacs will take you directly to the function
4733 definition.
4734 @end ignore
4735
4736 More generally, if you want to see a function in its original source
4737 file, you can use the @code{find-tag} function to jump to it.
4738 @code{find-tag} works with a wide variety of languages, not just
4739 Lisp, and C, and it works with non-programming text as well. For
4740 example, @code{find-tag} will jump to the various nodes in the
4741 Texinfo source file of this document.
4742 The @code{find-tag} function depends on `tags tables' that record
4743 the locations of the functions, variables, and other items to which
4744 @code{find-tag} jumps.
4745
4746 To use the @code{find-tag} command, type @kbd{M-.} (i.e., press the
4747 period key while holding down the @key{META} key, or else type the
4748 @key{ESC} key and then type the period key), and then, at the prompt,
4749 type in the name of the function whose source code you want to see,
4750 such as @code{mark-whole-buffer}, and then type @key{RET}. Emacs will
4751 switch buffers and display the source code for the function on your
4752 screen. To switch back to your current buffer, type @kbd{C-x b
4753 @key{RET}}. (On some keyboards, the @key{META} key is labeled
4754 @key{ALT}.)
4755
4756 @c !!! 22.1.1 tags table location in this paragraph
4757 @cindex TAGS table, specifying
4758 @findex find-tag
4759 Depending on how the initial default values of your copy of Emacs are
4760 set, you may also need to specify the location of your `tags table',
4761 which is a file called @file{TAGS}. For example, if you are
4762 interested in Emacs sources, the tags table you will most likely want,
4763 if it has already been created for you, will be in a subdirectory of
4764 the @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/} directory; thus you would use the
4765 @code{M-x visit-tags-table} command and specify a pathname such as
4766 @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/TAGS}. If the tags table
4767 has not already been created, you will have to create it yourself. It
4768 will be in a file such as @file{/usr/local/src/emacs/src/TAGS}.
4769
4770 @need 1250
4771 To create a @file{TAGS} file in a specific directory, switch to that
4772 directory in Emacs using @kbd{M-x cd} command, or list the directory
4773 with @kbd{C-x d} (@code{dired}). Then run the compile command, with
4774 @w{@code{etags *.el}} as the command to execute:
4775
4776 @smallexample
4777 M-x compile RET etags *.el RET
4778 @end smallexample
4779
4780 For more information, see @ref{etags, , Create Your Own @file{TAGS} File}.
4781
4782 After you become more familiar with Emacs Lisp, you will find that you will
4783 frequently use @code{find-tag} to navigate your way around source code;
4784 and you will create your own @file{TAGS} tables.
4785
4786 @cindex Library, as term for `file'
4787 Incidentally, the files that contain Lisp code are conventionally
4788 called @dfn{libraries}. The metaphor is derived from that of a
4789 specialized library, such as a law library or an engineering library,
4790 rather than a general library. Each library, or file, contains
4791 functions that relate to a particular topic or activity, such as
4792 @file{abbrev.el} for handling abbreviations and other typing
4793 shortcuts, and @file{help.el} for on-line help. (Sometimes several
4794 libraries provide code for a single activity, as the various
4795 @file{rmail@dots{}} files provide code for reading electronic mail.)
4796 In @cite{The GNU Emacs Manual}, you will see sentences such as ``The
4797 @kbd{C-h p} command lets you search the standard Emacs Lisp libraries
4798 by topic keywords.''
4799
4800 @node simplified-beginning-of-buffer, mark-whole-buffer, Finding More, Buffer Walk Through
4801 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4802 @section A Simplified @code{beginning-of-buffer} Definition
4803 @findex simplified-beginning-of-buffer
4804
4805 The @code{beginning-of-buffer} command is a good function to start with
4806 since you are likely to be familiar with it and it is easy to
4807 understand. Used as an interactive command, @code{beginning-of-buffer}
4808 moves the cursor to the beginning of the buffer, leaving the mark at the
4809 previous position. It is generally bound to @kbd{M-<}.
4810
4811 In this section, we will discuss a shortened version of the function
4812 that shows how it is most frequently used. This shortened function
4813 works as written, but it does not contain the code for a complex option.
4814 In another section, we will describe the entire function.
4815 (@xref{beginning-of-buffer, , Complete Definition of
4816 @code{beginning-of-buffer}}.)
4817
4818 Before looking at the code, let's consider what the function
4819 definition has to contain: it must include an expression that makes
4820 the function interactive so it can be called by typing @kbd{M-x
4821 beginning-of-buffer} or by typing a keychord such as @kbd{M-<}; it
4822 must include code to leave a mark at the original position in the
4823 buffer; and it must include code to move the cursor to the beginning
4824 of the buffer.
4825
4826 @need 1250
4827 Here is the complete text of the shortened version of the function:
4828
4829 @smallexample
4830 @group
4831 (defun simplified-beginning-of-buffer ()
4832 "Move point to the beginning of the buffer;
4833 leave mark at previous position."
4834 (interactive)
4835 (push-mark)
4836 (goto-char (point-min)))
4837 @end group
4838 @end smallexample
4839
4840 Like all function definitions, this definition has five parts following
4841 the special form @code{defun}:
4842
4843 @enumerate
4844 @item
4845 The name: in this example, @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer}.
4846
4847 @item
4848 A list of the arguments: in this example, an empty list, @code{()},
4849
4850 @item
4851 The documentation string.
4852
4853 @item
4854 The interactive expression.
4855
4856 @item
4857 The body.
4858 @end enumerate
4859
4860 @noindent
4861 In this function definition, the argument list is empty; this means that
4862 this function does not require any arguments. (When we look at the
4863 definition for the complete function, we will see that it may be passed
4864 an optional argument.)
4865
4866 The interactive expression tells Emacs that the function is intended to
4867 be used interactively. In this example, @code{interactive} does not have
4868 an argument because @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} does not
4869 require one.
4870
4871 @need 800
4872 The body of the function consists of the two lines:
4873
4874 @smallexample
4875 @group
4876 (push-mark)
4877 (goto-char (point-min))
4878 @end group
4879 @end smallexample
4880
4881 The first of these lines is the expression, @code{(push-mark)}. When
4882 this expression is evaluated by the Lisp interpreter, it sets a mark at
4883 the current position of the cursor, wherever that may be. The position
4884 of this mark is saved in the mark ring.
4885
4886 The next line is @code{(goto-char (point-min))}. This expression
4887 jumps the cursor to the minimum point in the buffer, that is, to the
4888 beginning of the buffer (or to the beginning of the accessible portion
4889 of the buffer if it is narrowed. @xref{Narrowing & Widening, ,
4890 Narrowing and Widening}.)
4891
4892 The @code{push-mark} command sets a mark at the place where the cursor
4893 was located before it was moved to the beginning of the buffer by the
4894 @code{(goto-char (point-min))} expression. Consequently, you can, if
4895 you wish, go back to where you were originally by typing @kbd{C-x C-x}.
4896
4897 That is all there is to the function definition!
4898
4899 @findex describe-function
4900 When you are reading code such as this and come upon an unfamiliar
4901 function, such as @code{goto-char}, you can find out what it does by
4902 using the @code{describe-function} command. To use this command, type
4903 @kbd{C-h f} and then type in the name of the function and press
4904 @key{RET}. The @code{describe-function} command will print the
4905 function's documentation string in a @file{*Help*} window. For
4906 example, the documentation for @code{goto-char} is:
4907
4908 @smallexample
4909 @group
4910 Set point to POSITION, a number or marker.
4911 Beginning of buffer is position (point-min), end is (point-max).
4912 @end group
4913 @end smallexample
4914
4915 @noindent
4916 The function's one argument is the desired position.
4917
4918 @noindent
4919 (The prompt for @code{describe-function} will offer you the symbol
4920 under or preceding the cursor, so you can save typing by positioning
4921 the cursor right over or after the function and then typing @kbd{C-h f
4922 @key{RET}}.)
4923
4924 The @code{end-of-buffer} function definition is written in the same way as
4925 the @code{beginning-of-buffer} definition except that the body of the
4926 function contains the expression @code{(goto-char (point-max))} in place
4927 of @code{(goto-char (point-min))}.
4928
4929 @node mark-whole-buffer, append-to-buffer, simplified-beginning-of-buffer, Buffer Walk Through
4930 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4931 @section The Definition of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
4932 @findex mark-whole-buffer
4933
4934 The @code{mark-whole-buffer} function is no harder to understand than the
4935 @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} function. In this case, however,
4936 we will look at the complete function, not a shortened version.
4937
4938 The @code{mark-whole-buffer} function is not as commonly used as the
4939 @code{beginning-of-buffer} function, but is useful nonetheless: it
4940 marks a whole buffer as a region by putting point at the beginning and
4941 a mark at the end of the buffer. It is generally bound to @kbd{C-x
4942 h}.
4943
4944 @menu
4945 * mark-whole-buffer overview::
4946 * Body of mark-whole-buffer:: Only three lines of code.
4947 @end menu
4948
4949 @node mark-whole-buffer overview, Body of mark-whole-buffer, mark-whole-buffer, mark-whole-buffer
4950 @ifnottex
4951 @unnumberedsubsec An overview of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
4952 @end ifnottex
4953
4954 @need 1250
4955 In GNU Emacs 22, the code for the complete function looks like this:
4956
4957 @smallexample
4958 @group
4959 (defun mark-whole-buffer ()
4960 "Put point at beginning and mark at end of buffer.
4961 You probably should not use this function in Lisp programs;
4962 it is usually a mistake for a Lisp function to use any subroutine
4963 that uses or sets the mark."
4964 (interactive)
4965 (push-mark (point))
4966 (push-mark (point-max) nil t)
4967 (goto-char (point-min)))
4968 @end group
4969 @end smallexample
4970
4971 @need 1250
4972 Like all other functions, the @code{mark-whole-buffer} function fits
4973 into the template for a function definition. The template looks like
4974 this:
4975
4976 @smallexample
4977 @group
4978 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
4979 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
4980 (@var{interactive-expression}@dots{})
4981 @var{body}@dots{})
4982 @end group
4983 @end smallexample
4984
4985 Here is how the function works: the name of the function is
4986 @code{mark-whole-buffer}; it is followed by an empty argument list,
4987 @samp{()}, which means that the function does not require arguments.
4988 The documentation comes next.
4989
4990 The next line is an @code{(interactive)} expression that tells Emacs
4991 that the function will be used interactively. These details are similar
4992 to the @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} function described in the
4993 previous section.
4994
4995 @need 1250
4996 @node Body of mark-whole-buffer, , mark-whole-buffer overview, mark-whole-buffer
4997 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4998 @subsection Body of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
4999
5000 The body of the @code{mark-whole-buffer} function consists of three
5001 lines of code:
5002
5003 @c GNU Emacs 22
5004 @smallexample
5005 @group
5006 (push-mark (point))
5007 (push-mark (point-max) nil t)
5008 (goto-char (point-min))
5009 @end group
5010 @end smallexample
5011
5012 The first of these lines is the expression, @code{(push-mark (point))}.
5013
5014 This line does exactly the same job as the first line of the body of
5015 the @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} function, which is written
5016 @code{(push-mark)}. In both cases, the Lisp interpreter sets a mark
5017 at the current position of the cursor.
5018
5019 I don't know why the expression in @code{mark-whole-buffer} is written
5020 @code{(push-mark (point))} and the expression in
5021 @code{beginning-of-buffer} is written @code{(push-mark)}. Perhaps
5022 whoever wrote the code did not know that the arguments for
5023 @code{push-mark} are optional and that if @code{push-mark} is not
5024 passed an argument, the function automatically sets mark at the
5025 location of point by default. Or perhaps the expression was written
5026 so as to parallel the structure of the next line. In any case, the
5027 line causes Emacs to determine the position of point and set a mark
5028 there.
5029
5030 In earlier versions of GNU Emacs, the next line of
5031 @code{mark-whole-buffer} was @code{(push-mark (point-max))}. This
5032 expression sets a mark at the point in the buffer that has the highest
5033 number. This will be the end of the buffer (or, if the buffer is
5034 narrowed, the end of the accessible portion of the buffer.
5035 @xref{Narrowing & Widening, , Narrowing and Widening}, for more about
5036 narrowing.) After this mark has been set, the previous mark, the one
5037 set at point, is no longer set, but Emacs remembers its position, just
5038 as all other recent marks are always remembered. This means that you
5039 can, if you wish, go back to that position by typing @kbd{C-u
5040 C-@key{SPC}} twice.
5041
5042 @need 1250
5043 In GNU Emacs 22, the @code{(point-max)} is slightly more complicated.
5044 The line reads
5045
5046 @smallexample
5047 (push-mark (point-max) nil t)
5048 @end smallexample
5049
5050 @noindent
5051 The expression works nearly the same as before. It sets a mark at the
5052 highest numbered place in the buffer that it can. However, in this
5053 version, @code{push-mark} has two additional arguments. The second
5054 argument to @code{push-mark} is @code{nil}. This tells the function
5055 it @emph{should} display a message that says `Mark set' when it pushes
5056 the mark. The third argument is @code{t}. This tells
5057 @code{push-mark} to activate the mark when Transient Mark mode is
5058 turned on. Transient Mark mode highlights the currently active
5059 region. It is often turned off.
5060
5061 Finally, the last line of the function is @code{(goto-char
5062 (point-min)))}. This is written exactly the same way as it is written
5063 in @code{beginning-of-buffer}. The expression moves the cursor to
5064 the minimum point in the buffer, that is, to the beginning of the buffer
5065 (or to the beginning of the accessible portion of the buffer). As a
5066 result of this, point is placed at the beginning of the buffer and mark
5067 is set at the end of the buffer. The whole buffer is, therefore, the
5068 region.
5069
5070 @node append-to-buffer, Buffer Related Review, mark-whole-buffer, Buffer Walk Through
5071 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5072 @section The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}
5073 @findex append-to-buffer
5074
5075 The @code{append-to-buffer} command is more complex than the
5076 @code{mark-whole-buffer} command. What it does is copy the region
5077 (that is, the part of the buffer between point and mark) from the
5078 current buffer to a specified buffer.
5079
5080 @menu
5081 * append-to-buffer overview::
5082 * append interactive:: A two part interactive expression.
5083 * append-to-buffer body:: Incorporates a @code{let} expression.
5084 * append save-excursion:: How the @code{save-excursion} works.
5085 @end menu
5086
5087 @node append-to-buffer overview, append interactive, append-to-buffer, append-to-buffer
5088 @ifnottex
5089 @unnumberedsubsec An Overview of @code{append-to-buffer}
5090 @end ifnottex
5091
5092 @findex insert-buffer-substring
5093 The @code{append-to-buffer} command uses the
5094 @code{insert-buffer-substring} function to copy the region.
5095 @code{insert-buffer-substring} is described by its name: it takes a
5096 string of characters from part of a buffer, a ``substring'', and
5097 inserts them into another buffer.
5098
5099 Most of @code{append-to-buffer} is
5100 concerned with setting up the conditions for
5101 @code{insert-buffer-substring} to work: the code must specify both the
5102 buffer to which the text will go, the window it comes from and goes
5103 to, and the region that will be copied.
5104
5105 @need 1250
5106 Here is the complete text of the function:
5107
5108 @smallexample
5109 @group
5110 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
5111 "Append to specified buffer the text of the region.
5112 It is inserted into that buffer before its point.
5113 @end group
5114
5115 @group
5116 When calling from a program, give three arguments:
5117 BUFFER (or buffer name), START and END.
5118 START and END specify the portion of the current buffer to be copied."
5119 (interactive
5120 (list (read-buffer "Append to buffer: " (other-buffer
5121 (current-buffer) t))
5122 (region-beginning) (region-end)))
5123 @end group
5124 @group
5125 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5126 (save-excursion
5127 (let* ((append-to (get-buffer-create buffer))
5128 (windows (get-buffer-window-list append-to t t))
5129 point)
5130 (set-buffer append-to)
5131 (setq point (point))
5132 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
5133 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5134 (dolist (window windows)
5135 (when (= (window-point window) point)
5136 (set-window-point window (point))))))))
5137 @end group
5138 @end smallexample
5139
5140 The function can be understood by looking at it as a series of
5141 filled-in templates.
5142
5143 The outermost template is for the function definition. In this
5144 function, it looks like this (with several slots filled in):
5145
5146 @smallexample
5147 @group
5148 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
5149 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5150 (interactive @dots{})
5151 @var{body}@dots{})
5152 @end group
5153 @end smallexample
5154
5155 The first line of the function includes its name and three arguments.
5156 The arguments are the @code{buffer} to which the text will be copied, and
5157 the @code{start} and @code{end} of the region in the current buffer that
5158 will be copied.
5159
5160 The next part of the function is the documentation, which is clear and
5161 complete. As is conventional, the three arguments are written in
5162 upper case so you will notice them easily. Even better, they are
5163 described in the same order as in the argument list.
5164
5165 Note that the documentation distinguishes between a buffer and its
5166 name. (The function can handle either.)
5167
5168 @node append interactive, append-to-buffer body, append-to-buffer overview, append-to-buffer
5169 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5170 @subsection The @code{append-to-buffer} Interactive Expression
5171
5172 Since the @code{append-to-buffer} function will be used interactively,
5173 the function must have an @code{interactive} expression. (For a
5174 review of @code{interactive}, see @ref{Interactive, , Making a
5175 Function Interactive}.) The expression reads as follows:
5176
5177 @smallexample
5178 @group
5179 (interactive
5180 (list (read-buffer
5181 "Append to buffer: "
5182 (other-buffer (current-buffer) t))
5183 (region-beginning)
5184 (region-end)))
5185 @end group
5186 @end smallexample
5187
5188 @noindent
5189 This expression is not one with letters standing for parts, as
5190 described earlier. Instead, it starts a list with these parts:
5191
5192 The first part of the list is an expression to read the name of a
5193 buffer and return it as a string. That is @code{read-buffer}. The
5194 function requires a prompt as its first argument, @samp{"Append to
5195 buffer: "}. Its second argument tells the command what value to
5196 provide if you don't specify anything.
5197
5198 In this case that second argument is an expression containing the
5199 function @code{other-buffer}, an exception, and a @samp{t}, standing
5200 for true.
5201
5202 The first argument to @code{other-buffer}, the exception, is yet
5203 another function, @code{current-buffer}. That is not going to be
5204 returned. The second argument is the symbol for true, @code{t}. that
5205 tells @code{other-buffer} that it may show visible buffers (except in
5206 this case, it will not show the current buffer, which makes sense).
5207
5208 @need 1250
5209 The expression looks like this:
5210
5211 @smallexample
5212 (other-buffer (current-buffer) t)
5213 @end smallexample
5214
5215 The second and third arguments to the @code{list} expression are
5216 @code{(region-beginning)} and @code{(region-end)}. These two
5217 functions specify the beginning and end of the text to be appended.
5218
5219 @need 1250
5220 Originally, the command used the letters @samp{B} and @samp{r}.
5221 The whole @code{interactive} expression looked like this:
5222
5223 @smallexample
5224 (interactive "BAppend to buffer:@: \nr")
5225 @end smallexample
5226
5227 @noindent
5228 But when that was done, the default value of the buffer switched to
5229 was invisible. That was not wanted.
5230
5231 (The prompt was separated from the second argument with a newline,
5232 @samp{\n}. It was followed by an @samp{r} that told Emacs to bind the
5233 two arguments that follow the symbol @code{buffer} in the function's
5234 argument list (that is, @code{start} and @code{end}) to the values of
5235 point and mark. That argument worked fine.)
5236
5237 @node append-to-buffer body, append save-excursion, append interactive, append-to-buffer
5238 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5239 @subsection The Body of @code{append-to-buffer}
5240
5241 @ignore
5242 in GNU Emacs 22 in /usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/simple.el
5243
5244 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
5245 "Append to specified buffer the text of the region.
5246 It is inserted into that buffer before its point.
5247
5248 When calling from a program, give three arguments:
5249 BUFFER (or buffer name), START and END.
5250 START and END specify the portion of the current buffer to be copied."
5251 (interactive
5252 (list (read-buffer "Append to buffer: " (other-buffer (current-buffer) t))
5253 (region-beginning) (region-end)))
5254 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5255 (save-excursion
5256 (let* ((append-to (get-buffer-create buffer))
5257 (windows (get-buffer-window-list append-to t t))
5258 point)
5259 (set-buffer append-to)
5260 (setq point (point))
5261 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
5262 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5263 (dolist (window windows)
5264 (when (= (window-point window) point)
5265 (set-window-point window (point))))))))
5266 @end ignore
5267
5268 The body of the @code{append-to-buffer} function begins with @code{let}.
5269
5270 As we have seen before (@pxref{let, , @code{let}}), the purpose of a
5271 @code{let} expression is to create and give initial values to one or
5272 more variables that will only be used within the body of the
5273 @code{let}. This means that such a variable will not be confused with
5274 any variable of the same name outside the @code{let} expression.
5275
5276 We can see how the @code{let} expression fits into the function as a
5277 whole by showing a template for @code{append-to-buffer} with the
5278 @code{let} expression in outline:
5279
5280 @smallexample
5281 @group
5282 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
5283 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5284 (interactive @dots{})
5285 (let ((@var{variable} @var{value}))
5286 @var{body}@dots{})
5287 @end group
5288 @end smallexample
5289
5290 The @code{let} expression has three elements:
5291
5292 @enumerate
5293 @item
5294 The symbol @code{let};
5295
5296 @item
5297 A varlist containing, in this case, a single two-element list,
5298 @code{(@var{variable} @var{value})};
5299
5300 @item
5301 The body of the @code{let} expression.
5302 @end enumerate
5303
5304 @need 800
5305 In the @code{append-to-buffer} function, the varlist looks like this:
5306
5307 @smallexample
5308 (oldbuf (current-buffer))
5309 @end smallexample
5310
5311 @noindent
5312 In this part of the @code{let} expression, the one variable,
5313 @code{oldbuf}, is bound to the value returned by the
5314 @code{(current-buffer)} expression. The variable, @code{oldbuf}, is
5315 used to keep track of the buffer in which you are working and from
5316 which you will copy.
5317
5318 The element or elements of a varlist are surrounded by a set of
5319 parentheses so the Lisp interpreter can distinguish the varlist from
5320 the body of the @code{let}. As a consequence, the two-element list
5321 within the varlist is surrounded by a circumscribing set of parentheses.
5322 The line looks like this:
5323
5324 @smallexample
5325 @group
5326 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5327 @dots{} )
5328 @end group
5329 @end smallexample
5330
5331 @noindent
5332 The two parentheses before @code{oldbuf} might surprise you if you did
5333 not realize that the first parenthesis before @code{oldbuf} marks the
5334 boundary of the varlist and the second parenthesis marks the beginning
5335 of the two-element list, @code{(oldbuf (current-buffer))}.
5336
5337 @node append save-excursion, , append-to-buffer body, append-to-buffer
5338 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5339 @subsection @code{save-excursion} in @code{append-to-buffer}
5340
5341 The body of the @code{let} expression in @code{append-to-buffer}
5342 consists of a @code{save-excursion} expression.
5343
5344 The @code{save-excursion} function saves the locations of point and
5345 mark, and restores them to those positions after the expressions in the
5346 body of the @code{save-excursion} complete execution. In addition,
5347 @code{save-excursion} keeps track of the original buffer, and
5348 restores it. This is how @code{save-excursion} is used in
5349 @code{append-to-buffer}.
5350
5351 @need 1500
5352 @cindex Indentation for formatting
5353 @cindex Formatting convention
5354 Incidentally, it is worth noting here that a Lisp function is normally
5355 formatted so that everything that is enclosed in a multi-line spread is
5356 indented more to the right than the first symbol. In this function
5357 definition, the @code{let} is indented more than the @code{defun}, and
5358 the @code{save-excursion} is indented more than the @code{let}, like
5359 this:
5360
5361 @smallexample
5362 @group
5363 (defun @dots{}
5364 @dots{}
5365 @dots{}
5366 (let@dots{}
5367 (save-excursion
5368 @dots{}
5369 @end group
5370 @end smallexample
5371
5372 @need 1500
5373 @noindent
5374 This formatting convention makes it easy to see that the lines in
5375 the body of the @code{save-excursion} are enclosed by the parentheses
5376 associated with @code{save-excursion}, just as the
5377 @code{save-excursion} itself is enclosed by the parentheses associated
5378 with the @code{let}:
5379
5380 @smallexample
5381 @group
5382 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5383 (save-excursion
5384 @dots{}
5385 (set-buffer @dots{})
5386 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5387 @dots{}))
5388 @end group
5389 @end smallexample
5390
5391 @need 1200
5392 The use of the @code{save-excursion} function can be viewed as a process
5393 of filling in the slots of a template:
5394
5395 @smallexample
5396 @group
5397 (save-excursion
5398 @var{first-expression-in-body}
5399 @var{second-expression-in-body}
5400 @dots{}
5401 @var{last-expression-in-body})
5402 @end group
5403 @end smallexample
5404
5405 @need 1200
5406 @noindent
5407 In this function, the body of the @code{save-excursion} contains only
5408 one expression, the @code{let*} expression. You know about a
5409 @code{let} function. The @code{let*} function is different. It has a
5410 @samp{*} in its name. It enables Emacs to set each variable in its
5411 varlist in sequence, one after another.
5412
5413 Its critical feature is that variables later in the varlist can make
5414 use of the values to which Emacs set variables earlier in the varlist.
5415 @xref{fwd-para let, , The @code{let*} expression}.
5416
5417 We will skip functions like @code{let*} and focus on two: the
5418 @code{set-buffer} function and the @code{insert-buffer-substring}
5419 function.
5420
5421 @need 1250
5422 In the old days, the @code{set-buffer} expression was simply
5423
5424 @smallexample
5425 (set-buffer (get-buffer-create buffer))
5426 @end smallexample
5427
5428 @need 1250
5429 @noindent
5430 but now it is
5431
5432 @smallexample
5433 (set-buffer append-to)
5434 @end smallexample
5435
5436 @noindent
5437 @code{append-to} is bound to @code{(get-buffer-create buffer)} earlier
5438 on in the @code{let*} expression. That extra binding would not be
5439 necessary except for that @code{append-to} is used later in the
5440 varlist as an argument to @code{get-buffer-window-list}.
5441
5442 @ignore
5443 in GNU Emacs 22
5444
5445 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5446 (save-excursion
5447 (let* ((append-to (get-buffer-create buffer))
5448 (windows (get-buffer-window-list append-to t t))
5449 point)
5450 (set-buffer append-to)
5451 (setq point (point))
5452 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
5453 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5454 (dolist (window windows)
5455 (when (= (window-point window) point)
5456 (set-window-point window (point))))))))
5457 @end ignore
5458
5459 The @code{append-to-buffer} function definition inserts text from the
5460 buffer in which you are currently to a named buffer. It happens that
5461 @code{insert-buffer-substring} copies text from another buffer to the
5462 current buffer, just the reverse---that is why the
5463 @code{append-to-buffer} definition starts out with a @code{let} that
5464 binds the local symbol @code{oldbuf} to the value returned by
5465 @code{current-buffer}.
5466
5467 @need 1250
5468 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} expression looks like this:
5469
5470 @smallexample
5471 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5472 @end smallexample
5473
5474 @noindent
5475 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} function copies a string
5476 @emph{from} the buffer specified as its first argument and inserts the
5477 string into the present buffer. In this case, the argument to
5478 @code{insert-buffer-substring} is the value of the variable created
5479 and bound by the @code{let}, namely the value of @code{oldbuf}, which
5480 was the current buffer when you gave the @code{append-to-buffer}
5481 command.
5482
5483 After @code{insert-buffer-substring} has done its work,
5484 @code{save-excursion} will restore the action to the original buffer
5485 and @code{append-to-buffer} will have done its job.
5486
5487 @need 800
5488 Written in skeletal form, the workings of the body look like this:
5489
5490 @smallexample
5491 @group
5492 (let (@var{bind-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-to-value-of-}@code{current-buffer})
5493 (save-excursion ; @r{Keep track of buffer.}
5494 @var{change-buffer}
5495 @var{insert-substring-from-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-into-buffer})
5496
5497 @var{change-back-to-original-buffer-when-finished}
5498 @var{let-the-local-meaning-of-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-disappear-when-finished}
5499 @end group
5500 @end smallexample
5501
5502 In summary, @code{append-to-buffer} works as follows: it saves the
5503 value of the current buffer in the variable called @code{oldbuf}. It
5504 gets the new buffer (creating one if need be) and switches Emacs'
5505 attention to it. Using the value of @code{oldbuf}, it inserts the
5506 region of text from the old buffer into the new buffer; and then using
5507 @code{save-excursion}, it brings you back to your original buffer.
5508
5509 In looking at @code{append-to-buffer}, you have explored a fairly
5510 complex function. It shows how to use @code{let} and
5511 @code{save-excursion}, and how to change to and come back from another
5512 buffer. Many function definitions use @code{let},
5513 @code{save-excursion}, and @code{set-buffer} this way.
5514
5515 @node Buffer Related Review, Buffer Exercises, append-to-buffer, Buffer Walk Through
5516 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5517 @section Review
5518
5519 Here is a brief summary of the various functions discussed in this chapter.
5520
5521 @table @code
5522 @item describe-function
5523 @itemx describe-variable
5524 Print the documentation for a function or variable.
5525 Conventionally bound to @kbd{C-h f} and @kbd{C-h v}.
5526
5527 @item find-tag
5528 Find the file containing the source for a function or variable and
5529 switch buffers to it, positioning point at the beginning of the item.
5530 Conventionally bound to @kbd{M-.} (that's a period following the
5531 @key{META} key).
5532
5533 @item save-excursion
5534 Save the location of point and mark and restore their values after the
5535 arguments to @code{save-excursion} have been evaluated. Also, remember
5536 the current buffer and return to it.
5537
5538 @item push-mark
5539 Set mark at a location and record the value of the previous mark on the
5540 mark ring. The mark is a location in the buffer that will keep its
5541 relative position even if text is added to or removed from the buffer.
5542
5543 @item goto-char
5544 Set point to the location specified by the value of the argument, which
5545 can be a number, a marker, or an expression that returns the number of
5546 a position, such as @code{(point-min)}.
5547
5548 @item insert-buffer-substring
5549 Copy a region of text from a buffer that is passed to the function as
5550 an argument and insert the region into the current buffer.
5551
5552 @item mark-whole-buffer
5553 Mark the whole buffer as a region. Normally bound to @kbd{C-x h}.
5554
5555 @item set-buffer
5556 Switch the attention of Emacs to another buffer, but do not change the
5557 window being displayed. Used when the program rather than a human is
5558 to work on a different buffer.
5559
5560 @item get-buffer-create
5561 @itemx get-buffer
5562 Find a named buffer or create one if a buffer of that name does not
5563 exist. The @code{get-buffer} function returns @code{nil} if the named
5564 buffer does not exist.
5565 @end table
5566
5567 @need 1500
5568 @node Buffer Exercises, , Buffer Related Review, Buffer Walk Through
5569 @section Exercises
5570
5571 @itemize @bullet
5572 @item
5573 Write your own @code{simplified-end-of-buffer} function definition;
5574 then test it to see whether it works.
5575
5576 @item
5577 Use @code{if} and @code{get-buffer} to write a function that prints a
5578 message telling you whether a buffer exists.
5579
5580 @item
5581 Using @code{find-tag}, find the source for the @code{copy-to-buffer}
5582 function.
5583 @end itemize
5584
5585 @node More Complex, Narrowing & Widening, Buffer Walk Through, Top
5586 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5587 @chapter A Few More Complex Functions
5588
5589 In this chapter, we build on what we have learned in previous chapters
5590 by looking at more complex functions. The @code{copy-to-buffer}
5591 function illustrates use of two @code{save-excursion} expressions in
5592 one definition, while the @code{insert-buffer} function illustrates
5593 use of an asterisk in an @code{interactive} expression, use of
5594 @code{or}, and the important distinction between a name and the object
5595 to which the name refers.
5596
5597 @menu
5598 * copy-to-buffer:: With @code{set-buffer}, @code{get-buffer-create}.
5599 * insert-buffer:: Read-only, and with @code{or}.
5600 * beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
5601 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
5602 * Second Buffer Related Review::
5603 * optional Exercise::
5604 @end menu
5605
5606 @node copy-to-buffer, insert-buffer, More Complex, More Complex
5607 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5608 @section The Definition of @code{copy-to-buffer}
5609 @findex copy-to-buffer
5610
5611 After understanding how @code{append-to-buffer} works, it is easy to
5612 understand @code{copy-to-buffer}. This function copies text into a
5613 buffer, but instead of adding to the second buffer, it replaces all the
5614 previous text in the second buffer.
5615
5616 @need 800
5617 The body of @code{copy-to-buffer} looks like this,
5618
5619 @smallexample
5620 @group
5621 @dots{}
5622 (interactive "BCopy to buffer: \nr")
5623 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5624 (with-current-buffer (get-buffer-create buffer)
5625 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
5626 (erase-buffer)
5627 (save-excursion
5628 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)))))
5629 @end group
5630 @end smallexample
5631
5632 The @code{copy-to-buffer} function has a simpler @code{interactive}
5633 expression than @code{append-to-buffer}.
5634
5635 @need 800
5636 The definition then says
5637
5638 @smallexample
5639 (with-current-buffer (get-buffer-create buffer) @dots{}
5640 @end smallexample
5641
5642 First, look at the earliest inner expression; that is evaluated first.
5643 That expression starts with @code{get-buffer-create buffer}. The
5644 function tells the computer to use the buffer with the name specified
5645 as the one to which you are copying, or if such a buffer does not
5646 exist, to create it. Then, the @code{with-current-buffer} function
5647 evaluates its body with that buffer temporarily current.
5648
5649 (This demonstrates another way to shift the computer's attention but
5650 not the user's. The @code{append-to-buffer} function showed how to do
5651 the same with @code{save-excursion} and @code{set-buffer}.
5652 @code{with-current-buffer} is a newer, and arguably easier,
5653 mechanism.)
5654
5655 The @code{barf-if-buffer-read-only} function sends you an error
5656 message saying the buffer is read-only if you cannot modify it.
5657
5658 The next line has the @code{erase-buffer} function as its sole
5659 contents. That function erases the buffer.
5660
5661 Finally, the last two lines contain the @code{save-excursion}
5662 expression with @code{insert-buffer-substring} as its body.
5663 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} expression copies the text from
5664 the buffer you are in (and you have not seen the computer shift its
5665 attention, so you don't know that that buffer is now called
5666 @code{oldbuf}).
5667
5668 Incidentally, this is what is meant by `replacement'. To replace text,
5669 Emacs erases the previous text and then inserts new text.
5670
5671 @need 1250
5672 In outline, the body of @code{copy-to-buffer} looks like this:
5673
5674 @smallexample
5675 @group
5676 (let (@var{bind-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-to-value-of-}@code{current-buffer})
5677 (@var{with-the-buffer-you-are-copying-to}
5678 (@var{but-do-not-erase-or-copy-to-a-read-only-buffer})
5679 (erase-buffer)
5680 (save-excursion
5681 @var{insert-substring-from-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-into-buffer})))
5682 @end group
5683 @end smallexample
5684
5685 @node insert-buffer, beginning-of-buffer, copy-to-buffer, More Complex
5686 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5687 @section The Definition of @code{insert-buffer}
5688 @findex insert-buffer
5689
5690 @code{insert-buffer} is yet another buffer-related function. This
5691 command copies another buffer @emph{into} the current buffer. It is the
5692 reverse of @code{append-to-buffer} or @code{copy-to-buffer}, since they
5693 copy a region of text @emph{from} the current buffer to another buffer.
5694
5695 Here is a discussion based on the original code. The code was
5696 simplified in 2003 and is harder to understand.
5697
5698 (@xref{New insert-buffer, , New Body for @code{insert-buffer}}, to see
5699 a discussion of the new body.)
5700
5701 In addition, this code illustrates the use of @code{interactive} with a
5702 buffer that might be @dfn{read-only} and the important distinction
5703 between the name of an object and the object actually referred to.
5704
5705 @menu
5706 * insert-buffer code::
5707 * insert-buffer interactive:: When you can read, but not write.
5708 * insert-buffer body:: The body has an @code{or} and a @code{let}.
5709 * if & or:: Using an @code{if} instead of an @code{or}.
5710 * Insert or:: How the @code{or} expression works.
5711 * Insert let:: Two @code{save-excursion} expressions.
5712 * New insert-buffer::
5713 @end menu
5714
5715 @node insert-buffer code, insert-buffer interactive, insert-buffer, insert-buffer
5716 @ifnottex
5717 @unnumberedsubsec The Code for @code{insert-buffer}
5718 @end ifnottex
5719
5720 @need 800
5721 Here is the earlier code:
5722
5723 @smallexample
5724 @group
5725 (defun insert-buffer (buffer)
5726 "Insert after point the contents of BUFFER.
5727 Puts mark after the inserted text.
5728 BUFFER may be a buffer or a buffer name."
5729 (interactive "*bInsert buffer:@: ")
5730 @end group
5731 @group
5732 (or (bufferp buffer)
5733 (setq buffer (get-buffer buffer)))
5734 (let (start end newmark)
5735 (save-excursion
5736 (save-excursion
5737 (set-buffer buffer)
5738 (setq start (point-min) end (point-max)))
5739 @end group
5740 @group
5741 (insert-buffer-substring buffer start end)
5742 (setq newmark (point)))
5743 (push-mark newmark)))
5744 @end group
5745 @end smallexample
5746
5747 @need 1200
5748 As with other function definitions, you can use a template to see an
5749 outline of the function:
5750
5751 @smallexample
5752 @group
5753 (defun insert-buffer (buffer)
5754 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5755 (interactive "*bInsert buffer:@: ")
5756 @var{body}@dots{})
5757 @end group
5758 @end smallexample
5759
5760 @node insert-buffer interactive, insert-buffer body, insert-buffer code, insert-buffer
5761 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5762 @subsection The Interactive Expression in @code{insert-buffer}
5763 @findex interactive, @r{example use of}
5764
5765 In @code{insert-buffer}, the argument to the @code{interactive}
5766 declaration has two parts, an asterisk, @samp{*}, and @samp{bInsert
5767 buffer:@: }.
5768
5769 @menu
5770 * Read-only buffer:: When a buffer cannot be modified.
5771 * b for interactive:: An existing buffer or else its name.
5772 @end menu
5773
5774 @node Read-only buffer, b for interactive, insert-buffer interactive, insert-buffer interactive
5775 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5776 @unnumberedsubsubsec A Read-only Buffer
5777 @cindex Read-only buffer
5778 @cindex Asterisk for read-only buffer
5779 @findex * @r{for read-only buffer}
5780
5781 The asterisk is for the situation when the current buffer is a
5782 read-only buffer---a buffer that cannot be modified. If
5783 @code{insert-buffer} is called when the current buffer is read-only, a
5784 message to this effect is printed in the echo area and the terminal
5785 may beep or blink at you; you will not be permitted to insert anything
5786 into current buffer. The asterisk does not need to be followed by a
5787 newline to separate it from the next argument.
5788
5789 @node b for interactive, , Read-only buffer, insert-buffer interactive
5790 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5791 @unnumberedsubsubsec @samp{b} in an Interactive Expression
5792
5793 The next argument in the interactive expression starts with a lower
5794 case @samp{b}. (This is different from the code for
5795 @code{append-to-buffer}, which uses an upper-case @samp{B}.
5796 @xref{append-to-buffer, , The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}}.)
5797 The lower-case @samp{b} tells the Lisp interpreter that the argument
5798 for @code{insert-buffer} should be an existing buffer or else its
5799 name. (The upper-case @samp{B} option provides for the possibility
5800 that the buffer does not exist.) Emacs will prompt you for the name
5801 of the buffer, offering you a default buffer, with name completion
5802 enabled. If the buffer does not exist, you receive a message that
5803 says ``No match''; your terminal may beep at you as well.
5804
5805 The new and simplified code generates a list for @code{interactive}.
5806 It uses the @code{barf-if-buffer-read-only} and @code{read-buffer}
5807 functions with which we are already familiar and the @code{progn}
5808 special form with which we are not. (It will be described later.)
5809
5810 @node insert-buffer body, if & or, insert-buffer interactive, insert-buffer
5811 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5812 @subsection The Body of the @code{insert-buffer} Function
5813
5814 The body of the @code{insert-buffer} function has two major parts: an
5815 @code{or} expression and a @code{let} expression. The purpose of the
5816 @code{or} expression is to ensure that the argument @code{buffer} is
5817 bound to a buffer and not just the name of a buffer. The body of the
5818 @code{let} expression contains the code which copies the other buffer
5819 into the current buffer.
5820
5821 @need 1250
5822 In outline, the two expressions fit into the @code{insert-buffer}
5823 function like this:
5824
5825 @smallexample
5826 @group
5827 (defun insert-buffer (buffer)
5828 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5829 (interactive "*bInsert buffer:@: ")
5830 (or @dots{}
5831 @dots{}
5832 @end group
5833 @group
5834 (let (@var{varlist})
5835 @var{body-of-}@code{let}@dots{} )
5836 @end group
5837 @end smallexample
5838
5839 To understand how the @code{or} expression ensures that the argument
5840 @code{buffer} is bound to a buffer and not to the name of a buffer, it
5841 is first necessary to understand the @code{or} function.
5842
5843 Before doing this, let me rewrite this part of the function using
5844 @code{if} so that you can see what is done in a manner that will be familiar.
5845
5846 @node if & or, Insert or, insert-buffer body, insert-buffer
5847 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5848 @subsection @code{insert-buffer} With an @code{if} Instead of an @code{or}
5849
5850 The job to be done is to make sure the value of @code{buffer} is a
5851 buffer itself and not the name of a buffer. If the value is the name,
5852 then the buffer itself must be got.
5853
5854 You can imagine yourself at a conference where an usher is wandering
5855 around holding a list with your name on it and looking for you: the
5856 usher is ``bound'' to your name, not to you; but when the usher finds
5857 you and takes your arm, the usher becomes ``bound'' to you.
5858
5859 @need 800
5860 In Lisp, you might describe this situation like this:
5861
5862 @smallexample
5863 @group
5864 (if (not (holding-on-to-guest))
5865 (find-and-take-arm-of-guest))
5866 @end group
5867 @end smallexample
5868
5869 We want to do the same thing with a buffer---if we do not have the
5870 buffer itself, we want to get it.
5871
5872 @need 1200
5873 Using a predicate called @code{bufferp} that tells us whether we have a
5874 buffer (rather than its name), we can write the code like this:
5875
5876 @smallexample
5877 @group
5878 (if (not (bufferp buffer)) ; @r{if-part}
5879 (setq buffer (get-buffer buffer))) ; @r{then-part}
5880 @end group
5881 @end smallexample
5882
5883 @noindent
5884 Here, the true-or-false-test of the @code{if} expression is
5885 @w{@code{(not (bufferp buffer))}}; and the then-part is the expression
5886 @w{@code{(setq buffer (get-buffer buffer))}}.
5887
5888 In the test, the function @code{bufferp} returns true if its argument is
5889 a buffer---but false if its argument is the name of the buffer. (The
5890 last character of the function name @code{bufferp} is the character
5891 @samp{p}; as we saw earlier, such use of @samp{p} is a convention that
5892 indicates that the function is a predicate, which is a term that means
5893 that the function will determine whether some property is true or false.
5894 @xref{Wrong Type of Argument, , Using the Wrong Type Object as an
5895 Argument}.)
5896
5897 @need 1200
5898 The function @code{not} precedes the expression @code{(bufferp buffer)},
5899 so the true-or-false-test looks like this:
5900
5901 @smallexample
5902 (not (bufferp buffer))
5903 @end smallexample
5904
5905 @noindent
5906 @code{not} is a function that returns true if its argument is false
5907 and false if its argument is true. So if @code{(bufferp buffer)}
5908 returns true, the @code{not} expression returns false and vice-verse:
5909 what is ``not true'' is false and what is ``not false'' is true.
5910
5911 Using this test, the @code{if} expression works as follows: when the
5912 value of the variable @code{buffer} is actually a buffer rather than
5913 its name, the true-or-false-test returns false and the @code{if}
5914 expression does not evaluate the then-part. This is fine, since we do
5915 not need to do anything to the variable @code{buffer} if it really is
5916 a buffer.
5917
5918 On the other hand, when the value of @code{buffer} is not a buffer
5919 itself, but the name of a buffer, the true-or-false-test returns true
5920 and the then-part of the expression is evaluated. In this case, the
5921 then-part is @code{(setq buffer (get-buffer buffer))}. This
5922 expression uses the @code{get-buffer} function to return an actual
5923 buffer itself, given its name. The @code{setq} then sets the variable
5924 @code{buffer} to the value of the buffer itself, replacing its previous
5925 value (which was the name of the buffer).
5926
5927 @node Insert or, Insert let, if & or, insert-buffer
5928 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5929 @subsection The @code{or} in the Body
5930
5931 The purpose of the @code{or} expression in the @code{insert-buffer}
5932 function is to ensure that the argument @code{buffer} is bound to a
5933 buffer and not just to the name of a buffer. The previous section shows
5934 how the job could have been done using an @code{if} expression.
5935 However, the @code{insert-buffer} function actually uses @code{or}.
5936 To understand this, it is necessary to understand how @code{or} works.
5937
5938 @findex or
5939 An @code{or} function can have any number of arguments. It evaluates
5940 each argument in turn and returns the value of the first of its
5941 arguments that is not @code{nil}. Also, and this is a crucial feature
5942 of @code{or}, it does not evaluate any subsequent arguments after
5943 returning the first non-@code{nil} value.
5944
5945 @need 800
5946 The @code{or} expression looks like this:
5947
5948 @smallexample
5949 @group
5950 (or (bufferp buffer)
5951 (setq buffer (get-buffer buffer)))
5952 @end group
5953 @end smallexample
5954
5955 @noindent
5956 The first argument to @code{or} is the expression @code{(bufferp buffer)}.
5957 This expression returns true (a non-@code{nil} value) if the buffer is
5958 actually a buffer, and not just the name of a buffer. In the @code{or}
5959 expression, if this is the case, the @code{or} expression returns this
5960 true value and does not evaluate the next expression---and this is fine
5961 with us, since we do not want to do anything to the value of
5962 @code{buffer} if it really is a buffer.
5963
5964 On the other hand, if the value of @code{(bufferp buffer)} is @code{nil},
5965 which it will be if the value of @code{buffer} is the name of a buffer,
5966 the Lisp interpreter evaluates the next element of the @code{or}
5967 expression. This is the expression @code{(setq buffer (get-buffer
5968 buffer))}. This expression returns a non-@code{nil} value, which
5969 is the value to which it sets the variable @code{buffer}---and this
5970 value is a buffer itself, not the name of a buffer.
5971
5972 The result of all this is that the symbol @code{buffer} is always
5973 bound to a buffer itself rather than to the name of a buffer. All
5974 this is necessary because the @code{set-buffer} function in a
5975 following line only works with a buffer itself, not with the name to a
5976 buffer.
5977
5978 @need 1250
5979 Incidentally, using @code{or}, the situation with the usher would be
5980 written like this:
5981
5982 @smallexample
5983 (or (holding-on-to-guest) (find-and-take-arm-of-guest))
5984 @end smallexample
5985
5986 @node Insert let, New insert-buffer, Insert or, insert-buffer
5987 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5988 @subsection The @code{let} Expression in @code{insert-buffer}
5989
5990 After ensuring that the variable @code{buffer} refers to a buffer itself
5991 and not just to the name of a buffer, the @code{insert-buffer function}
5992 continues with a @code{let} expression. This specifies three local
5993 variables, @code{start}, @code{end}, and @code{newmark} and binds them
5994 to the initial value @code{nil}. These variables are used inside the
5995 remainder of the @code{let} and temporarily hide any other occurrence of
5996 variables of the same name in Emacs until the end of the @code{let}.
5997
5998 @need 1200
5999 The body of the @code{let} contains two @code{save-excursion}
6000 expressions. First, we will look at the inner @code{save-excursion}
6001 expression in detail. The expression looks like this:
6002
6003 @smallexample
6004 @group
6005 (save-excursion
6006 (set-buffer buffer)
6007 (setq start (point-min) end (point-max)))
6008 @end group
6009 @end smallexample
6010
6011 @noindent
6012 The expression @code{(set-buffer buffer)} changes Emacs' attention
6013 from the current buffer to the one from which the text will copied.
6014 In that buffer, the variables @code{start} and @code{end} are set to
6015 the beginning and end of the buffer, using the commands
6016 @code{point-min} and @code{point-max}. Note that we have here an
6017 illustration of how @code{setq} is able to set two variables in the
6018 same expression. The first argument of @code{setq} is set to the
6019 value of its second, and its third argument is set to the value of its
6020 fourth.
6021
6022 After the body of the inner @code{save-excursion} is evaluated, the
6023 @code{save-excursion} restores the original buffer, but @code{start} and
6024 @code{end} remain set to the values of the beginning and end of the
6025 buffer from which the text will be copied.
6026
6027 @need 1250
6028 The outer @code{save-excursion} expression looks like this:
6029
6030 @smallexample
6031 @group
6032 (save-excursion
6033 (@var{inner-}@code{save-excursion}@var{-expression}
6034 (@var{go-to-new-buffer-and-set-}@code{start}@var{-and-}@code{end})
6035 (insert-buffer-substring buffer start end)
6036 (setq newmark (point)))
6037 @end group
6038 @end smallexample
6039
6040 @noindent
6041 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} function copies the text
6042 @emph{into} the current buffer @emph{from} the region indicated by
6043 @code{start} and @code{end} in @code{buffer}. Since the whole of the
6044 second buffer lies between @code{start} and @code{end}, the whole of
6045 the second buffer is copied into the buffer you are editing. Next,
6046 the value of point, which will be at the end of the inserted text, is
6047 recorded in the variable @code{newmark}.
6048
6049 After the body of the outer @code{save-excursion} is evaluated, point
6050 and mark are relocated to their original places.
6051
6052 However, it is convenient to locate a mark at the end of the newly
6053 inserted text and locate point at its beginning. The @code{newmark}
6054 variable records the end of the inserted text. In the last line of
6055 the @code{let} expression, the @code{(push-mark newmark)} expression
6056 function sets a mark to this location. (The previous location of the
6057 mark is still accessible; it is recorded on the mark ring and you can
6058 go back to it with @kbd{C-u C-@key{SPC}}.) Meanwhile, point is
6059 located at the beginning of the inserted text, which is where it was
6060 before you called the insert function, the position of which was saved
6061 by the first @code{save-excursion}.
6062
6063 @need 1250
6064 The whole @code{let} expression looks like this:
6065
6066 @smallexample
6067 @group
6068 (let (start end newmark)
6069 (save-excursion
6070 (save-excursion
6071 (set-buffer buffer)
6072 (setq start (point-min) end (point-max)))
6073 (insert-buffer-substring buffer start end)
6074 (setq newmark (point)))
6075 (push-mark newmark))
6076 @end group
6077 @end smallexample
6078
6079 Like the @code{append-to-buffer} function, the @code{insert-buffer}
6080 function uses @code{let}, @code{save-excursion}, and
6081 @code{set-buffer}. In addition, the function illustrates one way to
6082 use @code{or}. All these functions are building blocks that we will
6083 find and use again and again.
6084
6085 @node New insert-buffer, , Insert let, insert-buffer
6086 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6087 @subsection New Body for @code{insert-buffer}
6088 @findex insert-buffer, new version body
6089 @findex new version body for insert-buffer
6090
6091 The body in the GNU Emacs 22 version is more confusing than the original.
6092
6093 @need 1250
6094 It consists of two expressions,
6095
6096 @smallexample
6097 @group
6098 (push-mark
6099 (save-excursion
6100 (insert-buffer-substring (get-buffer buffer))
6101 (point)))
6102
6103 nil
6104 @end group
6105 @end smallexample
6106
6107 @noindent
6108 except, and this is what confuses novices, very important work is done
6109 inside the @code{push-mark} expression.
6110
6111 The @code{get-buffer} function returns a buffer with the name
6112 provided. You will note that the function is @emph{not} called
6113 @code{get-buffer-create}; it does not create a buffer if one does not
6114 already exist. The buffer returned by @code{get-buffer}, an existing
6115 buffer, is passed to @code{insert-buffer-substring}, which inserts the
6116 whole of the buffer (since you did not specify anything else).
6117
6118 The location into which the buffer is inserted is recorded by
6119 @code{push-mark}. Then the function returns @code{nil}, the value of
6120 its last command. Put another way, the @code{insert-buffer} function
6121 exists only to produce a side effect, inserting another buffer, not to
6122 return any value.
6123
6124 @node beginning-of-buffer, Second Buffer Related Review, insert-buffer, More Complex
6125 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6126 @section Complete Definition of @code{beginning-of-buffer}
6127 @findex beginning-of-buffer
6128
6129 The basic structure of the @code{beginning-of-buffer} function has
6130 already been discussed. (@xref{simplified-beginning-of-buffer, , A
6131 Simplified @code{beginning-of-buffer} Definition}.)
6132 This section describes the complex part of the definition.
6133
6134 As previously described, when invoked without an argument,
6135 @code{beginning-of-buffer} moves the cursor to the beginning of the
6136 buffer (in truth, the beginning of the accessible portion of the
6137 buffer), leaving the mark at the previous position. However, when the
6138 command is invoked with a number between one and ten, the function
6139 considers that number to be a fraction of the length of the buffer,
6140 measured in tenths, and Emacs moves the cursor that fraction of the
6141 way from the beginning of the buffer. Thus, you can either call this
6142 function with the key command @kbd{M-<}, which will move the cursor to
6143 the beginning of the buffer, or with a key command such as @kbd{C-u 7
6144 M-<} which will move the cursor to a point 70% of the way through the
6145 buffer. If a number bigger than ten is used for the argument, it
6146 moves to the end of the buffer.
6147
6148 The @code{beginning-of-buffer} function can be called with or without an
6149 argument. The use of the argument is optional.
6150
6151 @menu
6152 * Optional Arguments::
6153 * beginning-of-buffer opt arg:: Example with optional argument.
6154 * beginning-of-buffer complete::
6155 @end menu
6156
6157 @node Optional Arguments, beginning-of-buffer opt arg, beginning-of-buffer, beginning-of-buffer
6158 @subsection Optional Arguments
6159
6160 Unless told otherwise, Lisp expects that a function with an argument in
6161 its function definition will be called with a value for that argument.
6162 If that does not happen, you get an error and a message that says
6163 @samp{Wrong number of arguments}.
6164
6165 @cindex Optional arguments
6166 @cindex Keyword
6167 @findex optional
6168 However, optional arguments are a feature of Lisp: a particular
6169 @dfn{keyword} is used to tell the Lisp interpreter that an argument is
6170 optional. The keyword is @code{&optional}. (The @samp{&} in front of
6171 @samp{optional} is part of the keyword.) In a function definition, if
6172 an argument follows the keyword @code{&optional}, no value need be
6173 passed to that argument when the function is called.
6174
6175 @need 1200
6176 The first line of the function definition of @code{beginning-of-buffer}
6177 therefore looks like this:
6178
6179 @smallexample
6180 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6181 @end smallexample
6182
6183 @need 1250
6184 In outline, the whole function looks like this:
6185
6186 @smallexample
6187 @group
6188 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6189 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
6190 (interactive "P")
6191 (or (@var{is-the-argument-a-cons-cell} arg)
6192 (and @var{are-both-transient-mark-mode-and-mark-active-true})
6193 (push-mark))
6194 (let (@var{determine-size-and-set-it})
6195 (goto-char
6196 (@var{if-there-is-an-argument}
6197 @var{figure-out-where-to-go}
6198 @var{else-go-to}
6199 (point-min))))
6200 @var{do-nicety}
6201 @end group
6202 @end smallexample
6203
6204 The function is similar to the @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer}
6205 function except that the @code{interactive} expression has @code{"P"}
6206 as an argument and the @code{goto-char} function is followed by an
6207 if-then-else expression that figures out where to put the cursor if
6208 there is an argument that is not a cons cell.
6209
6210 (Since I do not explain a cons cell for many more chapters, please
6211 consider ignoring the function @code{consp}. @xref{List
6212 Implementation, , How Lists are Implemented}, and @ref{Cons Cell Type,
6213 , Cons Cell and List Types, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
6214 Manual}.)
6215
6216 The @code{"P"} in the @code{interactive} expression tells Emacs to
6217 pass a prefix argument, if there is one, to the function in raw form.
6218 A prefix argument is made by typing the @key{META} key followed by a
6219 number, or by typing @kbd{C-u} and then a number. (If you don't type
6220 a number, @kbd{C-u} defaults to a cons cell with a 4. A lowercase
6221 @code{"p"} in the @code{interactive} expression causes the function to
6222 convert a prefix arg to a number.)
6223
6224 The true-or-false-test of the @code{if} expression looks complex, but
6225 it is not: it checks whether @code{arg} has a value that is not
6226 @code{nil} and whether it is a cons cell. (That is what @code{consp}
6227 does; it checks whether its argument is a cons cell.) If @code{arg}
6228 has a value that is not @code{nil} (and is not a cons cell), which
6229 will be the case if @code{beginning-of-buffer} is called with a
6230 numeric argument, then this true-or-false-test will return true and
6231 the then-part of the @code{if} expression will be evaluated. On the
6232 other hand, if @code{beginning-of-buffer} is not called with an
6233 argument, the value of @code{arg} will be @code{nil} and the else-part
6234 of the @code{if} expression will be evaluated. The else-part is
6235 simply @code{point-min}, and when this is the outcome, the whole
6236 @code{goto-char} expression is @code{(goto-char (point-min))}, which
6237 is how we saw the @code{beginning-of-buffer} function in its
6238 simplified form.
6239
6240 @node beginning-of-buffer opt arg, beginning-of-buffer complete, Optional Arguments, beginning-of-buffer
6241 @subsection @code{beginning-of-buffer} with an Argument
6242
6243 When @code{beginning-of-buffer} is called with an argument, an
6244 expression is evaluated which calculates what value to pass to
6245 @code{goto-char}. This expression is rather complicated at first sight.
6246 It includes an inner @code{if} expression and much arithmetic. It looks
6247 like this:
6248
6249 @smallexample
6250 @group
6251 (if (> (buffer-size) 10000)
6252 ;; @r{Avoid overflow for large buffer sizes!}
6253 (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6254 (/ size 10))
6255 (/
6256 (+ 10
6257 (*
6258 size (prefix-numeric-value arg))) 10)))
6259 @end group
6260 @end smallexample
6261
6262 @menu
6263 * Disentangle beginning-of-buffer::
6264 * Large buffer case::
6265 * Small buffer case::
6266 @end menu
6267
6268 @node Disentangle beginning-of-buffer, Large buffer case, beginning-of-buffer opt arg, beginning-of-buffer opt arg
6269 @ifnottex
6270 @unnumberedsubsubsec Disentangle @code{beginning-of-buffer}
6271 @end ifnottex
6272
6273 Like other complex-looking expressions, the conditional expression
6274 within @code{beginning-of-buffer} can be disentangled by looking at it
6275 as parts of a template, in this case, the template for an if-then-else
6276 expression. In skeletal form, the expression looks like this:
6277
6278 @smallexample
6279 @group
6280 (if (@var{buffer-is-large}
6281 @var{divide-buffer-size-by-10-and-multiply-by-arg}
6282 @var{else-use-alternate-calculation}
6283 @end group
6284 @end smallexample
6285
6286 The true-or-false-test of this inner @code{if} expression checks the
6287 size of the buffer. The reason for this is that the old version 18
6288 Emacs used numbers that are no bigger than eight million or so and in
6289 the computation that followed, the programmer feared that Emacs might
6290 try to use over-large numbers if the buffer were large. The term
6291 `overflow', mentioned in the comment, means numbers that are over
6292 large. More recent versions of Emacs use larger numbers, but this
6293 code has not been touched, if only because people now look at buffers
6294 that are far, far larger than ever before.
6295
6296 There are two cases: if the buffer is large and if it is not.
6297
6298 @node Large buffer case, Small buffer case, Disentangle beginning-of-buffer, beginning-of-buffer opt arg
6299 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6300 @unnumberedsubsubsec What happens in a large buffer
6301
6302 In @code{beginning-of-buffer}, the inner @code{if} expression tests
6303 whether the size of the buffer is greater than 10,000 characters. To do
6304 this, it uses the @code{>} function and the computation of @code{size}
6305 that comes from the let expression.
6306
6307 In the old days, the function @code{buffer-size} was used. Not only
6308 was that function called several times, it gave the size of the whole
6309 buffer, not the accessible part. The computation makes much more
6310 sense when it handles just the accessible part. (@xref{Narrowing &
6311 Widening, , Narrowing and Widening}, for more information on focusing
6312 attention to an `accessible' part.)
6313
6314 @need 800
6315 The line looks like this:
6316
6317 @smallexample
6318 (if (> size 10000)
6319 @end smallexample
6320
6321 @need 1200
6322 @noindent
6323 When the buffer is large, the then-part of the @code{if} expression is
6324 evaluated. It reads like this (after formatting for easy reading):
6325
6326 @smallexample
6327 @group
6328 (*
6329 (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6330 (/ size 10))
6331 @end group
6332 @end smallexample
6333
6334 @noindent
6335 This expression is a multiplication, with two arguments to the function
6336 @code{*}.
6337
6338 The first argument is @code{(prefix-numeric-value arg)}. When
6339 @code{"P"} is used as the argument for @code{interactive}, the value
6340 passed to the function as its argument is passed a ``raw prefix
6341 argument'', and not a number. (It is a number in a list.) To perform
6342 the arithmetic, a conversion is necessary, and
6343 @code{prefix-numeric-value} does the job.
6344
6345 @findex / @r{(division)}
6346 @cindex Division
6347 The second argument is @code{(/ size 10)}. This expression divides
6348 the numeric value by ten --- the numeric value of the size of the
6349 accessible portion of the buffer. This produces a number that tells
6350 how many characters make up one tenth of the buffer size. (In Lisp,
6351 @code{/} is used for division, just as @code{*} is used for
6352 multiplication.)
6353
6354 @need 1200
6355 In the multiplication expression as a whole, this amount is multiplied
6356 by the value of the prefix argument---the multiplication looks like this:
6357
6358 @smallexample
6359 @group
6360 (* @var{numeric-value-of-prefix-arg}
6361 @var{number-of-characters-in-one-tenth-of-the-accessible-buffer})
6362 @end group
6363 @end smallexample
6364
6365 @noindent
6366 If, for example, the prefix argument is @samp{7}, the one-tenth value
6367 will be multiplied by 7 to give a position 70% of the way through.
6368
6369 @need 1200
6370 The result of all this is that if the accessible portion of the buffer
6371 is large, the @code{goto-char} expression reads like this:
6372
6373 @smallexample
6374 @group
6375 (goto-char (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6376 (/ size 10)))
6377 @end group
6378 @end smallexample
6379
6380 This puts the cursor where we want it.
6381
6382 @node Small buffer case, , Large buffer case, beginning-of-buffer opt arg
6383 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6384 @unnumberedsubsubsec What happens in a small buffer
6385
6386 If the buffer contains fewer than 10,000 characters, a slightly
6387 different computation is performed. You might think this is not
6388 necessary, since the first computation could do the job. However, in
6389 a small buffer, the first method may not put the cursor on exactly the
6390 desired line; the second method does a better job.
6391
6392 @need 800
6393 The code looks like this:
6394
6395 @c Keep this on one line.
6396 @smallexample
6397 (/ (+ 10 (* size (prefix-numeric-value arg))) 10))
6398 @end smallexample
6399
6400 @need 1200
6401 @noindent
6402 This is code in which you figure out what happens by discovering how the
6403 functions are embedded in parentheses. It is easier to read if you
6404 reformat it with each expression indented more deeply than its
6405 enclosing expression:
6406
6407 @smallexample
6408 @group
6409 (/
6410 (+ 10
6411 (*
6412 size
6413 (prefix-numeric-value arg)))
6414 10))
6415 @end group
6416 @end smallexample
6417
6418 @need 1200
6419 @noindent
6420 Looking at parentheses, we see that the innermost operation is
6421 @code{(prefix-numeric-value arg)}, which converts the raw argument to
6422 a number. In the following expression, this number is multiplied by
6423 the size of the accessible portion of the buffer:
6424
6425 @smallexample
6426 (* size (prefix-numeric-value arg))
6427 @end smallexample
6428
6429 @noindent
6430 This multiplication creates a number that may be larger than the size of
6431 the buffer---seven times larger if the argument is 7, for example. Ten
6432 is then added to this number and finally the large number is divided by
6433 ten to provide a value that is one character larger than the percentage
6434 position in the buffer.
6435
6436 The number that results from all this is passed to @code{goto-char} and
6437 the cursor is moved to that point.
6438
6439 @need 1500
6440 @node beginning-of-buffer complete, , beginning-of-buffer opt arg, beginning-of-buffer
6441 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6442 @subsection The Complete @code{beginning-of-buffer}
6443
6444 @need 1000
6445 Here is the complete text of the @code{beginning-of-buffer} function:
6446 @sp 1
6447
6448 @c In GNU Emacs 22
6449 @smallexample
6450 @group
6451 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6452 "Move point to the beginning of the buffer;
6453 leave mark at previous position.
6454 With \\[universal-argument] prefix,
6455 do not set mark at previous position.
6456 With numeric arg N,
6457 put point N/10 of the way from the beginning.
6458
6459 If the buffer is narrowed,
6460 this command uses the beginning and size
6461 of the accessible part of the buffer.
6462 @end group
6463
6464 @group
6465 Don't use this command in Lisp programs!
6466 \(goto-char (point-min)) is faster
6467 and avoids clobbering the mark."
6468 (interactive "P")
6469 (or (consp arg)
6470 (and transient-mark-mode mark-active)
6471 (push-mark))
6472 @end group
6473 @group
6474 (let ((size (- (point-max) (point-min))))
6475 (goto-char (if (and arg (not (consp arg)))
6476 (+ (point-min)
6477 (if (> size 10000)
6478 ;; Avoid overflow for large buffer sizes!
6479 (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6480 (/ size 10))
6481 (/ (+ 10 (* size (prefix-numeric-value arg)))
6482 10)))
6483 (point-min))))
6484 (if arg (forward-line 1)))
6485 @end group
6486 @end smallexample
6487
6488 @ignore
6489 From before GNU Emacs 22
6490 @smallexample
6491 @group
6492 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6493 "Move point to the beginning of the buffer;
6494 leave mark at previous position.
6495 With arg N, put point N/10 of the way
6496 from the true beginning.
6497 @end group
6498 @group
6499 Don't use this in Lisp programs!
6500 \(goto-char (point-min)) is faster
6501 and does not set the mark."
6502 (interactive "P")
6503 (push-mark)
6504 @end group
6505 @group
6506 (goto-char
6507 (if arg
6508 (if (> (buffer-size) 10000)
6509 ;; @r{Avoid overflow for large buffer sizes!}
6510 (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6511 (/ (buffer-size) 10))
6512 @end group
6513 @group
6514 (/ (+ 10 (* (buffer-size)
6515 (prefix-numeric-value arg)))
6516 10))
6517 (point-min)))
6518 (if arg (forward-line 1)))
6519 @end group
6520 @end smallexample
6521 @end ignore
6522
6523 @noindent
6524 Except for two small points, the previous discussion shows how this
6525 function works. The first point deals with a detail in the
6526 documentation string, and the second point concerns the last line of
6527 the function.
6528
6529 @need 800
6530 In the documentation string, there is reference to an expression:
6531
6532 @smallexample
6533 \\[universal-argument]
6534 @end smallexample
6535
6536 @noindent
6537 A @samp{\\} is used before the first square bracket of this
6538 expression. This @samp{\\} tells the Lisp interpreter to substitute
6539 whatever key is currently bound to the @samp{[@dots{}]}. In the case
6540 of @code{universal-argument}, that is usually @kbd{C-u}, but it might
6541 be different. (@xref{Documentation Tips, , Tips for Documentation
6542 Strings, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more
6543 information.)
6544
6545 @need 1200
6546 Finally, the last line of the @code{beginning-of-buffer} command says
6547 to move point to the beginning of the next line if the command is
6548 invoked with an argument:
6549
6550 @smallexample
6551 (if arg (forward-line 1)))
6552 @end smallexample
6553
6554 @noindent
6555 This puts the cursor at the beginning of the first line after the
6556 appropriate tenths position in the buffer. This is a flourish that
6557 means that the cursor is always located @emph{at least} the requested
6558 tenths of the way through the buffer, which is a nicety that is,
6559 perhaps, not necessary, but which, if it did not occur, would be sure
6560 to draw complaints.
6561
6562 On the other hand, it also means that if you specify the command with
6563 a @kbd{C-u}, but without a number, that is to say, if the `raw prefix
6564 argument' is simply a cons cell, then the command puts you at the
6565 beginning of the second line @dots{} I don't know whether this is
6566 intended or whether no one has dealt with the code to avoid this
6567 happening.
6568
6569 @node Second Buffer Related Review, optional Exercise, beginning-of-buffer, More Complex
6570 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6571 @section Review
6572
6573 Here is a brief summary of some of the topics covered in this chapter.
6574
6575 @table @code
6576 @item or
6577 Evaluate each argument in sequence, and return the value of the first
6578 argument that is not @code{nil}; if none return a value that is not
6579 @code{nil}, return @code{nil}. In brief, return the first true value
6580 of the arguments; return a true value if one @emph{or} any of the
6581 others are true.
6582
6583 @item and
6584 Evaluate each argument in sequence, and if any are @code{nil}, return
6585 @code{nil}; if none are @code{nil}, return the value of the last
6586 argument. In brief, return a true value only if all the arguments are
6587 true; return a true value if one @emph{and} each of the others is
6588 true.
6589
6590 @item &optional
6591 A keyword used to indicate that an argument to a function definition
6592 is optional; this means that the function can be evaluated without the
6593 argument, if desired.
6594
6595 @item prefix-numeric-value
6596 Convert the `raw prefix argument' produced by @code{(interactive
6597 "P")} to a numeric value.
6598
6599 @item forward-line
6600 Move point forward to the beginning of the next line, or if the argument
6601 is greater than one, forward that many lines. If it can't move as far
6602 forward as it is supposed to, @code{forward-line} goes forward as far as
6603 it can and then returns a count of the number of additional lines it was
6604 supposed to move but couldn't.
6605
6606 @item erase-buffer
6607 Delete the entire contents of the current buffer.
6608
6609 @item bufferp
6610 Return @code{t} if its argument is a buffer; otherwise return @code{nil}.
6611 @end table
6612
6613 @node optional Exercise, , Second Buffer Related Review, More Complex
6614 @section @code{optional} Argument Exercise
6615
6616 Write an interactive function with an optional argument that tests
6617 whether its argument, a number, is greater than or equal to, or else,
6618 less than the value of @code{fill-column}, and tells you which, in a
6619 message. However, if you do not pass an argument to the function, use
6620 56 as a default value.
6621
6622 @node Narrowing & Widening, car cdr & cons, More Complex, Top
6623 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6624 @chapter Narrowing and Widening
6625 @cindex Focusing attention (narrowing)
6626 @cindex Narrowing
6627 @cindex Widening
6628
6629 Narrowing is a feature of Emacs that makes it possible for you to focus
6630 on a specific part of a buffer, and work without accidentally changing
6631 other parts. Narrowing is normally disabled since it can confuse
6632 novices.
6633
6634 @menu
6635 * Narrowing advantages:: The advantages of narrowing
6636 * save-restriction:: The @code{save-restriction} special form.
6637 * what-line:: The number of the line that point is on.
6638 * narrow Exercise::
6639 @end menu
6640
6641 @node Narrowing advantages, save-restriction, Narrowing & Widening, Narrowing & Widening
6642 @ifnottex
6643 @unnumberedsec The Advantages of Narrowing
6644 @end ifnottex
6645
6646 With narrowing, the rest of a buffer is made invisible, as if it weren't
6647 there. This is an advantage if, for example, you want to replace a word
6648 in one part of a buffer but not in another: you narrow to the part you want
6649 and the replacement is carried out only in that section, not in the rest
6650 of the buffer. Searches will only work within a narrowed region, not
6651 outside of one, so if you are fixing a part of a document, you can keep
6652 yourself from accidentally finding parts you do not need to fix by
6653 narrowing just to the region you want.
6654 (The key binding for @code{narrow-to-region} is @kbd{C-x n n}.)
6655
6656 However, narrowing does make the rest of the buffer invisible, which
6657 can scare people who inadvertently invoke narrowing and think they
6658 have deleted a part of their file. Moreover, the @code{undo} command
6659 (which is usually bound to @kbd{C-x u}) does not turn off narrowing
6660 (nor should it), so people can become quite desperate if they do not
6661 know that they can return the rest of a buffer to visibility with the
6662 @code{widen} command.
6663 (The key binding for @code{widen} is @kbd{C-x n w}.)
6664
6665 Narrowing is just as useful to the Lisp interpreter as to a human.
6666 Often, an Emacs Lisp function is designed to work on just part of a
6667 buffer; or conversely, an Emacs Lisp function needs to work on all of a
6668 buffer that has been narrowed. The @code{what-line} function, for
6669 example, removes the narrowing from a buffer, if it has any narrowing
6670 and when it has finished its job, restores the narrowing to what it was.
6671 On the other hand, the @code{count-lines} function, which is called by
6672 @code{what-line}, uses narrowing to restrict itself to just that portion
6673 of the buffer in which it is interested and then restores the previous
6674 situation.
6675
6676 @node save-restriction, what-line, Narrowing advantages, Narrowing & Widening
6677 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6678 @section The @code{save-restriction} Special Form
6679 @findex save-restriction
6680
6681 In Emacs Lisp, you can use the @code{save-restriction} special form to
6682 keep track of whatever narrowing is in effect, if any. When the Lisp
6683 interpreter meets with @code{save-restriction}, it executes the code
6684 in the body of the @code{save-restriction} expression, and then undoes
6685 any changes to narrowing that the code caused. If, for example, the
6686 buffer is narrowed and the code that follows @code{save-restriction}
6687 gets rid of the narrowing, @code{save-restriction} returns the buffer
6688 to its narrowed region afterwards. In the @code{what-line} command,
6689 any narrowing the buffer may have is undone by the @code{widen}
6690 command that immediately follows the @code{save-restriction} command.
6691 Any original narrowing is restored just before the completion of the
6692 function.
6693
6694 @need 1250
6695 The template for a @code{save-restriction} expression is simple:
6696
6697 @smallexample
6698 @group
6699 (save-restriction
6700 @var{body}@dots{} )
6701 @end group
6702 @end smallexample
6703
6704 @noindent
6705 The body of the @code{save-restriction} is one or more expressions that
6706 will be evaluated in sequence by the Lisp interpreter.
6707
6708 Finally, a point to note: when you use both @code{save-excursion} and
6709 @code{save-restriction}, one right after the other, you should use
6710 @code{save-excursion} outermost. If you write them in reverse order,
6711 you may fail to record narrowing in the buffer to which Emacs switches
6712 after calling @code{save-excursion}. Thus, when written together,
6713 @code{save-excursion} and @code{save-restriction} should be written
6714 like this:
6715
6716 @smallexample
6717 @group
6718 (save-excursion
6719 (save-restriction
6720 @var{body}@dots{}))
6721 @end group
6722 @end smallexample
6723
6724 In other circumstances, when not written together, the
6725 @code{save-excursion} and @code{save-restriction} special forms must
6726 be written in the order appropriate to the function.
6727
6728 @need 1250
6729 For example,
6730
6731 @smallexample
6732 @group
6733 (save-restriction
6734 (widen)
6735 (save-excursion
6736 @var{body}@dots{}))
6737 @end group
6738 @end smallexample
6739
6740 @ignore
6741 Emacs 22
6742 /usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/simple.el
6743
6744 (defun what-line ()
6745 "Print the current buffer line number and narrowed line number of point."
6746 (interactive)
6747 (let ((start (point-min))
6748 (n (line-number-at-pos)))
6749 (if (= start 1)
6750 (message "Line %d" n)
6751 (save-excursion
6752 (save-restriction
6753 (widen)
6754 (message "line %d (narrowed line %d)"
6755 (+ n (line-number-at-pos start) -1) n))))))
6756
6757 (defun line-number-at-pos (&optional pos)
6758 "Return (narrowed) buffer line number at position POS.
6759 If POS is nil, use current buffer location.
6760 Counting starts at (point-min), so the value refers
6761 to the contents of the accessible portion of the buffer."
6762 (let ((opoint (or pos (point))) start)
6763 (save-excursion
6764 (goto-char (point-min))
6765 (setq start (point))
6766 (goto-char opoint)
6767 (forward-line 0)
6768 (1+ (count-lines start (point))))))
6769
6770 (defun count-lines (start end)
6771 "Return number of lines between START and END.
6772 This is usually the number of newlines between them,
6773 but can be one more if START is not equal to END
6774 and the greater of them is not at the start of a line."
6775 (save-excursion
6776 (save-restriction
6777 (narrow-to-region start end)
6778 (goto-char (point-min))
6779 (if (eq selective-display t)
6780 (save-match-data
6781 (let ((done 0))
6782 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 40)
6783 (setq done (+ 40 done)))
6784 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 1)
6785 (setq done (+ 1 done)))
6786 (goto-char (point-max))
6787 (if (and (/= start end)
6788 (not (bolp)))
6789 (1+ done)
6790 done)))
6791 (- (buffer-size) (forward-line (buffer-size)))))))
6792 @end ignore
6793
6794 @node what-line, narrow Exercise, save-restriction, Narrowing & Widening
6795 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6796 @section @code{what-line}
6797 @findex what-line
6798 @cindex Widening, example of
6799
6800 The @code{what-line} command tells you the number of the line in which
6801 the cursor is located. The function illustrates the use of the
6802 @code{save-restriction} and @code{save-excursion} commands. Here is the
6803 original text of the function:
6804
6805 @smallexample
6806 @group
6807 (defun what-line ()
6808 "Print the current line number (in the buffer) of point."
6809 (interactive)
6810 (save-restriction
6811 (widen)
6812 (save-excursion
6813 (beginning-of-line)
6814 (message "Line %d"
6815 (1+ (count-lines 1 (point)))))))
6816 @end group
6817 @end smallexample
6818
6819 (In recent versions of GNU Emacs, the @code{what-line} function has
6820 been expanded to tell you your line number in a narrowed buffer as
6821 well as your line number in a widened buffer. The recent version is
6822 more complex than the version shown here. If you feel adventurous,
6823 you might want to look at it after figuring out how this version
6824 works. You will probably need to use @kbd{C-h f}
6825 (@code{describe-function}). The newer version uses a conditional to
6826 determine whether the buffer has been narrowed.
6827
6828 (Also, it uses @code{line-number-at-pos}, which among other simple
6829 expressions, such as @code{(goto-char (point-min))}, moves point to
6830 the beginning of the current line with @code{(forward-line 0)} rather
6831 than @code{beginning-of-line}.)
6832
6833 The @code{what-line} function as shown here has a documentation line
6834 and is interactive, as you would expect. The next two lines use the
6835 functions @code{save-restriction} and @code{widen}.
6836
6837 The @code{save-restriction} special form notes whatever narrowing is in
6838 effect, if any, in the current buffer and restores that narrowing after
6839 the code in the body of the @code{save-restriction} has been evaluated.
6840
6841 The @code{save-restriction} special form is followed by @code{widen}.
6842 This function undoes any narrowing the current buffer may have had
6843 when @code{what-line} was called. (The narrowing that was there is
6844 the narrowing that @code{save-restriction} remembers.) This widening
6845 makes it possible for the line counting commands to count from the
6846 beginning of the buffer. Otherwise, they would have been limited to
6847 counting within the accessible region. Any original narrowing is
6848 restored just before the completion of the function by the
6849 @code{save-restriction} special form.
6850
6851 The call to @code{widen} is followed by @code{save-excursion}, which
6852 saves the location of the cursor (i.e., of point) and of the mark, and
6853 restores them after the code in the body of the @code{save-excursion}
6854 uses the @code{beginning-of-line} function to move point.
6855
6856 (Note that the @code{(widen)} expression comes between the
6857 @code{save-restriction} and @code{save-excursion} special forms. When
6858 you write the two @code{save- @dots{}} expressions in sequence, write
6859 @code{save-excursion} outermost.)
6860
6861 @need 1200
6862 The last two lines of the @code{what-line} function are functions to
6863 count the number of lines in the buffer and then print the number in the
6864 echo area.
6865
6866 @smallexample
6867 @group
6868 (message "Line %d"
6869 (1+ (count-lines 1 (point)))))))
6870 @end group
6871 @end smallexample
6872
6873 The @code{message} function prints a one-line message at the bottom of
6874 the Emacs screen. The first argument is inside of quotation marks and
6875 is printed as a string of characters. However, it may contain a
6876 @samp{%d} expression to print a following argument. @samp{%d} prints
6877 the argument as a decimal, so the message will say something such as
6878 @samp{Line 243}.
6879
6880 @need 1200
6881 The number that is printed in place of the @samp{%d} is computed by the
6882 last line of the function:
6883
6884 @smallexample
6885 (1+ (count-lines 1 (point)))
6886 @end smallexample
6887
6888 @ignore
6889 GNU Emacs 22
6890
6891 (defun count-lines (start end)
6892 "Return number of lines between START and END.
6893 This is usually the number of newlines between them,
6894 but can be one more if START is not equal to END
6895 and the greater of them is not at the start of a line."
6896 (save-excursion
6897 (save-restriction
6898 (narrow-to-region start end)
6899 (goto-char (point-min))
6900 (if (eq selective-display t)
6901 (save-match-data
6902 (let ((done 0))
6903 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 40)
6904 (setq done (+ 40 done)))
6905 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 1)
6906 (setq done (+ 1 done)))
6907 (goto-char (point-max))
6908 (if (and (/= start end)
6909 (not (bolp)))
6910 (1+ done)
6911 done)))
6912 (- (buffer-size) (forward-line (buffer-size)))))))
6913 @end ignore
6914
6915 @noindent
6916 What this does is count the lines from the first position of the
6917 buffer, indicated by the @code{1}, up to @code{(point)}, and then add
6918 one to that number. (The @code{1+} function adds one to its
6919 argument.) We add one to it because line 2 has only one line before
6920 it, and @code{count-lines} counts only the lines @emph{before} the
6921 current line.
6922
6923 After @code{count-lines} has done its job, and the message has been
6924 printed in the echo area, the @code{save-excursion} restores point and
6925 mark to their original positions; and @code{save-restriction} restores
6926 the original narrowing, if any.
6927
6928 @node narrow Exercise, , what-line, Narrowing & Widening
6929 @section Exercise with Narrowing
6930
6931 Write a function that will display the first 60 characters of the
6932 current buffer, even if you have narrowed the buffer to its latter
6933 half so that the first line is inaccessible. Restore point, mark, and
6934 narrowing. For this exercise, you need to use a whole potpourri of
6935 functions, including @code{save-restriction}, @code{widen},
6936 @code{goto-char}, @code{point-min}, @code{message}, and
6937 @code{buffer-substring}.
6938
6939 @cindex Properties, mention of @code{buffer-substring-no-properties}
6940 (@code{buffer-substring} is a previously unmentioned function you will
6941 have to investigate yourself; or perhaps you will have to use
6942 @code{buffer-substring-no-properties} or
6943 @code{filter-buffer-substring} @dots{}, yet other functions. Text
6944 properties are a feature otherwise not discussed here. @xref{Text
6945 Properties, , Text Properties, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
6946 Manual}.)
6947
6948 Additionally, do you really need @code{goto-char} or @code{point-min}?
6949 Or can you write the function without them?
6950
6951 @node car cdr & cons, Cutting & Storing Text, Narrowing & Widening, Top
6952 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6953 @chapter @code{car}, @code{cdr}, @code{cons}: Fundamental Functions
6954 @findex car, @r{introduced}
6955 @findex cdr, @r{introduced}
6956
6957 In Lisp, @code{car}, @code{cdr}, and @code{cons} are fundamental
6958 functions. The @code{cons} function is used to construct lists, and
6959 the @code{car} and @code{cdr} functions are used to take them apart.
6960
6961 In the walk through of the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function, we
6962 will see @code{cons} as well as two variants on @code{cdr},
6963 namely, @code{setcdr} and @code{nthcdr}. (@xref{copy-region-as-kill}.)
6964
6965 @menu
6966 * Strange Names:: An historical aside: why the strange names?
6967 * car & cdr:: Functions for extracting part of a list.
6968 * cons:: Constructing a list.
6969 * nthcdr:: Calling @code{cdr} repeatedly.
6970 * nth::
6971 * setcar:: Changing the first element of a list.
6972 * setcdr:: Changing the rest of a list.
6973 * cons Exercise::
6974 @end menu
6975
6976 @node Strange Names, car & cdr, car cdr & cons, car cdr & cons
6977 @ifnottex
6978 @unnumberedsec Strange Names
6979 @end ifnottex
6980
6981 The name of the @code{cons} function is not unreasonable: it is an
6982 abbreviation of the word `construct'. The origins of the names for
6983 @code{car} and @code{cdr}, on the other hand, are esoteric: @code{car}
6984 is an acronym from the phrase `Contents of the Address part of the
6985 Register'; and @code{cdr} (pronounced `could-er') is an acronym from
6986 the phrase `Contents of the Decrement part of the Register'. These
6987 phrases refer to specific pieces of hardware on the very early
6988 computer on which the original Lisp was developed. Besides being
6989 obsolete, the phrases have been completely irrelevant for more than 25
6990 years to anyone thinking about Lisp. Nonetheless, although a few
6991 brave scholars have begun to use more reasonable names for these
6992 functions, the old terms are still in use. In particular, since the
6993 terms are used in the Emacs Lisp source code, we will use them in this
6994 introduction.
6995
6996 @node car & cdr, cons, Strange Names, car cdr & cons
6997 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6998 @section @code{car} and @code{cdr}
6999
7000 The @sc{car} of a list is, quite simply, the first item in the list.
7001 Thus the @sc{car} of the list @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)} is
7002 @code{rose}.
7003
7004 @need 1200
7005 If you are reading this in Info in GNU Emacs, you can see this by
7006 evaluating the following:
7007
7008 @smallexample
7009 (car '(rose violet daisy buttercup))
7010 @end smallexample
7011
7012 @noindent
7013 After evaluating the expression, @code{rose} will appear in the echo
7014 area.
7015
7016 Clearly, a more reasonable name for the @code{car} function would be
7017 @code{first} and this is often suggested.
7018
7019 @code{car} does not remove the first item from the list; it only reports
7020 what it is. After @code{car} has been applied to a list, the list is
7021 still the same as it was. In the jargon, @code{car} is
7022 `non-destructive'. This feature turns out to be important.
7023
7024 The @sc{cdr} of a list is the rest of the list, that is, the
7025 @code{cdr} function returns the part of the list that follows the
7026 first item. Thus, while the @sc{car} of the list @code{'(rose violet
7027 daisy buttercup)} is @code{rose}, the rest of the list, the value
7028 returned by the @code{cdr} function, is @code{(violet daisy
7029 buttercup)}.
7030
7031 @need 800
7032 You can see this by evaluating the following in the usual way:
7033
7034 @smallexample
7035 (cdr '(rose violet daisy buttercup))
7036 @end smallexample
7037
7038 @noindent
7039 When you evaluate this, @code{(violet daisy buttercup)} will appear in
7040 the echo area.
7041
7042 Like @code{car}, @code{cdr} does not remove any elements from the
7043 list---it just returns a report of what the second and subsequent
7044 elements are.
7045
7046 Incidentally, in the example, the list of flowers is quoted. If it were
7047 not, the Lisp interpreter would try to evaluate the list by calling
7048 @code{rose} as a function. In this example, we do not want to do that.
7049
7050 Clearly, a more reasonable name for @code{cdr} would be @code{rest}.
7051
7052 (There is a lesson here: when you name new functions, consider very
7053 carefully what you are doing, since you may be stuck with the names
7054 for far longer than you expect. The reason this document perpetuates
7055 these names is that the Emacs Lisp source code uses them, and if I did
7056 not use them, you would have a hard time reading the code; but do,
7057 please, try to avoid using these terms yourself. The people who come
7058 after you will be grateful to you.)
7059
7060 When @code{car} and @code{cdr} are applied to a list made up of symbols,
7061 such as the list @code{(pine fir oak maple)}, the element of the list
7062 returned by the function @code{car} is the symbol @code{pine} without
7063 any parentheses around it. @code{pine} is the first element in the
7064 list. However, the @sc{cdr} of the list is a list itself, @code{(fir
7065 oak maple)}, as you can see by evaluating the following expressions in
7066 the usual way:
7067
7068 @smallexample
7069 @group
7070 (car '(pine fir oak maple))
7071
7072 (cdr '(pine fir oak maple))
7073 @end group
7074 @end smallexample
7075
7076 On the other hand, in a list of lists, the first element is itself a
7077 list. @code{car} returns this first element as a list. For example,
7078 the following list contains three sub-lists, a list of carnivores, a
7079 list of herbivores and a list of sea mammals:
7080
7081 @smallexample
7082 @group
7083 (car '((lion tiger cheetah)
7084 (gazelle antelope zebra)
7085 (whale dolphin seal)))
7086 @end group
7087 @end smallexample
7088
7089 @noindent
7090 In this example, the first element or @sc{car} of the list is the list of
7091 carnivores, @code{(lion tiger cheetah)}, and the rest of the list is
7092 @code{((gazelle antelope zebra) (whale dolphin seal))}.
7093
7094 @smallexample
7095 @group
7096 (cdr '((lion tiger cheetah)
7097 (gazelle antelope zebra)
7098 (whale dolphin seal)))
7099 @end group
7100 @end smallexample
7101
7102 It is worth saying again that @code{car} and @code{cdr} are
7103 non-destructive---that is, they do not modify or change lists to which
7104 they are applied. This is very important for how they are used.
7105
7106 Also, in the first chapter, in the discussion about atoms, I said that
7107 in Lisp, ``certain kinds of atom, such as an array, can be separated
7108 into parts; but the mechanism for doing this is different from the
7109 mechanism for splitting a list. As far as Lisp is concerned, the
7110 atoms of a list are unsplittable.'' (@xref{Lisp Atoms}.) The
7111 @code{car} and @code{cdr} functions are used for splitting lists and
7112 are considered fundamental to Lisp. Since they cannot split or gain
7113 access to the parts of an array, an array is considered an atom.
7114 Conversely, the other fundamental function, @code{cons}, can put
7115 together or construct a list, but not an array. (Arrays are handled
7116 by array-specific functions. @xref{Arrays, , Arrays, elisp, The GNU
7117 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
7118
7119 @node cons, nthcdr, car & cdr, car cdr & cons
7120 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7121 @section @code{cons}
7122 @findex cons, @r{introduced}
7123
7124 The @code{cons} function constructs lists; it is the inverse of
7125 @code{car} and @code{cdr}. For example, @code{cons} can be used to make
7126 a four element list from the three element list, @code{(fir oak maple)}:
7127
7128 @smallexample
7129 (cons 'pine '(fir oak maple))
7130 @end smallexample
7131
7132 @need 800
7133 @noindent
7134 After evaluating this list, you will see
7135
7136 @smallexample
7137 (pine fir oak maple)
7138 @end smallexample
7139
7140 @noindent
7141 appear in the echo area. @code{cons} causes the creation of a new
7142 list in which the element is followed by the elements of the original
7143 list.
7144
7145 We often say that `@code{cons} puts a new element at the beginning of
7146 a list; it attaches or pushes elements onto the list', but this
7147 phrasing can be misleading, since @code{cons} does not change an
7148 existing list, but creates a new one.
7149
7150 Like @code{car} and @code{cdr}, @code{cons} is non-destructive.
7151
7152 @menu
7153 * Build a list::
7154 * length:: How to find the length of a list.
7155 @end menu
7156
7157 @node Build a list, length, cons, cons
7158 @ifnottex
7159 @unnumberedsubsec Build a list
7160 @end ifnottex
7161
7162 @code{cons} must have a list to attach to.@footnote{Actually, you can
7163 @code{cons} an element to an atom to produce a dotted pair. Dotted
7164 pairs are not discussed here; see @ref{Dotted Pair Notation, , Dotted
7165 Pair Notation, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.} You
7166 cannot start from absolutely nothing. If you are building a list, you
7167 need to provide at least an empty list at the beginning. Here is a
7168 series of @code{cons} expressions that build up a list of flowers. If
7169 you are reading this in Info in GNU Emacs, you can evaluate each of
7170 the expressions in the usual way; the value is printed in this text
7171 after @samp{@result{}}, which you may read as `evaluates to'.
7172
7173 @smallexample
7174 @group
7175 (cons 'buttercup ())
7176 @result{} (buttercup)
7177 @end group
7178
7179 @group
7180 (cons 'daisy '(buttercup))
7181 @result{} (daisy buttercup)
7182 @end group
7183
7184 @group
7185 (cons 'violet '(daisy buttercup))
7186 @result{} (violet daisy buttercup)
7187 @end group
7188
7189 @group
7190 (cons 'rose '(violet daisy buttercup))
7191 @result{} (rose violet daisy buttercup)
7192 @end group
7193 @end smallexample
7194
7195 @noindent
7196 In the first example, the empty list is shown as @code{()} and a list
7197 made up of @code{buttercup} followed by the empty list is constructed.
7198 As you can see, the empty list is not shown in the list that was
7199 constructed. All that you see is @code{(buttercup)}. The empty list is
7200 not counted as an element of a list because there is nothing in an empty
7201 list. Generally speaking, an empty list is invisible.
7202
7203 The second example, @code{(cons 'daisy '(buttercup))} constructs a new,
7204 two element list by putting @code{daisy} in front of @code{buttercup};
7205 and the third example constructs a three element list by putting
7206 @code{violet} in front of @code{daisy} and @code{buttercup}.
7207
7208 @node length, , Build a list, cons
7209 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7210 @subsection Find the Length of a List: @code{length}
7211 @findex length
7212
7213 You can find out how many elements there are in a list by using the Lisp
7214 function @code{length}, as in the following examples:
7215
7216 @smallexample
7217 @group
7218 (length '(buttercup))
7219 @result{} 1
7220 @end group
7221
7222 @group
7223 (length '(daisy buttercup))
7224 @result{} 2
7225 @end group
7226
7227 @group
7228 (length (cons 'violet '(daisy buttercup)))
7229 @result{} 3
7230 @end group
7231 @end smallexample
7232
7233 @noindent
7234 In the third example, the @code{cons} function is used to construct a
7235 three element list which is then passed to the @code{length} function as
7236 its argument.
7237
7238 @need 1200
7239 We can also use @code{length} to count the number of elements in an
7240 empty list:
7241
7242 @smallexample
7243 @group
7244 (length ())
7245 @result{} 0
7246 @end group
7247 @end smallexample
7248
7249 @noindent
7250 As you would expect, the number of elements in an empty list is zero.
7251
7252 An interesting experiment is to find out what happens if you try to find
7253 the length of no list at all; that is, if you try to call @code{length}
7254 without giving it an argument, not even an empty list:
7255
7256 @smallexample
7257 (length )
7258 @end smallexample
7259
7260 @need 800
7261 @noindent
7262 What you see, if you evaluate this, is the error message
7263
7264 @smallexample
7265 Lisp error: (wrong-number-of-arguments length 0)
7266 @end smallexample
7267
7268 @noindent
7269 This means that the function receives the wrong number of
7270 arguments, zero, when it expects some other number of arguments. In
7271 this case, one argument is expected, the argument being a list whose
7272 length the function is measuring. (Note that @emph{one} list is
7273 @emph{one} argument, even if the list has many elements inside it.)
7274
7275 The part of the error message that says @samp{length} is the name of
7276 the function.
7277
7278 @ignore
7279 @code{length} is still a subroutine, but you need C-h f to discover that.
7280
7281 In an earlier version:
7282 This is written with a special notation, @samp{#<subr},
7283 that indicates that the function @code{length} is one of the primitive
7284 functions written in C rather than in Emacs Lisp. (@samp{subr} is an
7285 abbreviation for `subroutine'.) @xref{What Is a Function, , What Is a
7286 Function?, elisp , The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more
7287 about subroutines.
7288 @end ignore
7289
7290 @node nthcdr, nth, cons, car cdr & cons
7291 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7292 @section @code{nthcdr}
7293 @findex nthcdr
7294
7295 The @code{nthcdr} function is associated with the @code{cdr} function.
7296 What it does is take the @sc{cdr} of a list repeatedly.
7297
7298 If you take the @sc{cdr} of the list @code{(pine fir
7299 oak maple)}, you will be returned the list @code{(fir oak maple)}. If you
7300 repeat this on what was returned, you will be returned the list
7301 @code{(oak maple)}. (Of course, repeated @sc{cdr}ing on the original
7302 list will just give you the original @sc{cdr} since the function does
7303 not change the list. You need to evaluate the @sc{cdr} of the
7304 @sc{cdr} and so on.) If you continue this, eventually you will be
7305 returned an empty list, which in this case, instead of being shown as
7306 @code{()} is shown as @code{nil}.
7307
7308 @need 1200
7309 For review, here is a series of repeated @sc{cdr}s, the text following
7310 the @samp{@result{}} shows what is returned.
7311
7312 @smallexample
7313 @group
7314 (cdr '(pine fir oak maple))
7315 @result{}(fir oak maple)
7316 @end group
7317
7318 @group
7319 (cdr '(fir oak maple))
7320 @result{} (oak maple)
7321 @end group
7322
7323 @group
7324 (cdr '(oak maple))
7325 @result{}(maple)
7326 @end group
7327
7328 @group
7329 (cdr '(maple))
7330 @result{} nil
7331 @end group
7332
7333 @group
7334 (cdr 'nil)
7335 @result{} nil
7336 @end group
7337
7338 @group
7339 (cdr ())
7340 @result{} nil
7341 @end group
7342 @end smallexample
7343
7344 @need 1200
7345 You can also do several @sc{cdr}s without printing the values in
7346 between, like this:
7347
7348 @smallexample
7349 @group
7350 (cdr (cdr '(pine fir oak maple)))
7351 @result{} (oak maple)
7352 @end group
7353 @end smallexample
7354
7355 @noindent
7356 In this example, the Lisp interpreter evaluates the innermost list first.
7357 The innermost list is quoted, so it just passes the list as it is to the
7358 innermost @code{cdr}. This @code{cdr} passes a list made up of the
7359 second and subsequent elements of the list to the outermost @code{cdr},
7360 which produces a list composed of the third and subsequent elements of
7361 the original list. In this example, the @code{cdr} function is repeated
7362 and returns a list that consists of the original list without its
7363 first two elements.
7364
7365 The @code{nthcdr} function does the same as repeating the call to
7366 @code{cdr}. In the following example, the argument 2 is passed to the
7367 function @code{nthcdr}, along with the list, and the value returned is
7368 the list without its first two items, which is exactly the same
7369 as repeating @code{cdr} twice on the list:
7370
7371 @smallexample
7372 @group
7373 (nthcdr 2 '(pine fir oak maple))
7374 @result{} (oak maple)
7375 @end group
7376 @end smallexample
7377
7378 @need 1200
7379 Using the original four element list, we can see what happens when
7380 various numeric arguments are passed to @code{nthcdr}, including 0, 1,
7381 and 5:
7382
7383 @smallexample
7384 @group
7385 ;; @r{Leave the list as it was.}
7386 (nthcdr 0 '(pine fir oak maple))
7387 @result{} (pine fir oak maple)
7388 @end group
7389
7390 @group
7391 ;; @r{Return a copy without the first element.}
7392 (nthcdr 1 '(pine fir oak maple))
7393 @result{} (fir oak maple)
7394 @end group
7395
7396 @group
7397 ;; @r{Return a copy of the list without three elements.}
7398 (nthcdr 3 '(pine fir oak maple))
7399 @result{} (maple)
7400 @end group
7401
7402 @group
7403 ;; @r{Return a copy lacking all four elements.}
7404 (nthcdr 4 '(pine fir oak maple))
7405 @result{} nil
7406 @end group
7407
7408 @group
7409 ;; @r{Return a copy lacking all elements.}
7410 (nthcdr 5 '(pine fir oak maple))
7411 @result{} nil
7412 @end group
7413 @end smallexample
7414
7415 @node nth, setcar, nthcdr, car cdr & cons
7416 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7417 @section @code{nth}
7418 @findex nth
7419
7420 The @code{nthcdr} function takes the @sc{cdr} of a list repeatedly.
7421 The @code{nth} function takes the @sc{car} of the result returned by
7422 @code{nthcdr}. It returns the Nth element of the list.
7423
7424 @need 1500
7425 Thus, if it were not defined in C for speed, the definition of
7426 @code{nth} would be:
7427
7428 @smallexample
7429 @group
7430 (defun nth (n list)
7431 "Returns the Nth element of LIST.
7432 N counts from zero. If LIST is not that long, nil is returned."
7433 (car (nthcdr n list)))
7434 @end group
7435 @end smallexample
7436
7437 @noindent
7438 (Originally, @code{nth} was defined in Emacs Lisp in @file{subr.el},
7439 but its definition was redone in C in the 1980s.)
7440
7441 The @code{nth} function returns a single element of a list.
7442 This can be very convenient.
7443
7444 Note that the elements are numbered from zero, not one. That is to
7445 say, the first element of a list, its @sc{car} is the zeroth element.
7446 This is called `zero-based' counting and often bothers people who
7447 are accustomed to the first element in a list being number one, which
7448 is `one-based'.
7449
7450 @need 1250
7451 For example:
7452
7453 @smallexample
7454 @group
7455 (nth 0 '("one" "two" "three"))
7456 @result{} "one"
7457
7458 (nth 1 '("one" "two" "three"))
7459 @result{} "two"
7460 @end group
7461 @end smallexample
7462
7463 It is worth mentioning that @code{nth}, like @code{nthcdr} and
7464 @code{cdr}, does not change the original list---the function is
7465 non-destructive. This is in sharp contrast to the @code{setcar} and
7466 @code{setcdr} functions.
7467
7468 @node setcar, setcdr, nth, car cdr & cons
7469 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7470 @section @code{setcar}
7471 @findex setcar
7472
7473 As you might guess from their names, the @code{setcar} and @code{setcdr}
7474 functions set the @sc{car} or the @sc{cdr} of a list to a new value.
7475 They actually change the original list, unlike @code{car} and @code{cdr}
7476 which leave the original list as it was. One way to find out how this
7477 works is to experiment. We will start with the @code{setcar} function.
7478
7479 @need 1200
7480 First, we can make a list and then set the value of a variable to the
7481 list, using the @code{setq} function. Here is a list of animals:
7482
7483 @smallexample
7484 (setq animals '(antelope giraffe lion tiger))
7485 @end smallexample
7486
7487 @noindent
7488 If you are reading this in Info inside of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate
7489 this expression in the usual fashion, by positioning the cursor after
7490 the expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}. (I'm doing this right here
7491 as I write this. This is one of the advantages of having the
7492 interpreter built into the computing environment. Incidentally, when
7493 there is nothing on the line after the final parentheses, such as a
7494 comment, point can be on the next line. Thus, if your cursor is in
7495 the first column of the next line, you do not need to move it.
7496 Indeed, Emacs permits any amount of white space after the final
7497 parenthesis.)
7498
7499 @need 1200
7500 When we evaluate the variable @code{animals}, we see that it is bound to
7501 the list @code{(antelope giraffe lion tiger)}:
7502
7503 @smallexample
7504 @group
7505 animals
7506 @result{} (antelope giraffe lion tiger)
7507 @end group
7508 @end smallexample
7509
7510 @noindent
7511 Put another way, the variable @code{animals} points to the list
7512 @code{(antelope giraffe lion tiger)}.
7513
7514 Next, evaluate the function @code{setcar} while passing it two
7515 arguments, the variable @code{animals} and the quoted symbol
7516 @code{hippopotamus}; this is done by writing the three element list
7517 @code{(setcar animals 'hippopotamus)} and then evaluating it in the
7518 usual fashion:
7519
7520 @smallexample
7521 (setcar animals 'hippopotamus)
7522 @end smallexample
7523
7524 @need 1200
7525 @noindent
7526 After evaluating this expression, evaluate the variable @code{animals}
7527 again. You will see that the list of animals has changed:
7528
7529 @smallexample
7530 @group
7531 animals
7532 @result{} (hippopotamus giraffe lion tiger)
7533 @end group
7534 @end smallexample
7535
7536 @noindent
7537 The first element on the list, @code{antelope} is replaced by
7538 @code{hippopotamus}.
7539
7540 So we can see that @code{setcar} did not add a new element to the list
7541 as @code{cons} would have; it replaced @code{antelope} with
7542 @code{hippopotamus}; it @emph{changed} the list.
7543
7544 @node setcdr, cons Exercise, setcar, car cdr & cons
7545 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7546 @section @code{setcdr}
7547 @findex setcdr
7548
7549 The @code{setcdr} function is similar to the @code{setcar} function,
7550 except that the function replaces the second and subsequent elements of
7551 a list rather than the first element.
7552
7553 (To see how to change the last element of a list, look ahead to
7554 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}, which uses
7555 the @code{nthcdr} and @code{setcdr} functions.)
7556
7557 @need 1200
7558 To see how this works, set the value of the variable to a list of
7559 domesticated animals by evaluating the following expression:
7560
7561 @smallexample
7562 (setq domesticated-animals '(horse cow sheep goat))
7563 @end smallexample
7564
7565 @need 1200
7566 @noindent
7567 If you now evaluate the list, you will be returned the list
7568 @code{(horse cow sheep goat)}:
7569
7570 @smallexample
7571 @group
7572 domesticated-animals
7573 @result{} (horse cow sheep goat)
7574 @end group
7575 @end smallexample
7576
7577 @need 1200
7578 Next, evaluate @code{setcdr} with two arguments, the name of the
7579 variable which has a list as its value, and the list to which the
7580 @sc{cdr} of the first list will be set;
7581
7582 @smallexample
7583 (setcdr domesticated-animals '(cat dog))
7584 @end smallexample
7585
7586 @noindent
7587 If you evaluate this expression, the list @code{(cat dog)} will appear
7588 in the echo area. This is the value returned by the function. The
7589 result we are interested in is the ``side effect'', which we can see by
7590 evaluating the variable @code{domesticated-animals}:
7591
7592 @smallexample
7593 @group
7594 domesticated-animals
7595 @result{} (horse cat dog)
7596 @end group
7597 @end smallexample
7598
7599 @noindent
7600 Indeed, the list is changed from @code{(horse cow sheep goat)} to
7601 @code{(horse cat dog)}. The @sc{cdr} of the list is changed from
7602 @code{(cow sheep goat)} to @code{(cat dog)}.
7603
7604 @node cons Exercise, , setcdr, car cdr & cons
7605 @section Exercise
7606
7607 Construct a list of four birds by evaluating several expressions with
7608 @code{cons}. Find out what happens when you @code{cons} a list onto
7609 itself. Replace the first element of the list of four birds with a
7610 fish. Replace the rest of that list with a list of other fish.
7611
7612 @node Cutting & Storing Text, List Implementation, car cdr & cons, Top
7613 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7614 @chapter Cutting and Storing Text
7615 @cindex Cutting and storing text
7616 @cindex Storing and cutting text
7617 @cindex Killing text
7618 @cindex Clipping text
7619 @cindex Erasing text
7620 @cindex Deleting text
7621
7622 Whenever you cut or clip text out of a buffer with a `kill' command in
7623 GNU Emacs, it is stored in a list and you can bring it back with a
7624 `yank' command.
7625
7626 (The use of the word `kill' in Emacs for processes which specifically
7627 @emph{do not} destroy the values of the entities is an unfortunate
7628 historical accident. A much more appropriate word would be `clip' since
7629 that is what the kill commands do; they clip text out of a buffer and
7630 put it into storage from which it can be brought back. I have often
7631 been tempted to replace globally all occurrences of `kill' in the Emacs
7632 sources with `clip' and all occurrences of `killed' with `clipped'.)
7633
7634 @menu
7635 * Storing Text:: Text is stored in a list.
7636 * zap-to-char:: Cutting out text up to a character.
7637 * kill-region:: Cutting text out of a region.
7638 * copy-region-as-kill:: A definition for copying text.
7639 * Digression into C:: Minor note on C programming language macros.
7640 * defvar:: How to give a variable an initial value.
7641 * cons & search-fwd Review::
7642 * search Exercises::
7643 @end menu
7644
7645 @node Storing Text, zap-to-char, Cutting & Storing Text, Cutting & Storing Text
7646 @ifnottex
7647 @unnumberedsec Storing Text in a List
7648 @end ifnottex
7649
7650 When text is cut out of a buffer, it is stored on a list. Successive
7651 pieces of text are stored on the list successively, so the list might
7652 look like this:
7653
7654 @smallexample
7655 ("a piece of text" "previous piece")
7656 @end smallexample
7657
7658 @need 1200
7659 @noindent
7660 The function @code{cons} can be used to create a new list from a piece
7661 of text (an `atom', to use the jargon) and an existing list, like
7662 this:
7663
7664 @smallexample
7665 @group
7666 (cons "another piece"
7667 '("a piece of text" "previous piece"))
7668 @end group
7669 @end smallexample
7670
7671 @need 1200
7672 @noindent
7673 If you evaluate this expression, a list of three elements will appear in
7674 the echo area:
7675
7676 @smallexample
7677 ("another piece" "a piece of text" "previous piece")
7678 @end smallexample
7679
7680 With the @code{car} and @code{nthcdr} functions, you can retrieve
7681 whichever piece of text you want. For example, in the following code,
7682 @code{nthcdr 1 @dots{}} returns the list with the first item removed;
7683 and the @code{car} returns the first element of that remainder---the
7684 second element of the original list:
7685
7686 @smallexample
7687 @group
7688 (car (nthcdr 1 '("another piece"
7689 "a piece of text"
7690 "previous piece")))
7691 @result{} "a piece of text"
7692 @end group
7693 @end smallexample
7694
7695 The actual functions in Emacs are more complex than this, of course.
7696 The code for cutting and retrieving text has to be written so that
7697 Emacs can figure out which element in the list you want---the first,
7698 second, third, or whatever. In addition, when you get to the end of
7699 the list, Emacs should give you the first element of the list, rather
7700 than nothing at all.
7701
7702 The list that holds the pieces of text is called the @dfn{kill ring}.
7703 This chapter leads up to a description of the kill ring and how it is
7704 used by first tracing how the @code{zap-to-char} function works. This
7705 function uses (or `calls') a function that invokes a function that
7706 manipulates the kill ring. Thus, before reaching the mountains, we
7707 climb the foothills.
7708
7709 A subsequent chapter describes how text that is cut from the buffer is
7710 retrieved. @xref{Yanking, , Yanking Text Back}.
7711
7712 @node zap-to-char, kill-region, Storing Text, Cutting & Storing Text
7713 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7714 @section @code{zap-to-char}
7715 @findex zap-to-char
7716
7717 The @code{zap-to-char} function changed little between GNU Emacs
7718 version 19 and GNU Emacs version 22. However, @code{zap-to-char}
7719 calls another function, @code{kill-region}, which enjoyed a major
7720 rewrite.
7721
7722 The @code{kill-region} function in Emacs 19 is complex, but does not
7723 use code that is important at this time. We will skip it.
7724
7725 The @code{kill-region} function in Emacs 22 is easier to read than the
7726 same function in Emacs 19 and introduces a very important concept,
7727 that of error handling. We will walk through the function.
7728
7729 But first, let us look at the interactive @code{zap-to-char} function.
7730
7731 @menu
7732 * Complete zap-to-char:: The complete implementation.
7733 * zap-to-char interactive:: A three part interactive expression.
7734 * zap-to-char body:: A short overview.
7735 * search-forward:: How to search for a string.
7736 * progn:: The @code{progn} special form.
7737 * Summing up zap-to-char:: Using @code{point} and @code{search-forward}.
7738 @end menu
7739
7740 @node Complete zap-to-char, zap-to-char interactive, zap-to-char, zap-to-char
7741 @ifnottex
7742 @unnumberedsubsec The Complete @code{zap-to-char} Implementation
7743 @end ifnottex
7744
7745 The @code{zap-to-char} function removes the text in the region between
7746 the location of the cursor (i.e., of point) up to and including the
7747 next occurrence of a specified character. The text that
7748 @code{zap-to-char} removes is put in the kill ring; and it can be
7749 retrieved from the kill ring by typing @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank}). If
7750 the command is given an argument, it removes text through that number
7751 of occurrences. Thus, if the cursor were at the beginning of this
7752 sentence and the character were @samp{s}, @samp{Thus} would be
7753 removed. If the argument were two, @samp{Thus, if the curs} would be
7754 removed, up to and including the @samp{s} in @samp{cursor}.
7755
7756 If the specified character is not found, @code{zap-to-char} will say
7757 ``Search failed'', tell you the character you typed, and not remove
7758 any text.
7759
7760 In order to determine how much text to remove, @code{zap-to-char} uses
7761 a search function. Searches are used extensively in code that
7762 manipulates text, and we will focus attention on them as well as on the
7763 deletion command.
7764
7765 @ignore
7766 @c GNU Emacs version 19
7767 (defun zap-to-char (arg char) ; version 19 implementation
7768 "Kill up to and including ARG'th occurrence of CHAR.
7769 Goes backward if ARG is negative; error if CHAR not found."
7770 (interactive "*p\ncZap to char: ")
7771 (kill-region (point)
7772 (progn
7773 (search-forward
7774 (char-to-string char) nil nil arg)
7775 (point))))
7776 @end ignore
7777
7778 @need 1250
7779 Here is the complete text of the version 22 implementation of the function:
7780
7781 @c GNU Emacs 22
7782 @smallexample
7783 @group
7784 (defun zap-to-char (arg char)
7785 "Kill up to and including ARG'th occurrence of CHAR.
7786 Case is ignored if `case-fold-search' is non-nil in the current buffer.
7787 Goes backward if ARG is negative; error if CHAR not found."
7788 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
7789 (if (char-table-p translation-table-for-input)
7790 (setq char (or (aref translation-table-for-input char) char)))
7791 (kill-region (point) (progn
7792 (search-forward (char-to-string char)
7793 nil nil arg)
7794 (point))))
7795 @end group
7796 @end smallexample
7797
7798 The documentation is thorough. You do need to know the jargon meaning
7799 of the word `kill'.
7800
7801 @node zap-to-char interactive, zap-to-char body, Complete zap-to-char, zap-to-char
7802 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7803 @subsection The @code{interactive} Expression
7804
7805 @need 800
7806 The interactive expression in the @code{zap-to-char} command looks like
7807 this:
7808
7809 @smallexample
7810 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
7811 @end smallexample
7812
7813 The part within quotation marks, @code{"p\ncZap to char:@: "}, specifies
7814 two different things. First, and most simply, is the @samp{p}.
7815 This part is separated from the next part by a newline, @samp{\n}.
7816 The @samp{p} means that the first argument to the function will be
7817 passed the value of a `processed prefix'. The prefix argument is
7818 passed by typing @kbd{C-u} and a number, or @kbd{M-} and a number. If
7819 the function is called interactively without a prefix, 1 is passed to
7820 this argument.
7821
7822 The second part of @code{"p\ncZap to char:@: "} is
7823 @samp{cZap to char:@: }. In this part, the lower case @samp{c}
7824 indicates that @code{interactive} expects a prompt and that the
7825 argument will be a character. The prompt follows the @samp{c} and is
7826 the string @samp{Zap to char:@: } (with a space after the colon to
7827 make it look good).
7828
7829 What all this does is prepare the arguments to @code{zap-to-char} so they
7830 are of the right type, and give the user a prompt.
7831
7832 In a read-only buffer, the @code{zap-to-char} function copies the text
7833 to the kill ring, but does not remove it. The echo area displays a
7834 message saying that the buffer is read-only. Also, the terminal may
7835 beep or blink at you.
7836
7837 @node zap-to-char body, search-forward, zap-to-char interactive, zap-to-char
7838 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7839 @subsection The Body of @code{zap-to-char}
7840
7841 The body of the @code{zap-to-char} function contains the code that
7842 kills (that is, removes) the text in the region from the current
7843 position of the cursor up to and including the specified character.
7844
7845 The first part of the code looks like this:
7846
7847 @smallexample
7848 (if (char-table-p translation-table-for-input)
7849 (setq char (or (aref translation-table-for-input char) char)))
7850 (kill-region (point) (progn
7851 (search-forward (char-to-string char) nil nil arg)
7852 (point)))
7853 @end smallexample
7854
7855 @noindent
7856 @code{char-table-p} is an hitherto unseen function. It determines
7857 whether its argument is a character table. When it is, it sets the
7858 character passed to @code{zap-to-char} to one of them, if that
7859 character exists, or to the character itself. (This becomes important
7860 for certain characters in non-European languages. The @code{aref}
7861 function extracts an element from an array. It is an array-specific
7862 function that is not described in this document. @xref{Arrays, ,
7863 Arrays, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
7864
7865 @noindent
7866 @code{(point)} is the current position of the cursor.
7867
7868 The next part of the code is an expression using @code{progn}. The body
7869 of the @code{progn} consists of calls to @code{search-forward} and
7870 @code{point}.
7871
7872 It is easier to understand how @code{progn} works after learning about
7873 @code{search-forward}, so we will look at @code{search-forward} and
7874 then at @code{progn}.
7875
7876 @node search-forward, progn, zap-to-char body, zap-to-char
7877 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7878 @subsection The @code{search-forward} Function
7879 @findex search-forward
7880
7881 The @code{search-forward} function is used to locate the
7882 zapped-for-character in @code{zap-to-char}. If the search is
7883 successful, @code{search-forward} leaves point immediately after the
7884 last character in the target string. (In @code{zap-to-char}, the
7885 target string is just one character long. @code{zap-to-char} uses the
7886 function @code{char-to-string} to ensure that the computer treats that
7887 character as a string.) If the search is backwards,
7888 @code{search-forward} leaves point just before the first character in
7889 the target. Also, @code{search-forward} returns @code{t} for true.
7890 (Moving point is therefore a `side effect'.)
7891
7892 @need 1250
7893 In @code{zap-to-char}, the @code{search-forward} function looks like this:
7894
7895 @smallexample
7896 (search-forward (char-to-string char) nil nil arg)
7897 @end smallexample
7898
7899 The @code{search-forward} function takes four arguments:
7900
7901 @enumerate
7902 @item
7903 The first argument is the target, what is searched for. This must be a
7904 string, such as @samp{"z"}.
7905
7906 As it happens, the argument passed to @code{zap-to-char} is a single
7907 character. Because of the way computers are built, the Lisp
7908 interpreter may treat a single character as being different from a
7909 string of characters. Inside the computer, a single character has a
7910 different electronic format than a string of one character. (A single
7911 character can often be recorded in the computer using exactly one
7912 byte; but a string may be longer, and the computer needs to be ready
7913 for this.) Since the @code{search-forward} function searches for a
7914 string, the character that the @code{zap-to-char} function receives as
7915 its argument must be converted inside the computer from one format to
7916 the other; otherwise the @code{search-forward} function will fail.
7917 The @code{char-to-string} function is used to make this conversion.
7918
7919 @item
7920 The second argument bounds the search; it is specified as a position in
7921 the buffer. In this case, the search can go to the end of the buffer,
7922 so no bound is set and the second argument is @code{nil}.
7923
7924 @item
7925 The third argument tells the function what it should do if the search
7926 fails---it can signal an error (and print a message) or it can return
7927 @code{nil}. A @code{nil} as the third argument causes the function to
7928 signal an error when the search fails.
7929
7930 @item
7931 The fourth argument to @code{search-forward} is the repeat count---how
7932 many occurrences of the string to look for. This argument is optional
7933 and if the function is called without a repeat count, this argument is
7934 passed the value 1. If this argument is negative, the search goes
7935 backwards.
7936 @end enumerate
7937
7938 @need 800
7939 In template form, a @code{search-forward} expression looks like this:
7940
7941 @smallexample
7942 @group
7943 (search-forward "@var{target-string}"
7944 @var{limit-of-search}
7945 @var{what-to-do-if-search-fails}
7946 @var{repeat-count})
7947 @end group
7948 @end smallexample
7949
7950 We will look at @code{progn} next.
7951
7952 @node progn, Summing up zap-to-char, search-forward, zap-to-char
7953 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7954 @subsection The @code{progn} Special Form
7955 @findex progn
7956
7957 @code{progn} is a special form that causes each of its arguments to be
7958 evaluated in sequence and then returns the value of the last one. The
7959 preceding expressions are evaluated only for the side effects they
7960 perform. The values produced by them are discarded.
7961
7962 @need 800
7963 The template for a @code{progn} expression is very simple:
7964
7965 @smallexample
7966 @group
7967 (progn
7968 @var{body}@dots{})
7969 @end group
7970 @end smallexample
7971
7972 In @code{zap-to-char}, the @code{progn} expression has to do two things:
7973 put point in exactly the right position; and return the location of
7974 point so that @code{kill-region} will know how far to kill to.
7975
7976 The first argument to the @code{progn} is @code{search-forward}. When
7977 @code{search-forward} finds the string, the function leaves point
7978 immediately after the last character in the target string. (In this
7979 case the target string is just one character long.) If the search is
7980 backwards, @code{search-forward} leaves point just before the first
7981 character in the target. The movement of point is a side effect.
7982
7983 The second and last argument to @code{progn} is the expression
7984 @code{(point)}. This expression returns the value of point, which in
7985 this case will be the location to which it has been moved by
7986 @code{search-forward}. (In the source, a line that tells the function
7987 to go to the previous character, if it is going forward, was commented
7988 out in 1999; I don't remember whether that feature or mis-feature was
7989 ever a part of the distributed source.) The value of @code{point} is
7990 returned by the @code{progn} expression and is passed to
7991 @code{kill-region} as @code{kill-region}'s second argument.
7992
7993 @node Summing up zap-to-char, , progn, zap-to-char
7994 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7995 @subsection Summing up @code{zap-to-char}
7996
7997 Now that we have seen how @code{search-forward} and @code{progn} work,
7998 we can see how the @code{zap-to-char} function works as a whole.
7999
8000 The first argument to @code{kill-region} is the position of the cursor
8001 when the @code{zap-to-char} command is given---the value of point at
8002 that time. Within the @code{progn}, the search function then moves
8003 point to just after the zapped-to-character and @code{point} returns the
8004 value of this location. The @code{kill-region} function puts together
8005 these two values of point, the first one as the beginning of the region
8006 and the second one as the end of the region, and removes the region.
8007
8008 The @code{progn} special form is necessary because the
8009 @code{kill-region} command takes two arguments; and it would fail if
8010 @code{search-forward} and @code{point} expressions were written in
8011 sequence as two additional arguments. The @code{progn} expression is
8012 a single argument to @code{kill-region} and returns the one value that
8013 @code{kill-region} needs for its second argument.
8014
8015 @node kill-region, copy-region-as-kill, zap-to-char, Cutting & Storing Text
8016 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
8017 @section @code{kill-region}
8018 @findex kill-region
8019
8020 The @code{zap-to-char} function uses the @code{kill-region} function.
8021 This function clips text from a region and copies that text to
8022 the kill ring, from which it may be retrieved.
8023
8024 @ignore
8025 GNU Emacs 22:
8026
8027 (defun kill-region (beg end &optional yank-handler)
8028 "Kill (\"cut\") text between point and mark.
8029 This deletes the text from the buffer and saves it in the kill ring.
8030 The command \\[yank] can retrieve it from there.
8031 \(If you want to kill and then yank immediately, use \\[kill-ring-save].)
8032
8033 If you want to append the killed region to the last killed text,
8034 use \\[append-next-kill] before \\[kill-region].
8035
8036 If the buffer is read-only, Emacs will beep and refrain from deleting
8037 the text, but put the text in the kill ring anyway. This means that
8038 you can use the killing commands to copy text from a read-only buffer.
8039
8040 This is the primitive for programs to kill text (as opposed to deleting it).
8041 Supply two arguments, character positions indicating the stretch of text
8042 to be killed.
8043 Any command that calls this function is a \"kill command\".
8044 If the previous command was also a kill command,
8045 the text killed this time appends to the text killed last time
8046 to make one entry in the kill ring.
8047
8048 In Lisp code, optional third arg YANK-HANDLER, if non-nil,
8049 specifies the yank-handler text property to be set on the killed
8050 text. See `insert-for-yank'."
8051 ;; Pass point first, then mark, because the order matters
8052 ;; when calling kill-append.
8053 (interactive (list (point) (mark)))
8054 (unless (and beg end)
8055 (error "The mark is not set now, so there is no region"))
8056 (condition-case nil
8057 (let ((string (filter-buffer-substring beg end t)))
8058 (when string ;STRING is nil if BEG = END
8059 ;; Add that string to the kill ring, one way or another.
8060 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8061 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
8062 (kill-new string nil yank-handler)))
8063 (when (or string (eq last-command 'kill-region))
8064 (setq this-command 'kill-region))
8065 nil)
8066 ((buffer-read-only text-read-only)
8067 ;; The code above failed because the buffer, or some of the characters
8068 ;; in the region, are read-only.
8069 ;; We should beep, in case the user just isn't aware of this.
8070 ;; However, there's no harm in putting
8071 ;; the region's text in the kill ring, anyway.
8072 (copy-region-as-kill beg end)
8073 ;; Set this-command now, so it will be set even if we get an error.
8074 (setq this-command 'kill-region)
8075 ;; This should barf, if appropriate, and give us the correct error.
8076 (if kill-read-only-ok
8077 (progn (message "Read only text copied to kill ring") nil)
8078 ;; Signal an error if the buffer is read-only.
8079 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
8080 ;; If the buffer isn't read-only, the text is.
8081 (signal 'text-read-only (list (current-buffer)))))))
8082 @end ignore
8083
8084 The Emacs 22 version of that function uses @code{condition-case} and
8085 @code{copy-region-as-kill}, both of which we will explain.
8086 @code{condition-case} is an important special form.
8087
8088 In essence, the @code{kill-region} function calls
8089 @code{condition-case}, which takes three arguments. In this function,
8090 the first argument does nothing. The second argument contains the
8091 code that does the work when all goes well. The third argument
8092 contains the code that is called in the event of an error.
8093
8094 @menu
8095 * Complete kill-region:: The function definition.
8096 * condition-case:: Dealing with a problem.
8097 * Lisp macro::
8098 @end menu
8099
8100 @node Complete kill-region, condition-case, kill-region, kill-region
8101 @ifnottex
8102 @unnumberedsubsec The Complete @code{kill-region} Definition
8103 @end ifnottex
8104
8105 @need 1200
8106 We will go through the @code{condition-case} code in a moment. First,
8107 let us look at the definition of @code{kill-region}, with comments
8108 added:
8109
8110 @c GNU Emacs 22:
8111 @smallexample
8112 @group
8113 (defun kill-region (beg end)
8114 "Kill (\"cut\") text between point and mark.
8115 This deletes the text from the buffer and saves it in the kill ring.
8116 The command \\[yank] can retrieve it from there. @dots{} "
8117 @end group
8118
8119 @group
8120 ;; @bullet{} Since order matters, pass point first.
8121 (interactive (list (point) (mark)))
8122 ;; @bullet{} And tell us if we cannot cut the text.
8123 ;; `unless' is an `if' without a then-part.
8124 (unless (and beg end)
8125 (error "The mark is not set now, so there is no region"))
8126 @end group
8127
8128 @group
8129 ;; @bullet{} `condition-case' takes three arguments.
8130 ;; If the first argument is nil, as it is here,
8131 ;; information about the error signal is not
8132 ;; stored for use by another function.
8133 (condition-case nil
8134 @end group
8135
8136 @group
8137 ;; @bullet{} The second argument to `condition-case' tells the
8138 ;; Lisp interpreter what to do when all goes well.
8139 @end group
8140
8141 @group
8142 ;; It starts with a `let' function that extracts the string
8143 ;; and tests whether it exists. If so (that is what the
8144 ;; `when' checks), it calls an `if' function that determines
8145 ;; whether the previous command was another call to
8146 ;; `kill-region'; if it was, then the new text is appended to
8147 ;; the previous text; if not, then a different function,
8148 ;; `kill-new', is called.
8149 @end group
8150
8151 @group
8152 ;; The `kill-append' function concatenates the new string and
8153 ;; the old. The `kill-new' function inserts text into a new
8154 ;; item in the kill ring.
8155 @end group
8156
8157 @group
8158 ;; `when' is an `if' without an else-part. The second `when'
8159 ;; again checks whether the current string exists; in
8160 ;; addition, it checks whether the previous command was
8161 ;; another call to `kill-region'. If one or the other
8162 ;; condition is true, then it sets the current command to
8163 ;; be `kill-region'.
8164 @end group
8165 @group
8166 (let ((string (filter-buffer-substring beg end t)))
8167 (when string ;STRING is nil if BEG = END
8168 ;; Add that string to the kill ring, one way or another.
8169 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8170 @end group
8171 @group
8172 ;; @minus{} `yank-handler' is an optional argument to
8173 ;; `kill-region' that tells the `kill-append' and
8174 ;; `kill-new' functions how deal with properties
8175 ;; added to the text, such as `bold' or `italics'.
8176 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
8177 (kill-new string nil yank-handler)))
8178 (when (or string (eq last-command 'kill-region))
8179 (setq this-command 'kill-region))
8180 nil)
8181 @end group
8182
8183 @group
8184 ;; @bullet{} The third argument to `condition-case' tells the interpreter
8185 ;; what to do with an error.
8186 @end group
8187 @group
8188 ;; The third argument has a conditions part and a body part.
8189 ;; If the conditions are met (in this case,
8190 ;; if text or buffer are read-only)
8191 ;; then the body is executed.
8192 @end group
8193 @group
8194 ;; The first part of the third argument is the following:
8195 ((buffer-read-only text-read-only) ;; the if-part
8196 ;; @dots{} the then-part
8197 (copy-region-as-kill beg end)
8198 @end group
8199 @group
8200 ;; Next, also as part of the then-part, set this-command, so
8201 ;; it will be set in an error
8202 (setq this-command 'kill-region)
8203 ;; Finally, in the then-part, send a message if you may copy
8204 ;; the text to the kill ring without signaling an error, but
8205 ;; don't if you may not.
8206 @end group
8207 @group
8208 (if kill-read-only-ok
8209 (progn (message "Read only text copied to kill ring") nil)
8210 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
8211 ;; If the buffer isn't read-only, the text is.
8212 (signal 'text-read-only (list (current-buffer)))))
8213 @end group
8214 @end smallexample
8215
8216 @ignore
8217 @c v 21
8218 @smallexample
8219 @group
8220 (defun kill-region (beg end)
8221 "Kill between point and mark.
8222 The text is deleted but saved in the kill ring."
8223 (interactive "r")
8224 @end group
8225
8226 @group
8227 ;; 1. `condition-case' takes three arguments.
8228 ;; If the first argument is nil, as it is here,
8229 ;; information about the error signal is not
8230 ;; stored for use by another function.
8231 (condition-case nil
8232 @end group
8233
8234 @group
8235 ;; 2. The second argument to `condition-case'
8236 ;; tells the Lisp interpreter what to do when all goes well.
8237 @end group
8238
8239 @group
8240 ;; The `delete-and-extract-region' function usually does the
8241 ;; work. If the beginning and ending of the region are both
8242 ;; the same, then the variable `string' will be empty, or nil
8243 (let ((string (delete-and-extract-region beg end)))
8244 @end group
8245
8246 @group
8247 ;; `when' is an `if' clause that cannot take an `else-part'.
8248 ;; Emacs normally sets the value of `last-command' to the
8249 ;; previous command.
8250 @end group
8251 @group
8252 ;; `kill-append' concatenates the new string and the old.
8253 ;; `kill-new' inserts text into a new item in the kill ring.
8254 (when string
8255 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8256 ;; if true, prepend string
8257 (kill-append string (< end beg))
8258 (kill-new string)))
8259 (setq this-command 'kill-region))
8260 @end group
8261
8262 @group
8263 ;; 3. The third argument to `condition-case' tells the interpreter
8264 ;; what to do with an error.
8265 @end group
8266 @group
8267 ;; The third argument has a conditions part and a body part.
8268 ;; If the conditions are met (in this case,
8269 ;; if text or buffer are read-only)
8270 ;; then the body is executed.
8271 @end group
8272 @group
8273 ((buffer-read-only text-read-only) ;; this is the if-part
8274 ;; then...
8275 (copy-region-as-kill beg end)
8276 @end group
8277 @group
8278 (if kill-read-only-ok ;; usually this variable is nil
8279 (message "Read only text copied to kill ring")
8280 ;; or else, signal an error if the buffer is read-only;
8281 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
8282 ;; and, in any case, signal that the text is read-only.
8283 (signal 'text-read-only (list (current-buffer)))))))
8284 @end group
8285 @end smallexample
8286 @end ignore
8287
8288 @node condition-case, Lisp macro, Complete kill-region, kill-region
8289 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
8290 @subsection @code{condition-case}
8291 @findex condition-case
8292
8293 As we have seen earlier (@pxref{Making Errors, , Generate an Error
8294 Message}), when the Emacs Lisp interpreter has trouble evaluating an
8295 expression, it provides you with help; in the jargon, this is called
8296 ``signaling an error''. Usually, the computer stops the program and
8297 shows you a message.
8298
8299 However, some programs undertake complicated actions. They should not
8300 simply stop on an error. In the @code{kill-region} function, the most
8301 likely error is that you will try to kill text that is read-only and
8302 cannot be removed. So the @code{kill-region} function contains code
8303 to handle this circumstance. This code, which makes up the body of
8304 the @code{kill-region} function, is inside of a @code{condition-case}
8305 special form.
8306
8307 @need 800
8308 The template for @code{condition-case} looks like this:
8309
8310 @smallexample
8311 @group
8312 (condition-case
8313 @var{var}
8314 @var{bodyform}
8315 @var{error-handler}@dots{})
8316 @end group
8317 @end smallexample
8318
8319 The second argument, @var{bodyform}, is straightforward. The
8320 @code{condition-case} special form causes the Lisp interpreter to
8321 evaluate the code in @var{bodyform}. If no error occurs, the special
8322 form returns the code's value and produces the side-effects, if any.
8323
8324 In short, the @var{bodyform} part of a @code{condition-case}
8325 expression determines what should happen when everything works
8326 correctly.
8327
8328 However, if an error occurs, among its other actions, the function
8329 generating the error signal will define one or more error condition
8330 names.
8331
8332 An error handler is the third argument to @code{condition case}.
8333 An error handler has two parts, a @var{condition-name} and a
8334 @var{body}. If the @var{condition-name} part of an error handler
8335 matches a condition name generated by an error, then the @var{body}
8336 part of the error handler is run.
8337
8338 As you will expect, the @var{condition-name} part of an error handler
8339 may be either a single condition name or a list of condition names.
8340
8341 Also, a complete @code{condition-case} expression may contain more
8342 than one error handler. When an error occurs, the first applicable
8343 handler is run.
8344
8345 Lastly, the first argument to the @code{condition-case} expression,
8346 the @var{var} argument, is sometimes bound to a variable that
8347 contains information about the error. However, if that argument is
8348 nil, as is the case in @code{kill-region}, that information is
8349 discarded.
8350
8351 @need 1200
8352 In brief, in the @code{kill-region} function, the code
8353 @code{condition-case} works like this:
8354
8355 @smallexample
8356 @group
8357 @var{If no errors}, @var{run only this code}
8358 @var{but}, @var{if errors}, @var{run this other code}.
8359 @end group
8360 @end smallexample
8361
8362 @ignore
8363 2006 Oct 24
8364 In Emacs 22,
8365 copy-region-as-kill is short, 12 lines, and uses
8366 filter-buffer-substring, which is longer, 39 lines
8367 and has delete-and-extract-region in it.
8368 delete-and-extract-region is written in C.
8369
8370 see Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
8371 this is line 8054
8372 Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar} includes line 8350
8373 @end ignore
8374
8375 @node Lisp macro, , condition-case, kill-region
8376 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
8377 @subsection Lisp macro
8378 @cindex Macro, lisp
8379 @cindex Lisp macro
8380
8381 The part of the @code{condition-case} expression that is evaluated in
8382 the expectation that all goes well has a @code{when}. The code uses
8383 @code{when} to determine whether the @code{string} variable points to
8384 text that exists.
8385
8386 A @code{when} expression is simply a programmers' convenience. It is
8387 an @code{if} without the possibility of an else clause. In your mind,
8388 you can replace @code{when} with @code{if} and understand what goes
8389 on. That is what the Lisp interpreter does.
8390
8391 Technically speaking, @code{when} is a Lisp macro. A Lisp @dfn{macro}
8392 enables you to define new control constructs and other language
8393 features. It tells the interpreter how to compute another Lisp
8394 expression which will in turn compute the value. In this case, the
8395 `other expression' is an @code{if} expression.
8396
8397 The @code{kill-region} function definition also has an @code{unless}
8398 macro; it is the converse of @code{when}. The @code{unless} macro is
8399 an @code{if} without a then clause
8400
8401 For more about Lisp macros, see @ref{Macros, , Macros, elisp, The GNU
8402 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}. The C programming language also
8403 provides macros. These are different, but also useful.
8404
8405 @ignore
8406 We will briefly look at C macros in
8407 @ref{Digression into C}.
8408 @end ignore
8409
8410 @need 1200
8411 Regarding the @code{when} macro, in the @code{condition-case}
8412 expression, when the string has content, then another conditional
8413 expression is executed. This is an @code{if} with both a then-part
8414 and an else-part.
8415
8416 @smallexample
8417 @group
8418 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8419 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
8420 (kill-new string nil yank-handler))
8421 @end group
8422 @end smallexample
8423
8424 The then-part is evaluated if the previous command was another call to
8425 @code{kill-region}; if not, the else-part is evaluated.
8426
8427 @code{yank-handler} is an optional argument to @code{kill-region} that
8428 tells the @code{kill-append} and @code{kill-new} functions how deal
8429 with properties added to the text, such as `bold' or `italics'.
8430
8431 @code{last-command} is a variable that comes with Emacs that we have
8432 not seen before. Normally, whenever a function is executed, Emacs
8433 sets the value of @code{last-command} to the previous command.
8434
8435 @need 1200
8436 In this segment of the definition, the @code{if} expression checks
8437 whether the previous command was @code{kill-region}. If it was,
8438
8439 @smallexample
8440 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
8441 @end smallexample
8442
8443 @noindent
8444 concatenates a copy of the newly clipped text to the just previously
8445 clipped text in the kill ring.
8446
8447 @node copy-region-as-kill, Digression into C, kill-region, Cutting & Storing Text
8448 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
8449 @section @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8450 @findex copy-region-as-kill
8451 @findex nthcdr
8452
8453 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function copies a region of text from a
8454 buffer and (via either @code{kill-append} or @code{kill-new}) saves it
8455 in the @code{kill-ring}.
8456
8457 If you call @code{copy-region-as-kill} immediately after a
8458 @code{kill-region} command, Emacs appends the newly copied text to the
8459 previously copied text. This means that if you yank back the text, you
8460 get it all, from both this and the previous operation. On the other
8461 hand, if some other command precedes the @code{copy-region-as-kill},
8462 the function copies the text into a separate entry in the kill ring.
8463
8464 @menu
8465 * Complete copy-region-as-kill:: The complete function definition.
8466 * copy-region-as-kill body:: The body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}.
8467 @end menu
8468
8469 @node Complete copy-region-as-kill, copy-region-as-kill body, copy-region-as-kill, copy-region-as-kill
8470 @ifnottex
8471 @unnumberedsubsec The complete @code{copy-region-as-kill} function definition
8472 @end ifnottex
8473
8474 @need 1200
8475 Here is the complete text of the version 22 @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8476 function:
8477
8478 @smallexample
8479 @group
8480 (defun copy-region-as-kill (beg end)
8481 "Save the region as if killed, but don't kill it.
8482 In Transient Mark mode, deactivate the mark.
8483 If `interprogram-cut-function' is non-nil, also save the text for a window
8484 system cut and paste."
8485 (interactive "r")
8486 @end group
8487 @group
8488 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8489 (kill-append (filter-buffer-substring beg end) (< end beg))
8490 (kill-new (filter-buffer-substring beg end)))
8491 @end group
8492 @group
8493 (if transient-mark-mode
8494 (setq deactivate-mark t))
8495 nil)
8496 @end group
8497 @end smallexample
8498
8499 @need 800
8500 As usual, this function can be divided into its component parts:
8501
8502 @smallexample
8503 @group
8504 (defun copy-region-as-kill (@var{argument-list})
8505 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
8506 (interactive "r")
8507 @var{body}@dots{})
8508 @end group
8509 @end smallexample
8510
8511 The arguments are @code{beg} and @code{end} and the function is
8512 interactive with @code{"r"}, so the two arguments must refer to the
8513 beginning and end of the region. If you have been reading though this
8514 document from the beginning, understanding these parts of a function is
8515 almost becoming routine.
8516
8517 The documentation is somewhat confusing unless you remember that the
8518 word `kill' has a meaning different from usual. The `Transient Mark'
8519 and @code{interprogram-cut-function} comments explain certain
8520 side-effects.
8521
8522 After you once set a mark, a buffer always contains a region. If you
8523 wish, you can use Transient Mark mode to highlight the region
8524 temporarily. (No one wants to highlight the region all the time, so
8525 Transient Mark mode highlights it only at appropriate times. Many
8526 people turn off Transient Mark mode, so the region is never
8527 highlighted.)
8528
8529 Also, a windowing system allows you to copy, cut, and paste among
8530 different programs. In the X windowing system, for example, the
8531 @code{interprogram-cut-function} function is @code{x-select-text},
8532 which works with the windowing system's equivalent of the Emacs kill
8533 ring.
8534
8535 The body of the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function starts with an
8536 @code{if} clause. What this clause does is distinguish between two
8537 different situations: whether or not this command is executed
8538 immediately after a previous @code{kill-region} command. In the first
8539 case, the new region is appended to the previously copied text.
8540 Otherwise, it is inserted into the beginning of the kill ring as a
8541 separate piece of text from the previous piece.
8542
8543 The last two lines of the function prevent the region from lighting up
8544 if Transient Mark mode is turned on.
8545
8546 The body of @code{copy-region-as-kill} merits discussion in detail.
8547
8548 @node copy-region-as-kill body, , Complete copy-region-as-kill, copy-region-as-kill
8549 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
8550 @subsection The Body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8551
8552 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function works in much the same way as
8553 the @code{kill-region} function. Both are written so that two or more
8554 kills in a row combine their text into a single entry. If you yank
8555 back the text from the kill ring, you get it all in one piece.
8556 Moreover, kills that kill forward from the current position of the
8557 cursor are added to the end of the previously copied text and commands
8558 that copy text backwards add it to the beginning of the previously
8559 copied text. This way, the words in the text stay in the proper
8560 order.
8561
8562 Like @code{kill-region}, the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function makes
8563 use of the @code{last-command} variable that keeps track of the
8564 previous Emacs command.
8565
8566 @menu
8567 * last-command & this-command::
8568 * kill-append function::
8569 * kill-new function::
8570 @end menu
8571
8572 @node last-command & this-command, kill-append function, copy-region-as-kill body, copy-region-as-kill body
8573 @ifnottex
8574 @unnumberedsubsubsec @code{last-command} and @code{this-command}
8575 @end ifnottex
8576
8577 Normally, whenever a function is executed, Emacs sets the value of
8578 @code{this-command} to the function being executed (which in this case
8579 would be @code{copy-region-as-kill}). At the same time, Emacs sets
8580 the value of @code{last-command} to the previous value of
8581 @code{this-command}.
8582
8583 In the first part of the body of the @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8584 function, an @code{if} expression determines whether the value of
8585 @code{last-command} is @code{kill-region}. If so, the then-part of
8586 the @code{if} expression is evaluated; it uses the @code{kill-append}
8587 function to concatenate the text copied at this call to the function
8588 with the text already in the first element (the @sc{car}) of the kill
8589 ring. On the other hand, if the value of @code{last-command} is not
8590 @code{kill-region}, then the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function
8591 attaches a new element to the kill ring using the @code{kill-new}
8592 function.
8593
8594 @need 1250
8595 The @code{if} expression reads as follows; it uses @code{eq}:
8596
8597 @smallexample
8598 @group
8599 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8600 ;; @r{then-part}
8601 (kill-append (filter-buffer-substring beg end) (< end beg))
8602 ;; @r{else-part}
8603 (kill-new (filter-buffer-substring beg end)))
8604 @end group
8605 @end smallexample
8606
8607 @findex filter-buffer-substring
8608 (The @code{filter-buffer-substring} function returns a filtered
8609 substring of the buffer, if any. Optionally---the arguments are not
8610 here, so neither is done---the function may delete the initial text or
8611 return the text without its properties; this function is a replacement
8612 for the older @code{buffer-substring} function, which came before text
8613 properties were implemented.)
8614
8615 @findex eq @r{(example of use)}
8616 @noindent
8617 The @code{eq} function tests whether its first argument is the same Lisp
8618 object as its second argument. The @code{eq} function is similar to the
8619 @code{equal} function in that it is used to test for equality, but
8620 differs in that it determines whether two representations are actually
8621 the same object inside the computer, but with different names.
8622 @code{equal} determines whether the structure and contents of two
8623 expressions are the same.
8624
8625 If the previous command was @code{kill-region}, then the Emacs Lisp
8626 interpreter calls the @code{kill-append} function
8627
8628 @node kill-append function, kill-new function, last-command & this-command, copy-region-as-kill body
8629 @unnumberedsubsubsec The @code{kill-append} function
8630 @findex kill-append
8631
8632 @need 800
8633 The @code{kill-append} function looks like this:
8634
8635 @c in GNU Emacs 22
8636 @smallexample
8637 @group
8638 (defun kill-append (string before-p &optional yank-handler)
8639 "Append STRING to the end of the latest kill in the kill ring.
8640 If BEFORE-P is non-nil, prepend STRING to the kill.
8641 @dots{} "
8642 (let* ((cur (car kill-ring)))
8643 (kill-new (if before-p (concat string cur) (concat cur string))
8644 (or (= (length cur) 0)
8645 (equal yank-handler
8646 (get-text-property 0 'yank-handler cur)))
8647 yank-handler)))
8648 @end group
8649 @end smallexample
8650
8651 @ignore
8652 was:
8653 (defun kill-append (string before-p)
8654 "Append STRING to the end of the latest kill in the kill ring.
8655 If BEFORE-P is non-nil, prepend STRING to the kill.
8656 If `interprogram-cut-function' is set, pass the resulting kill to
8657 it."
8658 (kill-new (if before-p
8659 (concat string (car kill-ring))
8660 (concat (car kill-ring) string))
8661 t))
8662 @end ignore
8663
8664 @noindent
8665 The @code{kill-append} function is fairly straightforward. It uses
8666 the @code{kill-new} function, which we will discuss in more detail in
8667 a moment.
8668
8669 (Also, the function provides an optional argument called
8670 @code{yank-handler}; when invoked, this argument tells the function
8671 how to deal with properties added to the text, such as `bold' or
8672 `italics'.)
8673
8674 @c !!! bug in GNU Emacs 22 version of kill-append ?
8675 It has a @code{let*} function to set the value of the first element of
8676 the kill ring to @code{cur}. (I do not know why the function does not
8677 use @code{let} instead; only one value is set in the expression.
8678 Perhaps this is a bug that produces no problems?)
8679
8680 Consider the conditional that is one of the two arguments to
8681 @code{kill-new}. It uses @code{concat} to concatenate the new text to
8682 the @sc{car} of the kill ring. Whether it prepends or appends the
8683 text depends on the results of an @code{if} expression:
8684
8685 @smallexample
8686 @group
8687 (if before-p ; @r{if-part}
8688 (concat string cur) ; @r{then-part}
8689 (concat cur string)) ; @r{else-part}
8690 @end group
8691 @end smallexample
8692
8693 @noindent
8694 If the region being killed is before the region that was killed in the
8695 last command, then it should be prepended before the material that was
8696 saved in the previous kill; and conversely, if the killed text follows
8697 what was just killed, it should be appended after the previous text.
8698 The @code{if} expression depends on the predicate @code{before-p} to
8699 decide whether the newly saved text should be put before or after the
8700 previously saved text.
8701
8702 The symbol @code{before-p} is the name of one of the arguments to
8703 @code{kill-append}. When the @code{kill-append} function is
8704 evaluated, it is bound to the value returned by evaluating the actual
8705 argument. In this case, this is the expression @code{(< end beg)}.
8706 This expression does not directly determine whether the killed text in
8707 this command is located before or after the kill text of the last
8708 command; what it does is determine whether the value of the variable
8709 @code{end} is less than the value of the variable @code{beg}. If it
8710 is, it means that the user is most likely heading towards the
8711 beginning of the buffer. Also, the result of evaluating the predicate
8712 expression, @code{(< end beg)}, will be true and the text will be
8713 prepended before the previous text. On the other hand, if the value of
8714 the variable @code{end} is greater than the value of the variable
8715 @code{beg}, the text will be appended after the previous text.
8716
8717 @need 800
8718 When the newly saved text will be prepended, then the string with the new
8719 text will be concatenated before the old text:
8720
8721 @smallexample
8722 (concat string cur)
8723 @end smallexample
8724
8725 @need 1200
8726 @noindent
8727 But if the text will be appended, it will be concatenated
8728 after the old text:
8729
8730 @smallexample
8731 (concat cur string))
8732 @end smallexample
8733
8734 To understand how this works, we first need to review the
8735 @code{concat} function. The @code{concat} function links together or
8736 unites two strings of text. The result is a string. For example:
8737
8738 @smallexample
8739 @group
8740 (concat "abc" "def")
8741 @result{} "abcdef"
8742 @end group
8743
8744 @group
8745 (concat "new "
8746 (car '("first element" "second element")))
8747 @result{} "new first element"
8748
8749 (concat (car
8750 '("first element" "second element")) " modified")
8751 @result{} "first element modified"
8752 @end group
8753 @end smallexample
8754
8755 We can now make sense of @code{kill-append}: it modifies the contents
8756 of the kill ring. The kill ring is a list, each element of which is
8757 saved text. The @code{kill-append} function uses the @code{kill-new}
8758 function which in turn uses the @code{setcar} function.
8759
8760 @node kill-new function, , kill-append function, copy-region-as-kill body
8761 @unnumberedsubsubsec The @code{kill-new} function
8762 @findex kill-new
8763
8764 @c in GNU Emacs 22, additional documentation to kill-new:
8765 @ignore
8766 Optional third arguments YANK-HANDLER controls how the STRING is later
8767 inserted into a buffer; see `insert-for-yank' for details.
8768 When a yank handler is specified, STRING must be non-empty (the yank
8769 handler, if non-nil, is stored as a `yank-handler' text property on STRING).
8770
8771 When the yank handler has a non-nil PARAM element, the original STRING
8772 argument is not used by `insert-for-yank'. However, since Lisp code
8773 may access and use elements from the kill ring directly, the STRING
8774 argument should still be a \"useful\" string for such uses."
8775 @end ignore
8776 @need 1200
8777 The @code{kill-new} function looks like this:
8778
8779 @smallexample
8780 @group
8781 (defun kill-new (string &optional replace yank-handler)
8782 "Make STRING the latest kill in the kill ring.
8783 Set `kill-ring-yank-pointer' to point to it.
8784
8785 If `interprogram-cut-function' is non-nil, apply it to STRING.
8786 Optional second argument REPLACE non-nil means that STRING will replace
8787 the front of the kill ring, rather than being added to the list.
8788 @dots{}"
8789 @end group
8790 @group
8791 (if (> (length string) 0)
8792 (if yank-handler
8793 (put-text-property 0 (length string)
8794 'yank-handler yank-handler string))
8795 (if yank-handler
8796 (signal 'args-out-of-range
8797 (list string "yank-handler specified for empty string"))))
8798 @end group
8799 @group
8800 (if (fboundp 'menu-bar-update-yank-menu)
8801 (menu-bar-update-yank-menu string (and replace (car kill-ring))))
8802 @end group
8803 @group
8804 (if (and replace kill-ring)
8805 (setcar kill-ring string)
8806 (push string kill-ring)
8807 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8808 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil)))
8809 @end group
8810 @group
8811 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
8812 (if interprogram-cut-function
8813 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
8814 @end group
8815 @end smallexample
8816 @ignore
8817 was:
8818 (defun kill-new (string &optional replace)
8819 "Make STRING the latest kill in the kill ring.
8820 Set the kill-ring-yank pointer to point to it.
8821 If `interprogram-cut-function' is non-nil, apply it to STRING.
8822 Optional second argument REPLACE non-nil means that STRING will replace
8823 the front of the kill ring, rather than being added to the list."
8824 (and (fboundp 'menu-bar-update-yank-menu)
8825 (menu-bar-update-yank-menu string (and replace (car kill-ring))))
8826 (if (and replace kill-ring)
8827 (setcar kill-ring string)
8828 (setq kill-ring (cons string kill-ring))
8829 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8830 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil)))
8831 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
8832 (if interprogram-cut-function
8833 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
8834 @end ignore
8835
8836 (Notice that the function is not interactive.)
8837
8838 As usual, we can look at this function in parts.
8839
8840 The function definition has an optional @code{yank-handler} argument,
8841 which when invoked tells the function how to deal with properties
8842 added to the text, such as `bold' or `italics'. We will skip that.
8843
8844 @need 1200
8845 The first line of the documentation makes sense:
8846
8847 @smallexample
8848 Make STRING the latest kill in the kill ring.
8849 @end smallexample
8850
8851 @noindent
8852 Let's skip over the rest of the documentation for the moment.
8853
8854 @noindent
8855 Also, let's skip over the initial @code{if} expression and those lines
8856 of code involving @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu}. We will explain
8857 them below.
8858
8859 @need 1200
8860 The critical lines are these:
8861
8862 @smallexample
8863 @group
8864 (if (and replace kill-ring)
8865 ;; @r{then}
8866 (setcar kill-ring string)
8867 @end group
8868 @group
8869 ;; @r{else}
8870 (push string kill-ring)
8871 @end group
8872 @group
8873 (setq kill-ring (cons string kill-ring))
8874 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8875 ;; @r{avoid overly long kill ring}
8876 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil)))
8877 @end group
8878 @group
8879 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
8880 (if interprogram-cut-function
8881 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
8882 @end group
8883 @end smallexample
8884
8885 The conditional test is @w{@code{(and replace kill-ring)}}.
8886 This will be true when two conditions are met: the kill ring has
8887 something in it, and the @code{replace} variable is true.
8888
8889 @need 1250
8890 When the @code{kill-append} function sets @code{replace} to be true
8891 and when the kill ring has at least one item in it, the @code{setcar}
8892 expression is executed:
8893
8894 @smallexample
8895 (setcar kill-ring string)
8896 @end smallexample
8897
8898 The @code{setcar} function actually changes the first element of the
8899 @code{kill-ring} list to the value of @code{string}. It replaces the
8900 first element.
8901
8902 @need 1250
8903 On the other hand, if the kill ring is empty, or replace is false, the
8904 else-part of the condition is executed:
8905
8906 @smallexample
8907 (push string kill-ring)
8908 @end smallexample
8909
8910 @noindent
8911 @need 1250
8912 @code{push} puts its first argument onto the second. It is similar to
8913 the older
8914
8915 @smallexample
8916 (setq kill-ring (cons string kill-ring))
8917 @end smallexample
8918
8919 @noindent
8920 @need 1250
8921 or the newer
8922
8923 @smallexample
8924 (add-to-list kill-ring string)
8925 @end smallexample
8926
8927 @noindent
8928 When it is false, the expression first constructs a new version of the
8929 kill ring by prepending @code{string} to the existing kill ring as a
8930 new element (that is what the @code{push} does). Then it executes a
8931 second @code{if} clause. This second @code{if} clause keeps the kill
8932 ring from growing too long.
8933
8934 Let's look at these two expressions in order.
8935
8936 The @code{push} line of the else-part sets the new value of the kill
8937 ring to what results from adding the string being killed to the old
8938 kill ring.
8939
8940 We can see how this works with an example.
8941
8942 @need 800
8943 First,
8944
8945 @smallexample
8946 (setq example-list '("here is a clause" "another clause"))
8947 @end smallexample
8948
8949 @need 1200
8950 @noindent
8951 After evaluating this expression with @kbd{C-x C-e}, you can evaluate
8952 @code{example-list} and see what it returns:
8953
8954 @smallexample
8955 @group
8956 example-list
8957 @result{} ("here is a clause" "another clause")
8958 @end group
8959 @end smallexample
8960
8961 @need 1200
8962 @noindent
8963 Now, we can add a new element on to this list by evaluating the
8964 following expression:
8965 @findex push, @r{example}
8966
8967 @smallexample
8968 (push "a third clause" example-list)
8969 @end smallexample
8970
8971 @need 800
8972 @noindent
8973 When we evaluate @code{example-list}, we find its value is:
8974
8975 @smallexample
8976 @group
8977 example-list
8978 @result{} ("a third clause" "here is a clause" "another clause")
8979 @end group
8980 @end smallexample
8981
8982 @noindent
8983 Thus, the third clause is added to the list by @code{push}.
8984
8985 @need 1200
8986 Now for the second part of the @code{if} clause. This expression
8987 keeps the kill ring from growing too long. It looks like this:
8988
8989 @smallexample
8990 @group
8991 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8992 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil))
8993 @end group
8994 @end smallexample
8995
8996 The code checks whether the length of the kill ring is greater than
8997 the maximum permitted length. This is the value of
8998 @code{kill-ring-max} (which is 60, by default). If the length of the
8999 kill ring is too long, then this code sets the last element of the
9000 kill ring to @code{nil}. It does this by using two functions,
9001 @code{nthcdr} and @code{setcdr}.
9002
9003 We looked at @code{setcdr} earlier (@pxref{setcdr, , @code{setcdr}}).
9004 It sets the @sc{cdr} of a list, just as @code{setcar} sets the
9005 @sc{car} of a list. In this case, however, @code{setcdr} will not be
9006 setting the @sc{cdr} of the whole kill ring; the @code{nthcdr}
9007 function is used to cause it to set the @sc{cdr} of the next to last
9008 element of the kill ring---this means that since the @sc{cdr} of the
9009 next to last element is the last element of the kill ring, it will set
9010 the last element of the kill ring.
9011
9012 @findex nthcdr, @r{example}
9013 The @code{nthcdr} function works by repeatedly taking the @sc{cdr} of a
9014 list---it takes the @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr}
9015 @dots{} It does this @var{N} times and returns the results.
9016 (@xref{nthcdr, , @code{nthcdr}}.)
9017
9018 @findex setcdr, @r{example}
9019 Thus, if we had a four element list that was supposed to be three
9020 elements long, we could set the @sc{cdr} of the next to last element
9021 to @code{nil}, and thereby shorten the list. (If you set the last
9022 element to some other value than @code{nil}, which you could do, then
9023 you would not have shortened the list. @xref{setcdr, ,
9024 @code{setcdr}}.)
9025
9026 You can see shortening by evaluating the following three expressions
9027 in turn. First set the value of @code{trees} to @code{(maple oak pine
9028 birch)}, then set the @sc{cdr} of its second @sc{cdr} to @code{nil}
9029 and then find the value of @code{trees}:
9030
9031 @smallexample
9032 @group
9033 (setq trees '(maple oak pine birch))
9034 @result{} (maple oak pine birch)
9035 @end group
9036
9037 @group
9038 (setcdr (nthcdr 2 trees) nil)
9039 @result{} nil
9040
9041 trees
9042 @result{} (maple oak pine)
9043 @end group
9044 @end smallexample
9045
9046 @noindent
9047 (The value returned by the @code{setcdr} expression is @code{nil} since
9048 that is what the @sc{cdr} is set to.)
9049
9050 To repeat, in @code{kill-new}, the @code{nthcdr} function takes the
9051 @sc{cdr} a number of times that is one less than the maximum permitted
9052 size of the kill ring and @code{setcdr} sets the @sc{cdr} of that
9053 element (which will be the rest of the elements in the kill ring) to
9054 @code{nil}. This prevents the kill ring from growing too long.
9055
9056 @need 800
9057 The next to last expression in the @code{kill-new} function is
9058
9059 @smallexample
9060 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
9061 @end smallexample
9062
9063 The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is a global variable that is set to be
9064 the @code{kill-ring}.
9065
9066 Even though the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is called a
9067 @samp{pointer}, it is a variable just like the kill ring. However, the
9068 name has been chosen to help humans understand how the variable is used.
9069
9070 @need 1200
9071 Now, to return to an early expression in the body of the function:
9072
9073 @smallexample
9074 @group
9075 (if (fboundp 'menu-bar-update-yank-menu)
9076 (menu-bar-update-yank-menu string (and replace (car kill-ring))))
9077 @end group
9078 @end smallexample
9079
9080 @noindent
9081 It starts with an @code{if} expression
9082
9083 In this case, the expression tests first to see whether
9084 @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu} exists as a function, and if so,
9085 calls it. The @code{fboundp} function returns true if the symbol it
9086 is testing has a function definition that `is not void'. If the
9087 symbol's function definition were void, we would receive an error
9088 message, as we did when we created errors intentionally (@pxref{Making
9089 Errors, , Generate an Error Message}).
9090
9091 @noindent
9092 The then-part contains an expression whose first element is the
9093 function @code{and}.
9094
9095 @findex and
9096 The @code{and} special form evaluates each of its arguments until one
9097 of the arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, in which case the
9098 @code{and} expression returns @code{nil}; however, if none of the
9099 arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, the value resulting from
9100 evaluating the last argument is returned. (Since such a value is not
9101 @code{nil}, it is considered true in Emacs Lisp.) In other words, an
9102 @code{and} expression returns a true value only if all its arguments
9103 are true. (@xref{Second Buffer Related Review}.)
9104
9105 The expression determines whether the second argument to
9106 @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu} is true or not.
9107 @ignore
9108 ;; If we're supposed to be extending an existing string, and that
9109 ;; string really is at the front of the menu, then update it in place.
9110 @end ignore
9111
9112 @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu} is one of the functions that make it
9113 possible to use the `Select and Paste' menu in the Edit item of a menu
9114 bar; using a mouse, you can look at the various pieces of text you
9115 have saved and select one piece to paste.
9116
9117 The last expression in the @code{kill-new} function adds the newly
9118 copied string to whatever facility exists for copying and pasting
9119 among different programs running in a windowing system. In the X
9120 Windowing system, for example, the @code{x-select-text} function takes
9121 the string and stores it in memory operated by X. You can paste the
9122 string in another program, such as an Xterm.
9123
9124 @need 1200
9125 The expression looks like this:
9126
9127 @smallexample
9128 @group
9129 (if interprogram-cut-function
9130 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
9131 @end group
9132 @end smallexample
9133
9134 If an @code{interprogram-cut-function} exists, then Emacs executes
9135 @code{funcall}, which in turn calls its first argument as a function
9136 and passes the remaining arguments to it. (Incidentally, as far as I
9137 can see, this @code{if} expression could be replaced by an @code{and}
9138 expression similar to the one in the first part of the function.)
9139
9140 We are not going to discuss windowing systems and other programs
9141 further, but merely note that this is a mechanism that enables GNU
9142 Emacs to work easily and well with other programs.
9143
9144 This code for placing text in the kill ring, either concatenated with
9145 an existing element or as a new element, leads us to the code for
9146 bringing back text that has been cut out of the buffer---the yank
9147 commands. However, before discussing the yank commands, it is better
9148 to learn how lists are implemented in a computer. This will make
9149 clear such mysteries as the use of the term `pointer'. But before
9150 that, we will digress into C.
9151
9152 @ignore
9153 @c is this true in Emacs 22? Does not seems to be
9154
9155 (If the @w{@code{(< end beg))}}
9156 expression is true, @code{kill-append} prepends the string to the just
9157 previously clipped text. For a detailed discussion, see
9158 @ref{kill-append function, , The @code{kill-append} function}.)
9159
9160 If you then yank back the text, i.e., `paste' it, you get both
9161 pieces of text at once. That way, if you delete two words in a row,
9162 and then yank them back, you get both words, in their proper order,
9163 with one yank. (The @w{@code{(< end beg))}} expression makes sure the
9164 order is correct.)
9165
9166 On the other hand, if the previous command is not @code{kill-region},
9167 then the @code{kill-new} function is called, which adds the text to
9168 the kill ring as the latest item, and sets the
9169 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable to point to it.
9170 @end ignore
9171 @ignore
9172
9173 @c Evidently, changed for Emacs 22. The zap-to-char command does not
9174 @c use the delete-and-extract-region function
9175
9176 2006 Oct 26, the Digression into C is now OK but should come after
9177 copy-region-as-kill and filter-buffer-substring
9178
9179 2006 Oct 24
9180 In Emacs 22,
9181 copy-region-as-kill is short, 12 lines, and uses
9182 filter-buffer-substring, which is longer, 39 lines
9183 and has delete-and-extract-region in it.
9184 delete-and-extract-region is written in C.
9185
9186 see Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
9187 @end ignore
9188
9189 @node Digression into C, defvar, copy-region-as-kill, Cutting & Storing Text
9190 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
9191 @section Digression into C
9192 @findex delete-and-extract-region
9193 @cindex C, a digression into
9194 @cindex Digression into C
9195
9196 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function (@pxref{copy-region-as-kill, ,
9197 @code{copy-region-as-kill}}) uses the @code{filter-buffer-substring}
9198 function, which in turn uses the @code{delete-and-extract-region}
9199 function. It removes the contents of a region and you cannot get them
9200 back.
9201
9202 Unlike the other code discussed here, the
9203 @code{delete-and-extract-region} function is not written in Emacs
9204 Lisp; it is written in C and is one of the primitives of the GNU Emacs
9205 system. Since it is very simple, I will digress briefly from Lisp and
9206 describe it here.
9207
9208 @c GNU Emacs 22 in /usr/local/src/emacs/src/editfns.c
9209 @c the DEFUN for buffer-substring-no-properties
9210
9211 @need 1500
9212 Like many of the other Emacs primitives,
9213 @code{delete-and-extract-region} is written as an instance of a C
9214 macro, a macro being a template for code. The complete macro looks
9215 like this:
9216
9217 @smallexample
9218 @group
9219 DEFUN ("buffer-substring-no-properties", Fbuffer_substring_no_properties,
9220 Sbuffer_substring_no_properties, 2, 2, 0,
9221 doc: /* Return the characters of part of the buffer,
9222 without the text properties.
9223 The two arguments START and END are character positions;
9224 they can be in either order. */)
9225 (start, end)
9226 Lisp_Object start, end;
9227 @{
9228 register int b, e;
9229
9230 validate_region (&start, &end);
9231 b = XINT (start);
9232 e = XINT (end);
9233
9234 return make_buffer_string (b, e, 0);
9235 @}
9236 @end group
9237 @end smallexample
9238
9239 Without going into the details of the macro writing process, let me
9240 point out that this macro starts with the word @code{DEFUN}. The word
9241 @code{DEFUN} was chosen since the code serves the same purpose as
9242 @code{defun} does in Lisp. (The @code{DEFUN} C macro is defined in
9243 @file{emacs/src/lisp.h}.)
9244
9245 The word @code{DEFUN} is followed by seven parts inside of
9246 parentheses:
9247
9248 @itemize @bullet
9249 @item
9250 The first part is the name given to the function in Lisp,
9251 @code{delete-and-extract-region}.
9252
9253 @item
9254 The second part is the name of the function in C,
9255 @code{Fdelete_and_extract_region}. By convention, it starts with
9256 @samp{F}. Since C does not use hyphens in names, underscores are used
9257 instead.
9258
9259 @item
9260 The third part is the name for the C constant structure that records
9261 information on this function for internal use. It is the name of the
9262 function in C but begins with an @samp{S} instead of an @samp{F}.
9263
9264 @item
9265 The fourth and fifth parts specify the minimum and maximum number of
9266 arguments the function can have. This function demands exactly 2
9267 arguments.
9268
9269 @item
9270 The sixth part is nearly like the argument that follows the
9271 @code{interactive} declaration in a function written in Lisp: a letter
9272 followed, perhaps, by a prompt. The only difference from the Lisp is
9273 when the macro is called with no arguments. Then you write a @code{0}
9274 (which is a `null string'), as in this macro.
9275
9276 If you were to specify arguments, you would place them between
9277 quotation marks. The C macro for @code{goto-char} includes
9278 @code{"NGoto char: "} in this position to indicate that the function
9279 expects a raw prefix, in this case, a numerical location in a buffer,
9280 and provides a prompt.
9281
9282 @item
9283 The seventh part is a documentation string, just like the one for a
9284 function written in Emacs Lisp, except that every newline must be
9285 written explicitly as @samp{\n} followed by a backslash and carriage
9286 return.
9287
9288 @need 1000
9289 Thus, the first two lines of documentation for @code{goto-char} are
9290 written like this:
9291
9292 @smallexample
9293 @group
9294 "Set point to POSITION, a number or marker.\n\
9295 Beginning of buffer is position (point-min), end is (point-max)."
9296 @end group
9297 @end smallexample
9298 @end itemize
9299
9300 @need 1200
9301 In a C macro, the formal parameters come next, with a statement of
9302 what kind of object they are, followed by what might be called the `body'
9303 of the macro. For @code{delete-and-extract-region} the `body'
9304 consists of the following four lines:
9305
9306 @smallexample
9307 @group
9308 validate_region (&start, &end);
9309 if (XINT (start) == XINT (end))
9310 return build_string ("");
9311 return del_range_1 (XINT (start), XINT (end), 1, 1);
9312 @end group
9313 @end smallexample
9314
9315 The @code{validate_region} function checks whether the values
9316 passed as the beginning and end of the region are the proper type and
9317 are within range. If the beginning and end positions are the same,
9318 then return and empty string.
9319
9320 The @code{del_range_1} function actually deletes the text. It is a
9321 complex function we will not look into. It updates the buffer and
9322 does other things. However, it is worth looking at the two arguments
9323 passed to @code{del_range}. These are @w{@code{XINT (start)}} and
9324 @w{@code{XINT (end)}}.
9325
9326 As far as the C language is concerned, @code{start} and @code{end} are
9327 two integers that mark the beginning and end of the region to be
9328 deleted@footnote{More precisely, and requiring more expert knowledge
9329 to understand, the two integers are of type `Lisp_Object', which can
9330 also be a C union instead of an integer type.}.
9331
9332 In early versions of Emacs, these two numbers were thirty-two bits
9333 long, but the code is slowly being generalized to handle other
9334 lengths. Three of the available bits are used to specify the type of
9335 information; the remaining bits are used as `content'.
9336
9337 @samp{XINT} is a C macro that extracts the relevant number from the
9338 longer collection of bits; the three other bits are discarded.
9339
9340 @need 800
9341 The command in @code{delete-and-extract-region} looks like this:
9342
9343 @smallexample
9344 del_range_1 (XINT (start), XINT (end), 1, 1);
9345 @end smallexample
9346
9347 @noindent
9348 It deletes the region between the beginning position, @code{start},
9349 and the ending position, @code{end}.
9350
9351 From the point of view of the person writing Lisp, Emacs is all very
9352 simple; but hidden underneath is a great deal of complexity to make it
9353 all work.
9354
9355 @node defvar, cons & search-fwd Review, Digression into C, Cutting & Storing Text
9356 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
9357 @section Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
9358 @findex defvar
9359 @cindex Initializing a variable
9360 @cindex Variable initialization
9361
9362 @ignore
9363 2006 Oct 24
9364 In Emacs 22,
9365 copy-region-as-kill is short, 12 lines, and uses
9366 filter-buffer-substring, which is longer, 39 lines
9367 and has delete-and-extract-region in it.
9368 delete-and-extract-region is written in C.
9369
9370 see Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
9371
9372 @end ignore
9373
9374 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function is written in Emacs Lisp. Two
9375 functions within it, @code{kill-append} and @code{kill-new}, copy a
9376 region in a buffer and save it in a variable called the
9377 @code{kill-ring}. This section describes how the @code{kill-ring}
9378 variable is created and initialized using the @code{defvar} special
9379 form.
9380
9381 (Again we note that the term @code{kill-ring} is a misnomer. The text
9382 that is clipped out of the buffer can be brought back; it is not a ring
9383 of corpses, but a ring of resurrectable text.)
9384
9385 In Emacs Lisp, a variable such as the @code{kill-ring} is created and
9386 given an initial value by using the @code{defvar} special form. The
9387 name comes from ``define variable''.
9388
9389 The @code{defvar} special form is similar to @code{setq} in that it sets
9390 the value of a variable. It is unlike @code{setq} in two ways: first,
9391 it only sets the value of the variable if the variable does not already
9392 have a value. If the variable already has a value, @code{defvar} does
9393 not override the existing value. Second, @code{defvar} has a
9394 documentation string.
9395
9396 (Another special form, @code{defcustom}, is designed for variables
9397 that people customize. It has more features than @code{defvar}.
9398 (@xref{defcustom, , Setting Variables with @code{defcustom}}.)
9399
9400 @menu
9401 * See variable current value::
9402 * defvar and asterisk::
9403 @end menu
9404
9405 @node See variable current value, defvar and asterisk, defvar, defvar
9406 @ifnottex
9407 @unnumberedsubsec Seeing the Current Value of a Variable
9408 @end ifnottex
9409
9410 You can see the current value of a variable, any variable, by using
9411 the @code{describe-variable} function, which is usually invoked by
9412 typing @kbd{C-h v}. If you type @kbd{C-h v} and then @code{kill-ring}
9413 (followed by @key{RET}) when prompted, you will see what is in your
9414 current kill ring---this may be quite a lot! Conversely, if you have
9415 been doing nothing this Emacs session except read this document, you
9416 may have nothing in it. Also, you will see the documentation for
9417 @code{kill-ring}:
9418
9419 @smallexample
9420 @group
9421 Documentation:
9422 List of killed text sequences.
9423 Since the kill ring is supposed to interact nicely with cut-and-paste
9424 facilities offered by window systems, use of this variable should
9425 @end group
9426 @group
9427 interact nicely with `interprogram-cut-function' and
9428 `interprogram-paste-function'. The functions `kill-new',
9429 `kill-append', and `current-kill' are supposed to implement this
9430 interaction; you may want to use them instead of manipulating the kill
9431 ring directly.
9432 @end group
9433 @end smallexample
9434
9435 @need 800
9436 The kill ring is defined by a @code{defvar} in the following way:
9437
9438 @smallexample
9439 @group
9440 (defvar kill-ring nil
9441 "List of killed text sequences.
9442 @dots{}")
9443 @end group
9444 @end smallexample
9445
9446 @noindent
9447 In this variable definition, the variable is given an initial value of
9448 @code{nil}, which makes sense, since if you have saved nothing, you want
9449 nothing back if you give a @code{yank} command. The documentation
9450 string is written just like the documentation string of a @code{defun}.
9451 As with the documentation string of the @code{defun}, the first line of
9452 the documentation should be a complete sentence, since some commands,
9453 like @code{apropos}, print only the first line of documentation.
9454 Succeeding lines should not be indented; otherwise they look odd when
9455 you use @kbd{C-h v} (@code{describe-variable}).
9456
9457 @node defvar and asterisk, , See variable current value, defvar
9458 @subsection @code{defvar} and an asterisk
9459 @findex defvar @r{for a user customizable variable}
9460 @findex defvar @r{with an asterisk}
9461
9462 In the past, Emacs used the @code{defvar} special form both for
9463 internal variables that you would not expect a user to change and for
9464 variables that you do expect a user to change. Although you can still
9465 use @code{defvar} for user customizable variables, please use
9466 @code{defcustom} instead, since that special form provides a path into
9467 the Customization commands. (@xref{defcustom, , Specifying Variables
9468 using @code{defcustom}}.)
9469
9470 When you specified a variable using the @code{defvar} special form,
9471 you could distinguish a variable that a user might want to change from
9472 others by typing an asterisk, @samp{*}, in the first column of its
9473 documentation string. For example:
9474
9475 @smallexample
9476 @group
9477 (defvar shell-command-default-error-buffer nil
9478 "*Buffer name for `shell-command' @dots{} error output.
9479 @dots{} ")
9480 @end group
9481 @end smallexample
9482
9483 @findex set-variable
9484 @noindent
9485 You could (and still can) use the @code{set-variable} command to
9486 change the value of @code{shell-command-default-error-buffer}
9487 temporarily. However, options set using @code{set-variable} are set
9488 only for the duration of your editing session. The new values are not
9489 saved between sessions. Each time Emacs starts, it reads the original
9490 value, unless you change the value within your @file{.emacs} file,
9491 either by setting it manually or by using @code{customize}.
9492 @xref{Emacs Initialization, , Your @file{.emacs} File}.
9493
9494 For me, the major use of the @code{set-variable} command is to suggest
9495 variables that I might want to set in my @file{.emacs} file. There
9496 are now more than 700 such variables --- far too many to remember
9497 readily. Fortunately, you can press @key{TAB} after calling the
9498 @code{M-x set-variable} command to see the list of variables.
9499 (@xref{Examining, , Examining and Setting Variables, emacs,
9500 The GNU Emacs Manual}.)
9501
9502 @need 1250
9503 @node cons & search-fwd Review, search Exercises, defvar, Cutting & Storing Text
9504 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
9505 @section Review
9506
9507 Here is a brief summary of some recently introduced functions.
9508
9509 @table @code
9510 @item car
9511 @itemx cdr
9512 @code{car} returns the first element of a list; @code{cdr} returns the
9513 second and subsequent elements of a list.
9514
9515 @need 1250
9516 For example:
9517
9518 @smallexample
9519 @group
9520 (car '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7))
9521 @result{} 1
9522 (cdr '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7))
9523 @result{} (2 3 4 5 6 7)
9524 @end group
9525 @end smallexample
9526
9527 @item cons
9528 @code{cons} constructs a list by prepending its first argument to its
9529 second argument.
9530
9531 @need 1250
9532 For example:
9533
9534 @smallexample
9535 @group
9536 (cons 1 '(2 3 4))
9537 @result{} (1 2 3 4)
9538 @end group
9539 @end smallexample
9540
9541 @item funcall
9542 @code{funcall} evaluates its first argument as a function. It passes
9543 its remaining arguments to its first argument.
9544
9545 @item nthcdr
9546 Return the result of taking @sc{cdr} `n' times on a list.
9547 @iftex
9548 The
9549 @tex
9550 $n^{th}$
9551 @end tex
9552 @code{cdr}.
9553 @end iftex
9554 The `rest of the rest', as it were.
9555
9556 @need 1250
9557 For example:
9558
9559 @smallexample
9560 @group
9561 (nthcdr 3 '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7))
9562 @result{} (4 5 6 7)
9563 @end group
9564 @end smallexample
9565
9566 @item setcar
9567 @itemx setcdr
9568 @code{setcar} changes the first element of a list; @code{setcdr}
9569 changes the second and subsequent elements of a list.
9570
9571 @need 1250
9572 For example:
9573
9574 @smallexample
9575 @group
9576 (setq triple '(1 2 3))
9577
9578 (setcar triple '37)
9579
9580 triple
9581 @result{} (37 2 3)
9582
9583 (setcdr triple '("foo" "bar"))
9584
9585 triple
9586 @result{} (37 "foo" "bar")
9587 @end group
9588 @end smallexample
9589
9590 @item progn
9591 Evaluate each argument in sequence and then return the value of the
9592 last.
9593
9594 @need 1250
9595 For example:
9596
9597 @smallexample
9598 @group
9599 (progn 1 2 3 4)
9600 @result{} 4
9601 @end group
9602 @end smallexample
9603
9604 @item save-restriction
9605 Record whatever narrowing is in effect in the current buffer, if any,
9606 and restore that narrowing after evaluating the arguments.
9607
9608 @item search-forward
9609 Search for a string, and if the string is found, move point. With a
9610 regular expression, use the similar @code{re-search-forward}.
9611 (@xref{Regexp Search, , Regular Expression Searches}, for an
9612 explanation of regular expression patterns and searches.)
9613
9614 @need 1250
9615 @noindent
9616 @code{search-forward} and @code{re-search-forward} take four
9617 arguments:
9618
9619 @enumerate
9620 @item
9621 The string or regular expression to search for.
9622
9623 @item
9624 Optionally, the limit of the search.
9625
9626 @item
9627 Optionally, what to do if the search fails, return @code{nil} or an
9628 error message.
9629
9630 @item
9631 Optionally, how many times to repeat the search; if negative, the
9632 search goes backwards.
9633 @end enumerate
9634
9635 @item kill-region
9636 @itemx delete-and-extract-region
9637 @itemx copy-region-as-kill
9638
9639 @code{kill-region} cuts the text between point and mark from the
9640 buffer and stores that text in the kill ring, so you can get it back
9641 by yanking.
9642
9643 @code{copy-region-as-kill} copies the text between point and mark into
9644 the kill ring, from which you can get it by yanking. The function
9645 does not cut or remove the text from the buffer.
9646 @end table
9647
9648 @code{delete-and-extract-region} removes the text between point and
9649 mark from the buffer and throws it away. You cannot get it back.
9650 (This is not an interactive command.)
9651
9652 @need 1500
9653 @node search Exercises, , cons & search-fwd Review, Cutting & Storing Text
9654 @section Searching Exercises
9655
9656 @itemize @bullet
9657 @item
9658 Write an interactive function that searches for a string. If the
9659 search finds the string, leave point after it and display a message
9660 that says ``Found!''. (Do not use @code{search-forward} for the name
9661 of this function; if you do, you will overwrite the existing version of
9662 @code{search-forward} that comes with Emacs. Use a name such as
9663 @code{test-search} instead.)
9664
9665 @item
9666 Write a function that prints the third element of the kill ring in the
9667 echo area, if any; if the kill ring does not contain a third element,
9668 print an appropriate message.
9669 @end itemize
9670
9671 @node List Implementation, Yanking, Cutting & Storing Text, Top
9672 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
9673 @chapter How Lists are Implemented
9674 @cindex Lists in a computer
9675
9676 In Lisp, atoms are recorded in a straightforward fashion; if the
9677 implementation is not straightforward in practice, it is, nonetheless,
9678 straightforward in theory. The atom @samp{rose}, for example, is
9679 recorded as the four contiguous letters @samp{r}, @samp{o}, @samp{s},
9680 @samp{e}. A list, on the other hand, is kept differently. The mechanism
9681 is equally simple, but it takes a moment to get used to the idea. A
9682 list is kept using a series of pairs of pointers. In the series, the
9683 first pointer in each pair points to an atom or to another list, and the
9684 second pointer in each pair points to the next pair, or to the symbol
9685 @code{nil}, which marks the end of the list.
9686
9687 A pointer itself is quite simply the electronic address of what is
9688 pointed to. Hence, a list is kept as a series of electronic addresses.
9689
9690 @menu
9691 * Lists diagrammed::
9692 * Symbols as Chest:: Exploring a powerful metaphor.
9693 * List Exercise::
9694 @end menu
9695
9696 @node Lists diagrammed, Symbols as Chest, List Implementation, List Implementation
9697 @ifnottex
9698 @unnumberedsec Lists diagrammed
9699 @end ifnottex
9700
9701 For example, the list @code{(rose violet buttercup)} has three elements,
9702 @samp{rose}, @samp{violet}, and @samp{buttercup}. In the computer, the
9703 electronic address of @samp{rose} is recorded in a segment of computer
9704 memory along with the address that gives the electronic address of where
9705 the atom @samp{violet} is located; and that address (the one that tells
9706 where @samp{violet} is located) is kept along with an address that tells
9707 where the address for the atom @samp{buttercup} is located.
9708
9709 @need 1200
9710 This sounds more complicated than it is and is easier seen in a diagram:
9711
9712 @c clear print-postscript-figures
9713 @c !!! cons-cell-diagram #1
9714 @ifnottex
9715 @smallexample
9716 @group
9717 ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9718 |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9719 | | |
9720 | | |
9721 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9722 @end group
9723 @end smallexample
9724 @end ifnottex
9725 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9726 @sp 1
9727 @tex
9728 @center @image{cons-1}
9729 %%%% old method of including an image
9730 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
9731 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/cons-1.eps}}
9732 % \catcode`\@=0 %
9733 @end tex
9734 @sp 1
9735 @end ifset
9736 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9737 @iftex
9738 @smallexample
9739 @group
9740 ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9741 |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9742 | | |
9743 | | |
9744 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9745 @end group
9746 @end smallexample
9747 @end iftex
9748 @end ifclear
9749
9750 @noindent
9751 In the diagram, each box represents a word of computer memory that
9752 holds a Lisp object, usually in the form of a memory address. The boxes,
9753 i.e.@: the addresses, are in pairs. Each arrow points to what the address
9754 is the address of, either an atom or another pair of addresses. The
9755 first box is the electronic address of @samp{rose} and the arrow points
9756 to @samp{rose}; the second box is the address of the next pair of boxes,
9757 the first part of which is the address of @samp{violet} and the second
9758 part of which is the address of the next pair. The very last box
9759 points to the symbol @code{nil}, which marks the end of the list.
9760
9761 @need 1200
9762 When a variable is set to a list with a function such as @code{setq},
9763 it stores the address of the first box in the variable. Thus,
9764 evaluation of the expression
9765
9766 @smallexample
9767 (setq bouquet '(rose violet buttercup))
9768 @end smallexample
9769
9770 @need 1250
9771 @noindent
9772 creates a situation like this:
9773
9774 @c cons-cell-diagram #2
9775 @ifnottex
9776 @smallexample
9777 @group
9778 bouquet
9779 |
9780 | ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9781 --> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9782 | | |
9783 | | |
9784 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9785 @end group
9786 @end smallexample
9787 @end ifnottex
9788 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9789 @sp 1
9790 @tex
9791 @center @image{cons-2}
9792 %%%% old method of including an image
9793 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
9794 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/cons-2.eps}}
9795 % \catcode`\@=0 %
9796 @end tex
9797 @sp 1
9798 @end ifset
9799 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9800 @iftex
9801 @smallexample
9802 @group
9803 bouquet
9804 |
9805 | ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9806 --> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9807 | | |
9808 | | |
9809 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9810 @end group
9811 @end smallexample
9812 @end iftex
9813 @end ifclear
9814
9815 @noindent
9816 In this example, the symbol @code{bouquet} holds the address of the first
9817 pair of boxes.
9818
9819 @need 1200
9820 This same list can be illustrated in a different sort of box notation
9821 like this:
9822
9823 @c cons-cell-diagram #2a
9824 @ifnottex
9825 @smallexample
9826 @group
9827 bouquet
9828 |
9829 | -------------- --------------- ----------------
9830 | | car | cdr | | car | cdr | | car | cdr |
9831 -->| rose | o------->| violet | o------->| butter- | nil |
9832 | | | | | | | cup | |
9833 -------------- --------------- ----------------
9834 @end group
9835 @end smallexample
9836 @end ifnottex
9837 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9838 @sp 1
9839 @tex
9840 @center @image{cons-2a}
9841 %%%% old method of including an image
9842 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
9843 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/cons-2a.eps}}
9844 % \catcode`\@=0 %
9845 @end tex
9846 @sp 1
9847 @end ifset
9848 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9849 @iftex
9850 @smallexample
9851 @group
9852 bouquet
9853 |
9854 | -------------- --------------- ----------------
9855 | | car | cdr | | car | cdr | | car | cdr |
9856 -->| rose | o------->| violet | o------->| butter- | nil |
9857 | | | | | | | cup | |
9858 -------------- --------------- ----------------
9859 @end group
9860 @end smallexample
9861 @end iftex
9862 @end ifclear
9863
9864 (Symbols consist of more than pairs of addresses, but the structure of
9865 a symbol is made up of addresses. Indeed, the symbol @code{bouquet}
9866 consists of a group of address-boxes, one of which is the address of
9867 the printed word @samp{bouquet}, a second of which is the address of a
9868 function definition attached to the symbol, if any, a third of which
9869 is the address of the first pair of address-boxes for the list
9870 @code{(rose violet buttercup)}, and so on. Here we are showing that
9871 the symbol's third address-box points to the first pair of
9872 address-boxes for the list.)
9873
9874 If a symbol is set to the @sc{cdr} of a list, the list itself is not
9875 changed; the symbol simply has an address further down the list. (In
9876 the jargon, @sc{car} and @sc{cdr} are `non-destructive'.) Thus,
9877 evaluation of the following expression
9878
9879 @smallexample
9880 (setq flowers (cdr bouquet))
9881 @end smallexample
9882
9883 @need 800
9884 @noindent
9885 produces this:
9886
9887 @c cons-cell-diagram #3
9888 @ifnottex
9889 @sp 1
9890 @smallexample
9891 @group
9892 bouquet flowers
9893 | |
9894 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9895 --> | | | --> | | | | | |
9896 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9897 | | |
9898 | | |
9899 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9900 @end group
9901 @end smallexample
9902 @sp 1
9903 @end ifnottex
9904 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9905 @sp 1
9906 @tex
9907 @center @image{cons-3}
9908 %%%% old method of including an image
9909 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
9910 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/cons-3.eps}}
9911 % \catcode`\@=0 %
9912 @end tex
9913 @sp 1
9914 @end ifset
9915 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9916 @iftex
9917 @sp 1
9918 @smallexample
9919 @group
9920 bouquet flowers
9921 | |
9922 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9923 --> | | | --> | | | | | |
9924 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9925 | | |
9926 | | |
9927 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9928 @end group
9929 @end smallexample
9930 @sp 1
9931 @end iftex
9932 @end ifclear
9933
9934 @noindent
9935 The value of @code{flowers} is @code{(violet buttercup)}, which is
9936 to say, the symbol @code{flowers} holds the address of the pair of
9937 address-boxes, the first of which holds the address of @code{violet},
9938 and the second of which holds the address of @code{buttercup}.
9939
9940 A pair of address-boxes is called a @dfn{cons cell} or @dfn{dotted
9941 pair}. @xref{Cons Cell Type, , Cons Cell and List Types, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
9942 Reference Manual}, and @ref{Dotted Pair Notation, , Dotted Pair
9943 Notation, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more
9944 information about cons cells and dotted pairs.
9945
9946 @need 1200
9947 The function @code{cons} adds a new pair of addresses to the front of
9948 a series of addresses like that shown above. For example, evaluating
9949 the expression
9950
9951 @smallexample
9952 (setq bouquet (cons 'lily bouquet))
9953 @end smallexample
9954
9955 @need 1500
9956 @noindent
9957 produces:
9958
9959 @c cons-cell-diagram #4
9960 @ifnottex
9961 @sp 1
9962 @smallexample
9963 @group
9964 bouquet flowers
9965 | |
9966 | ___ ___ ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9967 --> | | | | | | --> | | | | | |
9968 |___|___|----> |___|___|----> |___|___|---->|___|___|--> nil
9969 | | | |
9970 | | | |
9971 --> lily --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9972 @end group
9973 @end smallexample
9974 @sp 1
9975 @end ifnottex
9976 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9977 @sp 1
9978 @tex
9979 @center @image{cons-4}
9980 %%%% old method of including an image
9981 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
9982 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/cons-4.eps}}
9983 % \catcode`\@=0 %
9984 @end tex
9985 @sp 1
9986 @end ifset
9987 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9988 @iftex
9989 @sp 1
9990 @smallexample
9991 @group
9992 bouquet flowers
9993 | |
9994 | ___ ___ ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9995 --> | | | | | | --> | | | | | |
9996 |___|___|----> |___|___|----> |___|___|---->|___|___|--> nil
9997 | | | |
9998 | | | |
9999 --> lily --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
10000 @end group
10001 @end smallexample
10002 @sp 1
10003 @end iftex
10004 @end ifclear
10005
10006 @need 1200
10007 @noindent
10008 However, this does not change the value of the symbol
10009 @code{flowers}, as you can see by evaluating the following,
10010
10011 @smallexample
10012 (eq (cdr (cdr bouquet)) flowers)
10013 @end smallexample
10014
10015 @noindent
10016 which returns @code{t} for true.
10017
10018 Until it is reset, @code{flowers} still has the value
10019 @code{(violet buttercup)}; that is, it has the address of the cons
10020 cell whose first address is of @code{violet}. Also, this does not
10021 alter any of the pre-existing cons cells; they are all still there.
10022
10023 Thus, in Lisp, to get the @sc{cdr} of a list, you just get the address
10024 of the next cons cell in the series; to get the @sc{car} of a list,
10025 you get the address of the first element of the list; to @code{cons} a
10026 new element on a list, you add a new cons cell to the front of the list.
10027 That is all there is to it! The underlying structure of Lisp is
10028 brilliantly simple!
10029
10030 And what does the last address in a series of cons cells refer to? It
10031 is the address of the empty list, of @code{nil}.
10032
10033 In summary, when a Lisp variable is set to a value, it is provided with
10034 the address of the list to which the variable refers.
10035
10036 @node Symbols as Chest, List Exercise, Lists diagrammed, List Implementation
10037 @section Symbols as a Chest of Drawers
10038 @cindex Symbols as a Chest of Drawers
10039 @cindex Chest of Drawers, metaphor for a symbol
10040 @cindex Drawers, Chest of, metaphor for a symbol
10041
10042 In an earlier section, I suggested that you might imagine a symbol as
10043 being a chest of drawers. The function definition is put in one
10044 drawer, the value in another, and so on. What is put in the drawer
10045 holding the value can be changed without affecting the contents of the
10046 drawer holding the function definition, and vice-verse.
10047
10048 Actually, what is put in each drawer is the address of the value or
10049 function definition. It is as if you found an old chest in the attic,
10050 and in one of its drawers you found a map giving you directions to
10051 where the buried treasure lies.
10052
10053 (In addition to its name, symbol definition, and variable value, a
10054 symbol has a `drawer' for a @dfn{property list} which can be used to
10055 record other information. Property lists are not discussed here; see
10056 @ref{Property Lists, , Property Lists, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
10057 Reference Manual}.)
10058
10059 @need 1500
10060 Here is a fanciful representation:
10061
10062 @c chest-of-drawers diagram
10063 @ifnottex
10064 @sp 1
10065 @smallexample
10066 @group
10067 Chest of Drawers Contents of Drawers
10068
10069 __ o0O0o __
10070 / \
10071 ---------------------
10072 | directions to | [map to]
10073 | symbol name | bouquet
10074 | |
10075 +---------------------+
10076 | directions to |
10077 | symbol definition | [none]
10078 | |
10079 +---------------------+
10080 | directions to | [map to]
10081 | variable value | (rose violet buttercup)
10082 | |
10083 +---------------------+
10084 | directions to |
10085 | property list | [not described here]
10086 | |
10087 +---------------------+
10088 |/ \|
10089 @end group
10090 @end smallexample
10091 @sp 1
10092 @end ifnottex
10093 @ifset print-postscript-figures
10094 @sp 1
10095 @tex
10096 @center @image{drawers}
10097 %%%% old method of including an image
10098 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
10099 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/drawers.eps}}
10100 % \catcode`\@=0 %
10101 @end tex
10102 @sp 1
10103 @end ifset
10104 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
10105 @iftex
10106 @sp 1
10107 @smallexample
10108 @group
10109 Chest of Drawers Contents of Drawers
10110
10111 __ o0O0o __
10112 / \
10113 ---------------------
10114 | directions to | [map to]
10115 | symbol name | bouquet
10116 | |
10117 +---------------------+
10118 | directions to |
10119 | symbol definition | [none]
10120 | |
10121 +---------------------+
10122 | directions to | [map to]
10123 | variable value | (rose violet buttercup)
10124 | |
10125 +---------------------+
10126 | directions to |
10127 | property list | [not described here]
10128 | |
10129 +---------------------+
10130 |/ \|
10131 @end group
10132 @end smallexample
10133 @sp 1
10134 @end iftex
10135 @end ifclear
10136
10137 @node List Exercise, , Symbols as Chest, List Implementation
10138 @section Exercise
10139
10140 Set @code{flowers} to @code{violet} and @code{buttercup}. Cons two
10141 more flowers on to this list and set this new list to
10142 @code{more-flowers}. Set the @sc{car} of @code{flowers} to a fish.
10143 What does the @code{more-flowers} list now contain?
10144
10145 @node Yanking, Loops & Recursion, List Implementation, Top
10146 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10147 @chapter Yanking Text Back
10148 @findex yank
10149 @cindex Text retrieval
10150 @cindex Retrieving text
10151 @cindex Pasting text
10152
10153 Whenever you cut text out of a buffer with a `kill' command in GNU Emacs,
10154 you can bring it back with a `yank' command. The text that is cut out of
10155 the buffer is put in the kill ring and the yank commands insert the
10156 appropriate contents of the kill ring back into a buffer (not necessarily
10157 the original buffer).
10158
10159 A simple @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank}) command inserts the first item from
10160 the kill ring into the current buffer. If the @kbd{C-y} command is
10161 followed immediately by @kbd{M-y}, the first element is replaced by
10162 the second element. Successive @kbd{M-y} commands replace the second
10163 element with the third, fourth, or fifth element, and so on. When the
10164 last element in the kill ring is reached, it is replaced by the first
10165 element and the cycle is repeated. (Thus the kill ring is called a
10166 `ring' rather than just a `list'. However, the actual data structure
10167 that holds the text is a list.
10168 @xref{Kill Ring, , Handling the Kill Ring}, for the details of how the
10169 list is handled as a ring.)
10170
10171 @menu
10172 * Kill Ring Overview::
10173 * kill-ring-yank-pointer:: The kill ring is a list.
10174 * yank nthcdr Exercises:: The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
10175 @end menu
10176
10177 @node Kill Ring Overview, kill-ring-yank-pointer, Yanking, Yanking
10178 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10179 @section Kill Ring Overview
10180 @cindex Kill ring overview
10181
10182 The kill ring is a list of textual strings. This is what it looks like:
10183
10184 @smallexample
10185 ("some text" "a different piece of text" "yet more text")
10186 @end smallexample
10187
10188 If this were the contents of my kill ring and I pressed @kbd{C-y}, the
10189 string of characters saying @samp{some text} would be inserted in this
10190 buffer where my cursor is located.
10191
10192 The @code{yank} command is also used for duplicating text by copying it.
10193 The copied text is not cut from the buffer, but a copy of it is put on the
10194 kill ring and is inserted by yanking it back.
10195
10196 Three functions are used for bringing text back from the kill ring:
10197 @code{yank}, which is usually bound to @kbd{C-y}; @code{yank-pop},
10198 which is usually bound to @kbd{M-y}; and @code{rotate-yank-pointer},
10199 which is used by the two other functions.
10200
10201 These functions refer to the kill ring through a variable called the
10202 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}. Indeed, the insertion code for both the
10203 @code{yank} and @code{yank-pop} functions is:
10204
10205 @smallexample
10206 (insert (car kill-ring-yank-pointer))
10207 @end smallexample
10208
10209 @noindent
10210 (Well, no more. In GNU Emacs 22, the function has been replaced by
10211 @code{insert-for-yank} which calls @code{insert-for-yank-1}
10212 repetitively for each @code{yank-handler} segment. In turn,
10213 @code{insert-for-yank-1} strips text properties from the inserted text
10214 according to @code{yank-excluded-properties}. Otherwise, it is just
10215 like @code{insert}. We will stick with plain @code{insert} since it
10216 is easier to understand.)
10217
10218 To begin to understand how @code{yank} and @code{yank-pop} work, it is
10219 first necessary to look at the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
10220
10221 @node kill-ring-yank-pointer, yank nthcdr Exercises, Kill Ring Overview, Yanking
10222 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10223 @section The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} Variable
10224
10225 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is a variable, just as @code{kill-ring} is
10226 a variable. It points to something by being bound to the value of what
10227 it points to, like any other Lisp variable.
10228
10229 @need 1000
10230 Thus, if the value of the kill ring is:
10231
10232 @smallexample
10233 ("some text" "a different piece of text" "yet more text")
10234 @end smallexample
10235
10236 @need 1250
10237 @noindent
10238 and the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points to the second clause, the
10239 value of @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is:
10240
10241 @smallexample
10242 ("a different piece of text" "yet more text")
10243 @end smallexample
10244
10245 As explained in the previous chapter (@pxref{List Implementation}), the
10246 computer does not keep two different copies of the text being pointed to
10247 by both the @code{kill-ring} and the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}. The
10248 words ``a different piece of text'' and ``yet more text'' are not
10249 duplicated. Instead, the two Lisp variables point to the same pieces of
10250 text. Here is a diagram:
10251
10252 @c cons-cell-diagram #5
10253 @ifnottex
10254 @smallexample
10255 @group
10256 kill-ring kill-ring-yank-pointer
10257 | |
10258 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
10259 ---> | | | --> | | | | | |
10260 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
10261 | | |
10262 | | |
10263 | | --> "yet more text"
10264 | |
10265 | --> "a different piece of text"
10266 |
10267 --> "some text"
10268 @end group
10269 @end smallexample
10270 @sp 1
10271 @end ifnottex
10272 @ifset print-postscript-figures
10273 @sp 1
10274 @tex
10275 @center @image{cons-5}
10276 %%%% old method of including an image
10277 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
10278 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/cons-5.eps}}
10279 % \catcode`\@=0 %
10280 @end tex
10281 @sp 1
10282 @end ifset
10283 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
10284 @iftex
10285 @smallexample
10286 @group
10287 kill-ring kill-ring-yank-pointer
10288 | |
10289 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
10290 ---> | | | --> | | | | | |
10291 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
10292 | | |
10293 | | |
10294 | | --> "yet more text"
10295 | |
10296 | --> "a different piece of text
10297 |
10298 --> "some text"
10299 @end group
10300 @end smallexample
10301 @sp 1
10302 @end iftex
10303 @end ifclear
10304
10305 Both the variable @code{kill-ring} and the variable
10306 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} are pointers. But the kill ring itself is
10307 usually described as if it were actually what it is composed of. The
10308 @code{kill-ring} is spoken of as if it were the list rather than that it
10309 points to the list. Conversely, the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is
10310 spoken of as pointing to a list.
10311
10312 These two ways of talking about the same thing sound confusing at first but
10313 make sense on reflection. The kill ring is generally thought of as the
10314 complete structure of data that holds the information of what has recently
10315 been cut out of the Emacs buffers. The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}
10316 on the other hand, serves to indicate---that is, to `point to'---that part
10317 of the kill ring of which the first element (the @sc{car}) will be
10318 inserted.
10319
10320 @ignore
10321 In GNU Emacs 22, the @code{kill-new} function calls
10322
10323 @code{(setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)}
10324
10325 (defun rotate-yank-pointer (arg)
10326 "Rotate the yanking point in the kill ring.
10327 With argument, rotate that many kills forward (or backward, if negative)."
10328 (interactive "p")
10329 (current-kill arg))
10330
10331 (defun current-kill (n &optional do-not-move)
10332 "Rotate the yanking point by N places, and then return that kill.
10333 If N is zero, `interprogram-paste-function' is set, and calling it
10334 returns a string, then that string is added to the front of the
10335 kill ring and returned as the latest kill.
10336 If optional arg DO-NOT-MOVE is non-nil, then don't actually move the
10337 yanking point; just return the Nth kill forward."
10338 (let ((interprogram-paste (and (= n 0)
10339 interprogram-paste-function
10340 (funcall interprogram-paste-function))))
10341 (if interprogram-paste
10342 (progn
10343 ;; Disable the interprogram cut function when we add the new
10344 ;; text to the kill ring, so Emacs doesn't try to own the
10345 ;; selection, with identical text.
10346 (let ((interprogram-cut-function nil))
10347 (kill-new interprogram-paste))
10348 interprogram-paste)
10349 (or kill-ring (error "Kill ring is empty"))
10350 (let ((ARGth-kill-element
10351 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
10352 (length kill-ring))
10353 kill-ring)))
10354 (or do-not-move
10355 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))
10356 (car ARGth-kill-element)))))
10357
10358 @end ignore
10359
10360 @need 1500
10361 @node yank nthcdr Exercises, , kill-ring-yank-pointer, Yanking
10362 @section Exercises with @code{yank} and @code{nthcdr}
10363
10364 @itemize @bullet
10365 @item
10366 Using @kbd{C-h v} (@code{describe-variable}), look at the value of
10367 your kill ring. Add several items to your kill ring; look at its
10368 value again. Using @kbd{M-y} (@code{yank-pop)}, move all the way
10369 around the kill ring. How many items were in your kill ring? Find
10370 the value of @code{kill-ring-max}. Was your kill ring full, or could
10371 you have kept more blocks of text within it?
10372
10373 @item
10374 Using @code{nthcdr} and @code{car}, construct a series of expressions
10375 to return the first, second, third, and fourth elements of a list.
10376 @end itemize
10377
10378 @node Loops & Recursion, Regexp Search, Yanking, Top
10379 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10380 @chapter Loops and Recursion
10381 @cindex Loops and recursion
10382 @cindex Recursion and loops
10383 @cindex Repetition (loops)
10384
10385 Emacs Lisp has two primary ways to cause an expression, or a series of
10386 expressions, to be evaluated repeatedly: one uses a @code{while}
10387 loop, and the other uses @dfn{recursion}.
10388
10389 Repetition can be very valuable. For example, to move forward four
10390 sentences, you need only write a program that will move forward one
10391 sentence and then repeat the process four times. Since a computer does
10392 not get bored or tired, such repetitive action does not have the
10393 deleterious effects that excessive or the wrong kinds of repetition can
10394 have on humans.
10395
10396 People mostly write Emacs Lisp functions using @code{while} loops and
10397 their kin; but you can use recursion, which provides a very powerful
10398 way to think about and then to solve problems@footnote{You can write
10399 recursive functions to be frugal or wasteful of mental or computer
10400 resources; as it happens, methods that people find easy---that are
10401 frugal of `mental resources'---sometimes use considerable computer
10402 resources. Emacs was designed to run on machines that we now consider
10403 limited and its default settings are conservative. You may want to
10404 increase the values of @code{max-specpdl-size} and
10405 @code{max-lisp-eval-depth}. In my @file{.emacs} file, I set them to
10406 15 and 30 times their default value.}.
10407
10408 @menu
10409 * while:: Causing a stretch of code to repeat.
10410 * dolist dotimes::
10411 * Recursion:: Causing a function to call itself.
10412 * Looping exercise::
10413 @end menu
10414
10415 @node while, dolist dotimes, Loops & Recursion, Loops & Recursion
10416 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10417 @section @code{while}
10418 @cindex Loops
10419 @findex while
10420
10421 The @code{while} special form tests whether the value returned by
10422 evaluating its first argument is true or false. This is similar to what
10423 the Lisp interpreter does with an @code{if}; what the interpreter does
10424 next, however, is different.
10425
10426 In a @code{while} expression, if the value returned by evaluating the
10427 first argument is false, the Lisp interpreter skips the rest of the
10428 expression (the @dfn{body} of the expression) and does not evaluate it.
10429 However, if the value is true, the Lisp interpreter evaluates the body
10430 of the expression and then again tests whether the first argument to
10431 @code{while} is true or false. If the value returned by evaluating the
10432 first argument is again true, the Lisp interpreter again evaluates the
10433 body of the expression.
10434
10435 @need 1200
10436 The template for a @code{while} expression looks like this:
10437
10438 @smallexample
10439 @group
10440 (while @var{true-or-false-test}
10441 @var{body}@dots{})
10442 @end group
10443 @end smallexample
10444
10445 @menu
10446 * Looping with while:: Repeat so long as test returns true.
10447 * Loop Example:: A @code{while} loop that uses a list.
10448 * print-elements-of-list:: Uses @code{while}, @code{car}, @code{cdr}.
10449 * Incrementing Loop:: A loop with an incrementing counter.
10450 * Incrementing Loop Details::
10451 * Decrementing Loop:: A loop with a decrementing counter.
10452 @end menu
10453
10454 @node Looping with while, Loop Example, while, while
10455 @ifnottex
10456 @unnumberedsubsec Looping with @code{while}
10457 @end ifnottex
10458
10459 So long as the true-or-false-test of the @code{while} expression
10460 returns a true value when it is evaluated, the body is repeatedly
10461 evaluated. This process is called a loop since the Lisp interpreter
10462 repeats the same thing again and again, like an airplane doing a loop.
10463 When the result of evaluating the true-or-false-test is false, the
10464 Lisp interpreter does not evaluate the rest of the @code{while}
10465 expression and `exits the loop'.
10466
10467 Clearly, if the value returned by evaluating the first argument to
10468 @code{while} is always true, the body following will be evaluated
10469 again and again @dots{} and again @dots{} forever. Conversely, if the
10470 value returned is never true, the expressions in the body will never
10471 be evaluated. The craft of writing a @code{while} loop consists of
10472 choosing a mechanism such that the true-or-false-test returns true
10473 just the number of times that you want the subsequent expressions to
10474 be evaluated, and then have the test return false.
10475
10476 The value returned by evaluating a @code{while} is the value of the
10477 true-or-false-test. An interesting consequence of this is that a
10478 @code{while} loop that evaluates without error will return @code{nil}
10479 or false regardless of whether it has looped 1 or 100 times or none at
10480 all. A @code{while} expression that evaluates successfully never
10481 returns a true value! What this means is that @code{while} is always
10482 evaluated for its side effects, which is to say, the consequences of
10483 evaluating the expressions within the body of the @code{while} loop.
10484 This makes sense. It is not the mere act of looping that is desired,
10485 but the consequences of what happens when the expressions in the loop
10486 are repeatedly evaluated.
10487
10488 @node Loop Example, print-elements-of-list, Looping with while, while
10489 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10490 @subsection A @code{while} Loop and a List
10491
10492 A common way to control a @code{while} loop is to test whether a list
10493 has any elements. If it does, the loop is repeated; but if it does not,
10494 the repetition is ended. Since this is an important technique, we will
10495 create a short example to illustrate it.
10496
10497 A simple way to test whether a list has elements is to evaluate the
10498 list: if it has no elements, it is an empty list and will return the
10499 empty list, @code{()}, which is a synonym for @code{nil} or false. On
10500 the other hand, a list with elements will return those elements when it
10501 is evaluated. Since Emacs Lisp considers as true any value that is not
10502 @code{nil}, a list that returns elements will test true in a
10503 @code{while} loop.
10504
10505 @need 1200
10506 For example, you can set the variable @code{empty-list} to @code{nil} by
10507 evaluating the following @code{setq} expression:
10508
10509 @smallexample
10510 (setq empty-list ())
10511 @end smallexample
10512
10513 @noindent
10514 After evaluating the @code{setq} expression, you can evaluate the
10515 variable @code{empty-list} in the usual way, by placing the cursor after
10516 the symbol and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}; @code{nil} will appear in your
10517 echo area:
10518
10519 @smallexample
10520 empty-list
10521 @end smallexample
10522
10523 On the other hand, if you set a variable to be a list with elements, the
10524 list will appear when you evaluate the variable, as you can see by
10525 evaluating the following two expressions:
10526
10527 @smallexample
10528 @group
10529 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
10530
10531 animals
10532 @end group
10533 @end smallexample
10534
10535 Thus, to create a @code{while} loop that tests whether there are any
10536 items in the list @code{animals}, the first part of the loop will be
10537 written like this:
10538
10539 @smallexample
10540 @group
10541 (while animals
10542 @dots{}
10543 @end group
10544 @end smallexample
10545
10546 @noindent
10547 When the @code{while} tests its first argument, the variable
10548 @code{animals} is evaluated. It returns a list. So long as the list
10549 has elements, the @code{while} considers the results of the test to be
10550 true; but when the list is empty, it considers the results of the test
10551 to be false.
10552
10553 To prevent the @code{while} loop from running forever, some mechanism
10554 needs to be provided to empty the list eventually. An oft-used
10555 technique is to have one of the subsequent forms in the @code{while}
10556 expression set the value of the list to be the @sc{cdr} of the list.
10557 Each time the @code{cdr} function is evaluated, the list will be made
10558 shorter, until eventually only the empty list will be left. At this
10559 point, the test of the @code{while} loop will return false, and the
10560 arguments to the @code{while} will no longer be evaluated.
10561
10562 For example, the list of animals bound to the variable @code{animals}
10563 can be set to be the @sc{cdr} of the original list with the
10564 following expression:
10565
10566 @smallexample
10567 (setq animals (cdr animals))
10568 @end smallexample
10569
10570 @noindent
10571 If you have evaluated the previous expressions and then evaluate this
10572 expression, you will see @code{(giraffe lion tiger)} appear in the echo
10573 area. If you evaluate the expression again, @code{(lion tiger)} will
10574 appear in the echo area. If you evaluate it again and yet again,
10575 @code{(tiger)} appears and then the empty list, shown by @code{nil}.
10576
10577 A template for a @code{while} loop that uses the @code{cdr} function
10578 repeatedly to cause the true-or-false-test eventually to test false
10579 looks like this:
10580
10581 @smallexample
10582 @group
10583 (while @var{test-whether-list-is-empty}
10584 @var{body}@dots{}
10585 @var{set-list-to-cdr-of-list})
10586 @end group
10587 @end smallexample
10588
10589 This test and use of @code{cdr} can be put together in a function that
10590 goes through a list and prints each element of the list on a line of its
10591 own.
10592
10593 @node print-elements-of-list, Incrementing Loop, Loop Example, while
10594 @subsection An Example: @code{print-elements-of-list}
10595 @findex print-elements-of-list
10596
10597 The @code{print-elements-of-list} function illustrates a @code{while}
10598 loop with a list.
10599
10600 @cindex @file{*scratch*} buffer
10601 The function requires several lines for its output. If you are
10602 reading this in a recent instance of GNU Emacs,
10603 @c GNU Emacs 21, GNU Emacs 22, or a later version,
10604 you can evaluate the following expression inside of Info, as usual.
10605
10606 If you are using an earlier version of Emacs, you need to copy the
10607 necessary expressions to your @file{*scratch*} buffer and evaluate
10608 them there. This is because the echo area had only one line in the
10609 earlier versions.
10610
10611 You can copy the expressions by marking the beginning of the region
10612 with @kbd{C-@key{SPC}} (@code{set-mark-command}), moving the cursor to
10613 the end of the region and then copying the region using @kbd{M-w}
10614 (@code{kill-ring-save}, which calls @code{copy-region-as-kill} and
10615 then provides visual feedback). In the @file{*scratch*}
10616 buffer, you can yank the expressions back by typing @kbd{C-y}
10617 (@code{yank}).
10618
10619 After you have copied the expressions to the @file{*scratch*} buffer,
10620 evaluate each expression in turn. Be sure to evaluate the last
10621 expression, @code{(print-elements-of-list animals)}, by typing
10622 @kbd{C-u C-x C-e}, that is, by giving an argument to
10623 @code{eval-last-sexp}. This will cause the result of the evaluation
10624 to be printed in the @file{*scratch*} buffer instead of being printed
10625 in the echo area. (Otherwise you will see something like this in your
10626 echo area: @code{^Jgazelle^J^Jgiraffe^J^Jlion^J^Jtiger^Jnil}, in which
10627 each @samp{^J} stands for a `newline'.)
10628
10629 @need 1500
10630 In a recent instance of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate these expressions
10631 directly in the Info buffer, and the echo area will grow to show the
10632 results.
10633
10634 @smallexample
10635 @group
10636 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
10637
10638 (defun print-elements-of-list (list)
10639 "Print each element of LIST on a line of its own."
10640 (while list
10641 (print (car list))
10642 (setq list (cdr list))))
10643
10644 (print-elements-of-list animals)
10645 @end group
10646 @end smallexample
10647
10648 @need 1200
10649 @noindent
10650 When you evaluate the three expressions in sequence, you will see
10651 this:
10652
10653 @smallexample
10654 @group
10655 gazelle
10656
10657 giraffe
10658
10659 lion
10660
10661 tiger
10662 nil
10663 @end group
10664 @end smallexample
10665
10666 Each element of the list is printed on a line of its own (that is what
10667 the function @code{print} does) and then the value returned by the
10668 function is printed. Since the last expression in the function is the
10669 @code{while} loop, and since @code{while} loops always return
10670 @code{nil}, a @code{nil} is printed after the last element of the list.
10671
10672 @node Incrementing Loop, Incrementing Loop Details, print-elements-of-list, while
10673 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10674 @subsection A Loop with an Incrementing Counter
10675
10676 A loop is not useful unless it stops when it ought. Besides
10677 controlling a loop with a list, a common way of stopping a loop is to
10678 write the first argument as a test that returns false when the correct
10679 number of repetitions are complete. This means that the loop must
10680 have a counter---an expression that counts how many times the loop
10681 repeats itself.
10682
10683 @node Incrementing Loop Details, Decrementing Loop, Incrementing Loop, while
10684 @ifnottex
10685 @unnumberedsubsec Details of an Incrementing Loop
10686 @end ifnottex
10687
10688 The test for a loop with an incrementing counter can be an expression
10689 such as @code{(< count desired-number)} which returns @code{t} for
10690 true if the value of @code{count} is less than the
10691 @code{desired-number} of repetitions and @code{nil} for false if the
10692 value of @code{count} is equal to or is greater than the
10693 @code{desired-number}. The expression that increments the count can
10694 be a simple @code{setq} such as @code{(setq count (1+ count))}, where
10695 @code{1+} is a built-in function in Emacs Lisp that adds 1 to its
10696 argument. (The expression @w{@code{(1+ count)}} has the same result
10697 as @w{@code{(+ count 1)}}, but is easier for a human to read.)
10698
10699 @need 1250
10700 The template for a @code{while} loop controlled by an incrementing
10701 counter looks like this:
10702
10703 @smallexample
10704 @group
10705 @var{set-count-to-initial-value}
10706 (while (< count desired-number) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
10707 @var{body}@dots{}
10708 (setq count (1+ count))) ; @r{incrementer}
10709 @end group
10710 @end smallexample
10711
10712 @noindent
10713 Note that you need to set the initial value of @code{count}; usually it
10714 is set to 1.
10715
10716 @menu
10717 * Incrementing Example:: Counting pebbles in a triangle.
10718 * Inc Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
10719 * Inc Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
10720 @end menu
10721
10722 @node Incrementing Example, Inc Example parts, Incrementing Loop Details, Incrementing Loop Details
10723 @unnumberedsubsubsec Example with incrementing counter
10724
10725 Suppose you are playing on the beach and decide to make a triangle of
10726 pebbles, putting one pebble in the first row, two in the second row,
10727 three in the third row and so on, like this:
10728
10729 @sp 1
10730 @c pebble diagram
10731 @ifnottex
10732 @smallexample
10733 @group
10734 *
10735 * *
10736 * * *
10737 * * * *
10738 @end group
10739 @end smallexample
10740 @end ifnottex
10741 @iftex
10742 @smallexample
10743 @group
10744 @bullet{}
10745 @bullet{} @bullet{}
10746 @bullet{} @bullet{} @bullet{}
10747 @bullet{} @bullet{} @bullet{} @bullet{}
10748 @end group
10749 @end smallexample
10750 @end iftex
10751 @sp 1
10752
10753 @noindent
10754 (About 2500 years ago, Pythagoras and others developed the beginnings of
10755 number theory by considering questions such as this.)
10756
10757 Suppose you want to know how many pebbles you will need to make a
10758 triangle with 7 rows?
10759
10760 Clearly, what you need to do is add up the numbers from 1 to 7. There
10761 are two ways to do this; start with the smallest number, one, and add up
10762 the list in sequence, 1, 2, 3, 4 and so on; or start with the largest
10763 number and add the list going down: 7, 6, 5, 4 and so on. Because both
10764 mechanisms illustrate common ways of writing @code{while} loops, we will
10765 create two examples, one counting up and the other counting down. In
10766 this first example, we will start with 1 and add 2, 3, 4 and so on.
10767
10768 If you are just adding up a short list of numbers, the easiest way to do
10769 it is to add up all the numbers at once. However, if you do not know
10770 ahead of time how many numbers your list will have, or if you want to be
10771 prepared for a very long list, then you need to design your addition so
10772 that what you do is repeat a simple process many times instead of doing
10773 a more complex process once.
10774
10775 For example, instead of adding up all the pebbles all at once, what you
10776 can do is add the number of pebbles in the first row, 1, to the number
10777 in the second row, 2, and then add the total of those two rows to the
10778 third row, 3. Then you can add the number in the fourth row, 4, to the
10779 total of the first three rows; and so on.
10780
10781 The critical characteristic of the process is that each repetitive
10782 action is simple. In this case, at each step we add only two numbers,
10783 the number of pebbles in the row and the total already found. This
10784 process of adding two numbers is repeated again and again until the last
10785 row has been added to the total of all the preceding rows. In a more
10786 complex loop the repetitive action might not be so simple, but it will
10787 be simpler than doing everything all at once.
10788
10789 @node Inc Example parts, Inc Example altogether, Incrementing Example, Incrementing Loop Details
10790 @unnumberedsubsubsec The parts of the function definition
10791
10792 The preceding analysis gives us the bones of our function definition:
10793 first, we will need a variable that we can call @code{total} that will
10794 be the total number of pebbles. This will be the value returned by
10795 the function.
10796
10797 Second, we know that the function will require an argument: this
10798 argument will be the total number of rows in the triangle. It can be
10799 called @code{number-of-rows}.
10800
10801 Finally, we need a variable to use as a counter. We could call this
10802 variable @code{counter}, but a better name is @code{row-number}. That
10803 is because what the counter does in this function is count rows, and a
10804 program should be written to be as understandable as possible.
10805
10806 When the Lisp interpreter first starts evaluating the expressions in the
10807 function, the value of @code{total} should be set to zero, since we have
10808 not added anything to it. Then the function should add the number of
10809 pebbles in the first row to the total, and then add the number of
10810 pebbles in the second to the total, and then add the number of
10811 pebbles in the third row to the total, and so on, until there are no
10812 more rows left to add.
10813
10814 Both @code{total} and @code{row-number} are used only inside the
10815 function, so they can be declared as local variables with @code{let}
10816 and given initial values. Clearly, the initial value for @code{total}
10817 should be 0. The initial value of @code{row-number} should be 1,
10818 since we start with the first row. This means that the @code{let}
10819 statement will look like this:
10820
10821 @smallexample
10822 @group
10823 (let ((total 0)
10824 (row-number 1))
10825 @var{body}@dots{})
10826 @end group
10827 @end smallexample
10828
10829 After the internal variables are declared and bound to their initial
10830 values, we can begin the @code{while} loop. The expression that serves
10831 as the test should return a value of @code{t} for true so long as the
10832 @code{row-number} is less than or equal to the @code{number-of-rows}.
10833 (If the expression tests true only so long as the row number is less
10834 than the number of rows in the triangle, the last row will never be
10835 added to the total; hence the row number has to be either less than or
10836 equal to the number of rows.)
10837
10838 @need 1500
10839 @findex <= @r{(less than or equal)}
10840 Lisp provides the @code{<=} function that returns true if the value of
10841 its first argument is less than or equal to the value of its second
10842 argument and false otherwise. So the expression that the @code{while}
10843 will evaluate as its test should look like this:
10844
10845 @smallexample
10846 (<= row-number number-of-rows)
10847 @end smallexample
10848
10849 The total number of pebbles can be found by repeatedly adding the number
10850 of pebbles in a row to the total already found. Since the number of
10851 pebbles in the row is equal to the row number, the total can be found by
10852 adding the row number to the total. (Clearly, in a more complex
10853 situation, the number of pebbles in the row might be related to the row
10854 number in a more complicated way; if this were the case, the row number
10855 would be replaced by the appropriate expression.)
10856
10857 @smallexample
10858 (setq total (+ total row-number))
10859 @end smallexample
10860
10861 @noindent
10862 What this does is set the new value of @code{total} to be equal to the
10863 sum of adding the number of pebbles in the row to the previous total.
10864
10865 After setting the value of @code{total}, the conditions need to be
10866 established for the next repetition of the loop, if there is one. This
10867 is done by incrementing the value of the @code{row-number} variable,
10868 which serves as a counter. After the @code{row-number} variable has
10869 been incremented, the true-or-false-test at the beginning of the
10870 @code{while} loop tests whether its value is still less than or equal to
10871 the value of the @code{number-of-rows} and if it is, adds the new value
10872 of the @code{row-number} variable to the @code{total} of the previous
10873 repetition of the loop.
10874
10875 @need 1200
10876 The built-in Emacs Lisp function @code{1+} adds 1 to a number, so the
10877 @code{row-number} variable can be incremented with this expression:
10878
10879 @smallexample
10880 (setq row-number (1+ row-number))
10881 @end smallexample
10882
10883 @node Inc Example altogether, , Inc Example parts, Incrementing Loop Details
10884 @unnumberedsubsubsec Putting the function definition together
10885
10886 We have created the parts for the function definition; now we need to
10887 put them together.
10888
10889 @need 800
10890 First, the contents of the @code{while} expression:
10891
10892 @smallexample
10893 @group
10894 (while (<= row-number number-of-rows) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
10895 (setq total (+ total row-number))
10896 (setq row-number (1+ row-number))) ; @r{incrementer}
10897 @end group
10898 @end smallexample
10899
10900 Along with the @code{let} expression varlist, this very nearly
10901 completes the body of the function definition. However, it requires
10902 one final element, the need for which is somewhat subtle.
10903
10904 The final touch is to place the variable @code{total} on a line by
10905 itself after the @code{while} expression. Otherwise, the value returned
10906 by the whole function is the value of the last expression that is
10907 evaluated in the body of the @code{let}, and this is the value
10908 returned by the @code{while}, which is always @code{nil}.
10909
10910 This may not be evident at first sight. It almost looks as if the
10911 incrementing expression is the last expression of the whole function.
10912 But that expression is part of the body of the @code{while}; it is the
10913 last element of the list that starts with the symbol @code{while}.
10914 Moreover, the whole of the @code{while} loop is a list within the body
10915 of the @code{let}.
10916
10917 @need 1250
10918 In outline, the function will look like this:
10919
10920 @smallexample
10921 @group
10922 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
10923 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
10924 (let (@var{varlist})
10925 (while (@var{true-or-false-test})
10926 @var{body-of-while}@dots{} )
10927 @dots{} )) ; @r{Need final expression here.}
10928 @end group
10929 @end smallexample
10930
10931 The result of evaluating the @code{let} is what is going to be returned
10932 by the @code{defun} since the @code{let} is not embedded within any
10933 containing list, except for the @code{defun} as a whole. However, if
10934 the @code{while} is the last element of the @code{let} expression, the
10935 function will always return @code{nil}. This is not what we want!
10936 Instead, what we want is the value of the variable @code{total}. This
10937 is returned by simply placing the symbol as the last element of the list
10938 starting with @code{let}. It gets evaluated after the preceding
10939 elements of the list are evaluated, which means it gets evaluated after
10940 it has been assigned the correct value for the total.
10941
10942 It may be easier to see this by printing the list starting with
10943 @code{let} all on one line. This format makes it evident that the
10944 @var{varlist} and @code{while} expressions are the second and third
10945 elements of the list starting with @code{let}, and the @code{total} is
10946 the last element:
10947
10948 @smallexample
10949 @group
10950 (let (@var{varlist}) (while (@var{true-or-false-test}) @var{body-of-while}@dots{} ) total)
10951 @end group
10952 @end smallexample
10953
10954 @need 1200
10955 Putting everything together, the @code{triangle} function definition
10956 looks like this:
10957
10958 @smallexample
10959 @group
10960 (defun triangle (number-of-rows) ; @r{Version with}
10961 ; @r{ incrementing counter.}
10962 "Add up the number of pebbles in a triangle.
10963 The first row has one pebble, the second row two pebbles,
10964 the third row three pebbles, and so on.
10965 The argument is NUMBER-OF-ROWS."
10966 @end group
10967 @group
10968 (let ((total 0)
10969 (row-number 1))
10970 (while (<= row-number number-of-rows)
10971 (setq total (+ total row-number))
10972 (setq row-number (1+ row-number)))
10973 total))
10974 @end group
10975 @end smallexample
10976
10977 @need 1200
10978 After you have installed @code{triangle} by evaluating the function, you
10979 can try it out. Here are two examples:
10980
10981 @smallexample
10982 @group
10983 (triangle 4)
10984
10985 (triangle 7)
10986 @end group
10987 @end smallexample
10988
10989 @noindent
10990 The sum of the first four numbers is 10 and the sum of the first seven
10991 numbers is 28.
10992
10993 @node Decrementing Loop, , Incrementing Loop Details, while
10994 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10995 @subsection Loop with a Decrementing Counter
10996
10997 Another common way to write a @code{while} loop is to write the test
10998 so that it determines whether a counter is greater than zero. So long
10999 as the counter is greater than zero, the loop is repeated. But when
11000 the counter is equal to or less than zero, the loop is stopped. For
11001 this to work, the counter has to start out greater than zero and then
11002 be made smaller and smaller by a form that is evaluated
11003 repeatedly.
11004
11005 The test will be an expression such as @code{(> counter 0)} which
11006 returns @code{t} for true if the value of @code{counter} is greater
11007 than zero, and @code{nil} for false if the value of @code{counter} is
11008 equal to or less than zero. The expression that makes the number
11009 smaller and smaller can be a simple @code{setq} such as @code{(setq
11010 counter (1- counter))}, where @code{1-} is a built-in function in
11011 Emacs Lisp that subtracts 1 from its argument.
11012
11013 @need 1250
11014 The template for a decrementing @code{while} loop looks like this:
11015
11016 @smallexample
11017 @group
11018 (while (> counter 0) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
11019 @var{body}@dots{}
11020 (setq counter (1- counter))) ; @r{decrementer}
11021 @end group
11022 @end smallexample
11023
11024 @menu
11025 * Decrementing Example:: More pebbles on the beach.
11026 * Dec Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
11027 * Dec Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
11028 @end menu
11029
11030 @node Decrementing Example, Dec Example parts, Decrementing Loop, Decrementing Loop
11031 @unnumberedsubsubsec Example with decrementing counter
11032
11033 To illustrate a loop with a decrementing counter, we will rewrite the
11034 @code{triangle} function so the counter decreases to zero.
11035
11036 This is the reverse of the earlier version of the function. In this
11037 case, to find out how many pebbles are needed to make a triangle with
11038 3 rows, add the number of pebbles in the third row, 3, to the number
11039 in the preceding row, 2, and then add the total of those two rows to
11040 the row that precedes them, which is 1.
11041
11042 Likewise, to find the number of pebbles in a triangle with 7 rows, add
11043 the number of pebbles in the seventh row, 7, to the number in the
11044 preceding row, which is 6, and then add the total of those two rows to
11045 the row that precedes them, which is 5, and so on. As in the previous
11046 example, each addition only involves adding two numbers, the total of
11047 the rows already added up and the number of pebbles in the row that is
11048 being added to the total. This process of adding two numbers is
11049 repeated again and again until there are no more pebbles to add.
11050
11051 We know how many pebbles to start with: the number of pebbles in the
11052 last row is equal to the number of rows. If the triangle has seven
11053 rows, the number of pebbles in the last row is 7. Likewise, we know how
11054 many pebbles are in the preceding row: it is one less than the number in
11055 the row.
11056
11057 @node Dec Example parts, Dec Example altogether, Decrementing Example, Decrementing Loop
11058 @unnumberedsubsubsec The parts of the function definition
11059
11060 We start with three variables: the total number of rows in the
11061 triangle; the number of pebbles in a row; and the total number of
11062 pebbles, which is what we want to calculate. These variables can be
11063 named @code{number-of-rows}, @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row}, and
11064 @code{total}, respectively.
11065
11066 Both @code{total} and @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} are used only
11067 inside the function and are declared with @code{let}. The initial
11068 value of @code{total} should, of course, be zero. However, the
11069 initial value of @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} should be equal to
11070 the number of rows in the triangle, since the addition will start with
11071 the longest row.
11072
11073 @need 1250
11074 This means that the beginning of the @code{let} expression will look
11075 like this:
11076
11077 @smallexample
11078 @group
11079 (let ((total 0)
11080 (number-of-pebbles-in-row number-of-rows))
11081 @var{body}@dots{})
11082 @end group
11083 @end smallexample
11084
11085 The total number of pebbles can be found by repeatedly adding the number
11086 of pebbles in a row to the total already found, that is, by repeatedly
11087 evaluating the following expression:
11088
11089 @smallexample
11090 (setq total (+ total number-of-pebbles-in-row))
11091 @end smallexample
11092
11093 @noindent
11094 After the @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} is added to the @code{total},
11095 the @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} should be decremented by one, since
11096 the next time the loop repeats, the preceding row will be
11097 added to the total.
11098
11099 The number of pebbles in a preceding row is one less than the number of
11100 pebbles in a row, so the built-in Emacs Lisp function @code{1-} can be
11101 used to compute the number of pebbles in the preceding row. This can be
11102 done with the following expression:
11103
11104 @smallexample
11105 @group
11106 (setq number-of-pebbles-in-row
11107 (1- number-of-pebbles-in-row))
11108 @end group
11109 @end smallexample
11110
11111 Finally, we know that the @code{while} loop should stop making repeated
11112 additions when there are no pebbles in a row. So the test for
11113 the @code{while} loop is simply:
11114
11115 @smallexample
11116 (while (> number-of-pebbles-in-row 0)
11117 @end smallexample
11118
11119 @node Dec Example altogether, , Dec Example parts, Decrementing Loop
11120 @unnumberedsubsubsec Putting the function definition together
11121
11122 We can put these expressions together to create a function definition
11123 that works. However, on examination, we find that one of the local
11124 variables is unneeded!
11125
11126 @need 1250
11127 The function definition looks like this:
11128
11129 @smallexample
11130 @group
11131 ;;; @r{First subtractive version.}
11132 (defun triangle (number-of-rows)
11133 "Add up the number of pebbles in a triangle."
11134 (let ((total 0)
11135 (number-of-pebbles-in-row number-of-rows))
11136 (while (> number-of-pebbles-in-row 0)
11137 (setq total (+ total number-of-pebbles-in-row))
11138 (setq number-of-pebbles-in-row
11139 (1- number-of-pebbles-in-row)))
11140 total))
11141 @end group
11142 @end smallexample
11143
11144 As written, this function works.
11145
11146 However, we do not need @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row}.
11147
11148 @cindex Argument as local variable
11149 When the @code{triangle} function is evaluated, the symbol
11150 @code{number-of-rows} will be bound to a number, giving it an initial
11151 value. That number can be changed in the body of the function as if
11152 it were a local variable, without any fear that such a change will
11153 effect the value of the variable outside of the function. This is a
11154 very useful characteristic of Lisp; it means that the variable
11155 @code{number-of-rows} can be used anywhere in the function where
11156 @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} is used.
11157
11158 @need 800
11159 Here is a second version of the function written a bit more cleanly:
11160
11161 @smallexample
11162 @group
11163 (defun triangle (number) ; @r{Second version.}
11164 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive."
11165 (let ((total 0))
11166 (while (> number 0)
11167 (setq total (+ total number))
11168 (setq number (1- number)))
11169 total))
11170 @end group
11171 @end smallexample
11172
11173 In brief, a properly written @code{while} loop will consist of three parts:
11174
11175 @enumerate
11176 @item
11177 A test that will return false after the loop has repeated itself the
11178 correct number of times.
11179
11180 @item
11181 An expression the evaluation of which will return the value desired
11182 after being repeatedly evaluated.
11183
11184 @item
11185 An expression to change the value passed to the true-or-false-test so
11186 that the test returns false after the loop has repeated itself the right
11187 number of times.
11188 @end enumerate
11189
11190 @node dolist dotimes, Recursion, while, Loops & Recursion
11191 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11192 @section Save your time: @code{dolist} and @code{dotimes}
11193
11194 In addition to @code{while}, both @code{dolist} and @code{dotimes}
11195 provide for looping. Sometimes these are quicker to write than the
11196 equivalent @code{while} loop. Both are Lisp macros. (@xref{Macros, ,
11197 Macros, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}. )
11198
11199 @code{dolist} works like a @code{while} loop that `@sc{cdr}s down a
11200 list': @code{dolist} automatically shortens the list each time it
11201 loops---takes the @sc{cdr} of the list---and binds the @sc{car} of
11202 each shorter version of the list to the first of its arguments.
11203
11204 @code{dotimes} loops a specific number of times: you specify the number.
11205
11206 @menu
11207 * dolist::
11208 * dotimes::
11209 @end menu
11210
11211 @node dolist, dotimes, dolist dotimes, dolist dotimes
11212 @unnumberedsubsubsec The @code{dolist} Macro
11213 @findex dolist
11214
11215 Suppose, for example, you want to reverse a list, so that
11216 ``first'' ``second'' ``third'' becomes ``third'' ``second'' ``first''.
11217
11218 @need 1250
11219 In practice, you would use the @code{reverse} function, like this:
11220
11221 @smallexample
11222 @group
11223 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11224
11225 (reverse animals)
11226 @end group
11227 @end smallexample
11228
11229 @need 800
11230 @noindent
11231 Here is how you could reverse the list using a @code{while} loop:
11232
11233 @smallexample
11234 @group
11235 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11236
11237 (defun reverse-list-with-while (list)
11238 "Using while, reverse the order of LIST."
11239 (let (value) ; make sure list starts empty
11240 (while list
11241 (setq value (cons (car list) value))
11242 (setq list (cdr list)))
11243 value))
11244
11245 (reverse-list-with-while animals)
11246 @end group
11247 @end smallexample
11248
11249 @need 800
11250 @noindent
11251 And here is how you could use the @code{dolist} macro:
11252
11253 @smallexample
11254 @group
11255 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11256
11257 (defun reverse-list-with-dolist (list)
11258 "Using dolist, reverse the order of LIST."
11259 (let (value) ; make sure list starts empty
11260 (dolist (element list value)
11261 (setq value (cons element value)))))
11262
11263 (reverse-list-with-dolist animals)
11264 @end group
11265 @end smallexample
11266
11267 @need 1250
11268 @noindent
11269 In Info, you can place your cursor after the closing parenthesis of
11270 each expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}; in each case, you should see
11271
11272 @smallexample
11273 (tiger lion giraffe gazelle)
11274 @end smallexample
11275
11276 @noindent
11277 in the echo area.
11278
11279 For this example, the existing @code{reverse} function is obviously best.
11280 The @code{while} loop is just like our first example (@pxref{Loop
11281 Example, , A @code{while} Loop and a List}). The @code{while} first
11282 checks whether the list has elements; if so, it constructs a new list
11283 by adding the first element of the list to the existing list (which in
11284 the first iteration of the loop is @code{nil}). Since the second
11285 element is prepended in front of the first element, and the third
11286 element is prepended in front of the second element, the list is reversed.
11287
11288 In the expression using a @code{while} loop,
11289 the @w{@code{(setq list (cdr list))}}
11290 expression shortens the list, so the @code{while} loop eventually
11291 stops. In addition, it provides the @code{cons} expression with a new
11292 first element by creating a new and shorter list at each repetition of
11293 the loop.
11294
11295 The @code{dolist} expression does very much the same as the
11296 @code{while} expression, except that the @code{dolist} macro does some
11297 of the work you have to do when writing a @code{while} expression.
11298
11299 Like a @code{while} loop, a @code{dolist} loops. What is different is
11300 that it automatically shortens the list each time it loops --- it
11301 `@sc{cdr}s down the list' on its own --- and it automatically binds
11302 the @sc{car} of each shorter version of the list to the first of its
11303 arguments.
11304
11305 In the example, the @sc{car} of each shorter version of the list is
11306 referred to using the symbol @samp{element}, the list itself is called
11307 @samp{list}, and the value returned is called @samp{value}. The
11308 remainder of the @code{dolist} expression is the body.
11309
11310 The @code{dolist} expression binds the @sc{car} of each shorter
11311 version of the list to @code{element} and then evaluates the body of
11312 the expression; and repeats the loop. The result is returned in
11313 @code{value}.
11314
11315 @node dotimes, , dolist, dolist dotimes
11316 @unnumberedsubsubsec The @code{dotimes} Macro
11317 @findex dotimes
11318
11319 The @code{dotimes} macro is similar to @code{dolist}, except that it
11320 loops a specific number of times.
11321
11322 The first argument to @code{dotimes} is assigned the numbers 0, 1, 2
11323 and so forth each time around the loop, and the value of the third
11324 argument is returned. You need to provide the value of the second
11325 argument, which is how many times the macro loops.
11326
11327 @need 1250
11328 For example, the following binds the numbers from 0 up to, but not
11329 including, the number 3 to the first argument, @var{number}, and then
11330 constructs a list of the three numbers. (The first number is 0, the
11331 second number is 1, and the third number is 2; this makes a total of
11332 three numbers in all, starting with zero as the first number.)
11333
11334 @smallexample
11335 @group
11336 (let (value) ; otherwise a value is a void variable
11337 (dotimes (number 3 value)
11338 (setq value (cons number value))))
11339
11340 @result{} (2 1 0)
11341 @end group
11342 @end smallexample
11343
11344 @noindent
11345 @code{dotimes} returns @code{value}, so the way to use
11346 @code{dotimes} is to operate on some expression @var{number} number of
11347 times and then return the result, either as a list or an atom.
11348
11349 @need 1250
11350 Here is an example of a @code{defun} that uses @code{dotimes} to add
11351 up the number of pebbles in a triangle.
11352
11353 @smallexample
11354 @group
11355 (defun triangle-using-dotimes (number-of-rows)
11356 "Using dotimes, add up the number of pebbles in a triangle."
11357 (let ((total 0)) ; otherwise a total is a void variable
11358 (dotimes (number number-of-rows total)
11359 (setq total (+ total (1+ number))))))
11360
11361 (triangle-using-dotimes 4)
11362 @end group
11363 @end smallexample
11364
11365 @node Recursion, Looping exercise, dolist dotimes, Loops & Recursion
11366 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11367 @section Recursion
11368 @cindex Recursion
11369
11370 A recursive function contains code that tells the Lisp interpreter to
11371 call a program that runs exactly like itself, but with slightly
11372 different arguments. The code runs exactly the same because it has
11373 the same name. However, even though the program has the same name, it
11374 is not the same entity. It is different. In the jargon, it is a
11375 different `instance'.
11376
11377 Eventually, if the program is written correctly, the `slightly
11378 different arguments' will become sufficiently different from the first
11379 arguments that the final instance will stop.
11380
11381 @menu
11382 * Building Robots:: Same model, different serial number ...
11383 * Recursive Definition Parts:: Walk until you stop ...
11384 * Recursion with list:: Using a list as the test whether to recurse.
11385 * Recursive triangle function::
11386 * Recursion with cond::
11387 * Recursive Patterns:: Often used templates.
11388 * No Deferment:: Don't store up work ...
11389 * No deferment solution::
11390 @end menu
11391
11392 @node Building Robots, Recursive Definition Parts, Recursion, Recursion
11393 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11394 @subsection Building Robots: Extending the Metaphor
11395 @cindex Building robots
11396 @cindex Robots, building
11397
11398 It is sometimes helpful to think of a running program as a robot that
11399 does a job. In doing its job, a recursive function calls on a second
11400 robot to help it. The second robot is identical to the first in every
11401 way, except that the second robot helps the first and has been
11402 passed different arguments than the first.
11403
11404 In a recursive function, the second robot may call a third; and the
11405 third may call a fourth, and so on. Each of these is a different
11406 entity; but all are clones.
11407
11408 Since each robot has slightly different instructions---the arguments
11409 will differ from one robot to the next---the last robot should know
11410 when to stop.
11411
11412 Let's expand on the metaphor in which a computer program is a robot.
11413
11414 A function definition provides the blueprints for a robot. When you
11415 install a function definition, that is, when you evaluate a
11416 @code{defun} special form, you install the necessary equipment to
11417 build robots. It is as if you were in a factory, setting up an
11418 assembly line. Robots with the same name are built according to the
11419 same blueprints. So they have, as it were, the same `model number',
11420 but a different `serial number'.
11421
11422 We often say that a recursive function `calls itself'. What we mean
11423 is that the instructions in a recursive function cause the Lisp
11424 interpreter to run a different function that has the same name and
11425 does the same job as the first, but with different arguments.
11426
11427 It is important that the arguments differ from one instance to the
11428 next; otherwise, the process will never stop.
11429
11430 @node Recursive Definition Parts, Recursion with list, Building Robots, Recursion
11431 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11432 @subsection The Parts of a Recursive Definition
11433 @cindex Parts of a Recursive Definition
11434 @cindex Recursive Definition Parts
11435
11436 A recursive function typically contains a conditional expression which
11437 has three parts:
11438
11439 @enumerate
11440 @item
11441 A true-or-false-test that determines whether the function is called
11442 again, here called the @dfn{do-again-test}.
11443
11444 @item
11445 The name of the function. When this name is called, a new instance of
11446 the function---a new robot, as it were---is created and told what to do.
11447
11448 @item
11449 An expression that returns a different value each time the function is
11450 called, here called the @dfn{next-step-expression}. Consequently, the
11451 argument (or arguments) passed to the new instance of the function
11452 will be different from that passed to the previous instance. This
11453 causes the conditional expression, the @dfn{do-again-test}, to test
11454 false after the correct number of repetitions.
11455 @end enumerate
11456
11457 Recursive functions can be much simpler than any other kind of
11458 function. Indeed, when people first start to use them, they often look
11459 so mysteriously simple as to be incomprehensible. Like riding a
11460 bicycle, reading a recursive function definition takes a certain knack
11461 which is hard at first but then seems simple.
11462
11463 @need 1200
11464 There are several different common recursive patterns. A very simple
11465 pattern looks like this:
11466
11467 @smallexample
11468 @group
11469 (defun @var{name-of-recursive-function} (@var{argument-list})
11470 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
11471 (if @var{do-again-test}
11472 @var{body}@dots{}
11473 (@var{name-of-recursive-function}
11474 @var{next-step-expression})))
11475 @end group
11476 @end smallexample
11477
11478 Each time a recursive function is evaluated, a new instance of it is
11479 created and told what to do. The arguments tell the instance what to do.
11480
11481 An argument is bound to the value of the next-step-expression. Each
11482 instance runs with a different value of the next-step-expression.
11483
11484 The value in the next-step-expression is used in the do-again-test.
11485
11486 The value returned by the next-step-expression is passed to the new
11487 instance of the function, which evaluates it (or some
11488 transmogrification of it) to determine whether to continue or stop.
11489 The next-step-expression is designed so that the do-again-test returns
11490 false when the function should no longer be repeated.
11491
11492 The do-again-test is sometimes called the @dfn{stop condition},
11493 since it stops the repetitions when it tests false.
11494
11495 @node Recursion with list, Recursive triangle function, Recursive Definition Parts, Recursion
11496 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11497 @subsection Recursion with a List
11498
11499 The example of a @code{while} loop that printed the elements of a list
11500 of numbers can be written recursively. Here is the code, including
11501 an expression to set the value of the variable @code{animals} to a list.
11502
11503 If you are using GNU Emacs 20 or before, this example must be copied
11504 to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and each expression must be evaluated
11505 there. Use @kbd{C-u C-x C-e} to evaluate the
11506 @code{(print-elements-recursively animals)} expression so that the
11507 results are printed in the buffer; otherwise the Lisp interpreter will
11508 try to squeeze the results into the one line of the echo area.
11509
11510 Also, place your cursor immediately after the last closing parenthesis
11511 of the @code{print-elements-recursively} function, before the comment.
11512 Otherwise, the Lisp interpreter will try to evaluate the comment.
11513
11514 If you are using a more recent version of Emacs, you can evaluate this
11515 expression directly in Info.
11516
11517 @findex print-elements-recursively
11518 @smallexample
11519 @group
11520 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11521
11522 (defun print-elements-recursively (list)
11523 "Print each element of LIST on a line of its own.
11524 Uses recursion."
11525 (when list ; @r{do-again-test}
11526 (print (car list)) ; @r{body}
11527 (print-elements-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
11528 (cdr list)))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
11529
11530 (print-elements-recursively animals)
11531 @end group
11532 @end smallexample
11533
11534 The @code{print-elements-recursively} function first tests whether
11535 there is any content in the list; if there is, the function prints the
11536 first element of the list, the @sc{car} of the list. Then the
11537 function `invokes itself', but gives itself as its argument, not the
11538 whole list, but the second and subsequent elements of the list, the
11539 @sc{cdr} of the list.
11540
11541 Put another way, if the list is not empty, the function invokes
11542 another instance of code that is similar to the initial code, but is a
11543 different thread of execution, with different arguments than the first
11544 instance.
11545
11546 Put in yet another way, if the list is not empty, the first robot
11547 assembles a second robot and tells it what to do; the second robot is
11548 a different individual from the first, but is the same model.
11549
11550 When the second evaluation occurs, the @code{when} expression is
11551 evaluated and if true, prints the first element of the list it
11552 receives as its argument (which is the second element of the original
11553 list). Then the function `calls itself' with the @sc{cdr} of the list
11554 it is invoked with, which (the second time around) is the @sc{cdr} of
11555 the @sc{cdr} of the original list.
11556
11557 Note that although we say that the function `calls itself', what we
11558 mean is that the Lisp interpreter assembles and instructs a new
11559 instance of the program. The new instance is a clone of the first,
11560 but is a separate individual.
11561
11562 Each time the function `invokes itself', it invokes itself on a
11563 shorter version of the original list. It creates a new instance that
11564 works on a shorter list.
11565
11566 Eventually, the function invokes itself on an empty list. It creates
11567 a new instance whose argument is @code{nil}. The conditional expression
11568 tests the value of @code{list}. Since the value of @code{list} is
11569 @code{nil}, the @code{when} expression tests false so the then-part is
11570 not evaluated. The function as a whole then returns @code{nil}.
11571
11572 @need 1200
11573 When you evaluate the expression @code{(print-elements-recursively
11574 animals)} in the @file{*scratch*} buffer, you see this result:
11575
11576 @smallexample
11577 @group
11578 gazelle
11579
11580 giraffe
11581
11582 lion
11583
11584 tiger
11585 nil
11586 @end group
11587 @end smallexample
11588
11589 @need 2000
11590 @node Recursive triangle function, Recursion with cond, Recursion with list, Recursion
11591 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11592 @subsection Recursion in Place of a Counter
11593 @findex triangle-recursively
11594
11595 @need 1200
11596 The @code{triangle} function described in a previous section can also
11597 be written recursively. It looks like this:
11598
11599 @smallexample
11600 @group
11601 (defun triangle-recursively (number)
11602 "Return the sum of the numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
11603 Uses recursion."
11604 (if (= number 1) ; @r{do-again-test}
11605 1 ; @r{then-part}
11606 (+ number ; @r{else-part}
11607 (triangle-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
11608 (1- number))))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
11609
11610 (triangle-recursively 7)
11611 @end group
11612 @end smallexample
11613
11614 @noindent
11615 You can install this function by evaluating it and then try it by
11616 evaluating @code{(triangle-recursively 7)}. (Remember to put your
11617 cursor immediately after the last parenthesis of the function
11618 definition, before the comment.) The function evaluates to 28.
11619
11620 To understand how this function works, let's consider what happens in the
11621 various cases when the function is passed 1, 2, 3, or 4 as the value of
11622 its argument.
11623
11624 @menu
11625 * Recursive Example arg of 1 or 2::
11626 * Recursive Example arg of 3 or 4::
11627 @end menu
11628
11629 @node Recursive Example arg of 1 or 2, Recursive Example arg of 3 or 4, Recursive triangle function, Recursive triangle function
11630 @ifnottex
11631 @unnumberedsubsubsec An argument of 1 or 2
11632 @end ifnottex
11633
11634 First, what happens if the value of the argument is 1?
11635
11636 The function has an @code{if} expression after the documentation
11637 string. It tests whether the value of @code{number} is equal to 1; if
11638 so, Emacs evaluates the then-part of the @code{if} expression, which
11639 returns the number 1 as the value of the function. (A triangle with
11640 one row has one pebble in it.)
11641
11642 Suppose, however, that the value of the argument is 2. In this case,
11643 Emacs evaluates the else-part of the @code{if} expression.
11644
11645 @need 1200
11646 The else-part consists of an addition, the recursive call to
11647 @code{triangle-recursively} and a decrementing action; and it looks like
11648 this:
11649
11650 @smallexample
11651 (+ number (triangle-recursively (1- number)))
11652 @end smallexample
11653
11654 When Emacs evaluates this expression, the innermost expression is
11655 evaluated first; then the other parts in sequence. Here are the steps
11656 in detail:
11657
11658 @table @i
11659 @item Step 1 @w{ } Evaluate the innermost expression.
11660
11661 The innermost expression is @code{(1- number)} so Emacs decrements the
11662 value of @code{number} from 2 to 1.
11663
11664 @item Step 2 @w{ } Evaluate the @code{triangle-recursively} function.
11665
11666 The Lisp interpreter creates an individual instance of
11667 @code{triangle-recursively}. It does not matter that this function is
11668 contained within itself. Emacs passes the result Step 1 as the
11669 argument used by this instance of the @code{triangle-recursively}
11670 function
11671
11672 In this case, Emacs evaluates @code{triangle-recursively} with an
11673 argument of 1. This means that this evaluation of
11674 @code{triangle-recursively} returns 1.
11675
11676 @item Step 3 @w{ } Evaluate the value of @code{number}.
11677
11678 The variable @code{number} is the second element of the list that
11679 starts with @code{+}; its value is 2.
11680
11681 @item Step 4 @w{ } Evaluate the @code{+} expression.
11682
11683 The @code{+} expression receives two arguments, the first
11684 from the evaluation of @code{number} (Step 3) and the second from the
11685 evaluation of @code{triangle-recursively} (Step 2).
11686
11687 The result of the addition is the sum of 2 plus 1, and the number 3 is
11688 returned, which is correct. A triangle with two rows has three
11689 pebbles in it.
11690 @end table
11691
11692 @node Recursive Example arg of 3 or 4, , Recursive Example arg of 1 or 2, Recursive triangle function
11693 @unnumberedsubsubsec An argument of 3 or 4
11694
11695 Suppose that @code{triangle-recursively} is called with an argument of
11696 3.
11697
11698 @table @i
11699 @item Step 1 @w{ } Evaluate the do-again-test.
11700
11701 The @code{if} expression is evaluated first. This is the do-again
11702 test and returns false, so the else-part of the @code{if} expression
11703 is evaluated. (Note that in this example, the do-again-test causes
11704 the function to call itself when it tests false, not when it tests
11705 true.)
11706
11707 @item Step 2 @w{ } Evaluate the innermost expression of the else-part.
11708
11709 The innermost expression of the else-part is evaluated, which decrements
11710 3 to 2. This is the next-step-expression.
11711
11712 @item Step 3 @w{ } Evaluate the @code{triangle-recursively} function.
11713
11714 The number 2 is passed to the @code{triangle-recursively} function.
11715
11716 We already know what happens when Emacs evaluates @code{triangle-recursively} with
11717 an argument of 2. After going through the sequence of actions described
11718 earlier, it returns a value of 3. So that is what will happen here.
11719
11720 @item Step 4 @w{ } Evaluate the addition.
11721
11722 3 will be passed as an argument to the addition and will be added to the
11723 number with which the function was called, which is 3.
11724 @end table
11725
11726 @noindent
11727 The value returned by the function as a whole will be 6.
11728
11729 Now that we know what will happen when @code{triangle-recursively} is
11730 called with an argument of 3, it is evident what will happen if it is
11731 called with an argument of 4:
11732
11733 @quotation
11734 @need 800
11735 In the recursive call, the evaluation of
11736
11737 @smallexample
11738 (triangle-recursively (1- 4))
11739 @end smallexample
11740
11741 @need 800
11742 @noindent
11743 will return the value of evaluating
11744
11745 @smallexample
11746 (triangle-recursively 3)
11747 @end smallexample
11748
11749 @noindent
11750 which is 6 and this value will be added to 4 by the addition in the
11751 third line.
11752 @end quotation
11753
11754 @noindent
11755 The value returned by the function as a whole will be 10.
11756
11757 Each time @code{triangle-recursively} is evaluated, it evaluates a
11758 version of itself---a different instance of itself---with a smaller
11759 argument, until the argument is small enough so that it does not
11760 evaluate itself.
11761
11762 Note that this particular design for a recursive function
11763 requires that operations be deferred.
11764
11765 Before @code{(triangle-recursively 7)} can calculate its answer, it
11766 must call @code{(triangle-recursively 6)}; and before
11767 @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} can calculate its answer, it must call
11768 @code{(triangle-recursively 5)}; and so on. That is to say, the
11769 calculation that @code{(triangle-recursively 7)} makes must be
11770 deferred until @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} makes its calculation;
11771 and @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} must defer until
11772 @code{(triangle-recursively 5)} completes; and so on.
11773
11774 If each of these instances of @code{triangle-recursively} are thought
11775 of as different robots, the first robot must wait for the second to
11776 complete its job, which must wait until the third completes, and so
11777 on.
11778
11779 There is a way around this kind of waiting, which we will discuss in
11780 @ref{No Deferment, , Recursion without Deferments}.
11781
11782 @node Recursion with cond, Recursive Patterns, Recursive triangle function, Recursion
11783 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11784 @subsection Recursion Example Using @code{cond}
11785 @findex cond
11786
11787 The version of @code{triangle-recursively} described earlier is written
11788 with the @code{if} special form. It can also be written using another
11789 special form called @code{cond}. The name of the special form
11790 @code{cond} is an abbreviation of the word @samp{conditional}.
11791
11792 Although the @code{cond} special form is not used as often in the
11793 Emacs Lisp sources as @code{if}, it is used often enough to justify
11794 explaining it.
11795
11796 @need 800
11797 The template for a @code{cond} expression looks like this:
11798
11799 @smallexample
11800 @group
11801 (cond
11802 @var{body}@dots{})
11803 @end group
11804 @end smallexample
11805
11806 @noindent
11807 where the @var{body} is a series of lists.
11808
11809 @need 800
11810 Written out more fully, the template looks like this:
11811
11812 @smallexample
11813 @group
11814 (cond
11815 (@var{first-true-or-false-test} @var{first-consequent})
11816 (@var{second-true-or-false-test} @var{second-consequent})
11817 (@var{third-true-or-false-test} @var{third-consequent})
11818 @dots{})
11819 @end group
11820 @end smallexample
11821
11822 When the Lisp interpreter evaluates the @code{cond} expression, it
11823 evaluates the first element (the @sc{car} or true-or-false-test) of
11824 the first expression in a series of expressions within the body of the
11825 @code{cond}.
11826
11827 If the true-or-false-test returns @code{nil} the rest of that
11828 expression, the consequent, is skipped and the true-or-false-test of the
11829 next expression is evaluated. When an expression is found whose
11830 true-or-false-test returns a value that is not @code{nil}, the
11831 consequent of that expression is evaluated. The consequent can be one
11832 or more expressions. If the consequent consists of more than one
11833 expression, the expressions are evaluated in sequence and the value of
11834 the last one is returned. If the expression does not have a consequent,
11835 the value of the true-or-false-test is returned.
11836
11837 If none of the true-or-false-tests test true, the @code{cond} expression
11838 returns @code{nil}.
11839
11840 @need 1250
11841 Written using @code{cond}, the @code{triangle} function looks like this:
11842
11843 @smallexample
11844 @group
11845 (defun triangle-using-cond (number)
11846 (cond ((<= number 0) 0)
11847 ((= number 1) 1)
11848 ((> number 1)
11849 (+ number (triangle-using-cond (1- number))))))
11850 @end group
11851 @end smallexample
11852
11853 @noindent
11854 In this example, the @code{cond} returns 0 if the number is less than or
11855 equal to 0, it returns 1 if the number is 1 and it evaluates @code{(+
11856 number (triangle-using-cond (1- number)))} if the number is greater than
11857 1.
11858
11859 @node Recursive Patterns, No Deferment, Recursion with cond, Recursion
11860 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11861 @subsection Recursive Patterns
11862 @cindex Recursive Patterns
11863
11864 Here are three common recursive patterns. Each involves a list.
11865 Recursion does not need to involve lists, but Lisp is designed for lists
11866 and this provides a sense of its primal capabilities.
11867
11868 @menu
11869 * Every::
11870 * Accumulate::
11871 * Keep::
11872 @end menu
11873
11874 @node Every, Accumulate, Recursive Patterns, Recursive Patterns
11875 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11876 @unnumberedsubsubsec Recursive Pattern: @emph{every}
11877 @cindex Every, type of recursive pattern
11878 @cindex Recursive pattern: every
11879
11880 In the @code{every} recursive pattern, an action is performed on every
11881 element of a list.
11882
11883 @need 1500
11884 The basic pattern is:
11885
11886 @itemize @bullet
11887 @item
11888 If a list be empty, return @code{nil}.
11889 @item
11890 Else, act on the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list)
11891 @itemize @minus
11892 @item
11893 through a recursive call by the function on the rest (the
11894 @sc{cdr}) of the list,
11895 @item
11896 and, optionally, combine the acted-on element, using @code{cons},
11897 with the results of acting on the rest.
11898 @end itemize
11899 @end itemize
11900
11901 @need 1500
11902 Here is example:
11903
11904 @smallexample
11905 @group
11906 (defun square-each (numbers-list)
11907 "Square each of a NUMBERS LIST, recursively."
11908 (if (not numbers-list) ; do-again-test
11909 nil
11910 (cons
11911 (* (car numbers-list) (car numbers-list))
11912 (square-each (cdr numbers-list))))) ; next-step-expression
11913 @end group
11914
11915 @group
11916 (square-each '(1 2 3))
11917 @result{} (1 4 9)
11918 @end group
11919 @end smallexample
11920
11921 @need 1200
11922 @noindent
11923 If @code{numbers-list} is empty, do nothing. But if it has content,
11924 construct a list combining the square of the first number in the list
11925 with the result of the recursive call.
11926
11927 (The example follows the pattern exactly: @code{nil} is returned if
11928 the numbers' list is empty. In practice, you would write the
11929 conditional so it carries out the action when the numbers' list is not
11930 empty.)
11931
11932 The @code{print-elements-recursively} function (@pxref{Recursion with
11933 list, , Recursion with a List}) is another example of an @code{every}
11934 pattern, except in this case, rather than bring the results together
11935 using @code{cons}, we print each element of output.
11936
11937 @need 1250
11938 The @code{print-elements-recursively} function looks like this:
11939
11940 @smallexample
11941 @group
11942 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11943 @end group
11944
11945 @group
11946 (defun print-elements-recursively (list)
11947 "Print each element of LIST on a line of its own.
11948 Uses recursion."
11949 (when list ; @r{do-again-test}
11950 (print (car list)) ; @r{body}
11951 (print-elements-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
11952 (cdr list)))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
11953
11954 (print-elements-recursively animals)
11955 @end group
11956 @end smallexample
11957
11958 @need 1500
11959 The pattern for @code{print-elements-recursively} is:
11960
11961 @itemize @bullet
11962 @item
11963 When the list is empty, do nothing.
11964 @item
11965 But when the list has at least one element,
11966 @itemize @minus
11967 @item
11968 act on the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list),
11969 @item
11970 and make a recursive call on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
11971 @end itemize
11972 @end itemize
11973
11974 @node Accumulate, Keep, Every, Recursive Patterns
11975 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11976 @unnumberedsubsubsec Recursive Pattern: @emph{accumulate}
11977 @cindex Accumulate, type of recursive pattern
11978 @cindex Recursive pattern: accumulate
11979
11980 Another recursive pattern is called the @code{accumulate} pattern. In
11981 the @code{accumulate} recursive pattern, an action is performed on
11982 every element of a list and the result of that action is accumulated
11983 with the results of performing the action on the other elements.
11984
11985 This is very like the `every' pattern using @code{cons}, except that
11986 @code{cons} is not used, but some other combiner.
11987
11988 @need 1500
11989 The pattern is:
11990
11991 @itemize @bullet
11992 @item
11993 If a list be empty, return zero or some other constant.
11994 @item
11995 Else, act on the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list),
11996 @itemize @minus
11997 @item
11998 and combine that acted-on element, using @code{+} or
11999 some other combining function, with
12000 @item
12001 a recursive call by the function on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
12002 @end itemize
12003 @end itemize
12004
12005 @need 1500
12006 Here is an example:
12007
12008 @smallexample
12009 @group
12010 (defun add-elements (numbers-list)
12011 "Add the elements of NUMBERS-LIST together."
12012 (if (not numbers-list)
12013 0
12014 (+ (car numbers-list) (add-elements (cdr numbers-list)))))
12015 @end group
12016
12017 @group
12018 (add-elements '(1 2 3 4))
12019 @result{} 10
12020 @end group
12021 @end smallexample
12022
12023 @xref{Files List, , Making a List of Files}, for an example of the
12024 accumulate pattern.
12025
12026 @node Keep, , Accumulate, Recursive Patterns
12027 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
12028 @unnumberedsubsubsec Recursive Pattern: @emph{keep}
12029 @cindex Keep, type of recursive pattern
12030 @cindex Recursive pattern: keep
12031
12032 A third recursive pattern is called the @code{keep} pattern.
12033 In the @code{keep} recursive pattern, each element of a list is tested;
12034 the element is acted on and the results are kept only if the element
12035 meets a criterion.
12036
12037 Again, this is very like the `every' pattern, except the element is
12038 skipped unless it meets a criterion.
12039
12040 @need 1500
12041 The pattern has three parts:
12042
12043 @itemize @bullet
12044 @item
12045 If a list be empty, return @code{nil}.
12046 @item
12047 Else, if the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list) passes
12048 a test
12049 @itemize @minus
12050 @item
12051 act on that element and combine it, using @code{cons} with
12052 @item
12053 a recursive call by the function on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
12054 @end itemize
12055 @item
12056 Otherwise, if the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list) fails
12057 the test
12058 @itemize @minus
12059 @item
12060 skip on that element,
12061 @item
12062 and, recursively call the function on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
12063 @end itemize
12064 @end itemize
12065
12066 @need 1500
12067 Here is an example that uses @code{cond}:
12068
12069 @smallexample
12070 @group
12071 (defun keep-three-letter-words (word-list)
12072 "Keep three letter words in WORD-LIST."
12073 (cond
12074 ;; First do-again-test: stop-condition
12075 ((not word-list) nil)
12076
12077 ;; Second do-again-test: when to act
12078 ((eq 3 (length (symbol-name (car word-list))))
12079 ;; combine acted-on element with recursive call on shorter list
12080 (cons (car word-list) (keep-three-letter-words (cdr word-list))))
12081
12082 ;; Third do-again-test: when to skip element;
12083 ;; recursively call shorter list with next-step expression
12084 (t (keep-three-letter-words (cdr word-list)))))
12085 @end group
12086
12087 @group
12088 (keep-three-letter-words '(one two three four five six))
12089 @result{} (one two six)
12090 @end group
12091 @end smallexample
12092
12093 It goes without saying that you need not use @code{nil} as the test for
12094 when to stop; and you can, of course, combine these patterns.
12095
12096 @node No Deferment, No deferment solution, Recursive Patterns, Recursion
12097 @subsection Recursion without Deferments
12098 @cindex Deferment in recursion
12099 @cindex Recursion without Deferments
12100
12101 Let's consider again what happens with the @code{triangle-recursively}
12102 function. We will find that the intermediate calculations are
12103 deferred until all can be done.
12104
12105 @need 800
12106 Here is the function definition:
12107
12108 @smallexample
12109 @group
12110 (defun triangle-recursively (number)
12111 "Return the sum of the numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
12112 Uses recursion."
12113 (if (= number 1) ; @r{do-again-test}
12114 1 ; @r{then-part}
12115 (+ number ; @r{else-part}
12116 (triangle-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
12117 (1- number))))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
12118 @end group
12119 @end smallexample
12120
12121 What happens when we call this function with a argument of 7?
12122
12123 The first instance of the @code{triangle-recursively} function adds
12124 the number 7 to the value returned by a second instance of
12125 @code{triangle-recursively}, an instance that has been passed an
12126 argument of 6. That is to say, the first calculation is:
12127
12128 @smallexample
12129 (+ 7 (triangle-recursively 6))
12130 @end smallexample
12131
12132 @noindent
12133 The first instance of @code{triangle-recursively}---you may want to
12134 think of it as a little robot---cannot complete its job. It must hand
12135 off the calculation for @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} to a second
12136 instance of the program, to a second robot. This second individual is
12137 completely different from the first one; it is, in the jargon, a
12138 `different instantiation'. Or, put another way, it is a different
12139 robot. It is the same model as the first; it calculates triangle
12140 numbers recursively; but it has a different serial number.
12141
12142 And what does @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} return? It returns the
12143 number 6 added to the value returned by evaluating
12144 @code{triangle-recursively} with an argument of 5. Using the robot
12145 metaphor, it asks yet another robot to help it.
12146
12147 @need 800
12148 Now the total is:
12149
12150 @smallexample
12151 (+ 7 6 (triangle-recursively 5))
12152 @end smallexample
12153
12154 @need 800
12155 And what happens next?
12156
12157 @smallexample
12158 (+ 7 6 5 (triangle-recursively 4))
12159 @end smallexample
12160
12161 Each time @code{triangle-recursively} is called, except for the last
12162 time, it creates another instance of the program---another robot---and
12163 asks it to make a calculation.
12164
12165 @need 800
12166 Eventually, the full addition is set up and performed:
12167
12168 @smallexample
12169 (+ 7 6 5 4 3 2 1)
12170 @end smallexample
12171
12172 This design for the function defers the calculation of the first step
12173 until the second can be done, and defers that until the third can be
12174 done, and so on. Each deferment means the computer must remember what
12175 is being waited on. This is not a problem when there are only a few
12176 steps, as in this example. But it can be a problem when there are
12177 more steps.
12178
12179 @node No deferment solution, , No Deferment, Recursion
12180 @subsection No Deferment Solution
12181 @cindex No deferment solution
12182 @cindex Defermentless solution
12183 @cindex Solution without deferment
12184
12185 The solution to the problem of deferred operations is to write in a
12186 manner that does not defer operations@footnote{The phrase @dfn{tail
12187 recursive} is used to describe such a process, one that uses
12188 `constant space'.}. This requires
12189 writing to a different pattern, often one that involves writing two
12190 function definitions, an `initialization' function and a `helper'
12191 function.
12192
12193 The `initialization' function sets up the job; the `helper' function
12194 does the work.
12195
12196 @need 1200
12197 Here are the two function definitions for adding up numbers. They are
12198 so simple, I find them hard to understand.
12199
12200 @smallexample
12201 @group
12202 (defun triangle-initialization (number)
12203 "Return the sum of the numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
12204 This is the `initialization' component of a two function
12205 duo that uses recursion."
12206 (triangle-recursive-helper 0 0 number))
12207 @end group
12208 @end smallexample
12209
12210 @smallexample
12211 @group
12212 (defun triangle-recursive-helper (sum counter number)
12213 "Return SUM, using COUNTER, through NUMBER inclusive.
12214 This is the `helper' component of a two function duo
12215 that uses recursion."
12216 (if (> counter number)
12217 sum
12218 (triangle-recursive-helper (+ sum counter) ; @r{sum}
12219 (1+ counter) ; @r{counter}
12220 number))) ; @r{number}
12221 @end group
12222 @end smallexample
12223
12224 @need 1250
12225 Install both function definitions by evaluating them, then call
12226 @code{triangle-initialization} with 2 rows:
12227
12228 @smallexample
12229 @group
12230 (triangle-initialization 2)
12231 @result{} 3
12232 @end group
12233 @end smallexample
12234
12235 The `initialization' function calls the first instance of the `helper'
12236 function with three arguments: zero, zero, and a number which is the
12237 number of rows in the triangle.
12238
12239 The first two arguments passed to the `helper' function are
12240 initialization values. These values are changed when
12241 @code{triangle-recursive-helper} invokes new instances.@footnote{The
12242 jargon is mildly confusing: @code{triangle-recursive-helper} uses a
12243 process that is iterative in a procedure that is recursive. The
12244 process is called iterative because the computer need only record the
12245 three values, @code{sum}, @code{counter}, and @code{number}; the
12246 procedure is recursive because the function `calls itself'. On the
12247 other hand, both the process and the procedure used by
12248 @code{triangle-recursively} are called recursive. The word
12249 `recursive' has different meanings in the two contexts.}
12250
12251 Let's see what happens when we have a triangle that has one row. (This
12252 triangle will have one pebble in it!)
12253
12254 @need 1200
12255 @code{triangle-initialization} will call its helper with
12256 the arguments @w{@code{0 0 1}}. That function will run the conditional
12257 test whether @code{(> counter number)}:
12258
12259 @smallexample
12260 (> 0 1)
12261 @end smallexample
12262
12263 @need 1200
12264 @noindent
12265 and find that the result is false, so it will invoke
12266 the else-part of the @code{if} clause:
12267
12268 @smallexample
12269 @group
12270 (triangle-recursive-helper
12271 (+ sum counter) ; @r{sum plus counter} @result{} @r{sum}
12272 (1+ counter) ; @r{increment counter} @result{} @r{counter}
12273 number) ; @r{number stays the same}
12274 @end group
12275 @end smallexample
12276
12277 @need 800
12278 @noindent
12279 which will first compute:
12280
12281 @smallexample
12282 @group
12283 (triangle-recursive-helper (+ 0 0) ; @r{sum}
12284 (1+ 0) ; @r{counter}
12285 1) ; @r{number}
12286 @exdent which is:
12287
12288 (triangle-recursive-helper 0 1 1)
12289 @end group
12290 @end smallexample
12291
12292 Again, @code{(> counter number)} will be false, so again, the Lisp
12293 interpreter will evaluate @code{triangle-recursive-helper}, creating a
12294 new instance with new arguments.
12295
12296 @need 800
12297 This new instance will be;
12298
12299 @smallexample
12300 @group
12301 (triangle-recursive-helper
12302 (+ sum counter) ; @r{sum plus counter} @result{} @r{sum}
12303 (1+ counter) ; @r{increment counter} @result{} @r{counter}
12304 number) ; @r{number stays the same}
12305
12306 @exdent which is:
12307
12308 (triangle-recursive-helper 1 2 1)
12309 @end group
12310 @end smallexample
12311
12312 In this case, the @code{(> counter number)} test will be true! So the
12313 instance will return the value of the sum, which will be 1, as
12314 expected.
12315
12316 Now, let's pass @code{triangle-initialization} an argument
12317 of 2, to find out how many pebbles there are in a triangle with two rows.
12318
12319 That function calls @code{(triangle-recursive-helper 0 0 2)}.
12320
12321 @need 800
12322 In stages, the instances called will be:
12323
12324 @smallexample
12325 @group
12326 @r{sum counter number}
12327 (triangle-recursive-helper 0 1 2)
12328
12329 (triangle-recursive-helper 1 2 2)
12330
12331 (triangle-recursive-helper 3 3 2)
12332 @end group
12333 @end smallexample
12334
12335 When the last instance is called, the @code{(> counter number)} test
12336 will be true, so the instance will return the value of @code{sum},
12337 which will be 3.
12338
12339 This kind of pattern helps when you are writing functions that can use
12340 many resources in a computer.
12341
12342 @need 1500
12343 @node Looping exercise, , Recursion, Loops & Recursion
12344 @section Looping Exercise
12345
12346 @itemize @bullet
12347 @item
12348 Write a function similar to @code{triangle} in which each row has a
12349 value which is the square of the row number. Use a @code{while} loop.
12350
12351 @item
12352 Write a function similar to @code{triangle} that multiplies instead of
12353 adds the values.
12354
12355 @item
12356 Rewrite these two functions recursively. Rewrite these functions
12357 using @code{cond}.
12358
12359 @c comma in printed title causes problem in Info cross reference
12360 @item
12361 Write a function for Texinfo mode that creates an index entry at the
12362 beginning of a paragraph for every @samp{@@dfn} within the paragraph.
12363 (In a Texinfo file, @samp{@@dfn} marks a definition. This book is
12364 written in Texinfo.)
12365
12366 Many of the functions you will need are described in two of the
12367 previous chapters, @ref{Cutting & Storing Text, , Cutting and Storing
12368 Text}, and @ref{Yanking, , Yanking Text Back}. If you use
12369 @code{forward-paragraph} to put the index entry at the beginning of
12370 the paragraph, you will have to use @w{@kbd{C-h f}}
12371 (@code{describe-function}) to find out how to make the command go
12372 backwards.
12373
12374 For more information, see
12375 @ifinfo
12376 @ref{Indicating, , Indicating Definitions, texinfo}.
12377 @end ifinfo
12378 @ifhtml
12379 @ref{Indicating, , Indicating, texinfo, Texinfo Manual}, which goes to
12380 a Texinfo manual in the current directory. Or, if you are on the
12381 Internet, see
12382 @uref{http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/manual/texinfo/}
12383 @end ifhtml
12384 @iftex
12385 ``Indicating Definitions, Commands, etc.'' in @cite{Texinfo, The GNU
12386 Documentation Format}.
12387 @end iftex
12388 @end itemize
12389
12390 @node Regexp Search, Counting Words, Loops & Recursion, Top
12391 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
12392 @chapter Regular Expression Searches
12393 @cindex Searches, illustrating
12394 @cindex Regular expression searches
12395 @cindex Patterns, searching for
12396 @cindex Motion by sentence and paragraph
12397 @cindex Sentences, movement by
12398 @cindex Paragraphs, movement by
12399
12400 Regular expression searches are used extensively in GNU Emacs. The
12401 two functions, @code{forward-sentence} and @code{forward-paragraph},
12402 illustrate these searches well. They use regular expressions to find
12403 where to move point. The phrase `regular expression' is often written
12404 as `regexp'.
12405
12406 Regular expression searches are described in @ref{Regexp Search, ,
12407 Regular Expression Search, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, as well as in
12408 @ref{Regular Expressions, , , elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
12409 Manual}. In writing this chapter, I am presuming that you have at
12410 least a mild acquaintance with them. The major point to remember is
12411 that regular expressions permit you to search for patterns as well as
12412 for literal strings of characters. For example, the code in
12413 @code{forward-sentence} searches for the pattern of possible
12414 characters that could mark the end of a sentence, and moves point to
12415 that spot.
12416
12417 Before looking at the code for the @code{forward-sentence} function, it
12418 is worth considering what the pattern that marks the end of a sentence
12419 must be. The pattern is discussed in the next section; following that
12420 is a description of the regular expression search function,
12421 @code{re-search-forward}. The @code{forward-sentence} function
12422 is described in the section following. Finally, the
12423 @code{forward-paragraph} function is described in the last section of
12424 this chapter. @code{forward-paragraph} is a complex function that
12425 introduces several new features.
12426
12427 @menu
12428 * sentence-end:: The regular expression for @code{sentence-end}.
12429 * re-search-forward:: Very similar to @code{search-forward}.
12430 * forward-sentence:: A straightforward example of regexp search.
12431 * forward-paragraph:: A somewhat complex example.
12432 * etags:: How to create your own @file{TAGS} table.
12433 * Regexp Review::
12434 * re-search Exercises::
12435 @end menu
12436
12437 @node sentence-end, re-search-forward, Regexp Search, Regexp Search
12438 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
12439 @section The Regular Expression for @code{sentence-end}
12440 @findex sentence-end
12441
12442 The symbol @code{sentence-end} is bound to the pattern that marks the
12443 end of a sentence. What should this regular expression be?
12444
12445 Clearly, a sentence may be ended by a period, a question mark, or an
12446 exclamation mark. Indeed, in English, only clauses that end with one
12447 of those three characters should be considered the end of a sentence.
12448 This means that the pattern should include the character set:
12449
12450 @smallexample
12451 [.?!]
12452 @end smallexample
12453
12454 However, we do not want @code{forward-sentence} merely to jump to a
12455 period, a question mark, or an exclamation mark, because such a character
12456 might be used in the middle of a sentence. A period, for example, is
12457 used after abbreviations. So other information is needed.
12458
12459 According to convention, you type two spaces after every sentence, but
12460 only one space after a period, a question mark, or an exclamation mark in
12461 the body of a sentence. So a period, a question mark, or an exclamation
12462 mark followed by two spaces is a good indicator of an end of sentence.
12463 However, in a file, the two spaces may instead be a tab or the end of a
12464 line. This means that the regular expression should include these three
12465 items as alternatives.
12466
12467 @need 800
12468 This group of alternatives will look like this:
12469
12470 @smallexample
12471 @group
12472 \\($\\| \\| \\)
12473 ^ ^^
12474 TAB SPC
12475 @end group
12476 @end smallexample
12477
12478 @noindent
12479 Here, @samp{$} indicates the end of the line, and I have pointed out
12480 where the tab and two spaces are inserted in the expression. Both are
12481 inserted by putting the actual characters into the expression.
12482
12483 Two backslashes, @samp{\\}, are required before the parentheses and
12484 vertical bars: the first backslash quotes the following backslash in
12485 Emacs; and the second indicates that the following character, the
12486 parenthesis or the vertical bar, is special.
12487
12488 @need 1000
12489 Also, a sentence may be followed by one or more carriage returns, like
12490 this:
12491
12492 @smallexample
12493 @group
12494 [
12495 ]*
12496 @end group
12497 @end smallexample
12498
12499 @noindent
12500 Like tabs and spaces, a carriage return is inserted into a regular
12501 expression by inserting it literally. The asterisk indicates that the
12502 @key{RET} is repeated zero or more times.
12503
12504 But a sentence end does not consist only of a period, a question mark or
12505 an exclamation mark followed by appropriate space: a closing quotation
12506 mark or a closing brace of some kind may precede the space. Indeed more
12507 than one such mark or brace may precede the space. These require a
12508 expression that looks like this:
12509
12510 @smallexample
12511 []\"')@}]*
12512 @end smallexample
12513
12514 In this expression, the first @samp{]} is the first character in the
12515 expression; the second character is @samp{"}, which is preceded by a
12516 @samp{\} to tell Emacs the @samp{"} is @emph{not} special. The last
12517 three characters are @samp{'}, @samp{)}, and @samp{@}}.
12518
12519 All this suggests what the regular expression pattern for matching the
12520 end of a sentence should be; and, indeed, if we evaluate
12521 @code{sentence-end} we find that it returns the following value:
12522
12523 @smallexample
12524 @group
12525 sentence-end
12526 @result{} "[.?!][]\"')@}]*\\($\\| \\| \\)[
12527 ]*"
12528 @end group
12529 @end smallexample
12530
12531 @noindent
12532 (Well, not in GNU Emacs 22; that is because of an effort to make the
12533 process simpler and to handle more glyphs and languages. When the
12534 value of @code{sentence-end} is @code{nil}, then use the value defined
12535 by the function @code{sentence-end}. (Here is a use of the difference
12536 between a value and a function in Emacs Lisp.) The function returns a
12537 value constructed from the variables @code{sentence-end-base},
12538 @code{sentence-end-double-space}, @code{sentence-end-without-period},
12539 and @code{sentence-end-without-space}. The critical variable is
12540 @code{sentence-end-base}; its global value is similar to the one
12541 described above but it also contains two additional quotation marks.
12542 These have differing degrees of curliness. The
12543 @code{sentence-end-without-period} variable, when true, tells Emacs
12544 that a sentence may end without a period, such as text in Thai.)
12545
12546 @ignore
12547 @noindent
12548 (Note that here the @key{TAB}, two spaces, and @key{RET} are shown
12549 literally in the pattern.)
12550
12551 This regular expression can be deciphered as follows:
12552
12553 @table @code
12554 @item [.?!]
12555 The first part of the pattern is the three characters, a period, a question
12556 mark and an exclamation mark, within square brackets. The pattern must
12557 begin with one or other of these characters.
12558
12559 @item []\"')@}]*
12560 The second part of the pattern is the group of closing braces and
12561 quotation marks, which can appear zero or more times. These may follow
12562 the period, question mark or exclamation mark. In a regular expression,
12563 the backslash, @samp{\}, followed by the double quotation mark,
12564 @samp{"}, indicates the class of string-quote characters. Usually, the
12565 double quotation mark is the only character in this class. The
12566 asterisk, @samp{*}, indicates that the items in the previous group (the
12567 group surrounded by square brackets, @samp{[]}) may be repeated zero or
12568 more times.
12569
12570 @item \\($\\| \\| \\)
12571 The third part of the pattern is one or other of: either the end of a
12572 line, or two blank spaces, or a tab. The double back-slashes are used
12573 to prevent Emacs from reading the parentheses and vertical bars as part
12574 of the search pattern; the parentheses are used to mark the group and
12575 the vertical bars are used to indicated that the patterns to either side
12576 of them are alternatives. The dollar sign is used to indicate the end
12577 of a line and both the two spaces and the tab are each inserted as is to
12578 indicate what they are.
12579
12580 @item [@key{RET}]*
12581 Finally, the last part of the pattern indicates that the end of the line
12582 or the whitespace following the period, question mark or exclamation
12583 mark may, but need not, be followed by one or more carriage returns. In
12584 the pattern, the carriage return is inserted as an actual carriage
12585 return between square brackets but here it is shown as @key{RET}.
12586 @end table
12587 @end ignore
12588
12589 @node re-search-forward, forward-sentence, sentence-end, Regexp Search
12590 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
12591 @section The @code{re-search-forward} Function
12592 @findex re-search-forward
12593
12594 The @code{re-search-forward} function is very like the
12595 @code{search-forward} function. (@xref{search-forward, , The
12596 @code{search-forward} Function}.)
12597
12598 @code{re-search-forward} searches for a regular expression. If the
12599 search is successful, it leaves point immediately after the last
12600 character in the target. If the search is backwards, it leaves point
12601 just before the first character in the target. You may tell
12602 @code{re-search-forward} to return @code{t} for true. (Moving point
12603 is therefore a `side effect'.)
12604
12605 Like @code{search-forward}, the @code{re-search-forward} function takes
12606 four arguments:
12607
12608 @enumerate
12609 @item
12610 The first argument is the regular expression that the function searches
12611 for. The regular expression will be a string between quotation marks.
12612
12613 @item
12614 The optional second argument limits how far the function will search; it is a
12615 bound, which is specified as a position in the buffer.
12616
12617 @item
12618 The optional third argument specifies how the function responds to
12619 failure: @code{nil} as the third argument causes the function to
12620 signal an error (and print a message) when the search fails; any other
12621 value causes it to return @code{nil} if the search fails and @code{t}
12622 if the search succeeds.
12623
12624 @item
12625 The optional fourth argument is the repeat count. A negative repeat
12626 count causes @code{re-search-forward} to search backwards.
12627 @end enumerate
12628
12629 @need 800
12630 The template for @code{re-search-forward} looks like this:
12631
12632 @smallexample
12633 @group
12634 (re-search-forward "@var{regular-expression}"
12635 @var{limit-of-search}
12636 @var{what-to-do-if-search-fails}
12637 @var{repeat-count})
12638 @end group
12639 @end smallexample
12640
12641 The second, third, and fourth arguments are optional. However, if you
12642 want to pass a value to either or both of the last two arguments, you
12643 must also pass a value to all the preceding arguments. Otherwise, the
12644 Lisp interpreter will mistake which argument you are passing the value
12645 to.
12646
12647 @need 1200
12648 In the @code{forward-sentence} function, the regular expression will be
12649 the value of the variable @code{sentence-end}. In simple form, that is:
12650
12651 @smallexample
12652 @group
12653 "[.?!][]\"')@}]*\\($\\| \\| \\)[
12654 ]*"
12655 @end group
12656 @end smallexample
12657
12658 @noindent
12659 The limit of the search will be the end of the paragraph (since a
12660 sentence cannot go beyond a paragraph). If the search fails, the
12661 function will return @code{nil}; and the repeat count will be provided
12662 by the argument to the @code{forward-sentence} function.
12663
12664 @node forward-sentence, forward-paragraph, re-search-forward, Regexp Search
12665 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
12666 @section @code{forward-sentence}
12667 @findex forward-sentence
12668
12669 The command to move the cursor forward a sentence is a straightforward
12670 illustration of how to use regular expression searches in Emacs Lisp.
12671 Indeed, the function looks longer and more complicated than it is; this
12672 is because the function is designed to go backwards as well as forwards;
12673 and, optionally, over more than one sentence. The function is usually
12674 bound to the key command @kbd{M-e}.
12675
12676 @menu
12677 * Complete forward-sentence::
12678 * fwd-sentence while loops:: Two @code{while} loops.
12679 * fwd-sentence re-search:: A regular expression search.
12680 @end menu
12681
12682 @node Complete forward-sentence, fwd-sentence while loops, forward-sentence, forward-sentence
12683 @ifnottex
12684 @unnumberedsubsec Complete @code{forward-sentence} function definition
12685 @end ifnottex
12686
12687 @need 1250
12688 Here is the code for @code{forward-sentence}:
12689
12690 @c in GNU Emacs 22
12691 @smallexample
12692 @group
12693 (defun forward-sentence (&optional arg)
12694 "Move forward to next `sentence-end'. With argument, repeat.
12695 With negative argument, move backward repeatedly to `sentence-beginning'.
12696
12697 The variable `sentence-end' is a regular expression that matches ends of
12698 sentences. Also, every paragraph boundary terminates sentences as well."
12699 @end group
12700 @group
12701 (interactive "p")
12702 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12703 (let ((opoint (point))
12704 (sentence-end (sentence-end)))
12705 (while (< arg 0)
12706 (let ((pos (point))
12707 (par-beg (save-excursion (start-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12708 (if (and (re-search-backward sentence-end par-beg t)
12709 (or (< (match-end 0) pos)
12710 (re-search-backward sentence-end par-beg t)))
12711 (goto-char (match-end 0))
12712 (goto-char par-beg)))
12713 (setq arg (1+ arg)))
12714 @end group
12715 @group
12716 (while (> arg 0)
12717 (let ((par-end (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12718 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t)
12719 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n")
12720 (goto-char par-end)))
12721 (setq arg (1- arg)))
12722 (constrain-to-field nil opoint t)))
12723 @end group
12724 @end smallexample
12725
12726 @ignore
12727 GNU Emacs 21
12728 @smallexample
12729 @group
12730 (defun forward-sentence (&optional arg)
12731 "Move forward to next sentence-end. With argument, repeat.
12732 With negative argument, move backward repeatedly to sentence-beginning.
12733 Sentence ends are identified by the value of sentence-end
12734 treated as a regular expression. Also, every paragraph boundary
12735 terminates sentences as well."
12736 @end group
12737 @group
12738 (interactive "p")
12739 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12740 (while (< arg 0)
12741 (let ((par-beg
12742 (save-excursion (start-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12743 (if (re-search-backward
12744 (concat sentence-end "[^ \t\n]") par-beg t)
12745 (goto-char (1- (match-end 0)))
12746 (goto-char par-beg)))
12747 (setq arg (1+ arg)))
12748 (while (> arg 0)
12749 (let ((par-end
12750 (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12751 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t)
12752 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n")
12753 (goto-char par-end)))
12754 (setq arg (1- arg))))
12755 @end group
12756 @end smallexample
12757 @end ignore
12758
12759 The function looks long at first sight and it is best to look at its
12760 skeleton first, and then its muscle. The way to see the skeleton is to
12761 look at the expressions that start in the left-most columns:
12762
12763 @smallexample
12764 @group
12765 (defun forward-sentence (&optional arg)
12766 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
12767 (interactive "p")
12768 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12769 (let ((opoint (point)) (sentence-end (sentence-end)))
12770 (while (< arg 0)
12771 (let ((pos (point))
12772 (par-beg (save-excursion (start-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12773 @var{rest-of-body-of-while-loop-when-going-backwards}
12774 (while (> arg 0)
12775 (let ((par-end (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12776 @var{rest-of-body-of-while-loop-when-going-forwards}
12777 @var{handle-forms-and-equivalent}
12778 @end group
12779 @end smallexample
12780
12781 This looks much simpler! The function definition consists of
12782 documentation, an @code{interactive} expression, an @code{or}
12783 expression, a @code{let} expression, and @code{while} loops.
12784
12785 Let's look at each of these parts in turn.
12786
12787 We note that the documentation is thorough and understandable.
12788
12789 The function has an @code{interactive "p"} declaration. This means
12790 that the processed prefix argument, if any, is passed to the
12791 function as its argument. (This will be a number.) If the function
12792 is not passed an argument (it is optional) then the argument
12793 @code{arg} will be bound to 1.
12794
12795 When @code{forward-sentence} is called non-interactively without an
12796 argument, @code{arg} is bound to @code{nil}. The @code{or} expression
12797 handles this. What it does is either leave the value of @code{arg} as
12798 it is, but only if @code{arg} is bound to a value; or it sets the
12799 value of @code{arg} to 1, in the case when @code{arg} is bound to
12800 @code{nil}.
12801
12802 Next is a @code{let}. That specifies the values of two local
12803 variables, @code{point} and @code{sentence-end}. The local value of
12804 point, from before the search, is used in the
12805 @code{constrain-to-field} function which handles forms and
12806 equivalents. The @code{sentence-end} variable is set by the
12807 @code{sentence-end} function.
12808
12809 @node fwd-sentence while loops, fwd-sentence re-search, Complete forward-sentence, forward-sentence
12810 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{while} loops
12811
12812 Two @code{while} loops follow. The first @code{while} has a
12813 true-or-false-test that tests true if the prefix argument for
12814 @code{forward-sentence} is a negative number. This is for going
12815 backwards. The body of this loop is similar to the body of the second
12816 @code{while} clause, but it is not exactly the same. We will skip
12817 this @code{while} loop and concentrate on the second @code{while}
12818 loop.
12819
12820 @need 1500
12821 The second @code{while} loop is for moving point forward. Its skeleton
12822 looks like this:
12823
12824 @smallexample
12825 @group
12826 (while (> arg 0) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
12827 (let @var{varlist}
12828 (if (@var{true-or-false-test})
12829 @var{then-part}
12830 @var{else-part}
12831 (setq arg (1- arg)))) ; @code{while} @r{loop decrementer}
12832 @end group
12833 @end smallexample
12834
12835 The @code{while} loop is of the decrementing kind.
12836 (@xref{Decrementing Loop, , A Loop with a Decrementing Counter}.) It
12837 has a true-or-false-test that tests true so long as the counter (in
12838 this case, the variable @code{arg}) is greater than zero; and it has a
12839 decrementer that subtracts 1 from the value of the counter every time
12840 the loop repeats.
12841
12842 If no prefix argument is given to @code{forward-sentence}, which is
12843 the most common way the command is used, this @code{while} loop will
12844 run once, since the value of @code{arg} will be 1.
12845
12846 The body of the @code{while} loop consists of a @code{let} expression,
12847 which creates and binds a local variable, and has, as its body, an
12848 @code{if} expression.
12849
12850 @need 1250
12851 The body of the @code{while} loop looks like this:
12852
12853 @smallexample
12854 @group
12855 (let ((par-end
12856 (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12857 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t)
12858 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n")
12859 (goto-char par-end)))
12860 @end group
12861 @end smallexample
12862
12863 The @code{let} expression creates and binds the local variable
12864 @code{par-end}. As we shall see, this local variable is designed to
12865 provide a bound or limit to the regular expression search. If the
12866 search fails to find a proper sentence ending in the paragraph, it will
12867 stop on reaching the end of the paragraph.
12868
12869 But first, let us examine how @code{par-end} is bound to the value of
12870 the end of the paragraph. What happens is that the @code{let} sets the
12871 value of @code{par-end} to the value returned when the Lisp interpreter
12872 evaluates the expression
12873
12874 @smallexample
12875 @group
12876 (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))
12877 @end group
12878 @end smallexample
12879
12880 @noindent
12881 In this expression, @code{(end-of-paragraph-text)} moves point to the
12882 end of the paragraph, @code{(point)} returns the value of point, and then
12883 @code{save-excursion} restores point to its original position. Thus,
12884 the @code{let} binds @code{par-end} to the value returned by the
12885 @code{save-excursion} expression, which is the position of the end of
12886 the paragraph. (The @code{end-of-paragraph-text} function uses
12887 @code{forward-paragraph}, which we will discuss shortly.)
12888
12889 @need 1200
12890 Emacs next evaluates the body of the @code{let}, which is an @code{if}
12891 expression that looks like this:
12892
12893 @smallexample
12894 @group
12895 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t) ; @r{if-part}
12896 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n") ; @r{then-part}
12897 (goto-char par-end))) ; @r{else-part}
12898 @end group
12899 @end smallexample
12900
12901 The @code{if} tests whether its first argument is true and if so,
12902 evaluates its then-part; otherwise, the Emacs Lisp interpreter
12903 evaluates the else-part. The true-or-false-test of the @code{if}
12904 expression is the regular expression search.
12905
12906 It may seem odd to have what looks like the `real work' of
12907 the @code{forward-sentence} function buried here, but this is a common
12908 way this kind of operation is carried out in Lisp.
12909
12910 @node fwd-sentence re-search, , fwd-sentence while loops, forward-sentence
12911 @unnumberedsubsec The regular expression search
12912
12913 The @code{re-search-forward} function searches for the end of the
12914 sentence, that is, for the pattern defined by the @code{sentence-end}
12915 regular expression. If the pattern is found---if the end of the sentence is
12916 found---then the @code{re-search-forward} function does two things:
12917
12918 @enumerate
12919 @item
12920 The @code{re-search-forward} function carries out a side effect, which
12921 is to move point to the end of the occurrence found.
12922
12923 @item
12924 The @code{re-search-forward} function returns a value of true. This is
12925 the value received by the @code{if}, and means that the search was
12926 successful.
12927 @end enumerate
12928
12929 @noindent
12930 The side effect, the movement of point, is completed before the
12931 @code{if} function is handed the value returned by the successful
12932 conclusion of the search.
12933
12934 When the @code{if} function receives the value of true from a successful
12935 call to @code{re-search-forward}, the @code{if} evaluates the then-part,
12936 which is the expression @code{(skip-chars-backward " \t\n")}. This
12937 expression moves backwards over any blank spaces, tabs or carriage
12938 returns until a printed character is found and then leaves point after
12939 the character. Since point has already been moved to the end of the
12940 pattern that marks the end of the sentence, this action leaves point
12941 right after the closing printed character of the sentence, which is
12942 usually a period.
12943
12944 On the other hand, if the @code{re-search-forward} function fails to
12945 find a pattern marking the end of the sentence, the function returns
12946 false. The false then causes the @code{if} to evaluate its third
12947 argument, which is @code{(goto-char par-end)}: it moves point to the
12948 end of the paragraph.
12949
12950 (And if the text is in a form or equivalent, and point may not move
12951 fully, then the @code{constrain-to-field} function comes into play.)
12952
12953 Regular expression searches are exceptionally useful and the pattern
12954 illustrated by @code{re-search-forward}, in which the search is the
12955 test of an @code{if} expression, is handy. You will see or write code
12956 incorporating this pattern often.
12957
12958 @node forward-paragraph, etags, forward-sentence, Regexp Search
12959 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
12960 @section @code{forward-paragraph}: a Goldmine of Functions
12961 @findex forward-paragraph
12962
12963 @ignore
12964 @c in GNU Emacs 22
12965 (defun forward-paragraph (&optional arg)
12966 "Move forward to end of paragraph.
12967 With argument ARG, do it ARG times;
12968 a negative argument ARG = -N means move backward N paragraphs.
12969
12970 A line which `paragraph-start' matches either separates paragraphs
12971 \(if `paragraph-separate' matches it also) or is the first line of a paragraph.
12972 A paragraph end is the beginning of a line which is not part of the paragraph
12973 to which the end of the previous line belongs, or the end of the buffer.
12974 Returns the count of paragraphs left to move."
12975 (interactive "p")
12976 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12977 (let* ((opoint (point))
12978 (fill-prefix-regexp
12979 (and fill-prefix (not (equal fill-prefix ""))
12980 (not paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix)
12981 (regexp-quote fill-prefix)))
12982 ;; Remove ^ from paragraph-start and paragraph-sep if they are there.
12983 ;; These regexps shouldn't be anchored, because we look for them
12984 ;; starting at the left-margin. This allows paragraph commands to
12985 ;; work normally with indented text.
12986 ;; This hack will not find problem cases like "whatever\\|^something".
12987 (parstart (if (and (not (equal "" paragraph-start))
12988 (equal ?^ (aref paragraph-start 0)))
12989 (substring paragraph-start 1)
12990 paragraph-start))
12991 (parsep (if (and (not (equal "" paragraph-separate))
12992 (equal ?^ (aref paragraph-separate 0)))
12993 (substring paragraph-separate 1)
12994 paragraph-separate))
12995 (parsep
12996 (if fill-prefix-regexp
12997 (concat parsep "\\|"
12998 fill-prefix-regexp "[ \t]*$")
12999 parsep))
13000 ;; This is used for searching.
13001 (sp-parstart (concat "^[ \t]*\\(?:" parstart "\\|" parsep "\\)"))
13002 start found-start)
13003 (while (and (< arg 0) (not (bobp)))
13004 (if (and (not (looking-at parsep))
13005 (re-search-backward "^\n" (max (1- (point)) (point-min)) t)
13006 (looking-at parsep))
13007 (setq arg (1+ arg))
13008 (setq start (point))
13009 ;; Move back over paragraph-separating lines.
13010 (forward-char -1) (beginning-of-line)
13011 (while (and (not (bobp))
13012 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13013 (looking-at parsep)))
13014 (forward-line -1))
13015 (if (bobp)
13016 nil
13017 (setq arg (1+ arg))
13018 ;; Go to end of the previous (non-separating) line.
13019 (end-of-line)
13020 ;; Search back for line that starts or separates paragraphs.
13021 (if (if fill-prefix-regexp
13022 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart.
13023 (let (multiple-lines)
13024 (while (and (progn (beginning-of-line) (not (bobp)))
13025 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13026 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13027 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13028 (unless (= (point) start)
13029 (setq multiple-lines t))
13030 (forward-line -1))
13031 (move-to-left-margin)
13032 ;; This deleted code caused a long hanging-indent line
13033 ;; not to be filled together with the following lines.
13034 ;; ;; Don't move back over a line before the paragraph
13035 ;; ;; which doesn't start with fill-prefix
13036 ;; ;; unless that is the only line we've moved over.
13037 ;; (and (not (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13038 ;; multiple-lines
13039 ;; (forward-line 1))
13040 (not (bobp)))
13041 (while (and (re-search-backward sp-parstart nil 1)
13042 (setq found-start t)
13043 ;; Found a candidate, but need to check if it is a
13044 ;; REAL parstart.
13045 (progn (setq start (point))
13046 (move-to-left-margin)
13047 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13048 (not (and (looking-at parstart)
13049 (or (not use-hard-newlines)
13050 (bobp)
13051 (get-text-property
13052 (1- start) 'hard)))))
13053 (setq found-start nil)
13054 (goto-char start))
13055 found-start)
13056 ;; Found one.
13057 (progn
13058 ;; Move forward over paragraph separators.
13059 ;; We know this cannot reach the place we started
13060 ;; because we know we moved back over a non-separator.
13061 (while (and (not (eobp))
13062 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13063 (looking-at parsep)))
13064 (forward-line 1))
13065 ;; If line before paragraph is just margin, back up to there.
13066 (end-of-line 0)
13067 (if (> (current-column) (current-left-margin))
13068 (forward-char 1)
13069 (skip-chars-backward " \t")
13070 (if (not (bolp))
13071 (forward-line 1))))
13072 ;; No starter or separator line => use buffer beg.
13073 (goto-char (point-min))))))
13074
13075 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp)))
13076 ;; Move forward over separator lines...
13077 (while (and (not (eobp))
13078 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13079 (looking-at parsep))
13080 (forward-line 1))
13081 (unless (eobp) (setq arg (1- arg)))
13082 ;; ... and one more line.
13083 (forward-line 1)
13084 (if fill-prefix-regexp
13085 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart.
13086 (while (and (not (eobp))
13087 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13088 (not (looking-at parsep))
13089 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13090 (forward-line 1))
13091 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
13092 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13093 (goto-char start)
13094 (not (eobp)))
13095 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13096 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13097 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
13098 (and use-hard-newlines
13099 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
13100 (forward-char 1))
13101 (if (< (point) (point-max))
13102 (goto-char start))))
13103 (constrain-to-field nil opoint t)
13104 ;; Return the number of steps that could not be done.
13105 arg))
13106 @end ignore
13107
13108 The @code{forward-paragraph} function moves point forward to the end
13109 of the paragraph. It is usually bound to @kbd{M-@}} and makes use of a
13110 number of functions that are important in themselves, including
13111 @code{let*}, @code{match-beginning}, and @code{looking-at}.
13112
13113 The function definition for @code{forward-paragraph} is considerably
13114 longer than the function definition for @code{forward-sentence}
13115 because it works with a paragraph, each line of which may begin with a
13116 fill prefix.
13117
13118 A fill prefix consists of a string of characters that are repeated at
13119 the beginning of each line. For example, in Lisp code, it is a
13120 convention to start each line of a paragraph-long comment with
13121 @samp{;;; }. In Text mode, four blank spaces make up another common
13122 fill prefix, creating an indented paragraph. (@xref{Fill Prefix, , ,
13123 emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, for more information about fill
13124 prefixes.)
13125
13126 The existence of a fill prefix means that in addition to being able to
13127 find the end of a paragraph whose lines begin on the left-most
13128 column, the @code{forward-paragraph} function must be able to find the
13129 end of a paragraph when all or many of the lines in the buffer begin
13130 with the fill prefix.
13131
13132 Moreover, it is sometimes practical to ignore a fill prefix that
13133 exists, especially when blank lines separate paragraphs.
13134 This is an added complication.
13135
13136 @menu
13137 * forward-paragraph in brief:: Key parts of the function definition.
13138 * fwd-para let:: The @code{let*} expression.
13139 * fwd-para while:: The forward motion @code{while} loop.
13140 @end menu
13141
13142 @node forward-paragraph in brief, fwd-para let, forward-paragraph, forward-paragraph
13143 @ifnottex
13144 @unnumberedsubsec Shortened @code{forward-paragraph} function definition
13145 @end ifnottex
13146
13147 Rather than print all of the @code{forward-paragraph} function, we
13148 will only print parts of it. Read without preparation, the function
13149 can be daunting!
13150
13151 @need 800
13152 In outline, the function looks like this:
13153
13154 @smallexample
13155 @group
13156 (defun forward-paragraph (&optional arg)
13157 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
13158 (interactive "p")
13159 (or arg (setq arg 1))
13160 (let*
13161 @var{varlist}
13162 (while (and (< arg 0) (not (bobp))) ; @r{backward-moving-code}
13163 @dots{}
13164 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp))) ; @r{forward-moving-code}
13165 @dots{}
13166 @end group
13167 @end smallexample
13168
13169 The first parts of the function are routine: the function's argument
13170 list consists of one optional argument. Documentation follows.
13171
13172 The lower case @samp{p} in the @code{interactive} declaration means
13173 that the processed prefix argument, if any, is passed to the function.
13174 This will be a number, and is the repeat count of how many paragraphs
13175 point will move. The @code{or} expression in the next line handles
13176 the common case when no argument is passed to the function, which occurs
13177 if the function is called from other code rather than interactively.
13178 This case was described earlier. (@xref{forward-sentence, The
13179 @code{forward-sentence} function}.) Now we reach the end of the
13180 familiar part of this function.
13181
13182 @node fwd-para let, fwd-para while, forward-paragraph in brief, forward-paragraph
13183 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{let*} expression
13184
13185 The next line of the @code{forward-paragraph} function begins a
13186 @code{let*} expression. This is a different than @code{let}. The
13187 symbol is @code{let*} not @code{let}.
13188
13189 The @code{let*} special form is like @code{let} except that Emacs sets
13190 each variable in sequence, one after another, and variables in the
13191 latter part of the varlist can make use of the values to which Emacs
13192 set variables in the earlier part of the varlist.
13193
13194 @ignore
13195 ( refappend save-excursion, , code save-excursion in code append-to-buffer .)
13196 @end ignore
13197
13198 (@ref{append save-excursion, , @code{save-excursion} in @code{append-to-buffer}}.)
13199
13200 In the @code{let*} expression in this function, Emacs binds a total of
13201 seven variables: @code{opoint}, @code{fill-prefix-regexp},
13202 @code{parstart}, @code{parsep}, @code{sp-parstart}, @code{start}, and
13203 @code{found-start}.
13204
13205 The variable @code{parsep} appears twice, first, to remove instances
13206 of @samp{^}, and second, to handle fill prefixes.
13207
13208 The variable @code{opoint} is just the value of @code{point}. As you
13209 can guess, it is used in a @code{constrain-to-field} expression, just
13210 as in @code{forward-sentence}.
13211
13212 The variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp} is set to the value returned by
13213 evaluating the following list:
13214
13215 @smallexample
13216 @group
13217 (and fill-prefix
13218 (not (equal fill-prefix ""))
13219 (not paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix)
13220 (regexp-quote fill-prefix))
13221 @end group
13222 @end smallexample
13223
13224 @noindent
13225 This is an expression whose first element is the @code{and} special form.
13226
13227 As we learned earlier (@pxref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new}
13228 function}), the @code{and} special form evaluates each of its
13229 arguments until one of the arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, in
13230 which case the @code{and} expression returns @code{nil}; however, if
13231 none of the arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, the value
13232 resulting from evaluating the last argument is returned. (Since such
13233 a value is not @code{nil}, it is considered true in Lisp.) In other
13234 words, an @code{and} expression returns a true value only if all its
13235 arguments are true.
13236 @findex and
13237
13238 In this case, the variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp} is bound to a
13239 non-@code{nil} value only if the following four expressions produce a
13240 true (i.e., a non-@code{nil}) value when they are evaluated; otherwise,
13241 @code{fill-prefix-regexp} is bound to @code{nil}.
13242
13243 @table @code
13244 @item fill-prefix
13245 When this variable is evaluated, the value of the fill prefix, if any,
13246 is returned. If there is no fill prefix, this variable returns
13247 @code{nil}.
13248
13249 @item (not (equal fill-prefix "")
13250 This expression checks whether an existing fill prefix is an empty
13251 string, that is, a string with no characters in it. An empty string is
13252 not a useful fill prefix.
13253
13254 @item (not paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix)
13255 This expression returns @code{nil} if the variable
13256 @code{paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix} has been turned on by being set to a
13257 true value such as @code{t}.
13258
13259 @item (regexp-quote fill-prefix)
13260 This is the last argument to the @code{and} special form. If all the
13261 arguments to the @code{and} are true, the value resulting from
13262 evaluating this expression will be returned by the @code{and} expression
13263 and bound to the variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp},
13264 @end table
13265
13266 @findex regexp-quote
13267 @noindent
13268 The result of evaluating this @code{and} expression successfully is that
13269 @code{fill-prefix-regexp} will be bound to the value of
13270 @code{fill-prefix} as modified by the @code{regexp-quote} function.
13271 What @code{regexp-quote} does is read a string and return a regular
13272 expression that will exactly match the string and match nothing else.
13273 This means that @code{fill-prefix-regexp} will be set to a value that
13274 will exactly match the fill prefix if the fill prefix exists.
13275 Otherwise, the variable will be set to @code{nil}.
13276
13277 The next two local variables in the @code{let*} expression are
13278 designed to remove instances of @samp{^} from @code{parstart} and
13279 @code{parsep}, the local variables which indicate the paragraph start
13280 and the paragraph separator. The next expression sets @code{parsep}
13281 again. That is to handle fill prefixes.
13282
13283 This is the setting that requires the definition call @code{let*}
13284 rather than @code{let}. The true-or-false-test for the @code{if}
13285 depends on whether the variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp} evaluates to
13286 @code{nil} or some other value.
13287
13288 If @code{fill-prefix-regexp} does not have a value, Emacs evaluates
13289 the else-part of the @code{if} expression and binds @code{parsep} to
13290 its local value. (@code{parsep} is a regular expression that matches
13291 what separates paragraphs.)
13292
13293 But if @code{fill-prefix-regexp} does have a value, Emacs evaluates
13294 the then-part of the @code{if} expression and binds @code{parsep} to a
13295 regular expression that includes the @code{fill-prefix-regexp} as part
13296 of the pattern.
13297
13298 Specifically, @code{parsep} is set to the original value of the
13299 paragraph separate regular expression concatenated with an alternative
13300 expression that consists of the @code{fill-prefix-regexp} followed by
13301 optional whitespace to the end of the line. The whitespace is defined
13302 by @w{@code{"[ \t]*$"}}.) The @samp{\\|} defines this portion of the
13303 regexp as an alternative to @code{parsep}.
13304
13305 According to a comment in the code, the next local variable,
13306 @code{sp-parstart}, is used for searching, and then the final two,
13307 @code{start} and @code{found-start}, are set to @code{nil}.
13308
13309 Now we get into the body of the @code{let*}. The first part of the body
13310 of the @code{let*} deals with the case when the function is given a
13311 negative argument and is therefore moving backwards. We will skip this
13312 section.
13313
13314 @node fwd-para while, , fwd-para let, forward-paragraph
13315 @unnumberedsubsec The forward motion @code{while} loop
13316
13317 The second part of the body of the @code{let*} deals with forward
13318 motion. It is a @code{while} loop that repeats itself so long as the
13319 value of @code{arg} is greater than zero. In the most common use of
13320 the function, the value of the argument is 1, so the body of the
13321 @code{while} loop is evaluated exactly once, and the cursor moves
13322 forward one paragraph.
13323
13324 @ignore
13325 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp)))
13326
13327 ;; Move forward over separator lines...
13328 (while (and (not (eobp))
13329 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13330 (looking-at parsep))
13331 (forward-line 1))
13332 (unless (eobp) (setq arg (1- arg)))
13333 ;; ... and one more line.
13334 (forward-line 1)
13335
13336 (if fill-prefix-regexp
13337 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart.
13338 (while (and (not (eobp))
13339 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13340 (not (looking-at parsep))
13341 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13342 (forward-line 1))
13343
13344 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
13345 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13346 (goto-char start)
13347 (not (eobp)))
13348 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13349 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13350 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
13351 (and use-hard-newlines
13352 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
13353 (forward-char 1))
13354
13355 (if (< (point) (point-max))
13356 (goto-char start))))
13357 @end ignore
13358
13359 This part handles three situations: when point is between paragraphs,
13360 when there is a fill prefix and when there is no fill prefix.
13361
13362 @need 800
13363 The @code{while} loop looks like this:
13364
13365 @smallexample
13366 @group
13367 ;; @r{going forwards and not at the end of the buffer}
13368 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp)))
13369
13370 ;; @r{between paragraphs}
13371 ;; Move forward over separator lines...
13372 (while (and (not (eobp))
13373 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13374 (looking-at parsep))
13375 (forward-line 1))
13376 ;; @r{This decrements the loop}
13377 (unless (eobp) (setq arg (1- arg)))
13378 ;; ... and one more line.
13379 (forward-line 1)
13380 @end group
13381
13382 @group
13383 (if fill-prefix-regexp
13384 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart;
13385 ;; we go forward line by line
13386 (while (and (not (eobp))
13387 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13388 (not (looking-at parsep))
13389 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13390 (forward-line 1))
13391 @end group
13392
13393 @group
13394 ;; There is no fill prefix;
13395 ;; we go forward character by character
13396 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
13397 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13398 (goto-char start)
13399 (not (eobp)))
13400 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13401 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13402 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
13403 (and use-hard-newlines
13404 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
13405 (forward-char 1))
13406 @end group
13407
13408 @group
13409 ;; and if there is no fill prefix and if we are not at the end,
13410 ;; go to whatever was found in the regular expression search
13411 ;; for sp-parstart
13412 (if (< (point) (point-max))
13413 (goto-char start))))
13414 @end group
13415 @end smallexample
13416
13417 @findex eobp
13418 We can see that this is a decrementing counter @code{while} loop,
13419 using the expression @code{(setq arg (1- arg))} as the decrementer.
13420 That expression is not far from the @code{while}, but is hidden in
13421 another Lisp macro, an @code{unless} macro. Unless we are at the end
13422 of the buffer --- that is what the @code{eobp} function determines; it
13423 is an abbreviation of @samp{End Of Buffer P} --- we decrease the value
13424 of @code{arg} by one.
13425
13426 (If we are at the end of the buffer, we cannot go forward any more and
13427 the next loop of the @code{while} expression will test false since the
13428 test is an @code{and} with @code{(not (eobp))}. The @code{not}
13429 function means exactly as you expect; it is another name for
13430 @code{null}, a function that returns true when its argument is false.)
13431
13432 Interestingly, the loop count is not decremented until we leave the
13433 space between paragraphs, unless we come to the end of buffer or stop
13434 seeing the local value of the paragraph separator.
13435
13436 That second @code{while} also has a @code{(move-to-left-margin)}
13437 expression. The function is self-explanatory. It is inside a
13438 @code{progn} expression and not the last element of its body, so it is
13439 only invoked for its side effect, which is to move point to the left
13440 margin of the current line.
13441
13442 @findex looking-at
13443 The @code{looking-at} function is also self-explanatory; it returns
13444 true if the text after point matches the regular expression given as
13445 its argument.
13446
13447 The rest of the body of the loop looks difficult at first, but makes
13448 sense as you come to understand it.
13449
13450 @need 800
13451 First consider what happens if there is a fill prefix:
13452
13453 @smallexample
13454 @group
13455 (if fill-prefix-regexp
13456 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart;
13457 ;; we go forward line by line
13458 (while (and (not (eobp))
13459 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13460 (not (looking-at parsep))
13461 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13462 (forward-line 1))
13463 @end group
13464 @end smallexample
13465
13466 @noindent
13467 This expression moves point forward line by line so long
13468 as four conditions are true:
13469
13470 @enumerate
13471 @item
13472 Point is not at the end of the buffer.
13473
13474 @item
13475 We can move to the left margin of the text and are
13476 not at the end of the buffer.
13477
13478 @item
13479 The text following point does not separate paragraphs.
13480
13481 @item
13482 The pattern following point is the fill prefix regular expression.
13483 @end enumerate
13484
13485 The last condition may be puzzling, until you remember that point was
13486 moved to the beginning of the line early in the @code{forward-paragraph}
13487 function. This means that if the text has a fill prefix, the
13488 @code{looking-at} function will see it.
13489
13490 @need 1250
13491 Consider what happens when there is no fill prefix.
13492
13493 @smallexample
13494 @group
13495 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
13496 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13497 (goto-char start)
13498 (not (eobp)))
13499 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13500 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13501 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
13502 (and use-hard-newlines
13503 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
13504 (forward-char 1))
13505 @end group
13506 @end smallexample
13507
13508 @noindent
13509 This @code{while} loop has us searching forward for
13510 @code{sp-parstart}, which is the combination of possible whitespace
13511 with a the local value of the start of a paragraph or of a paragraph
13512 separator. (The latter two are within an expression starting
13513 @code{\(?:} so that they are not referenced by the
13514 @code{match-beginning} function.)
13515
13516 @need 800
13517 The two expressions,
13518
13519 @smallexample
13520 @group
13521 (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13522 (goto-char start)
13523 @end group
13524 @end smallexample
13525
13526 @noindent
13527 mean go to the start of the text matched by the regular expression
13528 search.
13529
13530 The @code{(match-beginning 0)} expression is new. It returns a number
13531 specifying the location of the start of the text that was matched by
13532 the last search.
13533
13534 The @code{match-beginning} function is used here because of a
13535 characteristic of a forward search: a successful forward search,
13536 regardless of whether it is a plain search or a regular expression
13537 search, moves point to the end of the text that is found. In this
13538 case, a successful search moves point to the end of the pattern for
13539 @code{sp-parstart}.
13540
13541 However, we want to put point at the end of the current paragraph, not
13542 somewhere else. Indeed, since the search possibly includes the
13543 paragraph separator, point may end up at the beginning of the next one
13544 unless we use an expression that includes @code{match-beginning}.
13545
13546 @findex match-beginning
13547 When given an argument of 0, @code{match-beginning} returns the
13548 position that is the start of the text matched by the most recent
13549 search. In this case, the most recent search looks for
13550 @code{sp-parstart}. The @code{(match-beginning 0)} expression returns
13551 the beginning position of that pattern, rather than the end position
13552 of that pattern.
13553
13554 (Incidentally, when passed a positive number as an argument, the
13555 @code{match-beginning} function returns the location of point at that
13556 parenthesized expression in the last search unless that parenthesized
13557 expression begins with @code{\(?:}. I don't know why @code{\(?:}
13558 appears here since the argument is 0.)
13559
13560 @need 1250
13561 The last expression when there is no fill prefix is
13562
13563 @smallexample
13564 @group
13565 (if (< (point) (point-max))
13566 (goto-char start))))
13567 @end group
13568 @end smallexample
13569
13570 @noindent
13571 This says that if there is no fill prefix and if we are not at the
13572 end, point should move to the beginning of whatever was found by the
13573 regular expression search for @code{sp-parstart}.
13574
13575 The full definition for the @code{forward-paragraph} function not only
13576 includes code for going forwards, but also code for going backwards.
13577
13578 If you are reading this inside of GNU Emacs and you want to see the
13579 whole function, you can type @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function})
13580 and the name of the function. This gives you the function
13581 documentation and the name of the library containing the function's
13582 source. Place point over the name of the library and press the RET
13583 key; you will be taken directly to the source. (Be sure to install
13584 your sources! Without them, you are like a person who tries to drive
13585 a car with his eyes shut!)
13586
13587 @node etags, Regexp Review, forward-paragraph, Regexp Search
13588 @section Create Your Own @file{TAGS} File
13589 @findex etags
13590 @cindex @file{TAGS} file, create own
13591
13592 Besides @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}), another way to see the
13593 source of a function is to type @kbd{M-.} (@code{find-tag}) and the
13594 name of the function when prompted for it. This is a good habit to
13595 get into. The @kbd{M-.} (@code{find-tag}) command takes you directly
13596 to the source for a function, variable, or node. The function depends
13597 on tags tables to tell it where to go.
13598
13599 If the @code{find-tag} function first asks you for the name of a
13600 @file{TAGS} table, give it the name of a @file{TAGS} file such as
13601 @file{/usr/local/src/emacs/src/TAGS}. (The exact path to your
13602 @file{TAGS} file depends on how your copy of Emacs was installed. I
13603 just told you the location that provides both my C and my Emacs Lisp
13604 sources.)
13605
13606 You can also create your own @file{TAGS} file for directories that
13607 lack one.
13608
13609 You often need to build and install tags tables yourself. They are
13610 not built automatically. A tags table is called a @file{TAGS} file;
13611 the name is in upper case letters.
13612
13613 You can create a @file{TAGS} file by calling the @code{etags} program
13614 that comes as a part of the Emacs distribution. Usually, @code{etags}
13615 is compiled and installed when Emacs is built. (@code{etags} is not
13616 an Emacs Lisp function or a part of Emacs; it is a C program.)
13617
13618 @need 1250
13619 To create a @file{TAGS} file, first switch to the directory in which
13620 you want to create the file. In Emacs you can do this with the
13621 @kbd{M-x cd} command, or by visiting a file in the directory, or by
13622 listing the directory with @kbd{C-x d} (@code{dired}). Then run the
13623 compile command, with @w{@code{etags *.el}} as the command to execute
13624
13625 @smallexample
13626 M-x compile RET etags *.el RET
13627 @end smallexample
13628
13629 @noindent
13630 to create a @file{TAGS} file for Emacs Lisp.
13631
13632 For example, if you have a large number of files in your
13633 @file{~/emacs} directory, as I do---I have 137 @file{.el} files in it,
13634 of which I load 12---you can create a @file{TAGS} file for the Emacs
13635 Lisp files in that directory.
13636
13637 @need 1250
13638 The @code{etags} program takes all the usual shell `wildcards'. For
13639 example, if you have two directories for which you want a single
13640 @file{TAGS} file, type @w{@code{etags *.el ../elisp/*.el}}, where
13641 @file{../elisp/} is the second directory:
13642
13643 @smallexample
13644 M-x compile RET etags *.el ../elisp/*.el RET
13645 @end smallexample
13646
13647 @need 1250
13648 Type
13649
13650 @smallexample
13651 M-x compile RET etags --help RET
13652 @end smallexample
13653
13654 @noindent
13655 to see a list of the options accepted by @code{etags} as well as a
13656 list of supported languages.
13657
13658 The @code{etags} program handles more than 20 languages, including
13659 Emacs Lisp, Common Lisp, Scheme, C, C++, Ada, Fortran, HTML, Java,
13660 LaTeX, Pascal, Perl, PostScript, Python, TeX, Texinfo, makefiles, and
13661 most assemblers. The program has no switches for specifying the
13662 language; it recognizes the language in an input file according to its
13663 file name and contents.
13664
13665 @file{etags} is very helpful when you are writing code yourself and
13666 want to refer back to functions you have already written. Just run
13667 @code{etags} again at intervals as you write new functions, so they
13668 become part of the @file{TAGS} file.
13669
13670 If you think an appropriate @file{TAGS} file already exists for what
13671 you want, but do not know where it is, you can use the @code{locate}
13672 program to attempt to find it.
13673
13674 Type @w{@kbd{M-x locate @key{RET} TAGS @key{RET}}} and Emacs will list
13675 for you the full path names of all your @file{TAGS} files. On my
13676 system, this command lists 34 @file{TAGS} files. On the other hand, a
13677 `plain vanilla' system I recently installed did not contain any
13678 @file{TAGS} files.
13679
13680 If the tags table you want has been created, you can use the @code{M-x
13681 visit-tags-table} command to specify it. Otherwise, you will need to
13682 create the tag table yourself and then use @code{M-x
13683 visit-tags-table}.
13684
13685 @subsubheading Building Tags in the Emacs sources
13686 @cindex Building Tags in the Emacs sources
13687 @cindex Tags in the Emacs sources
13688 @findex make tags
13689
13690 The GNU Emacs sources come with a @file{Makefile} that contains a
13691 sophisticated @code{etags} command that creates, collects, and merges
13692 tags tables from all over the Emacs sources and puts the information
13693 into one @file{TAGS} file in the @file{src/} directory. (The
13694 @file{src/} directory is below the top level of your Emacs directory.)
13695
13696 @need 1250
13697 To build this @file{TAGS} file, go to the top level of your Emacs
13698 source directory and run the compile command @code{make tags}:
13699
13700 @smallexample
13701 M-x compile RET make tags RET
13702 @end smallexample
13703
13704 @noindent
13705 (The @code{make tags} command works well with the GNU Emacs sources,
13706 as well as with some other source packages.)
13707
13708 For more information, see @ref{Tags, , Tag Tables, emacs, The GNU Emacs
13709 Manual}.
13710
13711 @node Regexp Review, re-search Exercises, etags, Regexp Search
13712 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
13713 @section Review
13714
13715 Here is a brief summary of some recently introduced functions.
13716
13717 @table @code
13718 @item while
13719 Repeatedly evaluate the body of the expression so long as the first
13720 element of the body tests true. Then return @code{nil}. (The
13721 expression is evaluated only for its side effects.)
13722
13723 @need 1250
13724 For example:
13725
13726 @smallexample
13727 @group
13728 (let ((foo 2))
13729 (while (> foo 0)
13730 (insert (format "foo is %d.\n" foo))
13731 (setq foo (1- foo))))
13732
13733 @result{} foo is 2.
13734 foo is 1.
13735 nil
13736 @end group
13737 @end smallexample
13738
13739 @noindent
13740 (The @code{insert} function inserts its arguments at point; the
13741 @code{format} function returns a string formatted from its arguments
13742 the way @code{message} formats its arguments; @code{\n} produces a new
13743 line.)
13744
13745 @item re-search-forward
13746 Search for a pattern, and if the pattern is found, move point to rest
13747 just after it.
13748
13749 @noindent
13750 Takes four arguments, like @code{search-forward}:
13751
13752 @enumerate
13753 @item
13754 A regular expression that specifies the pattern to search for.
13755 (Remember to put quotation marks around this argument!)
13756
13757 @item
13758 Optionally, the limit of the search.
13759
13760 @item
13761 Optionally, what to do if the search fails, return @code{nil} or an
13762 error message.
13763
13764 @item
13765 Optionally, how many times to repeat the search; if negative, the
13766 search goes backwards.
13767 @end enumerate
13768
13769 @item let*
13770 Bind some variables locally to particular values,
13771 and then evaluate the remaining arguments, returning the value of the
13772 last one. While binding the local variables, use the local values of
13773 variables bound earlier, if any.
13774
13775 @need 1250
13776 For example:
13777
13778 @smallexample
13779 @group
13780 (let* ((foo 7)
13781 (bar (* 3 foo)))
13782 (message "`bar' is %d." bar))
13783 @result{} `bar' is 21.
13784 @end group
13785 @end smallexample
13786
13787 @item match-beginning
13788 Return the position of the start of the text found by the last regular
13789 expression search.
13790
13791 @item looking-at
13792 Return @code{t} for true if the text after point matches the argument,
13793 which should be a regular expression.
13794
13795 @item eobp
13796 Return @code{t} for true if point is at the end of the accessible part
13797 of a buffer. The end of the accessible part is the end of the buffer
13798 if the buffer is not narrowed; it is the end of the narrowed part if
13799 the buffer is narrowed.
13800 @end table
13801
13802 @need 1500
13803 @node re-search Exercises, , Regexp Review, Regexp Search
13804 @section Exercises with @code{re-search-forward}
13805
13806 @itemize @bullet
13807 @item
13808 Write a function to search for a regular expression that matches two
13809 or more blank lines in sequence.
13810
13811 @item
13812 Write a function to search for duplicated words, such as `the the'.
13813 @xref{Regexps, , Syntax of Regular Expressions, emacs, The GNU Emacs
13814 Manual}, for information on how to write a regexp (a regular
13815 expression) to match a string that is composed of two identical
13816 halves. You can devise several regexps; some are better than others.
13817 The function I use is described in an appendix, along with several
13818 regexps. @xref{the-the, , @code{the-the} Duplicated Words Function}.
13819 @end itemize
13820
13821 @node Counting Words, Words in a defun, Regexp Search, Top
13822 @chapter Counting: Repetition and Regexps
13823 @cindex Repetition for word counting
13824 @cindex Regular expressions for word counting
13825
13826 Repetition and regular expression searches are powerful tools that you
13827 often use when you write code in Emacs Lisp. This chapter illustrates
13828 the use of regular expression searches through the construction of
13829 word count commands using @code{while} loops and recursion.
13830
13831 @menu
13832 * Why Count Words::
13833 * @value{COUNT-WORDS}:: Use a regexp, but find a problem.
13834 * recursive-count-words:: Start with case of no words in region.
13835 * Counting Exercise::
13836 @end menu
13837
13838 @node Why Count Words, @value{COUNT-WORDS}, Counting Words, Counting Words
13839 @ifnottex
13840 @unnumberedsec Counting words
13841 @end ifnottex
13842
13843 The standard Emacs distribution contains functions for counting the
13844 number of lines and words within a region.
13845
13846 Certain types of writing ask you to count words. Thus, if you write
13847 an essay, you may be limited to 800 words; if you write a novel, you
13848 may discipline yourself to write 1000 words a day. It seems odd, but
13849 for a long time, Emacs lacked a word count command. Perhaps people used
13850 Emacs mostly for code or types of documentation that did not require
13851 word counts; or perhaps they restricted themselves to the operating
13852 system word count command, @code{wc}. Alternatively, people may have
13853 followed the publishers' convention and computed a word count by
13854 dividing the number of characters in a document by five.
13855
13856 There are many ways to implement a command to count words. Here are
13857 some examples, which you may wish to compare with the standard Emacs
13858 command, @code{count-words-region}.
13859
13860 @node @value{COUNT-WORDS}, recursive-count-words, Why Count Words, Counting Words
13861 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
13862 @section The @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} Function
13863 @findex @value{COUNT-WORDS}
13864
13865 A word count command could count words in a line, paragraph, region,
13866 or buffer. What should the command cover? You could design the
13867 command to count the number of words in a complete buffer. However,
13868 the Emacs tradition encourages flexibility---you may want to count
13869 words in just a section, rather than all of a buffer. So it makes
13870 more sense to design the command to count the number of words in a
13871 region. Once you have a command to count words in a region, you can,
13872 if you wish, count words in a whole buffer by marking it with
13873 @w{@kbd{C-x h}} (@code{mark-whole-buffer}).
13874
13875 Clearly, counting words is a repetitive act: starting from the
13876 beginning of the region, you count the first word, then the second
13877 word, then the third word, and so on, until you reach the end of the
13878 region. This means that word counting is ideally suited to recursion
13879 or to a @code{while} loop.
13880
13881 @menu
13882 * Design @value{COUNT-WORDS}:: The definition using a @code{while} loop.
13883 * Whitespace Bug:: The Whitespace Bug in @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
13884 @end menu
13885
13886 @node Design @value{COUNT-WORDS}, Whitespace Bug, @value{COUNT-WORDS}, @value{COUNT-WORDS}
13887 @ifnottex
13888 @unnumberedsubsec Designing @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
13889 @end ifnottex
13890
13891 First, we will implement the word count command with a @code{while}
13892 loop, then with recursion. The command will, of course, be
13893 interactive.
13894
13895 @need 800
13896 The template for an interactive function definition is, as always:
13897
13898 @smallexample
13899 @group
13900 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
13901 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
13902 (@var{interactive-expression}@dots{})
13903 @var{body}@dots{})
13904 @end group
13905 @end smallexample
13906
13907 What we need to do is fill in the slots.
13908
13909 The name of the function should be self-explanatory and similar to the
13910 existing @code{count-lines-region} name. This makes the name easier
13911 to remember. @code{count-words-region} is the obvious choice. Since
13912 that name is now used for the standard Emacs command to count words, we
13913 will name our implementation @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
13914
13915 The function counts words within a region. This means that the
13916 argument list must contain symbols that are bound to the two
13917 positions, the beginning and end of the region. These two positions
13918 can be called @samp{beginning} and @samp{end} respectively. The first
13919 line of the documentation should be a single sentence, since that is
13920 all that is printed as documentation by a command such as
13921 @code{apropos}. The interactive expression will be of the form
13922 @samp{(interactive "r")}, since that will cause Emacs to pass the
13923 beginning and end of the region to the function's argument list. All
13924 this is routine.
13925
13926 The body of the function needs to be written to do three tasks:
13927 first, to set up conditions under which the @code{while} loop can
13928 count words, second, to run the @code{while} loop, and third, to send
13929 a message to the user.
13930
13931 When a user calls @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}, point may be at the
13932 beginning or the end of the region. However, the counting process
13933 must start at the beginning of the region. This means we will want
13934 to put point there if it is not already there. Executing
13935 @code{(goto-char beginning)} ensures this. Of course, we will want to
13936 return point to its expected position when the function finishes its
13937 work. For this reason, the body must be enclosed in a
13938 @code{save-excursion} expression.
13939
13940 The central part of the body of the function consists of a
13941 @code{while} loop in which one expression jumps point forward word by
13942 word, and another expression counts those jumps. The true-or-false-test
13943 of the @code{while} loop should test true so long as point should jump
13944 forward, and false when point is at the end of the region.
13945
13946 We could use @code{(forward-word 1)} as the expression for moving point
13947 forward word by word, but it is easier to see what Emacs identifies as a
13948 `word' if we use a regular expression search.
13949
13950 A regular expression search that finds the pattern for which it is
13951 searching leaves point after the last character matched. This means
13952 that a succession of successful word searches will move point forward
13953 word by word.
13954
13955 As a practical matter, we want the regular expression search to jump
13956 over whitespace and punctuation between words as well as over the
13957 words themselves. A regexp that refuses to jump over interword
13958 whitespace would never jump more than one word! This means that
13959 the regexp should include the whitespace and punctuation that follows
13960 a word, if any, as well as the word itself. (A word may end a buffer
13961 and not have any following whitespace or punctuation, so that part of
13962 the regexp must be optional.)
13963
13964 Thus, what we want for the regexp is a pattern defining one or more
13965 word constituent characters followed, optionally, by one or more
13966 characters that are not word constituents. The regular expression for
13967 this is:
13968
13969 @smallexample
13970 \w+\W*
13971 @end smallexample
13972
13973 @noindent
13974 The buffer's syntax table determines which characters are and are not
13975 word constituents. For more information about syntax,
13976 @pxref{Syntax Tables, , Syntax Tables, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
13977 Reference Manual}.
13978
13979 @need 800
13980 The search expression looks like this:
13981
13982 @smallexample
13983 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*")
13984 @end smallexample
13985
13986 @noindent
13987 (Note that paired backslashes precede the @samp{w} and @samp{W}. A
13988 single backslash has special meaning to the Emacs Lisp interpreter.
13989 It indicates that the following character is interpreted differently
13990 than usual. For example, the two characters, @samp{\n}, stand for
13991 @samp{newline}, rather than for a backslash followed by @samp{n}. Two
13992 backslashes in a row stand for an ordinary, `unspecial' backslash, so
13993 Emacs Lisp interpreter ends of seeing a single backslash followed by a
13994 letter. So it discovers the letter is special.)
13995
13996 We need a counter to count how many words there are; this variable
13997 must first be set to 0 and then incremented each time Emacs goes
13998 around the @code{while} loop. The incrementing expression is simply:
13999
14000 @smallexample
14001 (setq count (1+ count))
14002 @end smallexample
14003
14004 Finally, we want to tell the user how many words there are in the
14005 region. The @code{message} function is intended for presenting this
14006 kind of information to the user. The message has to be phrased so
14007 that it reads properly regardless of how many words there are in the
14008 region: we don't want to say that ``there are 1 words in the region''.
14009 The conflict between singular and plural is ungrammatical. We can
14010 solve this problem by using a conditional expression that evaluates
14011 different messages depending on the number of words in the region.
14012 There are three possibilities: no words in the region, one word in the
14013 region, and more than one word. This means that the @code{cond}
14014 special form is appropriate.
14015
14016 @need 1500
14017 All this leads to the following function definition:
14018
14019 @smallexample
14020 @group
14021 ;;; @r{First version; has bugs!}
14022 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14023 "Print number of words in the region.
14024 Words are defined as at least one word-constituent
14025 character followed by at least one character that
14026 is not a word-constituent. The buffer's syntax
14027 table determines which characters these are."
14028 (interactive "r")
14029 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14030 @end group
14031
14032 @group
14033 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14034 (save-excursion
14035 (goto-char beginning)
14036 (let ((count 0))
14037 @end group
14038
14039 @group
14040 ;;; @r{2. Run the} while @r{loop.}
14041 (while (< (point) end)
14042 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*")
14043 (setq count (1+ count)))
14044 @end group
14045
14046 @group
14047 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14048 (cond ((zerop count)
14049 (message
14050 "The region does NOT have any words."))
14051 ((= 1 count)
14052 (message
14053 "The region has 1 word."))
14054 (t
14055 (message
14056 "The region has %d words." count))))))
14057 @end group
14058 @end smallexample
14059
14060 @noindent
14061 As written, the function works, but not in all circumstances.
14062
14063 @node Whitespace Bug, , Design @value{COUNT-WORDS}, @value{COUNT-WORDS}
14064 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
14065 @subsection The Whitespace Bug in @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
14066
14067 The @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} command described in the preceding
14068 section has two bugs, or rather, one bug with two manifestations.
14069 First, if you mark a region containing only whitespace in the middle
14070 of some text, the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} command tells you that the
14071 region contains one word! Second, if you mark a region containing
14072 only whitespace at the end of the buffer or the accessible portion of
14073 a narrowed buffer, the command displays an error message that looks
14074 like this:
14075
14076 @smallexample
14077 Search failed: "\\w+\\W*"
14078 @end smallexample
14079
14080 If you are reading this in Info in GNU Emacs, you can test for these
14081 bugs yourself.
14082
14083 First, evaluate the function in the usual manner to install it.
14084 @ifinfo
14085 Here is a copy of the definition. Place your cursor after the closing
14086 parenthesis and type @kbd{C-x C-e} to install it.
14087
14088 @smallexample
14089 @group
14090 ;; @r{First version; has bugs!}
14091 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14092 "Print number of words in the region.
14093 Words are defined as at least one word-constituent character followed
14094 by at least one character that is not a word-constituent. The buffer's
14095 syntax table determines which characters these are."
14096 @end group
14097 @group
14098 (interactive "r")
14099 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14100 @end group
14101
14102 @group
14103 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14104 (save-excursion
14105 (goto-char beginning)
14106 (let ((count 0))
14107 @end group
14108
14109 @group
14110 ;;; @r{2. Run the} while @r{loop.}
14111 (while (< (point) end)
14112 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*")
14113 (setq count (1+ count)))
14114 @end group
14115
14116 @group
14117 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14118 (cond ((zerop count)
14119 (message "The region does NOT have any words."))
14120 ((= 1 count) (message "The region has 1 word."))
14121 (t (message "The region has %d words." count))))))
14122 @end group
14123 @end smallexample
14124 @end ifinfo
14125
14126 @need 1000
14127 If you wish, you can also install this keybinding by evaluating it:
14128
14129 @smallexample
14130 (global-set-key "\C-c=" '@value{COUNT-WORDS})
14131 @end smallexample
14132
14133 To conduct the first test, set mark and point to the beginning and end
14134 of the following line and then type @kbd{C-c =} (or @kbd{M-x
14135 @value{COUNT-WORDS}} if you have not bound @kbd{C-c =}):
14136
14137 @smallexample
14138 one two three
14139 @end smallexample
14140
14141 @noindent
14142 Emacs will tell you, correctly, that the region has three words.
14143
14144 Repeat the test, but place mark at the beginning of the line and place
14145 point just @emph{before} the word @samp{one}. Again type the command
14146 @kbd{C-c =} (or @kbd{M-x @value{COUNT-WORDS}}). Emacs should tell you
14147 that the region has no words, since it is composed only of the
14148 whitespace at the beginning of the line. But instead Emacs tells you
14149 that the region has one word!
14150
14151 For the third test, copy the sample line to the end of the
14152 @file{*scratch*} buffer and then type several spaces at the end of the
14153 line. Place mark right after the word @samp{three} and point at the
14154 end of line. (The end of the line will be the end of the buffer.)
14155 Type @kbd{C-c =} (or @kbd{M-x @value{COUNT-WORDS}}) as you did before.
14156 Again, Emacs should tell you that the region has no words, since it is
14157 composed only of the whitespace at the end of the line. Instead,
14158 Emacs displays an error message saying @samp{Search failed}.
14159
14160 The two bugs stem from the same problem.
14161
14162 Consider the first manifestation of the bug, in which the command
14163 tells you that the whitespace at the beginning of the line contains
14164 one word. What happens is this: The @code{M-x @value{COUNT-WORDS}}
14165 command moves point to the beginning of the region. The @code{while}
14166 tests whether the value of point is smaller than the value of
14167 @code{end}, which it is. Consequently, the regular expression search
14168 looks for and finds the first word. It leaves point after the word.
14169 @code{count} is set to one. The @code{while} loop repeats; but this
14170 time the value of point is larger than the value of @code{end}, the
14171 loop is exited; and the function displays a message saying the number
14172 of words in the region is one. In brief, the regular expression
14173 search looks for and finds the word even though it is outside
14174 the marked region.
14175
14176 In the second manifestation of the bug, the region is whitespace at
14177 the end of the buffer. Emacs says @samp{Search failed}. What happens
14178 is that the true-or-false-test in the @code{while} loop tests true, so
14179 the search expression is executed. But since there are no more words
14180 in the buffer, the search fails.
14181
14182 In both manifestations of the bug, the search extends or attempts to
14183 extend outside of the region.
14184
14185 The solution is to limit the search to the region---this is a fairly
14186 simple action, but as you may have come to expect, it is not quite as
14187 simple as you might think.
14188
14189 As we have seen, the @code{re-search-forward} function takes a search
14190 pattern as its first argument. But in addition to this first,
14191 mandatory argument, it accepts three optional arguments. The optional
14192 second argument bounds the search. The optional third argument, if
14193 @code{t}, causes the function to return @code{nil} rather than signal
14194 an error if the search fails. The optional fourth argument is a
14195 repeat count. (In Emacs, you can see a function's documentation by
14196 typing @kbd{C-h f}, the name of the function, and then @key{RET}.)
14197
14198 In the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} definition, the value of the end of
14199 the region is held by the variable @code{end} which is passed as an
14200 argument to the function. Thus, we can add @code{end} as an argument
14201 to the regular expression search expression:
14202
14203 @smallexample
14204 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" end)
14205 @end smallexample
14206
14207 However, if you make only this change to the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
14208 definition and then test the new version of the definition on a
14209 stretch of whitespace, you will receive an error message saying
14210 @samp{Search failed}.
14211
14212 What happens is this: the search is limited to the region, and fails
14213 as you expect because there are no word-constituent characters in the
14214 region. Since it fails, we receive an error message. But we do not
14215 want to receive an error message in this case; we want to receive the
14216 message that "The region does NOT have any words."
14217
14218 The solution to this problem is to provide @code{re-search-forward}
14219 with a third argument of @code{t}, which causes the function to return
14220 @code{nil} rather than signal an error if the search fails.
14221
14222 However, if you make this change and try it, you will see the message
14223 ``Counting words in region ... '' and @dots{} you will keep on seeing
14224 that message @dots{}, until you type @kbd{C-g} (@code{keyboard-quit}).
14225
14226 Here is what happens: the search is limited to the region, as before,
14227 and it fails because there are no word-constituent characters in the
14228 region, as expected. Consequently, the @code{re-search-forward}
14229 expression returns @code{nil}. It does nothing else. In particular,
14230 it does not move point, which it does as a side effect if it finds the
14231 search target. After the @code{re-search-forward} expression returns
14232 @code{nil}, the next expression in the @code{while} loop is evaluated.
14233 This expression increments the count. Then the loop repeats. The
14234 true-or-false-test tests true because the value of point is still less
14235 than the value of end, since the @code{re-search-forward} expression
14236 did not move point. @dots{} and the cycle repeats @dots{}
14237
14238 The @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} definition requires yet another
14239 modification, to cause the true-or-false-test of the @code{while} loop
14240 to test false if the search fails. Put another way, there are two
14241 conditions that must be satisfied in the true-or-false-test before the
14242 word count variable is incremented: point must still be within the
14243 region and the search expression must have found a word to count.
14244
14245 Since both the first condition and the second condition must be true
14246 together, the two expressions, the region test and the search
14247 expression, can be joined with an @code{and} special form and embedded in
14248 the @code{while} loop as the true-or-false-test, like this:
14249
14250 @smallexample
14251 (and (< (point) end) (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" end t))
14252 @end smallexample
14253
14254 @c colon in printed section title causes problem in Info cross reference
14255 @c also trouble with an overfull hbox
14256 @iftex
14257 @noindent
14258 (For information about @code{and}, see
14259 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}.)
14260 @end iftex
14261 @ifinfo
14262 @noindent
14263 (@xref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}, for
14264 information about @code{and}.)
14265 @end ifinfo
14266
14267 The @code{re-search-forward} expression returns @code{t} if the search
14268 succeeds and as a side effect moves point. Consequently, as words are
14269 found, point is moved through the region. When the search expression
14270 fails to find another word, or when point reaches the end of the
14271 region, the true-or-false-test tests false, the @code{while} loop
14272 exits, and the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} function displays one or
14273 other of its messages.
14274
14275 After incorporating these final changes, the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
14276 works without bugs (or at least, without bugs that I have found!).
14277 Here is what it looks like:
14278
14279 @smallexample
14280 @group
14281 ;;; @r{Final version:} @code{while}
14282 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14283 "Print number of words in the region."
14284 (interactive "r")
14285 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14286 @end group
14287
14288 @group
14289 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14290 (save-excursion
14291 (let ((count 0))
14292 (goto-char beginning)
14293 @end group
14294
14295 @group
14296 ;;; @r{2. Run the} while @r{loop.}
14297 (while (and (< (point) end)
14298 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" end t))
14299 (setq count (1+ count)))
14300 @end group
14301
14302 @group
14303 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14304 (cond ((zerop count)
14305 (message
14306 "The region does NOT have any words."))
14307 ((= 1 count)
14308 (message
14309 "The region has 1 word."))
14310 (t
14311 (message
14312 "The region has %d words." count))))))
14313 @end group
14314 @end smallexample
14315
14316 @node recursive-count-words, Counting Exercise, @value{COUNT-WORDS}, Counting Words
14317 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
14318 @section Count Words Recursively
14319 @cindex Count words recursively
14320 @cindex Recursively counting words
14321 @cindex Words, counted recursively
14322
14323 You can write the function for counting words recursively as well as
14324 with a @code{while} loop. Let's see how this is done.
14325
14326 First, we need to recognize that the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
14327 function has three jobs: it sets up the appropriate conditions for
14328 counting to occur; it counts the words in the region; and it sends a
14329 message to the user telling how many words there are.
14330
14331 If we write a single recursive function to do everything, we will
14332 receive a message for every recursive call. If the region contains 13
14333 words, we will receive thirteen messages, one right after the other.
14334 We don't want this! Instead, we must write two functions to do the
14335 job, one of which (the recursive function) will be used inside of the
14336 other. One function will set up the conditions and display the
14337 message; the other will return the word count.
14338
14339 Let us start with the function that causes the message to be displayed.
14340 We can continue to call this @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
14341
14342 This is the function that the user will call. It will be interactive.
14343 Indeed, it will be similar to our previous versions of this
14344 function, except that it will call @code{recursive-count-words} to
14345 determine how many words are in the region.
14346
14347 @need 1250
14348 We can readily construct a template for this function, based on our
14349 previous versions:
14350
14351 @smallexample
14352 @group
14353 ;; @r{Recursive version; uses regular expression search}
14354 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14355 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14356 (@var{interactive-expression}@dots{})
14357 @end group
14358 @group
14359
14360 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14361 (@var{explanatory message})
14362 (@var{set-up functions}@dots{}
14363 @end group
14364 @group
14365
14366 ;;; @r{2. Count the words.}
14367 @var{recursive call}
14368 @end group
14369 @group
14370
14371 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14372 @var{message providing word count}))
14373 @end group
14374 @end smallexample
14375
14376 The definition looks straightforward, except that somehow the count
14377 returned by the recursive call must be passed to the message
14378 displaying the word count. A little thought suggests that this can be
14379 done by making use of a @code{let} expression: we can bind a variable
14380 in the varlist of a @code{let} expression to the number of words in
14381 the region, as returned by the recursive call; and then the
14382 @code{cond} expression, using binding, can display the value to the
14383 user.
14384
14385 Often, one thinks of the binding within a @code{let} expression as
14386 somehow secondary to the `primary' work of a function. But in this
14387 case, what you might consider the `primary' job of the function,
14388 counting words, is done within the @code{let} expression.
14389
14390 @need 1250
14391 Using @code{let}, the function definition looks like this:
14392
14393 @smallexample
14394 @group
14395 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14396 "Print number of words in the region."
14397 (interactive "r")
14398 @end group
14399
14400 @group
14401 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14402 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14403 (save-excursion
14404 (goto-char beginning)
14405 @end group
14406
14407 @group
14408 ;;; @r{2. Count the words.}
14409 (let ((count (recursive-count-words end)))
14410 @end group
14411
14412 @group
14413 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14414 (cond ((zerop count)
14415 (message
14416 "The region does NOT have any words."))
14417 ((= 1 count)
14418 (message
14419 "The region has 1 word."))
14420 (t
14421 (message
14422 "The region has %d words." count))))))
14423 @end group
14424 @end smallexample
14425
14426 Next, we need to write the recursive counting function.
14427
14428 A recursive function has at least three parts: the `do-again-test', the
14429 `next-step-expression', and the recursive call.
14430
14431 The do-again-test determines whether the function will or will not be
14432 called again. Since we are counting words in a region and can use a
14433 function that moves point forward for every word, the do-again-test
14434 can check whether point is still within the region. The do-again-test
14435 should find the value of point and determine whether point is before,
14436 at, or after the value of the end of the region. We can use the
14437 @code{point} function to locate point. Clearly, we must pass the
14438 value of the end of the region to the recursive counting function as an
14439 argument.
14440
14441 In addition, the do-again-test should also test whether the search finds a
14442 word. If it does not, the function should not call itself again.
14443
14444 The next-step-expression changes a value so that when the recursive
14445 function is supposed to stop calling itself, it stops. More
14446 precisely, the next-step-expression changes a value so that at the
14447 right time, the do-again-test stops the recursive function from
14448 calling itself again. In this case, the next-step-expression can be
14449 the expression that moves point forward, word by word.
14450
14451 The third part of a recursive function is the recursive call.
14452
14453 Somewhere, also, we also need a part that does the `work' of the
14454 function, a part that does the counting. A vital part!
14455
14456 @need 1250
14457 But already, we have an outline of the recursive counting function:
14458
14459 @smallexample
14460 @group
14461 (defun recursive-count-words (region-end)
14462 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14463 @var{do-again-test}
14464 @var{next-step-expression}
14465 @var{recursive call})
14466 @end group
14467 @end smallexample
14468
14469 Now we need to fill in the slots. Let's start with the simplest cases
14470 first: if point is at or beyond the end of the region, there cannot
14471 be any words in the region, so the function should return zero.
14472 Likewise, if the search fails, there are no words to count, so the
14473 function should return zero.
14474
14475 On the other hand, if point is within the region and the search
14476 succeeds, the function should call itself again.
14477
14478 @need 800
14479 Thus, the do-again-test should look like this:
14480
14481 @smallexample
14482 @group
14483 (and (< (point) region-end)
14484 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" region-end t))
14485 @end group
14486 @end smallexample
14487
14488 Note that the search expression is part of the do-again-test---the
14489 function returns @code{t} if its search succeeds and @code{nil} if it
14490 fails. (@xref{Whitespace Bug, , The Whitespace Bug in
14491 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}}, for an explanation of how
14492 @code{re-search-forward} works.)
14493
14494 The do-again-test is the true-or-false test of an @code{if} clause.
14495 Clearly, if the do-again-test succeeds, the then-part of the @code{if}
14496 clause should call the function again; but if it fails, the else-part
14497 should return zero since either point is outside the region or the
14498 search failed because there were no words to find.
14499
14500 But before considering the recursive call, we need to consider the
14501 next-step-expression. What is it? Interestingly, it is the search
14502 part of the do-again-test.
14503
14504 In addition to returning @code{t} or @code{nil} for the
14505 do-again-test, @code{re-search-forward} moves point forward as a side
14506 effect of a successful search. This is the action that changes the
14507 value of point so that the recursive function stops calling itself
14508 when point completes its movement through the region. Consequently,
14509 the @code{re-search-forward} expression is the next-step-expression.
14510
14511 @need 1200
14512 In outline, then, the body of the @code{recursive-count-words}
14513 function looks like this:
14514
14515 @smallexample
14516 @group
14517 (if @var{do-again-test-and-next-step-combined}
14518 ;; @r{then}
14519 @var{recursive-call-returning-count}
14520 ;; @r{else}
14521 @var{return-zero})
14522 @end group
14523 @end smallexample
14524
14525 How to incorporate the mechanism that counts?
14526
14527 If you are not used to writing recursive functions, a question like
14528 this can be troublesome. But it can and should be approached
14529 systematically.
14530
14531 We know that the counting mechanism should be associated in some way
14532 with the recursive call. Indeed, since the next-step-expression moves
14533 point forward by one word, and since a recursive call is made for
14534 each word, the counting mechanism must be an expression that adds one
14535 to the value returned by a call to @code{recursive-count-words}.
14536
14537 @need 800
14538 Consider several cases:
14539
14540 @itemize @bullet
14541 @item
14542 If there are two words in the region, the function should return
14543 a value resulting from adding one to the value returned when it counts
14544 the first word, plus the number returned when it counts the remaining
14545 words in the region, which in this case is one.
14546
14547 @item
14548 If there is one word in the region, the function should return
14549 a value resulting from adding one to the value returned when it counts
14550 that word, plus the number returned when it counts the remaining
14551 words in the region, which in this case is zero.
14552
14553 @item
14554 If there are no words in the region, the function should return zero.
14555 @end itemize
14556
14557 From the sketch we can see that the else-part of the @code{if} returns
14558 zero for the case of no words. This means that the then-part of the
14559 @code{if} must return a value resulting from adding one to the value
14560 returned from a count of the remaining words.
14561
14562 @need 1200
14563 The expression will look like this, where @code{1+} is a function that
14564 adds one to its argument.
14565
14566 @smallexample
14567 (1+ (recursive-count-words region-end))
14568 @end smallexample
14569
14570 @need 1200
14571 The whole @code{recursive-count-words} function will then look like
14572 this:
14573
14574 @smallexample
14575 @group
14576 (defun recursive-count-words (region-end)
14577 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14578
14579 ;;; @r{1. do-again-test}
14580 (if (and (< (point) region-end)
14581 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" region-end t))
14582 @end group
14583
14584 @group
14585 ;;; @r{2. then-part: the recursive call}
14586 (1+ (recursive-count-words region-end))
14587
14588 ;;; @r{3. else-part}
14589 0))
14590 @end group
14591 @end smallexample
14592
14593 @need 1250
14594 Let's examine how this works:
14595
14596 If there are no words in the region, the else part of the @code{if}
14597 expression is evaluated and consequently the function returns zero.
14598
14599 If there is one word in the region, the value of point is less than
14600 the value of @code{region-end} and the search succeeds. In this case,
14601 the true-or-false-test of the @code{if} expression tests true, and the
14602 then-part of the @code{if} expression is evaluated. The counting
14603 expression is evaluated. This expression returns a value (which will
14604 be the value returned by the whole function) that is the sum of one
14605 added to the value returned by a recursive call.
14606
14607 Meanwhile, the next-step-expression has caused point to jump over the
14608 first (and in this case only) word in the region. This means that
14609 when @code{(recursive-count-words region-end)} is evaluated a second
14610 time, as a result of the recursive call, the value of point will be
14611 equal to or greater than the value of region end. So this time,
14612 @code{recursive-count-words} will return zero. The zero will be added
14613 to one, and the original evaluation of @code{recursive-count-words}
14614 will return one plus zero, which is one, which is the correct amount.
14615
14616 Clearly, if there are two words in the region, the first call to
14617 @code{recursive-count-words} returns one added to the value returned
14618 by calling @code{recursive-count-words} on a region containing the
14619 remaining word---that is, it adds one to one, producing two, which is
14620 the correct amount.
14621
14622 Similarly, if there are three words in the region, the first call to
14623 @code{recursive-count-words} returns one added to the value returned
14624 by calling @code{recursive-count-words} on a region containing the
14625 remaining two words---and so on and so on.
14626
14627 @need 1250
14628 @noindent
14629 With full documentation the two functions look like this:
14630
14631 @need 1250
14632 @noindent
14633 The recursive function:
14634
14635 @findex recursive-count-words
14636 @smallexample
14637 @group
14638 (defun recursive-count-words (region-end)
14639 "Number of words between point and REGION-END."
14640 @end group
14641
14642 @group
14643 ;;; @r{1. do-again-test}
14644 (if (and (< (point) region-end)
14645 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" region-end t))
14646 @end group
14647
14648 @group
14649 ;;; @r{2. then-part: the recursive call}
14650 (1+ (recursive-count-words region-end))
14651
14652 ;;; @r{3. else-part}
14653 0))
14654 @end group
14655 @end smallexample
14656
14657 @need 800
14658 @noindent
14659 The wrapper:
14660
14661 @smallexample
14662 @group
14663 ;;; @r{Recursive version}
14664 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14665 "Print number of words in the region.
14666 @end group
14667
14668 @group
14669 Words are defined as at least one word-constituent
14670 character followed by at least one character that is
14671 not a word-constituent. The buffer's syntax table
14672 determines which characters these are."
14673 @end group
14674 @group
14675 (interactive "r")
14676 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14677 (save-excursion
14678 (goto-char beginning)
14679 (let ((count (recursive-count-words end)))
14680 @end group
14681 @group
14682 (cond ((zerop count)
14683 (message
14684 "The region does NOT have any words."))
14685 @end group
14686 @group
14687 ((= 1 count)
14688 (message "The region has 1 word."))
14689 (t
14690 (message
14691 "The region has %d words." count))))))
14692 @end group
14693 @end smallexample
14694
14695 @node Counting Exercise, , recursive-count-words, Counting Words
14696 @section Exercise: Counting Punctuation
14697
14698 Using a @code{while} loop, write a function to count the number of
14699 punctuation marks in a region---period, comma, semicolon, colon,
14700 exclamation mark, and question mark. Do the same using recursion.
14701
14702 @node Words in a defun, Readying a Graph, Counting Words, Top
14703 @chapter Counting Words in a @code{defun}
14704 @cindex Counting words in a @code{defun}
14705 @cindex Word counting in a @code{defun}
14706
14707 Our next project is to count the number of words in a function
14708 definition. Clearly, this can be done using some variant of
14709 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}. @xref{Counting Words, , Counting Words:
14710 Repetition and Regexps}. If we are just going to count the words in
14711 one definition, it is easy enough to mark the definition with the
14712 @kbd{C-M-h} (@code{mark-defun}) command, and then call
14713 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
14714
14715 However, I am more ambitious: I want to count the words and symbols in
14716 every definition in the Emacs sources and then print a graph that
14717 shows how many functions there are of each length: how many contain 40
14718 to 49 words or symbols, how many contain 50 to 59 words or symbols,
14719 and so on. I have often been curious how long a typical function is,
14720 and this will tell.
14721
14722 @menu
14723 * Divide and Conquer::
14724 * Words and Symbols:: What to count?
14725 * Syntax:: What constitutes a word or symbol?
14726 * count-words-in-defun:: Very like @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
14727 * Several defuns:: Counting several defuns in a file.
14728 * Find a File:: Do you want to look at a file?
14729 * lengths-list-file:: A list of the lengths of many definitions.
14730 * Several files:: Counting in definitions in different files.
14731 * Several files recursively:: Recursively counting in different files.
14732 * Prepare the data:: Prepare the data for display in a graph.
14733 @end menu
14734
14735 @node Divide and Conquer, Words and Symbols, Words in a defun, Words in a defun
14736 @ifnottex
14737 @unnumberedsec Divide and Conquer
14738 @end ifnottex
14739
14740 Described in one phrase, the histogram project is daunting; but
14741 divided into numerous small steps, each of which we can take one at a
14742 time, the project becomes less fearsome. Let us consider what the
14743 steps must be:
14744
14745 @itemize @bullet
14746 @item
14747 First, write a function to count the words in one definition. This
14748 includes the problem of handling symbols as well as words.
14749
14750 @item
14751 Second, write a function to list the numbers of words in each function
14752 in a file. This function can use the @code{count-words-in-defun}
14753 function.
14754
14755 @item
14756 Third, write a function to list the numbers of words in each function
14757 in each of several files. This entails automatically finding the
14758 various files, switching to them, and counting the words in the
14759 definitions within them.
14760
14761 @item
14762 Fourth, write a function to convert the list of numbers that we
14763 created in step three to a form that will be suitable for printing as
14764 a graph.
14765
14766 @item
14767 Fifth, write a function to print the results as a graph.
14768 @end itemize
14769
14770 This is quite a project! But if we take each step slowly, it will not
14771 be difficult.
14772
14773 @node Words and Symbols, Syntax, Divide and Conquer, Words in a defun
14774 @section What to Count?
14775 @cindex Words and symbols in defun
14776
14777 When we first start thinking about how to count the words in a
14778 function definition, the first question is (or ought to be) what are
14779 we going to count? When we speak of `words' with respect to a Lisp
14780 function definition, we are actually speaking, in large part, of
14781 `symbols'. For example, the following @code{multiply-by-seven}
14782 function contains the five symbols @code{defun},
14783 @code{multiply-by-seven}, @code{number}, @code{*}, and @code{7}. In
14784 addition, in the documentation string, it contains the four words
14785 @samp{Multiply}, @samp{NUMBER}, @samp{by}, and @samp{seven}. The
14786 symbol @samp{number} is repeated, so the definition contains a total
14787 of ten words and symbols.
14788
14789 @smallexample
14790 @group
14791 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
14792 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
14793 (* 7 number))
14794 @end group
14795 @end smallexample
14796
14797 @noindent
14798 However, if we mark the @code{multiply-by-seven} definition with
14799 @kbd{C-M-h} (@code{mark-defun}), and then call
14800 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} on it, we will find that
14801 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} claims the definition has eleven words, not
14802 ten! Something is wrong!
14803
14804 The problem is twofold: @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} does not count the
14805 @samp{*} as a word, and it counts the single symbol,
14806 @code{multiply-by-seven}, as containing three words. The hyphens are
14807 treated as if they were interword spaces rather than intraword
14808 connectors: @samp{multiply-by-seven} is counted as if it were written
14809 @samp{multiply by seven}.
14810
14811 The cause of this confusion is the regular expression search within
14812 the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} definition that moves point forward word
14813 by word. In the canonical version of @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}, the
14814 regexp is:
14815
14816 @smallexample
14817 "\\w+\\W*"
14818 @end smallexample
14819
14820 @noindent
14821 This regular expression is a pattern defining one or more word
14822 constituent characters possibly followed by one or more characters
14823 that are not word constituents. What is meant by `word constituent
14824 characters' brings us to the issue of syntax, which is worth a section
14825 of its own.
14826
14827 @node Syntax, count-words-in-defun, Words and Symbols, Words in a defun
14828 @section What Constitutes a Word or Symbol?
14829 @cindex Syntax categories and tables
14830
14831 Emacs treats different characters as belonging to different
14832 @dfn{syntax categories}. For example, the regular expression,
14833 @samp{\\w+}, is a pattern specifying one or more @emph{word
14834 constituent} characters. Word constituent characters are members of
14835 one syntax category. Other syntax categories include the class of
14836 punctuation characters, such as the period and the comma, and the
14837 class of whitespace characters, such as the blank space and the tab
14838 character. (For more information, @pxref{Syntax Tables, , Syntax
14839 Tables, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
14840
14841 Syntax tables specify which characters belong to which categories.
14842 Usually, a hyphen is not specified as a `word constituent character'.
14843 Instead, it is specified as being in the `class of characters that are
14844 part of symbol names but not words.' This means that the
14845 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} function treats it in the same way it treats
14846 an interword white space, which is why @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
14847 counts @samp{multiply-by-seven} as three words.
14848
14849 There are two ways to cause Emacs to count @samp{multiply-by-seven} as
14850 one symbol: modify the syntax table or modify the regular expression.
14851
14852 We could redefine a hyphen as a word constituent character by
14853 modifying the syntax table that Emacs keeps for each mode. This
14854 action would serve our purpose, except that a hyphen is merely the
14855 most common character within symbols that is not typically a word
14856 constituent character; there are others, too.
14857
14858 Alternatively, we can redefine the regular expression used in the
14859 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} definition so as to include symbols. This
14860 procedure has the merit of clarity, but the task is a little tricky.
14861
14862 @need 1200
14863 The first part is simple enough: the pattern must match ``at least one
14864 character that is a word or symbol constituent''. Thus:
14865
14866 @smallexample
14867 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+"
14868 @end smallexample
14869
14870 @noindent
14871 The @samp{\\(} is the first part of the grouping construct that
14872 includes the @samp{\\w} and the @samp{\\s_} as alternatives, separated
14873 by the @samp{\\|}. The @samp{\\w} matches any word-constituent
14874 character and the @samp{\\s_} matches any character that is part of a
14875 symbol name but not a word-constituent character. The @samp{+}
14876 following the group indicates that the word or symbol constituent
14877 characters must be matched at least once.
14878
14879 However, the second part of the regexp is more difficult to design.
14880 What we want is to follow the first part with ``optionally one or more
14881 characters that are not constituents of a word or symbol''. At first,
14882 I thought I could define this with the following:
14883
14884 @smallexample
14885 "\\(\\W\\|\\S_\\)*"
14886 @end smallexample
14887
14888 @noindent
14889 The upper case @samp{W} and @samp{S} match characters that are
14890 @emph{not} word or symbol constituents. Unfortunately, this
14891 expression matches any character that is either not a word constituent
14892 or not a symbol constituent. This matches any character!
14893
14894 I then noticed that every word or symbol in my test region was
14895 followed by white space (blank space, tab, or newline). So I tried
14896 placing a pattern to match one or more blank spaces after the pattern
14897 for one or more word or symbol constituents. This failed, too. Words
14898 and symbols are often separated by whitespace, but in actual code
14899 parentheses may follow symbols and punctuation may follow words. So
14900 finally, I designed a pattern in which the word or symbol constituents
14901 are followed optionally by characters that are not white space and
14902 then followed optionally by white space.
14903
14904 @need 800
14905 Here is the full regular expression:
14906
14907 @smallexample
14908 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*"
14909 @end smallexample
14910
14911 @node count-words-in-defun, Several defuns, Syntax, Words in a defun
14912 @section The @code{count-words-in-defun} Function
14913 @cindex Counting words in a @code{defun}
14914
14915 We have seen that there are several ways to write a
14916 @code{count-words-region} function. To write a
14917 @code{count-words-in-defun}, we need merely adapt one of these
14918 versions.
14919
14920 The version that uses a @code{while} loop is easy to understand, so I
14921 am going to adapt that. Because @code{count-words-in-defun} will be
14922 part of a more complex program, it need not be interactive and it need
14923 not display a message but just return the count. These considerations
14924 simplify the definition a little.
14925
14926 On the other hand, @code{count-words-in-defun} will be used within a
14927 buffer that contains function definitions. Consequently, it is
14928 reasonable to ask that the function determine whether it is called
14929 when point is within a function definition, and if it is, to return
14930 the count for that definition. This adds complexity to the
14931 definition, but saves us from needing to pass arguments to the
14932 function.
14933
14934 @need 1250
14935 These considerations lead us to prepare the following template:
14936
14937 @smallexample
14938 @group
14939 (defun count-words-in-defun ()
14940 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14941 (@var{set up}@dots{}
14942 (@var{while loop}@dots{})
14943 @var{return count})
14944 @end group
14945 @end smallexample
14946
14947 @noindent
14948 As usual, our job is to fill in the slots.
14949
14950 First, the set up.
14951
14952 We are presuming that this function will be called within a buffer
14953 containing function definitions. Point will either be within a
14954 function definition or not. For @code{count-words-in-defun} to work,
14955 point must move to the beginning of the definition, a counter must
14956 start at zero, and the counting loop must stop when point reaches the
14957 end of the definition.
14958
14959 The @code{beginning-of-defun} function searches backwards for an
14960 opening delimiter such as a @samp{(} at the beginning of a line, and
14961 moves point to that position, or else to the limit of the search. In
14962 practice, this means that @code{beginning-of-defun} moves point to the
14963 beginning of an enclosing or preceding function definition, or else to
14964 the beginning of the buffer. We can use @code{beginning-of-defun} to
14965 place point where we wish to start.
14966
14967 The @code{while} loop requires a counter to keep track of the words or
14968 symbols being counted. A @code{let} expression can be used to create
14969 a local variable for this purpose, and bind it to an initial value of zero.
14970
14971 The @code{end-of-defun} function works like @code{beginning-of-defun}
14972 except that it moves point to the end of the definition.
14973 @code{end-of-defun} can be used as part of an expression that
14974 determines the position of the end of the definition.
14975
14976 The set up for @code{count-words-in-defun} takes shape rapidly: first
14977 we move point to the beginning of the definition, then we create a
14978 local variable to hold the count, and finally, we record the position
14979 of the end of the definition so the @code{while} loop will know when to stop
14980 looping.
14981
14982 @need 1250
14983 The code looks like this:
14984
14985 @smallexample
14986 @group
14987 (beginning-of-defun)
14988 (let ((count 0)
14989 (end (save-excursion (end-of-defun) (point))))
14990 @end group
14991 @end smallexample
14992
14993 @noindent
14994 The code is simple. The only slight complication is likely to concern
14995 @code{end}: it is bound to the position of the end of the definition
14996 by a @code{save-excursion} expression that returns the value of point
14997 after @code{end-of-defun} temporarily moves it to the end of the
14998 definition.
14999
15000 The second part of the @code{count-words-in-defun}, after the set up,
15001 is the @code{while} loop.
15002
15003 The loop must contain an expression that jumps point forward word by
15004 word and symbol by symbol, and another expression that counts the
15005 jumps. The true-or-false-test for the @code{while} loop should test
15006 true so long as point should jump forward, and false when point is at
15007 the end of the definition. We have already redefined the regular
15008 expression for this, so the loop is straightforward:
15009
15010 @smallexample
15011 @group
15012 (while (and (< (point) end)
15013 (re-search-forward
15014 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*" end t))
15015 (setq count (1+ count)))
15016 @end group
15017 @end smallexample
15018
15019 The third part of the function definition returns the count of words
15020 and symbols. This part is the last expression within the body of the
15021 @code{let} expression, and can be, very simply, the local variable
15022 @code{count}, which when evaluated returns the count.
15023
15024 @need 1250
15025 Put together, the @code{count-words-in-defun} definition looks like this:
15026
15027 @findex count-words-in-defun
15028 @smallexample
15029 @group
15030 (defun count-words-in-defun ()
15031 "Return the number of words and symbols in a defun."
15032 (beginning-of-defun)
15033 (let ((count 0)
15034 (end (save-excursion (end-of-defun) (point))))
15035 @end group
15036 @group
15037 (while
15038 (and (< (point) end)
15039 (re-search-forward
15040 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*"
15041 end t))
15042 (setq count (1+ count)))
15043 count))
15044 @end group
15045 @end smallexample
15046
15047 How to test this? The function is not interactive, but it is easy to
15048 put a wrapper around the function to make it interactive; we can use
15049 almost the same code as for the recursive version of
15050 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}:
15051
15052 @smallexample
15053 @group
15054 ;;; @r{Interactive version.}
15055 (defun count-words-defun ()
15056 "Number of words and symbols in a function definition."
15057 (interactive)
15058 (message
15059 "Counting words and symbols in function definition ... ")
15060 @end group
15061 @group
15062 (let ((count (count-words-in-defun)))
15063 (cond
15064 ((zerop count)
15065 (message
15066 "The definition does NOT have any words or symbols."))
15067 @end group
15068 @group
15069 ((= 1 count)
15070 (message
15071 "The definition has 1 word or symbol."))
15072 (t
15073 (message
15074 "The definition has %d words or symbols." count)))))
15075 @end group
15076 @end smallexample
15077
15078 @need 800
15079 @noindent
15080 Let's re-use @kbd{C-c =} as a convenient keybinding:
15081
15082 @smallexample
15083 (global-set-key "\C-c=" 'count-words-defun)
15084 @end smallexample
15085
15086 Now we can try out @code{count-words-defun}: install both
15087 @code{count-words-in-defun} and @code{count-words-defun}, and set the
15088 keybinding, and then place the cursor within the following definition:
15089
15090 @smallexample
15091 @group
15092 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
15093 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
15094 (* 7 number))
15095 @result{} 10
15096 @end group
15097 @end smallexample
15098
15099 @noindent
15100 Success! The definition has 10 words and symbols.
15101
15102 The next problem is to count the numbers of words and symbols in
15103 several definitions within a single file.
15104
15105 @node Several defuns, Find a File, count-words-in-defun, Words in a defun
15106 @section Count Several @code{defuns} Within a File
15107
15108 A file such as @file{simple.el} may have a hundred or more function
15109 definitions within it. Our long term goal is to collect statistics on
15110 many files, but as a first step, our immediate goal is to collect
15111 statistics on one file.
15112
15113 The information will be a series of numbers, each number being the
15114 length of a function definition. We can store the numbers in a list.
15115
15116 We know that we will want to incorporate the information regarding one
15117 file with information about many other files; this means that the
15118 function for counting definition lengths within one file need only
15119 return the list of lengths. It need not and should not display any
15120 messages.
15121
15122 The word count commands contain one expression to jump point forward
15123 word by word and another expression to count the jumps. The function
15124 to return the lengths of definitions can be designed to work the same
15125 way, with one expression to jump point forward definition by
15126 definition and another expression to construct the lengths' list.
15127
15128 This statement of the problem makes it elementary to write the
15129 function definition. Clearly, we will start the count at the
15130 beginning of the file, so the first command will be @code{(goto-char
15131 (point-min))}. Next, we start the @code{while} loop; and the
15132 true-or-false test of the loop can be a regular expression search for
15133 the next function definition---so long as the search succeeds, point
15134 is moved forward and then the body of the loop is evaluated. The body
15135 needs an expression that constructs the lengths' list. @code{cons},
15136 the list construction command, can be used to create the list. That
15137 is almost all there is to it.
15138
15139 @need 800
15140 Here is what this fragment of code looks like:
15141
15142 @smallexample
15143 @group
15144 (goto-char (point-min))
15145 (while (re-search-forward "^(defun" nil t)
15146 (setq lengths-list
15147 (cons (count-words-in-defun) lengths-list)))
15148 @end group
15149 @end smallexample
15150
15151 What we have left out is the mechanism for finding the file that
15152 contains the function definitions.
15153
15154 In previous examples, we either used this, the Info file, or we
15155 switched back and forth to some other buffer, such as the
15156 @file{*scratch*} buffer.
15157
15158 Finding a file is a new process that we have not yet discussed.
15159
15160 @node Find a File, lengths-list-file, Several defuns, Words in a defun
15161 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
15162 @section Find a File
15163 @cindex Find a File
15164
15165 To find a file in Emacs, you use the @kbd{C-x C-f} (@code{find-file})
15166 command. This command is almost, but not quite right for the lengths
15167 problem.
15168
15169 @need 1200
15170 Let's look at the source for @code{find-file}:
15171
15172 @smallexample
15173 @group
15174 (defun find-file (filename)
15175 "Edit file FILENAME.
15176 Switch to a buffer visiting file FILENAME,
15177 creating one if none already exists."
15178 (interactive "FFind file: ")
15179 (switch-to-buffer (find-file-noselect filename)))
15180 @end group
15181 @end smallexample
15182
15183 @noindent
15184 (The most recent version of the @code{find-file} function definition
15185 permits you to specify optional wildcards to visit multiple files; that
15186 makes the definition more complex and we will not discuss it here,
15187 since it is not relevant. You can see its source using either
15188 @kbd{M-.} (@code{find-tag}) or @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}).)
15189
15190 @ignore
15191 In Emacs 22
15192 (defun find-file (filename &optional wildcards)
15193 "Edit file FILENAME.
15194 Switch to a buffer visiting file FILENAME,
15195 creating one if none already exists.
15196 Interactively, the default if you just type RET is the current directory,
15197 but the visited file name is available through the minibuffer history:
15198 type M-n to pull it into the minibuffer.
15199
15200 Interactively, or if WILDCARDS is non-nil in a call from Lisp,
15201 expand wildcards (if any) and visit multiple files. You can
15202 suppress wildcard expansion by setting `find-file-wildcards' to nil.
15203
15204 To visit a file without any kind of conversion and without
15205 automatically choosing a major mode, use \\[find-file-literally]."
15206 (interactive (find-file-read-args "Find file: " nil))
15207 (let ((value (find-file-noselect filename nil nil wildcards)))
15208 (if (listp value)
15209 (mapcar 'switch-to-buffer (nreverse value))
15210 (switch-to-buffer value))))
15211 @end ignore
15212
15213 The definition I am showing possesses short but complete documentation
15214 and an interactive specification that prompts you for a file name when
15215 you use the command interactively. The body of the definition
15216 contains two functions, @code{find-file-noselect} and
15217 @code{switch-to-buffer}.
15218
15219 According to its documentation as shown by @kbd{C-h f} (the
15220 @code{describe-function} command), the @code{find-file-noselect}
15221 function reads the named file into a buffer and returns the buffer.
15222 (Its most recent version includes an optional wildcards argument,
15223 too, as well as another to read a file literally and an other you
15224 suppress warning messages. These optional arguments are irrelevant.)
15225
15226 However, the @code{find-file-noselect} function does not select the
15227 buffer in which it puts the file. Emacs does not switch its attention
15228 (or yours if you are using @code{find-file-noselect}) to the selected
15229 buffer. That is what @code{switch-to-buffer} does: it switches the
15230 buffer to which Emacs attention is directed; and it switches the
15231 buffer displayed in the window to the new buffer. We have discussed
15232 buffer switching elsewhere. (@xref{Switching Buffers}.)
15233
15234 In this histogram project, we do not need to display each file on the
15235 screen as the program determines the length of each definition within
15236 it. Instead of employing @code{switch-to-buffer}, we can work with
15237 @code{set-buffer}, which redirects the attention of the computer
15238 program to a different buffer but does not redisplay it on the screen.
15239 So instead of calling on @code{find-file} to do the job, we must write
15240 our own expression.
15241
15242 The task is easy: use @code{find-file-noselect} and @code{set-buffer}.
15243
15244 @node lengths-list-file, Several files, Find a File, Words in a defun
15245 @section @code{lengths-list-file} in Detail
15246
15247 The core of the @code{lengths-list-file} function is a @code{while}
15248 loop containing a function to move point forward `defun by defun' and
15249 a function to count the number of words and symbols in each defun.
15250 This core must be surrounded by functions that do various other tasks,
15251 including finding the file, and ensuring that point starts out at the
15252 beginning of the file. The function definition looks like this:
15253 @findex lengths-list-file
15254
15255 @smallexample
15256 @group
15257 (defun lengths-list-file (filename)
15258 "Return list of definitions' lengths within FILE.
15259 The returned list is a list of numbers.
15260 Each number is the number of words or
15261 symbols in one function definition."
15262 @end group
15263 @group
15264 (message "Working on `%s' ... " filename)
15265 (save-excursion
15266 (let ((buffer (find-file-noselect filename))
15267 (lengths-list))
15268 (set-buffer buffer)
15269 (setq buffer-read-only t)
15270 (widen)
15271 (goto-char (point-min))
15272 (while (re-search-forward "^(defun" nil t)
15273 (setq lengths-list
15274 (cons (count-words-in-defun) lengths-list)))
15275 (kill-buffer buffer)
15276 lengths-list)))
15277 @end group
15278 @end smallexample
15279
15280 @noindent
15281 The function is passed one argument, the name of the file on which it
15282 will work. It has four lines of documentation, but no interactive
15283 specification. Since people worry that a computer is broken if they
15284 don't see anything going on, the first line of the body is a
15285 message.
15286
15287 The next line contains a @code{save-excursion} that returns Emacs'
15288 attention to the current buffer when the function completes. This is
15289 useful in case you embed this function in another function that
15290 presumes point is restored to the original buffer.
15291
15292 In the varlist of the @code{let} expression, Emacs finds the file and
15293 binds the local variable @code{buffer} to the buffer containing the
15294 file. At the same time, Emacs creates @code{lengths-list} as a local
15295 variable.
15296
15297 Next, Emacs switches its attention to the buffer.
15298
15299 In the following line, Emacs makes the buffer read-only. Ideally,
15300 this line is not necessary. None of the functions for counting words
15301 and symbols in a function definition should change the buffer.
15302 Besides, the buffer is not going to be saved, even if it were changed.
15303 This line is entirely the consequence of great, perhaps excessive,
15304 caution. The reason for the caution is that this function and those
15305 it calls work on the sources for Emacs and it is inconvenient if they
15306 are inadvertently modified. It goes without saying that I did not
15307 realize a need for this line until an experiment went awry and started
15308 to modify my Emacs source files @dots{}
15309
15310 Next comes a call to widen the buffer if it is narrowed. This
15311 function is usually not needed---Emacs creates a fresh buffer if none
15312 already exists; but if a buffer visiting the file already exists Emacs
15313 returns that one. In this case, the buffer may be narrowed and must
15314 be widened. If we wanted to be fully `user-friendly', we would
15315 arrange to save the restriction and the location of point, but we
15316 won't.
15317
15318 The @code{(goto-char (point-min))} expression moves point to the
15319 beginning of the buffer.
15320
15321 Then comes a @code{while} loop in which the `work' of the function is
15322 carried out. In the loop, Emacs determines the length of each
15323 definition and constructs a lengths' list containing the information.
15324
15325 Emacs kills the buffer after working through it. This is to save
15326 space inside of Emacs. My version of GNU Emacs 19 contained over 300
15327 source files of interest; GNU Emacs 22 contains over a thousand source
15328 files. Another function will apply @code{lengths-list-file} to each
15329 of the files.
15330
15331 Finally, the last expression within the @code{let} expression is the
15332 @code{lengths-list} variable; its value is returned as the value of
15333 the whole function.
15334
15335 You can try this function by installing it in the usual fashion. Then
15336 place your cursor after the following expression and type @kbd{C-x
15337 C-e} (@code{eval-last-sexp}).
15338
15339 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15340 @smallexample
15341 (lengths-list-file
15342 "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/emacs-lisp/debug.el")
15343 @end smallexample
15344
15345 @noindent
15346 (You may need to change the pathname of the file; the one here is for
15347 GNU Emacs version 22.1.1. To change the expression, copy it to
15348 the @file{*scratch*} buffer and edit it.
15349
15350 @need 1200
15351 @noindent
15352 (Also, to see the full length of the list, rather than a truncated
15353 version, you may have to evaluate the following:
15354
15355 @smallexample
15356 (custom-set-variables '(eval-expression-print-length nil))
15357 @end smallexample
15358
15359 @noindent
15360 (@xref{defcustom, , Specifying Variables using @code{defcustom}}.
15361 Then evaluate the @code{lengths-list-file} expression.)
15362
15363 @need 1200
15364 The lengths' list for @file{debug.el} takes less than a second to
15365 produce and looks like this in GNU Emacs 22:
15366
15367 @smallexample
15368 (83 113 105 144 289 22 30 97 48 89 25 52 52 88 28 29 77 49 43 290 232 587)
15369 @end smallexample
15370
15371 @need 1500
15372 (Using my old machine, the version 19 lengths' list for @file{debug.el}
15373 took seven seconds to produce and looked like this:
15374
15375 @smallexample
15376 (75 41 80 62 20 45 44 68 45 12 34 235)
15377 @end smallexample
15378
15379 (The newer version of @file{debug.el} contains more defuns than the
15380 earlier one; and my new machine is much faster than the old one.)
15381
15382 Note that the length of the last definition in the file is first in
15383 the list.
15384
15385 @node Several files, Several files recursively, lengths-list-file, Words in a defun
15386 @section Count Words in @code{defuns} in Different Files
15387
15388 In the previous section, we created a function that returns a list of
15389 the lengths of each definition in a file. Now, we want to define a
15390 function to return a master list of the lengths of the definitions in
15391 a list of files.
15392
15393 Working on each of a list of files is a repetitious act, so we can use
15394 either a @code{while} loop or recursion.
15395
15396 @menu
15397 * lengths-list-many-files:: Return a list of the lengths of defuns.
15398 * append:: Attach one list to another.
15399 @end menu
15400
15401 @node lengths-list-many-files, append, Several files, Several files
15402 @ifnottex
15403 @unnumberedsubsec Determine the lengths of @code{defuns}
15404 @end ifnottex
15405
15406 The design using a @code{while} loop is routine. The argument passed
15407 the function is a list of files. As we saw earlier (@pxref{Loop
15408 Example}), you can write a @code{while} loop so that the body of the
15409 loop is evaluated if such a list contains elements, but to exit the
15410 loop if the list is empty. For this design to work, the body of the
15411 loop must contain an expression that shortens the list each time the
15412 body is evaluated, so that eventually the list is empty. The usual
15413 technique is to set the value of the list to the value of the @sc{cdr}
15414 of the list each time the body is evaluated.
15415
15416 @need 800
15417 The template looks like this:
15418
15419 @smallexample
15420 @group
15421 (while @var{test-whether-list-is-empty}
15422 @var{body}@dots{}
15423 @var{set-list-to-cdr-of-list})
15424 @end group
15425 @end smallexample
15426
15427 Also, we remember that a @code{while} loop returns @code{nil} (the
15428 result of evaluating the true-or-false-test), not the result of any
15429 evaluation within its body. (The evaluations within the body of the
15430 loop are done for their side effects.) However, the expression that
15431 sets the lengths' list is part of the body---and that is the value
15432 that we want returned by the function as a whole. To do this, we
15433 enclose the @code{while} loop within a @code{let} expression, and
15434 arrange that the last element of the @code{let} expression contains
15435 the value of the lengths' list. (@xref{Incrementing Example, , Loop
15436 Example with an Incrementing Counter}.)
15437
15438 @findex lengths-list-many-files
15439 @need 1250
15440 These considerations lead us directly to the function itself:
15441
15442 @smallexample
15443 @group
15444 ;;; @r{Use @code{while} loop.}
15445 (defun lengths-list-many-files (list-of-files)
15446 "Return list of lengths of defuns in LIST-OF-FILES."
15447 @end group
15448 @group
15449 (let (lengths-list)
15450
15451 ;;; @r{true-or-false-test}
15452 (while list-of-files
15453 (setq lengths-list
15454 (append
15455 lengths-list
15456
15457 ;;; @r{Generate a lengths' list.}
15458 (lengths-list-file
15459 (expand-file-name (car list-of-files)))))
15460 @end group
15461
15462 @group
15463 ;;; @r{Make files' list shorter.}
15464 (setq list-of-files (cdr list-of-files)))
15465
15466 ;;; @r{Return final value of lengths' list.}
15467 lengths-list))
15468 @end group
15469 @end smallexample
15470
15471 @code{expand-file-name} is a built-in function that converts a file
15472 name to the absolute, long, path name form. The function employs the
15473 name of the directory in which the function is called.
15474
15475 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15476 @need 1500
15477 Thus, if @code{expand-file-name} is called on @code{debug.el} when
15478 Emacs is visiting the
15479 @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/emacs-lisp/} directory,
15480
15481 @smallexample
15482 debug.el
15483 @end smallexample
15484
15485 @need 800
15486 @noindent
15487 becomes
15488
15489 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15490 @smallexample
15491 /usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/emacs-lisp/debug.el
15492 @end smallexample
15493
15494 The only other new element of this function definition is the as yet
15495 unstudied function @code{append}, which merits a short section for
15496 itself.
15497
15498 @node append, , lengths-list-many-files, Several files
15499 @subsection The @code{append} Function
15500
15501 @need 800
15502 The @code{append} function attaches one list to another. Thus,
15503
15504 @smallexample
15505 (append '(1 2 3 4) '(5 6 7 8))
15506 @end smallexample
15507
15508 @need 800
15509 @noindent
15510 produces the list
15511
15512 @smallexample
15513 (1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8)
15514 @end smallexample
15515
15516 This is exactly how we want to attach two lengths' lists produced by
15517 @code{lengths-list-file} to each other. The results contrast with
15518 @code{cons},
15519
15520 @smallexample
15521 (cons '(1 2 3 4) '(5 6 7 8))
15522 @end smallexample
15523
15524 @need 1250
15525 @noindent
15526 which constructs a new list in which the first argument to @code{cons}
15527 becomes the first element of the new list:
15528
15529 @smallexample
15530 ((1 2 3 4) 5 6 7 8)
15531 @end smallexample
15532
15533 @node Several files recursively, Prepare the data, Several files, Words in a defun
15534 @section Recursively Count Words in Different Files
15535
15536 Besides a @code{while} loop, you can work on each of a list of files
15537 with recursion. A recursive version of @code{lengths-list-many-files}
15538 is short and simple.
15539
15540 The recursive function has the usual parts: the `do-again-test', the
15541 `next-step-expression', and the recursive call. The `do-again-test'
15542 determines whether the function should call itself again, which it
15543 will do if the @code{list-of-files} contains any remaining elements;
15544 the `next-step-expression' resets the @code{list-of-files} to the
15545 @sc{cdr} of itself, so eventually the list will be empty; and the
15546 recursive call calls itself on the shorter list. The complete
15547 function is shorter than this description!
15548 @findex recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15549
15550 @smallexample
15551 @group
15552 (defun recursive-lengths-list-many-files (list-of-files)
15553 "Return list of lengths of each defun in LIST-OF-FILES."
15554 (if list-of-files ; @r{do-again-test}
15555 (append
15556 (lengths-list-file
15557 (expand-file-name (car list-of-files)))
15558 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15559 (cdr list-of-files)))))
15560 @end group
15561 @end smallexample
15562
15563 @noindent
15564 In a sentence, the function returns the lengths' list for the first of
15565 the @code{list-of-files} appended to the result of calling itself on
15566 the rest of the @code{list-of-files}.
15567
15568 Here is a test of @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files}, along with
15569 the results of running @code{lengths-list-file} on each of the files
15570 individually.
15571
15572 Install @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} and
15573 @code{lengths-list-file}, if necessary, and then evaluate the
15574 following expressions. You may need to change the files' pathnames;
15575 those here work when this Info file and the Emacs sources are located
15576 in their customary places. To change the expressions, copy them to
15577 the @file{*scratch*} buffer, edit them, and then evaluate them.
15578
15579 The results are shown after the @samp{@result{}}. (These results are
15580 for files from Emacs version 22.1.1; files from other versions of
15581 Emacs may produce different results.)
15582
15583 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15584 @smallexample
15585 @group
15586 (cd "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/")
15587
15588 (lengths-list-file "./lisp/macros.el")
15589 @result{} (283 263 480 90)
15590 @end group
15591
15592 @group
15593 (lengths-list-file "./lisp/mail/mailalias.el")
15594 @result{} (38 32 29 95 178 180 321 218 324)
15595 @end group
15596
15597 @group
15598 (lengths-list-file "./lisp/makesum.el")
15599 @result{} (85 181)
15600 @end group
15601
15602 @group
15603 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15604 '("./lisp/macros.el"
15605 "./lisp/mail/mailalias.el"
15606 "./lisp/makesum.el"))
15607 @result{} (283 263 480 90 38 32 29 95 178 180 321 218 324 85 181)
15608 @end group
15609 @end smallexample
15610
15611 The @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function produces the
15612 output we want.
15613
15614 The next step is to prepare the data in the list for display in a graph.
15615
15616 @node Prepare the data, , Several files recursively, Words in a defun
15617 @section Prepare the Data for Display in a Graph
15618
15619 The @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function returns a list
15620 of numbers. Each number records the length of a function definition.
15621 What we need to do now is transform this data into a list of numbers
15622 suitable for generating a graph. The new list will tell how many
15623 functions definitions contain less than 10 words and
15624 symbols, how many contain between 10 and 19 words and symbols, how
15625 many contain between 20 and 29 words and symbols, and so on.
15626
15627 In brief, we need to go through the lengths' list produced by the
15628 @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function and count the number
15629 of defuns within each range of lengths, and produce a list of those
15630 numbers.
15631
15632 @menu
15633 * Data for Display in Detail::
15634 * Sorting:: Sorting lists.
15635 * Files List:: Making a list of files.
15636 * Counting function definitions::
15637 @end menu
15638
15639 @node Data for Display in Detail, Sorting, Prepare the data, Prepare the data
15640 @ifnottex
15641 @unnumberedsubsec The Data for Display in Detail
15642 @end ifnottex
15643
15644 Based on what we have done before, we can readily foresee that it
15645 should not be too hard to write a function that `@sc{cdr}s' down the
15646 lengths' list, looks at each element, determines which length range it
15647 is in, and increments a counter for that range.
15648
15649 However, before beginning to write such a function, we should consider
15650 the advantages of sorting the lengths' list first, so the numbers are
15651 ordered from smallest to largest. First, sorting will make it easier
15652 to count the numbers in each range, since two adjacent numbers will
15653 either be in the same length range or in adjacent ranges. Second, by
15654 inspecting a sorted list, we can discover the highest and lowest
15655 number, and thereby determine the largest and smallest length range
15656 that we will need.
15657
15658 @node Sorting, Files List, Data for Display in Detail, Prepare the data
15659 @subsection Sorting Lists
15660 @findex sort
15661
15662 Emacs contains a function to sort lists, called (as you might guess)
15663 @code{sort}. The @code{sort} function takes two arguments, the list
15664 to be sorted, and a predicate that determines whether the first of
15665 two list elements is ``less'' than the second.
15666
15667 As we saw earlier (@pxref{Wrong Type of Argument, , Using the Wrong
15668 Type Object as an Argument}), a predicate is a function that
15669 determines whether some property is true or false. The @code{sort}
15670 function will reorder a list according to whatever property the
15671 predicate uses; this means that @code{sort} can be used to sort
15672 non-numeric lists by non-numeric criteria---it can, for example,
15673 alphabetize a list.
15674
15675 @need 1250
15676 The @code{<} function is used when sorting a numeric list. For example,
15677
15678 @smallexample
15679 (sort '(4 8 21 17 33 7 21 7) '<)
15680 @end smallexample
15681
15682 @need 800
15683 @noindent
15684 produces this:
15685
15686 @smallexample
15687 (4 7 7 8 17 21 21 33)
15688 @end smallexample
15689
15690 @noindent
15691 (Note that in this example, both the arguments are quoted so that the
15692 symbols are not evaluated before being passed to @code{sort} as
15693 arguments.)
15694
15695 Sorting the list returned by the
15696 @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function is straightforward;
15697 it uses the @code{<} function:
15698
15699 @ignore
15700 2006 Oct 29
15701 In GNU Emacs 22, eval
15702 (progn
15703 (cd "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.0.50/")
15704 (sort
15705 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15706 '("./lisp/macros.el"
15707 "./lisp/mail/mailalias.el"
15708 "./lisp/makesum.el"))
15709 '<))
15710
15711 @end ignore
15712
15713 @smallexample
15714 @group
15715 (sort
15716 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15717 '("./lisp/macros.el"
15718 "./lisp/mailalias.el"
15719 "./lisp/makesum.el"))
15720 '<)
15721 @end group
15722 @end smallexample
15723
15724 @need 800
15725 @noindent
15726 which produces:
15727
15728 @smallexample
15729 (29 32 38 85 90 95 178 180 181 218 263 283 321 324 480)
15730 @end smallexample
15731
15732 @noindent
15733 (Note that in this example, the first argument to @code{sort} is not
15734 quoted, since the expression must be evaluated so as to produce the
15735 list that is passed to @code{sort}.)
15736
15737 @node Files List, Counting function definitions, Sorting, Prepare the data
15738 @subsection Making a List of Files
15739
15740 The @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function requires a list
15741 of files as its argument. For our test examples, we constructed such
15742 a list by hand; but the Emacs Lisp source directory is too large for
15743 us to do for that. Instead, we will write a function to do the job
15744 for us. In this function, we will use both a @code{while} loop and a
15745 recursive call.
15746
15747 @findex directory-files
15748 We did not have to write a function like this for older versions of
15749 GNU Emacs, since they placed all the @samp{.el} files in one
15750 directory. Instead, we were able to use the @code{directory-files}
15751 function, which lists the names of files that match a specified
15752 pattern within a single directory.
15753
15754 However, recent versions of Emacs place Emacs Lisp files in
15755 sub-directories of the top level @file{lisp} directory. This
15756 re-arrangement eases navigation. For example, all the mail related
15757 files are in a @file{lisp} sub-directory called @file{mail}. But at
15758 the same time, this arrangement forces us to create a file listing
15759 function that descends into the sub-directories.
15760
15761 @findex files-in-below-directory
15762 We can create this function, called @code{files-in-below-directory},
15763 using familiar functions such as @code{car}, @code{nthcdr}, and
15764 @code{substring} in conjunction with an existing function called
15765 @code{directory-files-and-attributes}. This latter function not only
15766 lists all the filenames in a directory, including the names
15767 of sub-directories, but also their attributes.
15768
15769 To restate our goal: to create a function that will enable us
15770 to feed filenames to @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files}
15771 as a list that looks like this (but with more elements):
15772
15773 @smallexample
15774 @group
15775 ("./lisp/macros.el"
15776 "./lisp/mail/rmail.el"
15777 "./lisp/makesum.el")
15778 @end group
15779 @end smallexample
15780
15781 The @code{directory-files-and-attributes} function returns a list of
15782 lists. Each of the lists within the main list consists of 13
15783 elements. The first element is a string that contains the name of the
15784 file -- which, in GNU/Linux, may be a `directory file', that is to
15785 say, a file with the special attributes of a directory. The second
15786 element of the list is @code{t} for a directory, a string
15787 for symbolic link (the string is the name linked to), or @code{nil}.
15788
15789 For example, the first @samp{.el} file in the @file{lisp/} directory
15790 is @file{abbrev.el}. Its name is
15791 @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/abbrev.el} and it is not a
15792 directory or a symbolic link.
15793
15794 @need 1000
15795 This is how @code{directory-files-and-attributes} lists that file and
15796 its attributes:
15797
15798 @smallexample
15799 @group
15800 ("abbrev.el"
15801 nil
15802 1
15803 1000
15804 100
15805 @end group
15806 @group
15807 (17733 259)
15808 (17491 28834)
15809 (17596 62124)
15810 13157
15811 "-rw-rw-r--"
15812 @end group
15813 @group
15814 nil
15815 2971624
15816 773)
15817 @end group
15818 @end smallexample
15819
15820 @need 1200
15821 On the other hand, @file{mail/} is a directory within the @file{lisp/}
15822 directory. The beginning of its listing looks like this:
15823
15824 @smallexample
15825 @group
15826 ("mail"
15827 t
15828 @dots{}
15829 )
15830 @end group
15831 @end smallexample
15832
15833 (To learn about the different attributes, look at the documentation of
15834 @code{file-attributes}. Bear in mind that the @code{file-attributes}
15835 function does not list the filename, so its first element is
15836 @code{directory-files-and-attributes}'s second element.)
15837
15838 We will want our new function, @code{files-in-below-directory}, to
15839 list the @samp{.el} files in the directory it is told to check, and in
15840 any directories below that directory.
15841
15842 This gives us a hint on how to construct
15843 @code{files-in-below-directory}: within a directory, the function
15844 should add @samp{.el} filenames to a list; and if, within a directory,
15845 the function comes upon a sub-directory, it should go into that
15846 sub-directory and repeat its actions.
15847
15848 However, we should note that every directory contains a name that
15849 refers to itself, called @file{.}, (``dot'') and a name that refers to
15850 its parent directory, called @file{..} (``double dot''). (In
15851 @file{/}, the root directory, @file{..} refers to itself, since
15852 @file{/} has no parent.) Clearly, we do not want our
15853 @code{files-in-below-directory} function to enter those directories,
15854 since they always lead us, directly or indirectly, to the current
15855 directory.
15856
15857 Consequently, our @code{files-in-below-directory} function must do
15858 several tasks:
15859
15860 @itemize @bullet
15861 @item
15862 Check to see whether it is looking at a filename that ends in
15863 @samp{.el}; and if so, add its name to a list.
15864
15865 @item
15866 Check to see whether it is looking at a filename that is the name of a
15867 directory; and if so,
15868
15869 @itemize @minus
15870 @item
15871 Check to see whether it is looking at @file{.} or @file{..}; and if
15872 so skip it.
15873
15874 @item
15875 Or else, go into that directory and repeat the process.
15876 @end itemize
15877 @end itemize
15878
15879 Let's write a function definition to do these tasks. We will use a
15880 @code{while} loop to move from one filename to another within a
15881 directory, checking what needs to be done; and we will use a recursive
15882 call to repeat the actions on each sub-directory. The recursive
15883 pattern is `accumulate'
15884 (@pxref{Accumulate, , Recursive Pattern: @emph{accumulate}}),
15885 using @code{append} as the combiner.
15886
15887 @ignore
15888 (directory-files "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/" t "\\.el$")
15889 (shell-command "find /usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/ -name '*.el'")
15890
15891 (directory-files "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/" t "\\.el$")
15892 (shell-command "find /usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/ -name '*.el'")
15893 @end ignore
15894
15895 @c /usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/
15896
15897 @need 800
15898 Here is the function:
15899
15900 @smallexample
15901 @group
15902 (defun files-in-below-directory (directory)
15903 "List the .el files in DIRECTORY and in its sub-directories."
15904 ;; Although the function will be used non-interactively,
15905 ;; it will be easier to test if we make it interactive.
15906 ;; The directory will have a name such as
15907 ;; "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/"
15908 (interactive "DDirectory name: ")
15909 @end group
15910 @group
15911 (let (el-files-list
15912 (current-directory-list
15913 (directory-files-and-attributes directory t)))
15914 ;; while we are in the current directory
15915 (while current-directory-list
15916 @end group
15917 @group
15918 (cond
15919 ;; check to see whether filename ends in `.el'
15920 ;; and if so, append its name to a list.
15921 ((equal ".el" (substring (car (car current-directory-list)) -3))
15922 (setq el-files-list
15923 (cons (car (car current-directory-list)) el-files-list)))
15924 @end group
15925 @group
15926 ;; check whether filename is that of a directory
15927 ((eq t (car (cdr (car current-directory-list))))
15928 ;; decide whether to skip or recurse
15929 (if
15930 (equal "."
15931 (substring (car (car current-directory-list)) -1))
15932 ;; then do nothing since filename is that of
15933 ;; current directory or parent, "." or ".."
15934 ()
15935 @end group
15936 @group
15937 ;; else descend into the directory and repeat the process
15938 (setq el-files-list
15939 (append
15940 (files-in-below-directory
15941 (car (car current-directory-list)))
15942 el-files-list)))))
15943 ;; move to the next filename in the list; this also
15944 ;; shortens the list so the while loop eventually comes to an end
15945 (setq current-directory-list (cdr current-directory-list)))
15946 ;; return the filenames
15947 el-files-list))
15948 @end group
15949 @end smallexample
15950
15951 @c (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/")
15952 @c (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/")
15953
15954 The @code{files-in-below-directory} @code{directory-files} function
15955 takes one argument, the name of a directory.
15956
15957 @need 1250
15958 Thus, on my system,
15959
15960 @c (length (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/"))
15961
15962 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15963 @smallexample
15964 @group
15965 (length
15966 (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/"))
15967 @end group
15968 @end smallexample
15969
15970 @noindent
15971 tells me that in and below my Lisp sources directory are 1031
15972 @samp{.el} files.
15973
15974 @code{files-in-below-directory} returns a list in reverse alphabetical
15975 order. An expression to sort the list in alphabetical order looks
15976 like this:
15977
15978 @smallexample
15979 @group
15980 (sort
15981 (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/")
15982 'string-lessp)
15983 @end group
15984 @end smallexample
15985
15986 @ignore
15987 (defun test ()
15988 "Test how long it takes to find lengths of all sorted elisp defuns."
15989 (insert "\n" (current-time-string) "\n")
15990 (sit-for 0)
15991 (sort
15992 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15993 (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/"))
15994 '<)
15995 (insert (format "%s" (current-time-string))))
15996 @end ignore
15997
15998 @node Counting function definitions, , Files List, Prepare the data
15999 @subsection Counting function definitions
16000
16001 Our immediate goal is to generate a list that tells us how many
16002 function definitions contain fewer than 10 words and symbols, how many
16003 contain between 10 and 19 words and symbols, how many contain between
16004 20 and 29 words and symbols, and so on.
16005
16006 With a sorted list of numbers, this is easy: count how many elements
16007 of the list are smaller than 10, then, after moving past the numbers
16008 just counted, count how many are smaller than 20, then, after moving
16009 past the numbers just counted, count how many are smaller than 30, and
16010 so on. Each of the numbers, 10, 20, 30, 40, and the like, is one
16011 larger than the top of that range. We can call the list of such
16012 numbers the @code{top-of-ranges} list.
16013
16014 @need 1200
16015 If we wished, we could generate this list automatically, but it is
16016 simpler to write a list manually. Here it is:
16017 @vindex top-of-ranges
16018
16019 @smallexample
16020 @group
16021 (defvar top-of-ranges
16022 '(10 20 30 40 50
16023 60 70 80 90 100
16024 110 120 130 140 150
16025 160 170 180 190 200
16026 210 220 230 240 250
16027 260 270 280 290 300)
16028 "List specifying ranges for `defuns-per-range'.")
16029 @end group
16030 @end smallexample
16031
16032 To change the ranges, we edit this list.
16033
16034 Next, we need to write the function that creates the list of the
16035 number of definitions within each range. Clearly, this function must
16036 take the @code{sorted-lengths} and the @code{top-of-ranges} lists
16037 as arguments.
16038
16039 The @code{defuns-per-range} function must do two things again and
16040 again: it must count the number of definitions within a range
16041 specified by the current top-of-range value; and it must shift to the
16042 next higher value in the @code{top-of-ranges} list after counting the
16043 number of definitions in the current range. Since each of these
16044 actions is repetitive, we can use @code{while} loops for the job.
16045 One loop counts the number of definitions in the range defined by the
16046 current top-of-range value, and the other loop selects each of the
16047 top-of-range values in turn.
16048
16049 Several entries of the @code{sorted-lengths} list are counted for each
16050 range; this means that the loop for the @code{sorted-lengths} list
16051 will be inside the loop for the @code{top-of-ranges} list, like a
16052 small gear inside a big gear.
16053
16054 The inner loop counts the number of definitions within the range. It
16055 is a simple counting loop of the type we have seen before.
16056 (@xref{Incrementing Loop, , A loop with an incrementing counter}.)
16057 The true-or-false test of the loop tests whether the value from the
16058 @code{sorted-lengths} list is smaller than the current value of the
16059 top of the range. If it is, the function increments the counter and
16060 tests the next value from the @code{sorted-lengths} list.
16061
16062 @need 1250
16063 The inner loop looks like this:
16064
16065 @smallexample
16066 @group
16067 (while @var{length-element-smaller-than-top-of-range}
16068 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
16069 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
16070 @end group
16071 @end smallexample
16072
16073 The outer loop must start with the lowest value of the
16074 @code{top-of-ranges} list, and then be set to each of the succeeding
16075 higher values in turn. This can be done with a loop like this:
16076
16077 @smallexample
16078 @group
16079 (while top-of-ranges
16080 @var{body-of-loop}@dots{}
16081 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges)))
16082 @end group
16083 @end smallexample
16084
16085 @need 1200
16086 Put together, the two loops look like this:
16087
16088 @smallexample
16089 @group
16090 (while top-of-ranges
16091
16092 ;; @r{Count the number of elements within the current range.}
16093 (while @var{length-element-smaller-than-top-of-range}
16094 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
16095 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
16096
16097 ;; @r{Move to next range.}
16098 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges)))
16099 @end group
16100 @end smallexample
16101
16102 In addition, in each circuit of the outer loop, Emacs should record
16103 the number of definitions within that range (the value of
16104 @code{number-within-range}) in a list. We can use @code{cons} for
16105 this purpose. (@xref{cons, , @code{cons}}.)
16106
16107 The @code{cons} function works fine, except that the list it
16108 constructs will contain the number of definitions for the highest
16109 range at its beginning and the number of definitions for the lowest
16110 range at its end. This is because @code{cons} attaches new elements
16111 of the list to the beginning of the list, and since the two loops are
16112 working their way through the lengths' list from the lower end first,
16113 the @code{defuns-per-range-list} will end up largest number first.
16114 But we will want to print our graph with smallest values first and the
16115 larger later. The solution is to reverse the order of the
16116 @code{defuns-per-range-list}. We can do this using the
16117 @code{nreverse} function, which reverses the order of a list.
16118 @findex nreverse
16119
16120 @need 800
16121 For example,
16122
16123 @smallexample
16124 (nreverse '(1 2 3 4))
16125 @end smallexample
16126
16127 @need 800
16128 @noindent
16129 produces:
16130
16131 @smallexample
16132 (4 3 2 1)
16133 @end smallexample
16134
16135 Note that the @code{nreverse} function is ``destructive''---that is,
16136 it changes the list to which it is applied; this contrasts with the
16137 @code{car} and @code{cdr} functions, which are non-destructive. In
16138 this case, we do not want the original @code{defuns-per-range-list},
16139 so it does not matter that it is destroyed. (The @code{reverse}
16140 function provides a reversed copy of a list, leaving the original list
16141 as is.)
16142 @findex reverse
16143
16144 @need 1250
16145 Put all together, the @code{defuns-per-range} looks like this:
16146
16147 @smallexample
16148 @group
16149 (defun defuns-per-range (sorted-lengths top-of-ranges)
16150 "SORTED-LENGTHS defuns in each TOP-OF-RANGES range."
16151 (let ((top-of-range (car top-of-ranges))
16152 (number-within-range 0)
16153 defuns-per-range-list)
16154 @end group
16155
16156 @group
16157 ;; @r{Outer loop.}
16158 (while top-of-ranges
16159 @end group
16160
16161 @group
16162 ;; @r{Inner loop.}
16163 (while (and
16164 ;; @r{Need number for numeric test.}
16165 (car sorted-lengths)
16166 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range))
16167 @end group
16168
16169 @group
16170 ;; @r{Count number of definitions within current range.}
16171 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
16172 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
16173
16174 ;; @r{Exit inner loop but remain within outer loop.}
16175 @end group
16176
16177 @group
16178 (setq defuns-per-range-list
16179 (cons number-within-range defuns-per-range-list))
16180 (setq number-within-range 0) ; @r{Reset count to zero.}
16181 @end group
16182
16183 @group
16184 ;; @r{Move to next range.}
16185 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges))
16186 ;; @r{Specify next top of range value.}
16187 (setq top-of-range (car top-of-ranges)))
16188 @end group
16189
16190 @group
16191 ;; @r{Exit outer loop and count the number of defuns larger than}
16192 ;; @r{ the largest top-of-range value.}
16193 (setq defuns-per-range-list
16194 (cons
16195 (length sorted-lengths)
16196 defuns-per-range-list))
16197 @end group
16198
16199 @group
16200 ;; @r{Return a list of the number of definitions within each range,}
16201 ;; @r{ smallest to largest.}
16202 (nreverse defuns-per-range-list)))
16203 @end group
16204 @end smallexample
16205
16206 @need 1200
16207 @noindent
16208 The function is straightforward except for one subtle feature. The
16209 true-or-false test of the inner loop looks like this:
16210
16211 @smallexample
16212 @group
16213 (and (car sorted-lengths)
16214 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range))
16215 @end group
16216 @end smallexample
16217
16218 @need 800
16219 @noindent
16220 instead of like this:
16221
16222 @smallexample
16223 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range)
16224 @end smallexample
16225
16226 The purpose of the test is to determine whether the first item in the
16227 @code{sorted-lengths} list is less than the value of the top of the
16228 range.
16229
16230 The simple version of the test works fine unless the
16231 @code{sorted-lengths} list has a @code{nil} value. In that case, the
16232 @code{(car sorted-lengths)} expression function returns
16233 @code{nil}. The @code{<} function cannot compare a number to
16234 @code{nil}, which is an empty list, so Emacs signals an error and
16235 stops the function from attempting to continue to execute.
16236
16237 The @code{sorted-lengths} list always becomes @code{nil} when the
16238 counter reaches the end of the list. This means that any attempt to
16239 use the @code{defuns-per-range} function with the simple version of
16240 the test will fail.
16241
16242 We solve the problem by using the @code{(car sorted-lengths)}
16243 expression in conjunction with the @code{and} expression. The
16244 @code{(car sorted-lengths)} expression returns a non-@code{nil}
16245 value so long as the list has at least one number within it, but
16246 returns @code{nil} if the list is empty. The @code{and} expression
16247 first evaluates the @code{(car sorted-lengths)} expression, and
16248 if it is @code{nil}, returns false @emph{without} evaluating the
16249 @code{<} expression. But if the @code{(car sorted-lengths)}
16250 expression returns a non-@code{nil} value, the @code{and} expression
16251 evaluates the @code{<} expression, and returns that value as the value
16252 of the @code{and} expression.
16253
16254 @c colon in printed section title causes problem in Info cross reference
16255 This way, we avoid an error.
16256 @iftex
16257 @noindent
16258 (For information about @code{and}, see
16259 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}.)
16260 @end iftex
16261 @ifinfo
16262 @noindent
16263 (@xref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}, for
16264 information about @code{and}.)
16265 @end ifinfo
16266
16267 Here is a short test of the @code{defuns-per-range} function. First,
16268 evaluate the expression that binds (a shortened)
16269 @code{top-of-ranges} list to the list of values, then evaluate the
16270 expression for binding the @code{sorted-lengths} list, and then
16271 evaluate the @code{defuns-per-range} function.
16272
16273 @smallexample
16274 @group
16275 ;; @r{(Shorter list than we will use later.)}
16276 (setq top-of-ranges
16277 '(110 120 130 140 150
16278 160 170 180 190 200))
16279
16280 (setq sorted-lengths
16281 '(85 86 110 116 122 129 154 176 179 200 265 300 300))
16282
16283 (defuns-per-range sorted-lengths top-of-ranges)
16284 @end group
16285 @end smallexample
16286
16287 @need 800
16288 @noindent
16289 The list returned looks like this:
16290
16291 @smallexample
16292 (2 2 2 0 0 1 0 2 0 0 4)
16293 @end smallexample
16294
16295 @noindent
16296 Indeed, there are two elements of the @code{sorted-lengths} list
16297 smaller than 110, two elements between 110 and 119, two elements
16298 between 120 and 129, and so on. There are four elements with a value
16299 of 200 or larger.
16300
16301 @c The next step is to turn this numbers' list into a graph.
16302 @node Readying a Graph, Emacs Initialization, Words in a defun, Top
16303 @chapter Readying a Graph
16304 @cindex Readying a graph
16305 @cindex Graph prototype
16306 @cindex Prototype graph
16307 @cindex Body of graph
16308
16309 Our goal is to construct a graph showing the numbers of function
16310 definitions of various lengths in the Emacs lisp sources.
16311
16312 As a practical matter, if you were creating a graph, you would
16313 probably use a program such as @code{gnuplot} to do the job.
16314 (@code{gnuplot} is nicely integrated into GNU Emacs.) In this case,
16315 however, we create one from scratch, and in the process we will
16316 re-acquaint ourselves with some of what we learned before and learn
16317 more.
16318
16319 In this chapter, we will first write a simple graph printing function.
16320 This first definition will be a @dfn{prototype}, a rapidly written
16321 function that enables us to reconnoiter this unknown graph-making
16322 territory. We will discover dragons, or find that they are myth.
16323 After scouting the terrain, we will feel more confident and enhance
16324 the function to label the axes automatically.
16325
16326 @menu
16327 * Columns of a graph::
16328 * graph-body-print:: How to print the body of a graph.
16329 * recursive-graph-body-print::
16330 * Printed Axes::
16331 * Line Graph Exercise::
16332 @end menu
16333
16334 @node Columns of a graph, graph-body-print, Readying a Graph, Readying a Graph
16335 @ifnottex
16336 @unnumberedsec Printing the Columns of a Graph
16337 @end ifnottex
16338
16339 Since Emacs is designed to be flexible and work with all kinds of
16340 terminals, including character-only terminals, the graph will need to
16341 be made from one of the `typewriter' symbols. An asterisk will do; as
16342 we enhance the graph-printing function, we can make the choice of
16343 symbol a user option.
16344
16345 We can call this function @code{graph-body-print}; it will take a
16346 @code{numbers-list} as its only argument. At this stage, we will not
16347 label the graph, but only print its body.
16348
16349 The @code{graph-body-print} function inserts a vertical column of
16350 asterisks for each element in the @code{numbers-list}. The height of
16351 each line is determined by the value of that element of the
16352 @code{numbers-list}.
16353
16354 Inserting columns is a repetitive act; that means that this function can
16355 be written either with a @code{while} loop or recursively.
16356
16357 Our first challenge is to discover how to print a column of asterisks.
16358 Usually, in Emacs, we print characters onto a screen horizontally,
16359 line by line, by typing. We have two routes we can follow: write our
16360 own column-insertion function or discover whether one exists in Emacs.
16361
16362 To see whether there is one in Emacs, we can use the @kbd{M-x apropos}
16363 command. This command is like the @kbd{C-h a} (@code{command-apropos})
16364 command, except that the latter finds only those functions that are
16365 commands. The @kbd{M-x apropos} command lists all symbols that match
16366 a regular expression, including functions that are not interactive.
16367 @findex apropos
16368
16369 What we want to look for is some command that prints or inserts
16370 columns. Very likely, the name of the function will contain either
16371 the word `print' or the word `insert' or the word `column'.
16372 Therefore, we can simply type @kbd{M-x apropos RET
16373 print\|insert\|column RET} and look at the result. On my system, this
16374 command once too takes quite some time, and then produced a list of 79
16375 functions and variables. Now it does not take much time at all and
16376 produces a list of 211 functions and variables. Scanning down the
16377 list, the only function that looks as if it might do the job is
16378 @code{insert-rectangle}.
16379
16380 @need 1200
16381 Indeed, this is the function we want; its documentation says:
16382
16383 @smallexample
16384 @group
16385 insert-rectangle:
16386 Insert text of RECTANGLE with upper left corner at point.
16387 RECTANGLE's first line is inserted at point,
16388 its second line is inserted at a point vertically under point, etc.
16389 RECTANGLE should be a list of strings.
16390 After this command, the mark is at the upper left corner
16391 and point is at the lower right corner.
16392 @end group
16393 @end smallexample
16394
16395 We can run a quick test, to make sure it does what we expect of it.
16396
16397 Here is the result of placing the cursor after the
16398 @code{insert-rectangle} expression and typing @kbd{C-u C-x C-e}
16399 (@code{eval-last-sexp}). The function inserts the strings
16400 @samp{"first"}, @samp{"second"}, and @samp{"third"} at and below
16401 point. Also the function returns @code{nil}.
16402
16403 @smallexample
16404 @group
16405 (insert-rectangle '("first" "second" "third"))first
16406 second
16407 thirdnil
16408 @end group
16409 @end smallexample
16410
16411 @noindent
16412 Of course, we won't be inserting the text of the
16413 @code{insert-rectangle} expression itself into the buffer in which we
16414 are making the graph, but will call the function from our program. We
16415 shall, however, have to make sure that point is in the buffer at the
16416 place where the @code{insert-rectangle} function will insert its
16417 column of strings.
16418
16419 If you are reading this in Info, you can see how this works by
16420 switching to another buffer, such as the @file{*scratch*} buffer,
16421 placing point somewhere in the buffer, typing @kbd{M-:}, typing the
16422 @code{insert-rectangle} expression into the minibuffer at the prompt,
16423 and then typing @key{RET}. This causes Emacs to evaluate the
16424 expression in the minibuffer, but to use as the value of point the
16425 position of point in the @file{*scratch*} buffer. (@kbd{M-:} is the
16426 keybinding for @code{eval-expression}. Also, @code{nil} does not
16427 appear in the @file{*scratch*} buffer since the expression is
16428 evaluated in the minibuffer.)
16429
16430 We find when we do this that point ends up at the end of the last
16431 inserted line---that is to say, this function moves point as a
16432 side-effect. If we were to repeat the command, with point at this
16433 position, the next insertion would be below and to the right of the
16434 previous insertion. We don't want this! If we are going to make a
16435 bar graph, the columns need to be beside each other.
16436
16437 So we discover that each cycle of the column-inserting @code{while}
16438 loop must reposition point to the place we want it, and that place
16439 will be at the top, not the bottom, of the column. Moreover, we
16440 remember that when we print a graph, we do not expect all the columns
16441 to be the same height. This means that the top of each column may be
16442 at a different height from the previous one. We cannot simply
16443 reposition point to the same line each time, but moved over to the
16444 right---or perhaps we can@dots{}
16445
16446 We are planning to make the columns of the bar graph out of asterisks.
16447 The number of asterisks in the column is the number specified by the
16448 current element of the @code{numbers-list}. We need to construct a
16449 list of asterisks of the right length for each call to
16450 @code{insert-rectangle}. If this list consists solely of the requisite
16451 number of asterisks, then we will have position point the right number
16452 of lines above the base for the graph to print correctly. This could
16453 be difficult.
16454
16455 Alternatively, if we can figure out some way to pass
16456 @code{insert-rectangle} a list of the same length each time, then we
16457 can place point on the same line each time, but move it over one
16458 column to the right for each new column. If we do this, however, some
16459 of the entries in the list passed to @code{insert-rectangle} must be
16460 blanks rather than asterisks. For example, if the maximum height of
16461 the graph is 5, but the height of the column is 3, then
16462 @code{insert-rectangle} requires an argument that looks like this:
16463
16464 @smallexample
16465 (" " " " "*" "*" "*")
16466 @end smallexample
16467
16468 This last proposal is not so difficult, so long as we can determine
16469 the column height. There are two ways for us to specify the column
16470 height: we can arbitrarily state what it will be, which would work
16471 fine for graphs of that height; or we can search through the list of
16472 numbers and use the maximum height of the list as the maximum height
16473 of the graph. If the latter operation were difficult, then the former
16474 procedure would be easiest, but there is a function built into Emacs
16475 that determines the maximum of its arguments. We can use that
16476 function. The function is called @code{max} and it returns the
16477 largest of all its arguments, which must be numbers. Thus, for
16478 example,
16479
16480 @smallexample
16481 (max 3 4 6 5 7 3)
16482 @end smallexample
16483
16484 @noindent
16485 returns 7. (A corresponding function called @code{min} returns the
16486 smallest of all its arguments.)
16487 @findex max
16488 @findex min
16489
16490 However, we cannot simply call @code{max} on the @code{numbers-list};
16491 the @code{max} function expects numbers as its argument, not a list of
16492 numbers. Thus, the following expression,
16493
16494 @smallexample
16495 (max '(3 4 6 5 7 3))
16496 @end smallexample
16497
16498 @need 800
16499 @noindent
16500 produces the following error message;
16501
16502 @smallexample
16503 Wrong type of argument: number-or-marker-p, (3 4 6 5 7 3)
16504 @end smallexample
16505
16506 @findex apply
16507 We need a function that passes a list of arguments to a function.
16508 This function is @code{apply}. This function `applies' its first
16509 argument (a function) to its remaining arguments, the last of which
16510 may be a list.
16511
16512 @need 1250
16513 For example,
16514
16515 @smallexample
16516 (apply 'max 3 4 7 3 '(4 8 5))
16517 @end smallexample
16518
16519 @noindent
16520 returns 8.
16521
16522 (Incidentally, I don't know how you would learn of this function
16523 without a book such as this. It is possible to discover other
16524 functions, like @code{search-forward} or @code{insert-rectangle}, by
16525 guessing at a part of their names and then using @code{apropos}. Even
16526 though its base in metaphor is clear---`apply' its first argument to
16527 the rest---I doubt a novice would come up with that particular word
16528 when using @code{apropos} or other aid. Of course, I could be wrong;
16529 after all, the function was first named by someone who had to invent
16530 it.)
16531
16532 The second and subsequent arguments to @code{apply} are optional, so
16533 we can use @code{apply} to call a function and pass the elements of a
16534 list to it, like this, which also returns 8:
16535
16536 @smallexample
16537 (apply 'max '(4 8 5))
16538 @end smallexample
16539
16540 This latter way is how we will use @code{apply}. The
16541 @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function returns a numbers'
16542 list to which we can apply @code{max} (we could also apply @code{max} to
16543 the sorted numbers' list; it does not matter whether the list is
16544 sorted or not.)
16545
16546 @need 800
16547 Hence, the operation for finding the maximum height of the graph is this:
16548
16549 @smallexample
16550 (setq max-graph-height (apply 'max numbers-list))
16551 @end smallexample
16552
16553 Now we can return to the question of how to create a list of strings
16554 for a column of the graph. Told the maximum height of the graph
16555 and the number of asterisks that should appear in the column, the
16556 function should return a list of strings for the
16557 @code{insert-rectangle} command to insert.
16558
16559 Each column is made up of asterisks or blanks. Since the function is
16560 passed the value of the height of the column and the number of
16561 asterisks in the column, the number of blanks can be found by
16562 subtracting the number of asterisks from the height of the column.
16563 Given the number of blanks and the number of asterisks, two
16564 @code{while} loops can be used to construct the list:
16565
16566 @smallexample
16567 @group
16568 ;;; @r{First version.}
16569 (defun column-of-graph (max-graph-height actual-height)
16570 "Return list of strings that is one column of a graph."
16571 (let ((insert-list nil)
16572 (number-of-top-blanks
16573 (- max-graph-height actual-height)))
16574 @end group
16575
16576 @group
16577 ;; @r{Fill in asterisks.}
16578 (while (> actual-height 0)
16579 (setq insert-list (cons "*" insert-list))
16580 (setq actual-height (1- actual-height)))
16581 @end group
16582
16583 @group
16584 ;; @r{Fill in blanks.}
16585 (while (> number-of-top-blanks 0)
16586 (setq insert-list (cons " " insert-list))
16587 (setq number-of-top-blanks
16588 (1- number-of-top-blanks)))
16589 @end group
16590
16591 @group
16592 ;; @r{Return whole list.}
16593 insert-list))
16594 @end group
16595 @end smallexample
16596
16597 If you install this function and then evaluate the following
16598 expression you will see that it returns the list as desired:
16599
16600 @smallexample
16601 (column-of-graph 5 3)
16602 @end smallexample
16603
16604 @need 800
16605 @noindent
16606 returns
16607
16608 @smallexample
16609 (" " " " "*" "*" "*")
16610 @end smallexample
16611
16612 As written, @code{column-of-graph} contains a major flaw: the symbols
16613 used for the blank and for the marked entries in the column are
16614 `hard-coded' as a space and asterisk. This is fine for a prototype,
16615 but you, or another user, may wish to use other symbols. For example,
16616 in testing the graph function, you many want to use a period in place
16617 of the space, to make sure the point is being repositioned properly
16618 each time the @code{insert-rectangle} function is called; or you might
16619 want to substitute a @samp{+} sign or other symbol for the asterisk.
16620 You might even want to make a graph-column that is more than one
16621 display column wide. The program should be more flexible. The way to
16622 do that is to replace the blank and the asterisk with two variables
16623 that we can call @code{graph-blank} and @code{graph-symbol} and define
16624 those variables separately.
16625
16626 Also, the documentation is not well written. These considerations
16627 lead us to the second version of the function:
16628
16629 @smallexample
16630 @group
16631 (defvar graph-symbol "*"
16632 "String used as symbol in graph, usually an asterisk.")
16633 @end group
16634
16635 @group
16636 (defvar graph-blank " "
16637 "String used as blank in graph, usually a blank space.
16638 graph-blank must be the same number of columns wide
16639 as graph-symbol.")
16640 @end group
16641 @end smallexample
16642
16643 @noindent
16644 (For an explanation of @code{defvar}, see
16645 @ref{defvar, , Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}}.)
16646
16647 @smallexample
16648 @group
16649 ;;; @r{Second version.}
16650 (defun column-of-graph (max-graph-height actual-height)
16651 "Return MAX-GRAPH-HEIGHT strings; ACTUAL-HEIGHT are graph-symbols.
16652
16653 @end group
16654 @group
16655 The graph-symbols are contiguous entries at the end
16656 of the list.
16657 The list will be inserted as one column of a graph.
16658 The strings are either graph-blank or graph-symbol."
16659 @end group
16660
16661 @group
16662 (let ((insert-list nil)
16663 (number-of-top-blanks
16664 (- max-graph-height actual-height)))
16665 @end group
16666
16667 @group
16668 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-symbols}.}
16669 (while (> actual-height 0)
16670 (setq insert-list (cons graph-symbol insert-list))
16671 (setq actual-height (1- actual-height)))
16672 @end group
16673
16674 @group
16675 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-blanks}.}
16676 (while (> number-of-top-blanks 0)
16677 (setq insert-list (cons graph-blank insert-list))
16678 (setq number-of-top-blanks
16679 (1- number-of-top-blanks)))
16680
16681 ;; @r{Return whole list.}
16682 insert-list))
16683 @end group
16684 @end smallexample
16685
16686 If we wished, we could rewrite @code{column-of-graph} a third time to
16687 provide optionally for a line graph as well as for a bar graph. This
16688 would not be hard to do. One way to think of a line graph is that it
16689 is no more than a bar graph in which the part of each bar that is
16690 below the top is blank. To construct a column for a line graph, the
16691 function first constructs a list of blanks that is one shorter than
16692 the value, then it uses @code{cons} to attach a graph symbol to the
16693 list; then it uses @code{cons} again to attach the `top blanks' to
16694 the list.
16695
16696 It is easy to see how to write such a function, but since we don't
16697 need it, we will not do it. But the job could be done, and if it were
16698 done, it would be done with @code{column-of-graph}. Even more
16699 important, it is worth noting that few changes would have to be made
16700 anywhere else. The enhancement, if we ever wish to make it, is
16701 simple.
16702
16703 Now, finally, we come to our first actual graph printing function.
16704 This prints the body of a graph, not the labels for the vertical and
16705 horizontal axes, so we can call this @code{graph-body-print}.
16706
16707 @node graph-body-print, recursive-graph-body-print, Columns of a graph, Readying a Graph
16708 @section The @code{graph-body-print} Function
16709 @findex graph-body-print
16710
16711 After our preparation in the preceding section, the
16712 @code{graph-body-print} function is straightforward. The function
16713 will print column after column of asterisks and blanks, using the
16714 elements of a numbers' list to specify the number of asterisks in each
16715 column. This is a repetitive act, which means we can use a
16716 decrementing @code{while} loop or recursive function for the job. In
16717 this section, we will write the definition using a @code{while} loop.
16718
16719 The @code{column-of-graph} function requires the height of the graph
16720 as an argument, so we should determine and record that as a local variable.
16721
16722 This leads us to the following template for the @code{while} loop
16723 version of this function:
16724
16725 @smallexample
16726 @group
16727 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list)
16728 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
16729 (let ((height @dots{}
16730 @dots{}))
16731 @end group
16732
16733 @group
16734 (while numbers-list
16735 @var{insert-columns-and-reposition-point}
16736 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))))
16737 @end group
16738 @end smallexample
16739
16740 @noindent
16741 We need to fill in the slots of the template.
16742
16743 Clearly, we can use the @code{(apply 'max numbers-list)} expression to
16744 determine the height of the graph.
16745
16746 The @code{while} loop will cycle through the @code{numbers-list} one
16747 element at a time. As it is shortened by the @code{(setq numbers-list
16748 (cdr numbers-list))} expression, the @sc{car} of each instance of the
16749 list is the value of the argument for @code{column-of-graph}.
16750
16751 At each cycle of the @code{while} loop, the @code{insert-rectangle}
16752 function inserts the list returned by @code{column-of-graph}. Since
16753 the @code{insert-rectangle} function moves point to the lower right of
16754 the inserted rectangle, we need to save the location of point at the
16755 time the rectangle is inserted, move back to that position after the
16756 rectangle is inserted, and then move horizontally to the next place
16757 from which @code{insert-rectangle} is called.
16758
16759 If the inserted columns are one character wide, as they will be if
16760 single blanks and asterisks are used, the repositioning command is
16761 simply @code{(forward-char 1)}; however, the width of a column may be
16762 greater than one. This means that the repositioning command should be
16763 written @code{(forward-char symbol-width)}. The @code{symbol-width}
16764 itself is the length of a @code{graph-blank} and can be found using
16765 the expression @code{(length graph-blank)}. The best place to bind
16766 the @code{symbol-width} variable to the value of the width of graph
16767 column is in the varlist of the @code{let} expression.
16768
16769 @need 1250
16770 These considerations lead to the following function definition:
16771
16772 @smallexample
16773 @group
16774 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list)
16775 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
16776 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values."
16777
16778 (let ((height (apply 'max numbers-list))
16779 (symbol-width (length graph-blank))
16780 from-position)
16781 @end group
16782
16783 @group
16784 (while numbers-list
16785 (setq from-position (point))
16786 (insert-rectangle
16787 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
16788 (goto-char from-position)
16789 (forward-char symbol-width)
16790 @end group
16791 @group
16792 ;; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
16793 (sit-for 0)
16794 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))
16795 @end group
16796 @group
16797 ;; @r{Place point for X axis labels.}
16798 (forward-line height)
16799 (insert "\n")
16800 ))
16801 @end group
16802 @end smallexample
16803
16804 @noindent
16805 The one unexpected expression in this function is the
16806 @w{@code{(sit-for 0)}} expression in the @code{while} loop. This
16807 expression makes the graph printing operation more interesting to
16808 watch than it would be otherwise. The expression causes Emacs to
16809 `sit' or do nothing for a zero length of time and then redraw the
16810 screen. Placed here, it causes Emacs to redraw the screen column by
16811 column. Without it, Emacs would not redraw the screen until the
16812 function exits.
16813
16814 We can test @code{graph-body-print} with a short list of numbers.
16815
16816 @enumerate
16817 @item
16818 Install @code{graph-symbol}, @code{graph-blank},
16819 @code{column-of-graph}, which are in
16820 @iftex
16821 @ref{Readying a Graph, , Readying a Graph},
16822 @end iftex
16823 @ifinfo
16824 @ref{Columns of a graph},
16825 @end ifinfo
16826 and @code{graph-body-print}.
16827
16828 @need 800
16829 @item
16830 Copy the following expression:
16831
16832 @smallexample
16833 (graph-body-print '(1 2 3 4 6 4 3 5 7 6 5 2 3))
16834 @end smallexample
16835
16836 @item
16837 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
16838 want the graph to start.
16839
16840 @item
16841 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
16842
16843 @item
16844 Yank the @code{graph-body-print} expression into the minibuffer
16845 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
16846
16847 @item
16848 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the @code{graph-body-print} expression.
16849 @end enumerate
16850
16851 @need 800
16852 Emacs will print a graph like this:
16853
16854 @smallexample
16855 @group
16856 *
16857 * **
16858 * ****
16859 *** ****
16860 ********* *
16861 ************
16862 *************
16863 @end group
16864 @end smallexample
16865
16866 @node recursive-graph-body-print, Printed Axes, graph-body-print, Readying a Graph
16867 @section The @code{recursive-graph-body-print} Function
16868 @findex recursive-graph-body-print
16869
16870 The @code{graph-body-print} function may also be written recursively.
16871 The recursive solution is divided into two parts: an outside `wrapper'
16872 that uses a @code{let} expression to determine the values of several
16873 variables that need only be found once, such as the maximum height of
16874 the graph, and an inside function that is called recursively to print
16875 the graph.
16876
16877 @need 1250
16878 The `wrapper' is uncomplicated:
16879
16880 @smallexample
16881 @group
16882 (defun recursive-graph-body-print (numbers-list)
16883 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
16884 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values."
16885 (let ((height (apply 'max numbers-list))
16886 (symbol-width (length graph-blank))
16887 from-position)
16888 (recursive-graph-body-print-internal
16889 numbers-list
16890 height
16891 symbol-width)))
16892 @end group
16893 @end smallexample
16894
16895 The recursive function is a little more difficult. It has four parts:
16896 the `do-again-test', the printing code, the recursive call, and the
16897 `next-step-expression'. The `do-again-test' is a @code{when}
16898 expression that determines whether the @code{numbers-list} contains
16899 any remaining elements; if it does, the function prints one column of
16900 the graph using the printing code and calls itself again. The
16901 function calls itself again according to the value produced by the
16902 `next-step-expression' which causes the call to act on a shorter
16903 version of the @code{numbers-list}.
16904
16905 @smallexample
16906 @group
16907 (defun recursive-graph-body-print-internal
16908 (numbers-list height symbol-width)
16909 "Print a bar graph.
16910 Used within recursive-graph-body-print function."
16911 @end group
16912
16913 @group
16914 (when numbers-list
16915 (setq from-position (point))
16916 (insert-rectangle
16917 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
16918 @end group
16919 @group
16920 (goto-char from-position)
16921 (forward-char symbol-width)
16922 (sit-for 0) ; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
16923 (recursive-graph-body-print-internal
16924 (cdr numbers-list) height symbol-width)))
16925 @end group
16926 @end smallexample
16927
16928 @need 1250
16929 After installation, this expression can be tested; here is a sample:
16930
16931 @smallexample
16932 (recursive-graph-body-print '(3 2 5 6 7 5 3 4 6 4 3 2 1))
16933 @end smallexample
16934
16935 @need 800
16936 Here is what @code{recursive-graph-body-print} produces:
16937
16938 @smallexample
16939 @group
16940 *
16941 ** *
16942 **** *
16943 **** ***
16944 * *********
16945 ************
16946 *************
16947 @end group
16948 @end smallexample
16949
16950 Either of these two functions, @code{graph-body-print} or
16951 @code{recursive-graph-body-print}, create the body of a graph.
16952
16953 @node Printed Axes, Line Graph Exercise, recursive-graph-body-print, Readying a Graph
16954 @section Need for Printed Axes
16955
16956 A graph needs printed axes, so you can orient yourself. For a do-once
16957 project, it may be reasonable to draw the axes by hand using Emacs'
16958 Picture mode; but a graph drawing function may be used more than once.
16959
16960 For this reason, I have written enhancements to the basic
16961 @code{print-graph-body} function that automatically print labels for
16962 the horizontal and vertical axes. Since the label printing functions
16963 do not contain much new material, I have placed their description in
16964 an appendix. @xref{Full Graph, , A Graph with Labeled Axes}.
16965
16966 @node Line Graph Exercise, , Printed Axes, Readying a Graph
16967 @section Exercise
16968
16969 Write a line graph version of the graph printing functions.
16970
16971 @node Emacs Initialization, Debugging, Readying a Graph, Top
16972 @chapter Your @file{.emacs} File
16973 @cindex @file{.emacs} file
16974 @cindex Customizing your @file{.emacs} file
16975 @cindex Initialization file
16976
16977 ``You don't have to like Emacs to like it'' -- this seemingly
16978 paradoxical statement is the secret of GNU Emacs. The plain, `out of
16979 the box' Emacs is a generic tool. Most people who use it, customize
16980 it to suit themselves.
16981
16982 GNU Emacs is mostly written in Emacs Lisp; this means that by writing
16983 expressions in Emacs Lisp you can change or extend Emacs.
16984
16985 @menu
16986 * Default Configuration::
16987 * Site-wide Init:: You can write site-wide init files.
16988 * defcustom:: Emacs will write code for you.
16989 * Beginning a .emacs File:: How to write a @code{.emacs file}.
16990 * Text and Auto-fill:: Automatically wrap lines.
16991 * Mail Aliases:: Use abbreviations for email addresses.
16992 * Indent Tabs Mode:: Don't use tabs with @TeX{}
16993 * Keybindings:: Create some personal keybindings.
16994 * Keymaps:: More about key binding.
16995 * Loading Files:: Load (i.e., evaluate) files automatically.
16996 * Autoload:: Make functions available.
16997 * Simple Extension:: Define a function; bind it to a key.
16998 * X11 Colors:: Colors in X.
16999 * Miscellaneous::
17000 * Mode Line:: How to customize your mode line.
17001 @end menu
17002
17003 @node Default Configuration, Site-wide Init, Emacs Initialization, Emacs Initialization
17004 @ifnottex
17005 @unnumberedsec Emacs' Default Configuration
17006 @end ifnottex
17007
17008 There are those who appreciate Emacs' default configuration. After
17009 all, Emacs starts you in C mode when you edit a C file, starts you in
17010 Fortran mode when you edit a Fortran file, and starts you in
17011 Fundamental mode when you edit an unadorned file. This all makes
17012 sense, if you do not know who is going to use Emacs. Who knows what a
17013 person hopes to do with an unadorned file? Fundamental mode is the
17014 right default for such a file, just as C mode is the right default for
17015 editing C code. (Enough programming languages have syntaxes
17016 that enable them to share or nearly share features, so C mode is
17017 now provided by CC mode, the `C Collection'.)
17018
17019 But when you do know who is going to use Emacs---you,
17020 yourself---then it makes sense to customize Emacs.
17021
17022 For example, I seldom want Fundamental mode when I edit an
17023 otherwise undistinguished file; I want Text mode. This is why I
17024 customize Emacs: so it suits me.
17025
17026 You can customize and extend Emacs by writing or adapting a
17027 @file{~/.emacs} file. This is your personal initialization file; its
17028 contents, written in Emacs Lisp, tell Emacs what to do.@footnote{You
17029 may also add @file{.el} to @file{~/.emacs} and call it a
17030 @file{~/.emacs.el} file. In the past, you were forbidden to type the
17031 extra keystrokes that the name @file{~/.emacs.el} requires, but now
17032 you may. The new format is consistent with the Emacs Lisp file
17033 naming conventions; the old format saves typing.}
17034
17035 A @file{~/.emacs} file contains Emacs Lisp code. You can write this
17036 code yourself; or you can use Emacs' @code{customize} feature to write
17037 the code for you. You can combine your own expressions and
17038 auto-written Customize expressions in your @file{.emacs} file.
17039
17040 (I myself prefer to write my own expressions, except for those,
17041 particularly fonts, that I find easier to manipulate using the
17042 @code{customize} command. I combine the two methods.)
17043
17044 Most of this chapter is about writing expressions yourself. It
17045 describes a simple @file{.emacs} file; for more information, see
17046 @ref{Init File, , The Init File, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, and
17047 @ref{Init File, , The Init File, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
17048 Manual}.
17049
17050 @node Site-wide Init, defcustom, Default Configuration, Emacs Initialization
17051 @section Site-wide Initialization Files
17052
17053 @cindex @file{default.el} init file
17054 @cindex @file{site-init.el} init file
17055 @cindex @file{site-load.el} init file
17056 In addition to your personal initialization file, Emacs automatically
17057 loads various site-wide initialization files, if they exist. These
17058 have the same form as your @file{.emacs} file, but are loaded by
17059 everyone.
17060
17061 Two site-wide initialization files, @file{site-load.el} and
17062 @file{site-init.el}, are loaded into Emacs and then `dumped' if a
17063 `dumped' version of Emacs is created, as is most common. (Dumped
17064 copies of Emacs load more quickly. However, once a file is loaded and
17065 dumped, a change to it does not lead to a change in Emacs unless you
17066 load it yourself or re-dump Emacs. @xref{Building Emacs, , Building
17067 Emacs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, and the
17068 @file{INSTALL} file.)
17069
17070 Three other site-wide initialization files are loaded automatically
17071 each time you start Emacs, if they exist. These are
17072 @file{site-start.el}, which is loaded @emph{before} your @file{.emacs}
17073 file, and @file{default.el}, and the terminal type file, which are both
17074 loaded @emph{after} your @file{.emacs} file.
17075
17076 Settings and definitions in your @file{.emacs} file will overwrite
17077 conflicting settings and definitions in a @file{site-start.el} file,
17078 if it exists; but the settings and definitions in a @file{default.el}
17079 or terminal type file will overwrite those in your @file{.emacs} file.
17080 (You can prevent interference from a terminal type file by setting
17081 @code{term-file-prefix} to @code{nil}. @xref{Simple Extension, , A
17082 Simple Extension}.)
17083
17084 @c Rewritten to avoid overfull hbox.
17085 The @file{INSTALL} file that comes in the distribution contains
17086 descriptions of the @file{site-init.el} and @file{site-load.el} files.
17087
17088 The @file{loadup.el}, @file{startup.el}, and @file{loaddefs.el} files
17089 control loading. These files are in the @file{lisp} directory of the
17090 Emacs distribution and are worth perusing.
17091
17092 The @file{loaddefs.el} file contains a good many suggestions as to
17093 what to put into your own @file{.emacs} file, or into a site-wide
17094 initialization file.
17095
17096 @node defcustom, Beginning a .emacs File, Site-wide Init, Emacs Initialization
17097 @section Specifying Variables using @code{defcustom}
17098 @findex defcustom
17099
17100 You can specify variables using @code{defcustom} so that you and
17101 others can then use Emacs' @code{customize} feature to set their
17102 values. (You cannot use @code{customize} to write function
17103 definitions; but you can write @code{defuns} in your @file{.emacs}
17104 file. Indeed, you can write any Lisp expression in your @file{.emacs}
17105 file.)
17106
17107 The @code{customize} feature depends on the @code{defcustom} special
17108 form. Although you can use @code{defvar} or @code{setq} for variables
17109 that users set, the @code{defcustom} special form is designed for the
17110 job.
17111
17112 You can use your knowledge of @code{defvar} for writing the
17113 first three arguments for @code{defcustom}. The first argument to
17114 @code{defcustom} is the name of the variable. The second argument is
17115 the variable's initial value, if any; and this value is set only if
17116 the value has not already been set. The third argument is the
17117 documentation.
17118
17119 The fourth and subsequent arguments to @code{defcustom} specify types
17120 and options; these are not featured in @code{defvar}. (These
17121 arguments are optional.)
17122
17123 Each of these arguments consists of a keyword followed by a value.
17124 Each keyword starts with the colon character @samp{:}.
17125
17126 @need 1250
17127 For example, the customizable user option variable
17128 @code{text-mode-hook} looks like this:
17129
17130 @smallexample
17131 @group
17132 (defcustom text-mode-hook nil
17133 "Normal hook run when entering Text mode and many related modes."
17134 :type 'hook
17135 :options '(turn-on-auto-fill flyspell-mode)
17136 :group 'data)
17137 @end group
17138 @end smallexample
17139
17140 @noindent
17141 The name of the variable is @code{text-mode-hook}; it has no default
17142 value; and its documentation string tells you what it does.
17143
17144 The @code{:type} keyword tells Emacs the kind of data to which
17145 @code{text-mode-hook} should be set and how to display the value in a
17146 Customization buffer.
17147
17148 The @code{:options} keyword specifies a suggested list of values for
17149 the variable. Usually, @code{:options} applies to a hook.
17150 The list is only a suggestion; it is not exclusive; a person who sets
17151 the variable may set it to other values; the list shown following the
17152 @code{:options} keyword is intended to offer convenient choices to a
17153 user.
17154
17155 Finally, the @code{:group} keyword tells the Emacs Customization
17156 command in which group the variable is located. This tells where to
17157 find it.
17158
17159 The @code{defcustom} function recognizes more than a dozen keywords.
17160 For more information, see @ref{Customization, , Writing Customization
17161 Definitions, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
17162
17163 Consider @code{text-mode-hook} as an example.
17164
17165 There are two ways to customize this variable. You can use the
17166 customization command or write the appropriate expressions yourself.
17167
17168 @need 800
17169 Using the customization command, you can type:
17170
17171 @smallexample
17172 M-x customize
17173 @end smallexample
17174
17175 @noindent
17176 and find that the group for editing files of data is called `data'.
17177 Enter that group. Text Mode Hook is the first member. You can click
17178 on its various options, such as @code{turn-on-auto-fill}, to set the
17179 values. After you click on the button to
17180
17181 @smallexample
17182 Save for Future Sessions
17183 @end smallexample
17184
17185 @noindent
17186 Emacs will write an expression into your @file{.emacs} file.
17187 It will look like this:
17188
17189 @smallexample
17190 @group
17191 (custom-set-variables
17192 ;; custom-set-variables was added by Custom.
17193 ;; If you edit it by hand, you could mess it up, so be careful.
17194 ;; Your init file should contain only one such instance.
17195 ;; If there is more than one, they won't work right.
17196 '(text-mode-hook (quote (turn-on-auto-fill text-mode-hook-identify))))
17197 @end group
17198 @end smallexample
17199
17200 @noindent
17201 (The @code{text-mode-hook-identify} function tells
17202 @code{toggle-text-mode-auto-fill} which buffers are in Text mode.
17203 It comes on automatically.)
17204
17205 The @code{custom-set-variables} function works somewhat differently
17206 than a @code{setq}. While I have never learned the differences, I
17207 modify the @code{custom-set-variables} expressions in my @file{.emacs}
17208 file by hand: I make the changes in what appears to me to be a
17209 reasonable manner and have not had any problems. Others prefer to use
17210 the Customization command and let Emacs do the work for them.
17211
17212 Another @code{custom-set-@dots{}} function is @code{custom-set-faces}.
17213 This function sets the various font faces. Over time, I have set a
17214 considerable number of faces. Some of the time, I re-set them using
17215 @code{customize}; other times, I simply edit the
17216 @code{custom-set-faces} expression in my @file{.emacs} file itself.
17217
17218 The second way to customize your @code{text-mode-hook} is to set it
17219 yourself in your @file{.emacs} file using code that has nothing to do
17220 with the @code{custom-set-@dots{}} functions.
17221
17222 @need 800
17223 When you do this, and later use @code{customize}, you will see a
17224 message that says
17225
17226 @smallexample
17227 CHANGED outside Customize; operating on it here may be unreliable.
17228 @end smallexample
17229
17230 @need 800
17231 This message is only a warning. If you click on the button to
17232
17233 @smallexample
17234 Save for Future Sessions
17235 @end smallexample
17236
17237 @noindent
17238 Emacs will write a @code{custom-set-@dots{}} expression near the end
17239 of your @file{.emacs} file that will be evaluated after your
17240 hand-written expression. It will, therefore, overrule your
17241 hand-written expression. No harm will be done. When you do this,
17242 however, be careful to remember which expression is active; if you
17243 forget, you may confuse yourself.
17244
17245 So long as you remember where the values are set, you will have no
17246 trouble. In any event, the values are always set in your
17247 initialization file, which is usually called @file{.emacs}.
17248
17249 I myself use @code{customize} for hardly anything. Mostly, I write
17250 expressions myself.
17251
17252 @findex defsubst
17253 @findex defconst
17254 Incidentally, to be more complete concerning defines: @code{defsubst}
17255 defines an inline function. The syntax is just like that of
17256 @code{defun}. @code{defconst} defines a symbol as a constant. The
17257 intent is that neither programs nor users should ever change a value
17258 set by @code{defconst}. (You can change it; the value set is a
17259 variable; but please do not.)
17260
17261 @node Beginning a .emacs File, Text and Auto-fill, defcustom, Emacs Initialization
17262 @section Beginning a @file{.emacs} File
17263 @cindex @file{.emacs} file, beginning of
17264
17265 When you start Emacs, it loads your @file{.emacs} file unless you tell
17266 it not to by specifying @samp{-q} on the command line. (The
17267 @code{emacs -q} command gives you a plain, out-of-the-box Emacs.)
17268
17269 A @file{.emacs} file contains Lisp expressions. Often, these are no
17270 more than expressions to set values; sometimes they are function
17271 definitions.
17272
17273 @xref{Init File, , The Init File @file{~/.emacs}, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17274 Manual}, for a short description of initialization files.
17275
17276 This chapter goes over some of the same ground, but is a walk among
17277 extracts from a complete, long-used @file{.emacs} file---my own.
17278
17279 The first part of the file consists of comments: reminders to myself.
17280 By now, of course, I remember these things, but when I started, I did
17281 not.
17282
17283 @need 1200
17284 @smallexample
17285 @group
17286 ;;;; Bob's .emacs file
17287 ; Robert J. Chassell
17288 ; 26 September 1985
17289 @end group
17290 @end smallexample
17291
17292 @noindent
17293 Look at that date! I started this file a long time ago. I have been
17294 adding to it ever since.
17295
17296 @smallexample
17297 @group
17298 ; Each section in this file is introduced by a
17299 ; line beginning with four semicolons; and each
17300 ; entry is introduced by a line beginning with
17301 ; three semicolons.
17302 @end group
17303 @end smallexample
17304
17305 @noindent
17306 This describes the usual conventions for comments in Emacs Lisp.
17307 Everything on a line that follows a semicolon is a comment. Two,
17308 three, and four semicolons are used as subsection and section markers.
17309 (@xref{Comments, ,, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for
17310 more about comments.)
17311
17312 @smallexample
17313 @group
17314 ;;;; The Help Key
17315 ; Control-h is the help key;
17316 ; after typing control-h, type a letter to
17317 ; indicate the subject about which you want help.
17318 ; For an explanation of the help facility,
17319 ; type control-h two times in a row.
17320 @end group
17321 @end smallexample
17322
17323 @noindent
17324 Just remember: type @kbd{C-h} two times for help.
17325
17326 @smallexample
17327 @group
17328 ; To find out about any mode, type control-h m
17329 ; while in that mode. For example, to find out
17330 ; about mail mode, enter mail mode and then type
17331 ; control-h m.
17332 @end group
17333 @end smallexample
17334
17335 @noindent
17336 `Mode help', as I call this, is very helpful. Usually, it tells you
17337 all you need to know.
17338
17339 Of course, you don't need to include comments like these in your
17340 @file{.emacs} file. I included them in mine because I kept forgetting
17341 about Mode help or the conventions for comments---but I was able to
17342 remember to look here to remind myself.
17343
17344 @node Text and Auto-fill, Mail Aliases, Beginning a .emacs File, Emacs Initialization
17345 @section Text and Auto Fill Mode
17346
17347 Now we come to the part that `turns on' Text mode and
17348 Auto Fill mode.
17349
17350 @smallexample
17351 @group
17352 ;;; Text mode and Auto Fill mode
17353 ;; The next two lines put Emacs into Text mode
17354 ;; and Auto Fill mode, and are for writers who
17355 ;; want to start writing prose rather than code.
17356 (setq-default major-mode 'text-mode)
17357 (add-hook 'text-mode-hook 'turn-on-auto-fill)
17358 @end group
17359 @end smallexample
17360
17361 Here is the first part of this @file{.emacs} file that does something
17362 besides remind a forgetful human!
17363
17364 The first of the two lines in parentheses tells Emacs to turn on Text
17365 mode when you find a file, @emph{unless} that file should go into some
17366 other mode, such as C mode.
17367
17368 @cindex Per-buffer, local variables list
17369 @cindex Local variables list, per-buffer,
17370 @cindex Automatic mode selection
17371 @cindex Mode selection, automatic
17372 When Emacs reads a file, it looks at the extension to the file name,
17373 if any. (The extension is the part that comes after a @samp{.}.) If
17374 the file ends with a @samp{.c} or @samp{.h} extension then Emacs turns
17375 on C mode. Also, Emacs looks at first nonblank line of the file; if
17376 the line says @w{@samp{-*- C -*-}}, Emacs turns on C mode. Emacs
17377 possesses a list of extensions and specifications that it uses
17378 automatically. In addition, Emacs looks near the last page for a
17379 per-buffer, ``local variables list'', if any.
17380
17381 @ifinfo
17382 @xref{Choosing Modes, , How Major Modes are Chosen, emacs, The GNU
17383 Emacs Manual}.
17384
17385 @xref{File Variables, , Local Variables in Files, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17386 Manual}.
17387 @end ifinfo
17388 @iftex
17389 See sections ``How Major Modes are Chosen'' and ``Local Variables in
17390 Files'' in @cite{The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17391 @end iftex
17392
17393 Now, back to the @file{.emacs} file.
17394
17395 @need 800
17396 Here is the line again; how does it work?
17397
17398 @cindex Text Mode turned on
17399 @smallexample
17400 (setq major-mode 'text-mode)
17401 @end smallexample
17402
17403 @noindent
17404 This line is a short, but complete Emacs Lisp expression.
17405
17406 We are already familiar with @code{setq}. It sets the following variable,
17407 @code{major-mode}, to the subsequent value, which is @code{text-mode}.
17408 The single quote mark before @code{text-mode} tells Emacs to deal directly
17409 with the @code{text-mode} symbol, not with whatever it might stand for.
17410 @xref{set & setq, , Setting the Value of a Variable},
17411 for a reminder of how @code{setq} works.
17412 The main point is that there is no difference between the procedure you
17413 use to set a value in your @file{.emacs} file and the procedure you use
17414 anywhere else in Emacs.
17415
17416 @need 800
17417 Here is the next line:
17418
17419 @cindex Auto Fill mode turned on
17420 @findex add-hook
17421 @smallexample
17422 (add-hook 'text-mode-hook 'turn-on-auto-fill)
17423 @end smallexample
17424
17425 @noindent
17426 In this line, the @code{add-hook} command adds
17427 @code{turn-on-auto-fill} to the variable.
17428
17429 @code{turn-on-auto-fill} is the name of a program, that, you guessed
17430 it!, turns on Auto Fill mode.
17431
17432 Every time Emacs turns on Text mode, Emacs runs the commands `hooked'
17433 onto Text mode. So every time Emacs turns on Text mode, Emacs also
17434 turns on Auto Fill mode.
17435
17436 In brief, the first line causes Emacs to enter Text mode when you edit a
17437 file, unless the file name extension, a first non-blank line, or local
17438 variables to tell Emacs otherwise.
17439
17440 Text mode among other actions, sets the syntax table to work
17441 conveniently for writers. In Text mode, Emacs considers an apostrophe
17442 as part of a word like a letter; but Emacs does not consider a period
17443 or a space as part of a word. Thus, @kbd{M-f} moves you over
17444 @samp{it's}. On the other hand, in C mode, @kbd{M-f} stops just after
17445 the @samp{t} of @samp{it's}.
17446
17447 The second line causes Emacs to turn on Auto Fill mode when it turns
17448 on Text mode. In Auto Fill mode, Emacs automatically breaks a line
17449 that is too wide and brings the excessively wide part of the line down
17450 to the next line. Emacs breaks lines between words, not within them.
17451
17452 When Auto Fill mode is turned off, lines continue to the right as you
17453 type them. Depending on how you set the value of
17454 @code{truncate-lines}, the words you type either disappear off the
17455 right side of the screen, or else are shown, in a rather ugly and
17456 unreadable manner, as a continuation line on the screen.
17457
17458 @need 1250
17459 In addition, in this part of my @file{.emacs} file, I tell the Emacs
17460 fill commands to insert two spaces after a colon:
17461
17462 @smallexample
17463 (setq colon-double-space t)
17464 @end smallexample
17465
17466 @node Mail Aliases, Indent Tabs Mode, Text and Auto-fill, Emacs Initialization
17467 @section Mail Aliases
17468
17469 Here is a @code{setq} that `turns on' mail aliases, along with more
17470 reminders.
17471
17472 @smallexample
17473 @group
17474 ;;; Mail mode
17475 ; To enter mail mode, type `C-x m'
17476 ; To enter RMAIL (for reading mail),
17477 ; type `M-x rmail'
17478 (setq mail-aliases t)
17479 @end group
17480 @end smallexample
17481
17482 @cindex Mail aliases
17483 @noindent
17484 This @code{setq} command sets the value of the variable
17485 @code{mail-aliases} to @code{t}. Since @code{t} means true, the line
17486 says, in effect, ``Yes, use mail aliases.''
17487
17488 Mail aliases are convenient short names for long email addresses or
17489 for lists of email addresses. The file where you keep your `aliases'
17490 is @file{~/.mailrc}. You write an alias like this:
17491
17492 @smallexample
17493 alias geo george@@foobar.wiz.edu
17494 @end smallexample
17495
17496 @noindent
17497 When you write a message to George, address it to @samp{geo}; the
17498 mailer will automatically expand @samp{geo} to the full address.
17499
17500 @node Indent Tabs Mode, Keybindings, Mail Aliases, Emacs Initialization
17501 @section Indent Tabs Mode
17502 @cindex Tabs, preventing
17503 @findex indent-tabs-mode
17504
17505 By default, Emacs inserts tabs in place of multiple spaces when it
17506 formats a region. (For example, you might indent many lines of text
17507 all at once with the @code{indent-region} command.) Tabs look fine on
17508 a terminal or with ordinary printing, but they produce badly indented
17509 output when you use @TeX{} or Texinfo since @TeX{} ignores tabs.
17510
17511 @need 1250
17512 The following turns off Indent Tabs mode:
17513
17514 @smallexample
17515 @group
17516 ;;; Prevent Extraneous Tabs
17517 (setq-default indent-tabs-mode nil)
17518 @end group
17519 @end smallexample
17520
17521 Note that this line uses @code{setq-default} rather than the
17522 @code{setq} command that we have seen before. The @code{setq-default}
17523 command sets values only in buffers that do not have their own local
17524 values for the variable.
17525
17526 @ifinfo
17527 @xref{Just Spaces, , Tabs vs. Spaces, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17528
17529 @xref{File Variables, , Local Variables in Files, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17530 Manual}.
17531 @end ifinfo
17532 @iftex
17533 See sections ``Tabs vs.@: Spaces'' and ``Local Variables in
17534 Files'' in @cite{The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17535 @end iftex
17536
17537 @need 1700
17538 @node Keybindings, Keymaps, Indent Tabs Mode, Emacs Initialization
17539 @section Some Keybindings
17540
17541 Now for some personal keybindings:
17542
17543 @smallexample
17544 @group
17545 ;;; Compare windows
17546 (global-set-key "\C-cw" 'compare-windows)
17547 @end group
17548 @end smallexample
17549
17550 @findex compare-windows
17551 @code{compare-windows} is a nifty command that compares the text in
17552 your current window with text in the next window. It makes the
17553 comparison by starting at point in each window, moving over text in
17554 each window as far as they match. I use this command all the time.
17555
17556 This also shows how to set a key globally, for all modes.
17557
17558 @cindex Setting a key globally
17559 @cindex Global set key
17560 @cindex Key setting globally
17561 @findex global-set-key
17562 The command is @code{global-set-key}. It is followed by the
17563 keybinding. In a @file{.emacs} file, the keybinding is written as
17564 shown: @code{\C-c} stands for `control-c', which means `press the
17565 control key and the @key{c} key at the same time'. The @code{w} means
17566 `press the @key{w} key'. The keybinding is surrounded by double
17567 quotation marks. In documentation, you would write this as
17568 @w{@kbd{C-c w}}. (If you were binding a @key{META} key, such as
17569 @kbd{M-c}, rather than a @key{CTRL} key, you would write
17570 @w{@code{\M-c}} in your @file{.emacs} file. @xref{Init Rebinding, ,
17571 Rebinding Keys in Your Init File, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, for
17572 details.)
17573
17574 The command invoked by the keys is @code{compare-windows}. Note that
17575 @code{compare-windows} is preceded by a single quote; otherwise, Emacs
17576 would first try to evaluate the symbol to determine its value.
17577
17578 These three things, the double quotation marks, the backslash before
17579 the @samp{C}, and the single quote mark are necessary parts of
17580 keybinding that I tend to forget. Fortunately, I have come to
17581 remember that I should look at my existing @file{.emacs} file, and
17582 adapt what is there.
17583
17584 As for the keybinding itself: @kbd{C-c w}. This combines the prefix
17585 key, @kbd{C-c}, with a single character, in this case, @kbd{w}. This
17586 set of keys, @kbd{C-c} followed by a single character, is strictly
17587 reserved for individuals' own use. (I call these `own' keys, since
17588 these are for my own use.) You should always be able to create such a
17589 keybinding for your own use without stomping on someone else's
17590 keybinding. If you ever write an extension to Emacs, please avoid
17591 taking any of these keys for public use. Create a key like @kbd{C-c
17592 C-w} instead. Otherwise, we will run out of `own' keys.
17593
17594 @need 1250
17595 Here is another keybinding, with a comment:
17596
17597 @smallexample
17598 @group
17599 ;;; Keybinding for `occur'
17600 ; I use occur a lot, so let's bind it to a key:
17601 (global-set-key "\C-co" 'occur)
17602 @end group
17603 @end smallexample
17604
17605 @findex occur
17606 The @code{occur} command shows all the lines in the current buffer
17607 that contain a match for a regular expression. Matching lines are
17608 shown in a buffer called @file{*Occur*}. That buffer serves as a menu
17609 to jump to occurrences.
17610
17611 @findex global-unset-key
17612 @cindex Unbinding key
17613 @cindex Key unbinding
17614 @need 1250
17615 Here is how to unbind a key, so it does not
17616 work:
17617
17618 @smallexample
17619 @group
17620 ;;; Unbind `C-x f'
17621 (global-unset-key "\C-xf")
17622 @end group
17623 @end smallexample
17624
17625 There is a reason for this unbinding: I found I inadvertently typed
17626 @w{@kbd{C-x f}} when I meant to type @kbd{C-x C-f}. Rather than find a
17627 file, as I intended, I accidentally set the width for filled text,
17628 almost always to a width I did not want. Since I hardly ever reset my
17629 default width, I simply unbound the key.
17630
17631 @findex list-buffers, @r{rebound}
17632 @findex buffer-menu, @r{bound to key}
17633 @need 1250
17634 The following rebinds an existing key:
17635
17636 @smallexample
17637 @group
17638 ;;; Rebind `C-x C-b' for `buffer-menu'
17639 (global-set-key "\C-x\C-b" 'buffer-menu)
17640 @end group
17641 @end smallexample
17642
17643 By default, @kbd{C-x C-b} runs the
17644 @code{list-buffers} command. This command lists
17645 your buffers in @emph{another} window. Since I
17646 almost always want to do something in that
17647 window, I prefer the @code{buffer-menu}
17648 command, which not only lists the buffers,
17649 but moves point into that window.
17650
17651 @node Keymaps, Loading Files, Keybindings, Emacs Initialization
17652 @section Keymaps
17653 @cindex Keymaps
17654 @cindex Rebinding keys
17655
17656 Emacs uses @dfn{keymaps} to record which keys call which commands.
17657 When you use @code{global-set-key} to set the keybinding for a single
17658 command in all parts of Emacs, you are specifying the keybinding in
17659 @code{current-global-map}.
17660
17661 Specific modes, such as C mode or Text mode, have their own keymaps;
17662 the mode-specific keymaps override the global map that is shared by
17663 all buffers.
17664
17665 The @code{global-set-key} function binds, or rebinds, the global
17666 keymap. For example, the following binds the key @kbd{C-x C-b} to the
17667 function @code{buffer-menu}:
17668
17669 @smallexample
17670 (global-set-key "\C-x\C-b" 'buffer-menu)
17671 @end smallexample
17672
17673 Mode-specific keymaps are bound using the @code{define-key} function,
17674 which takes a specific keymap as an argument, as well as the key and
17675 the command. For example, my @file{.emacs} file contains the
17676 following expression to bind the @code{texinfo-insert-@@group} command
17677 to @kbd{C-c C-c g}:
17678
17679 @smallexample
17680 @group
17681 (define-key texinfo-mode-map "\C-c\C-cg" 'texinfo-insert-@@group)
17682 @end group
17683 @end smallexample
17684
17685 @noindent
17686 The @code{texinfo-insert-@@group} function itself is a little extension
17687 to Texinfo mode that inserts @samp{@@group} into a Texinfo file. I
17688 use this command all the time and prefer to type the three strokes
17689 @kbd{C-c C-c g} rather than the six strokes @kbd{@@ g r o u p}.
17690 (@samp{@@group} and its matching @samp{@@end group} are commands that
17691 keep all enclosed text together on one page; many multi-line examples
17692 in this book are surrounded by @samp{@@group @dots{} @@end group}.)
17693
17694 @need 1250
17695 Here is the @code{texinfo-insert-@@group} function definition:
17696
17697 @smallexample
17698 @group
17699 (defun texinfo-insert-@@group ()
17700 "Insert the string @@group in a Texinfo buffer."
17701 (interactive)
17702 (beginning-of-line)
17703 (insert "@@group\n"))
17704 @end group
17705 @end smallexample
17706
17707 (Of course, I could have used Abbrev mode to save typing, rather than
17708 write a function to insert a word; but I prefer key strokes consistent
17709 with other Texinfo mode key bindings.)
17710
17711 You will see numerous @code{define-key} expressions in
17712 @file{loaddefs.el} as well as in the various mode libraries, such as
17713 @file{cc-mode.el} and @file{lisp-mode.el}.
17714
17715 @xref{Key Bindings, , Customizing Key Bindings, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17716 Manual}, and @ref{Keymaps, , Keymaps, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
17717 Reference Manual}, for more information about keymaps.
17718
17719 @node Loading Files, Autoload, Keymaps, Emacs Initialization
17720 @section Loading Files
17721 @cindex Loading files
17722 @c findex load
17723
17724 Many people in the GNU Emacs community have written extensions to
17725 Emacs. As time goes by, these extensions are often included in new
17726 releases. For example, the Calendar and Diary packages are now part
17727 of the standard GNU Emacs, as is Calc.
17728
17729 You can use a @code{load} command to evaluate a complete file and
17730 thereby install all the functions and variables in the file into Emacs.
17731 For example:
17732
17733 @c (auto-compression-mode t)
17734
17735 @smallexample
17736 (load "~/emacs/slowsplit")
17737 @end smallexample
17738
17739 This evaluates, i.e.@: loads, the @file{slowsplit.el} file or if it
17740 exists, the faster, byte compiled @file{slowsplit.elc} file from the
17741 @file{emacs} sub-directory of your home directory. The file contains
17742 the function @code{split-window-quietly}, which John Robinson wrote in
17743 1989.
17744
17745 The @code{split-window-quietly} function splits a window with the
17746 minimum of redisplay. I installed it in 1989 because it worked well
17747 with the slow 1200 baud terminals I was then using. Nowadays, I only
17748 occasionally come across such a slow connection, but I continue to use
17749 the function because I like the way it leaves the bottom half of a
17750 buffer in the lower of the new windows and the top half in the upper
17751 window.
17752
17753 @need 1250
17754 To replace the key binding for the default
17755 @code{split-window-vertically}, you must also unset that key and bind
17756 the keys to @code{split-window-quietly}, like this:
17757
17758 @smallexample
17759 @group
17760 (global-unset-key "\C-x2")
17761 (global-set-key "\C-x2" 'split-window-quietly)
17762 @end group
17763 @end smallexample
17764
17765 @vindex load-path
17766 If you load many extensions, as I do, then instead of specifying the
17767 exact location of the extension file, as shown above, you can specify
17768 that directory as part of Emacs' @code{load-path}. Then, when Emacs
17769 loads a file, it will search that directory as well as its default
17770 list of directories. (The default list is specified in @file{paths.h}
17771 when Emacs is built.)
17772
17773 @need 1250
17774 The following command adds your @file{~/emacs} directory to the
17775 existing load path:
17776
17777 @smallexample
17778 @group
17779 ;;; Emacs Load Path
17780 (setq load-path (cons "~/emacs" load-path))
17781 @end group
17782 @end smallexample
17783
17784 Incidentally, @code{load-library} is an interactive interface to the
17785 @code{load} function. The complete function looks like this:
17786
17787 @findex load-library
17788 @smallexample
17789 @group
17790 (defun load-library (library)
17791 "Load the library named LIBRARY.
17792 This is an interface to the function `load'."
17793 (interactive
17794 (list (completing-read "Load library: "
17795 (apply-partially 'locate-file-completion-table
17796 load-path
17797 (get-load-suffixes)))))
17798 (load library))
17799 @end group
17800 @end smallexample
17801
17802 The name of the function, @code{load-library}, comes from the use of
17803 `library' as a conventional synonym for `file'. The source for the
17804 @code{load-library} command is in the @file{files.el} library.
17805
17806 Another interactive command that does a slightly different job is
17807 @code{load-file}. @xref{Lisp Libraries, , Libraries of Lisp Code for
17808 Emacs, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, for information on the
17809 distinction between @code{load-library} and this command.
17810
17811 @node Autoload, Simple Extension, Loading Files, Emacs Initialization
17812 @section Autoloading
17813 @findex autoload
17814
17815 Instead of installing a function by loading the file that contains it,
17816 or by evaluating the function definition, you can make the function
17817 available but not actually install it until it is first called. This
17818 is called @dfn{autoloading}.
17819
17820 When you execute an autoloaded function, Emacs automatically evaluates
17821 the file that contains the definition, and then calls the function.
17822
17823 Emacs starts quicker with autoloaded functions, since their libraries
17824 are not loaded right away; but you need to wait a moment when you
17825 first use such a function, while its containing file is evaluated.
17826
17827 Rarely used functions are frequently autoloaded. The
17828 @file{loaddefs.el} library contains hundreds of autoloaded functions,
17829 from @code{bookmark-set} to @code{wordstar-mode}. Of course, you may
17830 come to use a `rare' function frequently. When you do, you should
17831 load that function's file with a @code{load} expression in your
17832 @file{.emacs} file.
17833
17834 In my @file{.emacs} file, I load 14 libraries that contain functions
17835 that would otherwise be autoloaded. (Actually, it would have been
17836 better to include these files in my `dumped' Emacs, but I forgot.
17837 @xref{Building Emacs, , Building Emacs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
17838 Reference Manual}, and the @file{INSTALL} file for more about
17839 dumping.)
17840
17841 You may also want to include autoloaded expressions in your @file{.emacs}
17842 file. @code{autoload} is a built-in function that takes up to five
17843 arguments, the final three of which are optional. The first argument
17844 is the name of the function to be autoloaded; the second is the name
17845 of the file to be loaded. The third argument is documentation for the
17846 function, and the fourth tells whether the function can be called
17847 interactively. The fifth argument tells what type of
17848 object---@code{autoload} can handle a keymap or macro as well as a
17849 function (the default is a function).
17850
17851 @need 800
17852 Here is a typical example:
17853
17854 @smallexample
17855 @group
17856 (autoload 'html-helper-mode
17857 "html-helper-mode" "Edit HTML documents" t)
17858 @end group
17859 @end smallexample
17860
17861 @noindent
17862 (@code{html-helper-mode} is an older alternative to @code{html-mode},
17863 which is a standard part of the distribution.)
17864
17865 @noindent
17866 This expression autoloads the @code{html-helper-mode} function. It
17867 takes it from the @file{html-helper-mode.el} file (or from the byte
17868 compiled version @file{html-helper-mode.elc}, if that exists.) The
17869 file must be located in a directory specified by @code{load-path}.
17870 The documentation says that this is a mode to help you edit documents
17871 written in the HyperText Markup Language. You can call this mode
17872 interactively by typing @kbd{M-x html-helper-mode}. (You need to
17873 duplicate the function's regular documentation in the autoload
17874 expression because the regular function is not yet loaded, so its
17875 documentation is not available.)
17876
17877 @xref{Autoload, , Autoload, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
17878 Manual}, for more information.
17879
17880 @node Simple Extension, X11 Colors, Autoload, Emacs Initialization
17881 @section A Simple Extension: @code{line-to-top-of-window}
17882 @findex line-to-top-of-window
17883 @cindex Simple extension in @file{.emacs} file
17884
17885 Here is a simple extension to Emacs that moves the line point is on to
17886 the top of the window. I use this all the time, to make text easier
17887 to read.
17888
17889 You can put the following code into a separate file and then load it
17890 from your @file{.emacs} file, or you can include it within your
17891 @file{.emacs} file.
17892
17893 @need 1250
17894 Here is the definition:
17895
17896 @smallexample
17897 @group
17898 ;;; Line to top of window;
17899 ;;; replace three keystroke sequence C-u 0 C-l
17900 (defun line-to-top-of-window ()
17901 "Move the line point is on to top of window."
17902 (interactive)
17903 (recenter 0))
17904 @end group
17905 @end smallexample
17906
17907 @need 1250
17908 Now for the keybinding.
17909
17910 Nowadays, function keys as well as mouse button events and
17911 non-@sc{ascii} characters are written within square brackets, without
17912 quotation marks. (In Emacs version 18 and before, you had to write
17913 different function key bindings for each different make of terminal.)
17914
17915 I bind @code{line-to-top-of-window} to my @key{F6} function key like
17916 this:
17917
17918 @smallexample
17919 (global-set-key [f6] 'line-to-top-of-window)
17920 @end smallexample
17921
17922 For more information, see @ref{Init Rebinding, , Rebinding Keys in
17923 Your Init File, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17924
17925 @cindex Conditional 'twixt two versions of Emacs
17926 @cindex Version of Emacs, choosing
17927 @cindex Emacs version, choosing
17928 If you run two versions of GNU Emacs, such as versions 22 and 23, and
17929 use one @file{.emacs} file, you can select which code to evaluate with
17930 the following conditional:
17931
17932 @smallexample
17933 @group
17934 (cond
17935 ((= 22 emacs-major-version)
17936 ;; evaluate version 22 code
17937 ( @dots{} ))
17938 ((= 23 emacs-major-version)
17939 ;; evaluate version 23 code
17940 ( @dots{} )))
17941 @end group
17942 @end smallexample
17943
17944 For example, in contrast to version 20, more recent versions blink
17945 their cursors by default. I hate such blinking, as well as other
17946 features, so I placed the following in my @file{.emacs}
17947 file@footnote{When I start instances of Emacs that do not load my
17948 @file{.emacs} file or any site file, I also turn off blinking:
17949
17950 @smallexample
17951 emacs -q --no-site-file -eval '(blink-cursor-mode nil)'
17952
17953 @exdent Or nowadays, using an even more sophisticated set of options,
17954
17955 emacs -Q - D
17956 @end smallexample
17957 }:
17958
17959 @smallexample
17960 @group
17961 (when (>= emacs-major-version 21)
17962 (blink-cursor-mode 0)
17963 ;; Insert newline when you press `C-n' (next-line)
17964 ;; at the end of the buffer
17965 (setq next-line-add-newlines t)
17966 @end group
17967 @group
17968 ;; Turn on image viewing
17969 (auto-image-file-mode t)
17970 @end group
17971 @group
17972 ;; Turn on menu bar (this bar has text)
17973 ;; (Use numeric argument to turn on)
17974 (menu-bar-mode 1)
17975 @end group
17976 @group
17977 ;; Turn off tool bar (this bar has icons)
17978 ;; (Use numeric argument to turn on)
17979 (tool-bar-mode nil)
17980 @end group
17981 @group
17982 ;; Turn off tooltip mode for tool bar
17983 ;; (This mode causes icon explanations to pop up)
17984 ;; (Use numeric argument to turn on)
17985 (tooltip-mode nil)
17986 ;; If tooltips turned on, make tips appear promptly
17987 (setq tooltip-delay 0.1) ; default is 0.7 second
17988 )
17989 @end group
17990 @end smallexample
17991
17992 @node X11 Colors, Miscellaneous, Simple Extension, Emacs Initialization
17993 @section X11 Colors
17994
17995 You can specify colors when you use Emacs with the MIT X Windowing
17996 system.
17997
17998 I dislike the default colors and specify my own.
17999
18000 @need 1250
18001 Here are the expressions in my @file{.emacs}
18002 file that set values:
18003
18004 @smallexample
18005 @group
18006 ;; Set cursor color
18007 (set-cursor-color "white")
18008
18009 ;; Set mouse color
18010 (set-mouse-color "white")
18011
18012 ;; Set foreground and background
18013 (set-foreground-color "white")
18014 (set-background-color "darkblue")
18015 @end group
18016
18017 @group
18018 ;;; Set highlighting colors for isearch and drag
18019 (set-face-foreground 'highlight "white")
18020 (set-face-background 'highlight "blue")
18021 @end group
18022
18023 @group
18024 (set-face-foreground 'region "cyan")
18025 (set-face-background 'region "blue")
18026 @end group
18027
18028 @group
18029 (set-face-foreground 'secondary-selection "skyblue")
18030 (set-face-background 'secondary-selection "darkblue")
18031 @end group
18032
18033 @group
18034 ;; Set calendar highlighting colors
18035 (setq calendar-load-hook
18036 '(lambda ()
18037 (set-face-foreground 'diary-face "skyblue")
18038 (set-face-background 'holiday-face "slate blue")
18039 (set-face-foreground 'holiday-face "white")))
18040 @end group
18041 @end smallexample
18042
18043 The various shades of blue soothe my eye and prevent me from seeing
18044 the screen flicker.
18045
18046 Alternatively, I could have set my specifications in various X
18047 initialization files. For example, I could set the foreground,
18048 background, cursor, and pointer (i.e., mouse) colors in my
18049 @file{~/.Xresources} file like this:
18050
18051 @smallexample
18052 @group
18053 Emacs*foreground: white
18054 Emacs*background: darkblue
18055 Emacs*cursorColor: white
18056 Emacs*pointerColor: white
18057 @end group
18058 @end smallexample
18059
18060 In any event, since it is not part of Emacs, I set the root color of
18061 my X window in my @file{~/.xinitrc} file, like this@footnote{I also
18062 run more modern window managers, such as Enlightenment, Gnome, or KDE;
18063 in those cases, I often specify an image rather than a plain color.}:
18064
18065 @smallexample
18066 xsetroot -solid Navy -fg white &
18067 @end smallexample
18068
18069 @need 1700
18070 @node Miscellaneous, Mode Line, X11 Colors, Emacs Initialization
18071 @section Miscellaneous Settings for a @file{.emacs} File
18072
18073 @need 1250
18074 Here are a few miscellaneous settings:
18075 @sp 1
18076
18077 @itemize @minus
18078 @item
18079 Set the shape and color of the mouse cursor:
18080
18081 @smallexample
18082 @group
18083 ; Cursor shapes are defined in
18084 ; `/usr/include/X11/cursorfont.h';
18085 ; for example, the `target' cursor is number 128;
18086 ; the `top_left_arrow' cursor is number 132.
18087 @end group
18088
18089 @group
18090 (let ((mpointer (x-get-resource "*mpointer"
18091 "*emacs*mpointer")))
18092 ;; If you have not set your mouse pointer
18093 ;; then set it, otherwise leave as is:
18094 (if (eq mpointer nil)
18095 (setq mpointer "132")) ; top_left_arrow
18096 @end group
18097 @group
18098 (setq x-pointer-shape (string-to-int mpointer))
18099 (set-mouse-color "white"))
18100 @end group
18101 @end smallexample
18102
18103 @item
18104 Or you can set the values of a variety of features in an alist, like
18105 this:
18106
18107 @smallexample
18108 @group
18109 (setq-default
18110 default-frame-alist
18111 '((cursor-color . "white")
18112 (mouse-color . "white")
18113 (foreground-color . "white")
18114 (background-color . "DodgerBlue4")
18115 ;; (cursor-type . bar)
18116 (cursor-type . box)
18117 @end group
18118 @group
18119 (tool-bar-lines . 0)
18120 (menu-bar-lines . 1)
18121 (width . 80)
18122 (height . 58)
18123 (font .
18124 "-Misc-Fixed-Medium-R-Normal--20-200-75-75-C-100-ISO8859-1")
18125 ))
18126 @end group
18127 @end smallexample
18128
18129 @item
18130 Convert @kbd{@key{CTRL}-h} into @key{DEL} and @key{DEL}
18131 into @kbd{@key{CTRL}-h}.@*
18132 (Some older keyboards needed this, although I have not seen the
18133 problem recently.)
18134
18135 @smallexample
18136 @group
18137 ;; Translate `C-h' to <DEL>.
18138 ; (keyboard-translate ?\C-h ?\C-?)
18139
18140 ;; Translate <DEL> to `C-h'.
18141 (keyboard-translate ?\C-? ?\C-h)
18142 @end group
18143 @end smallexample
18144
18145 @item Turn off a blinking cursor!
18146
18147 @smallexample
18148 @group
18149 (if (fboundp 'blink-cursor-mode)
18150 (blink-cursor-mode -1))
18151 @end group
18152 @end smallexample
18153
18154 @noindent
18155 or start GNU Emacs with the command @code{emacs -nbc}.
18156
18157 @need 1250
18158 @item When using `grep'@*
18159 @samp{-i}@w{ } Ignore case distinctions@*
18160 @samp{-n}@w{ } Prefix each line of output with line number@*
18161 @samp{-H}@w{ } Print the filename for each match.@*
18162 @samp{-e}@w{ } Protect patterns beginning with a hyphen character, @samp{-}
18163
18164 @smallexample
18165 (setq grep-command "grep -i -nH -e ")
18166 @end smallexample
18167
18168 @ignore
18169 @c Evidently, no longer needed in GNU Emacs 22
18170
18171 item Automatically uncompress compressed files when visiting them
18172
18173 smallexample
18174 (load "uncompress")
18175 end smallexample
18176
18177 @end ignore
18178
18179 @item Find an existing buffer, even if it has a different name@*
18180 This avoids problems with symbolic links.
18181
18182 @smallexample
18183 (setq find-file-existing-other-name t)
18184 @end smallexample
18185
18186 @item Set your language environment and default input method
18187
18188 @smallexample
18189 @group
18190 (set-language-environment "latin-1")
18191 ;; Remember you can enable or disable multilingual text input
18192 ;; with the @code{toggle-input-method'} (@kbd{C-\}) command
18193 (setq default-input-method "latin-1-prefix")
18194 @end group
18195 @end smallexample
18196
18197 If you want to write with Chinese `GB' characters, set this instead:
18198
18199 @smallexample
18200 @group
18201 (set-language-environment "Chinese-GB")
18202 (setq default-input-method "chinese-tonepy")
18203 @end group
18204 @end smallexample
18205 @end itemize
18206
18207 @subsubheading Fixing Unpleasant Key Bindings
18208 @cindex Key bindings, fixing
18209 @cindex Bindings, key, fixing unpleasant
18210
18211 Some systems bind keys unpleasantly. Sometimes, for example, the
18212 @key{CTRL} key appears in an awkward spot rather than at the far left
18213 of the home row.
18214
18215 Usually, when people fix these sorts of keybindings, they do not
18216 change their @file{~/.emacs} file. Instead, they bind the proper keys
18217 on their consoles with the @code{loadkeys} or @code{install-keymap}
18218 commands in their boot script and then include @code{xmodmap} commands
18219 in their @file{.xinitrc} or @file{.Xsession} file for X Windows.
18220
18221 @need 1250
18222 @noindent
18223 For a boot script:
18224
18225 @smallexample
18226 @group
18227 loadkeys /usr/share/keymaps/i386/qwerty/emacs2.kmap.gz
18228 @exdent or
18229 install-keymap emacs2
18230 @end group
18231 @end smallexample
18232
18233 @need 1250
18234 @noindent
18235 For a @file{.xinitrc} or @file{.Xsession} file when the @key{Caps
18236 Lock} key is at the far left of the home row:
18237
18238 @smallexample
18239 @group
18240 # Bind the key labeled `Caps Lock' to `Control'
18241 # (Such a broken user interface suggests that keyboard manufacturers
18242 # think that computers are typewriters from 1885.)
18243
18244 xmodmap -e "clear Lock"
18245 xmodmap -e "add Control = Caps_Lock"
18246 @end group
18247 @end smallexample
18248
18249 @need 1250
18250 @noindent
18251 In a @file{.xinitrc} or @file{.Xsession} file, to convert an @key{ALT}
18252 key to a @key{META} key:
18253
18254 @smallexample
18255 @group
18256 # Some ill designed keyboards have a key labeled ALT and no Meta
18257 xmodmap -e "keysym Alt_L = Meta_L Alt_L"
18258 @end group
18259 @end smallexample
18260
18261 @need 1700
18262 @node Mode Line, , Miscellaneous, Emacs Initialization
18263 @section A Modified Mode Line
18264 @vindex mode-line-format
18265 @cindex Mode line format
18266
18267 Finally, a feature I really like: a modified mode line.
18268
18269 When I work over a network, I forget which machine I am using. Also,
18270 I tend to I lose track of where I am, and which line point is on.
18271
18272 So I reset my mode line to look like this:
18273
18274 @smallexample
18275 -:-- foo.texi rattlesnake:/home/bob/ Line 1 (Texinfo Fill) Top
18276 @end smallexample
18277
18278 I am visiting a file called @file{foo.texi}, on my machine
18279 @file{rattlesnake} in my @file{/home/bob} buffer. I am on line 1, in
18280 Texinfo mode, and am at the top of the buffer.
18281
18282 @need 1200
18283 My @file{.emacs} file has a section that looks like this:
18284
18285 @smallexample
18286 @group
18287 ;; Set a Mode Line that tells me which machine, which directory,
18288 ;; and which line I am on, plus the other customary information.
18289 (setq-default mode-line-format
18290 (quote
18291 (#("-" 0 1
18292 (help-echo
18293 "mouse-1: select window, mouse-2: delete others ..."))
18294 mode-line-mule-info
18295 mode-line-modified
18296 mode-line-frame-identification
18297 " "
18298 @end group
18299 @group
18300 mode-line-buffer-identification
18301 " "
18302 (:eval (substring
18303 (system-name) 0 (string-match "\\..+" (system-name))))
18304 ":"
18305 default-directory
18306 #(" " 0 1
18307 (help-echo
18308 "mouse-1: select window, mouse-2: delete others ..."))
18309 (line-number-mode " Line %l ")
18310 global-mode-string
18311 @end group
18312 @group
18313 #(" %[(" 0 6
18314 (help-echo
18315 "mouse-1: select window, mouse-2: delete others ..."))
18316 (:eval (mode-line-mode-name))
18317 mode-line-process
18318 minor-mode-alist
18319 #("%n" 0 2 (help-echo "mouse-2: widen" local-map (keymap ...)))
18320 ")%] "
18321 (-3 . "%P")
18322 ;; "-%-"
18323 )))
18324 @end group
18325 @end smallexample
18326
18327 @noindent
18328 Here, I redefine the default mode line. Most of the parts are from
18329 the original; but I make a few changes. I set the @emph{default} mode
18330 line format so as to permit various modes, such as Info, to override
18331 it.
18332
18333 Many elements in the list are self-explanatory:
18334 @code{mode-line-modified} is a variable that tells whether the buffer
18335 has been modified, @code{mode-name} tells the name of the mode, and so
18336 on. However, the format looks complicated because of two features we
18337 have not discussed.
18338
18339 @cindex Properties, in mode line example
18340 The first string in the mode line is a dash or hyphen, @samp{-}. In
18341 the old days, it would have been specified simply as @code{"-"}. But
18342 nowadays, Emacs can add properties to a string, such as highlighting
18343 or, as in this case, a help feature. If you place your mouse cursor
18344 over the hyphen, some help information appears (By default, you must
18345 wait seven-tenths of a second before the information appears. You can
18346 change that timing by changing the value of @code{tooltip-delay}.)
18347
18348 @need 1000
18349 The new string format has a special syntax:
18350
18351 @smallexample
18352 #("-" 0 1 (help-echo "mouse-1: select window, ..."))
18353 @end smallexample
18354
18355 @noindent
18356 The @code{#(} begins a list. The first element of the list is the
18357 string itself, just one @samp{-}. The second and third
18358 elements specify the range over which the fourth element applies. A
18359 range starts @emph{after} a character, so a zero means the range
18360 starts just before the first character; a 1 means that the range ends
18361 just after the first character. The third element is the property for
18362 the range. It consists of a property list, a
18363 property name, in this case, @samp{help-echo}, followed by a value, in this
18364 case, a string. The second, third, and fourth elements of this new
18365 string format can be repeated.
18366
18367 @xref{Text Properties, , Text Properties, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
18368 Reference Manual}, and see @ref{Mode Line Format, , Mode Line Format,
18369 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more information.
18370
18371 @code{mode-line-buffer-identification}
18372 displays the current buffer name. It is a list
18373 beginning @code{(#("%12b" 0 4 @dots{}}.
18374 The @code{#(} begins the list.
18375
18376 The @samp{"%12b"} displays the current buffer name, using the
18377 @code{buffer-name} function with which we are familiar; the `12'
18378 specifies the maximum number of characters that will be displayed.
18379 When a name has fewer characters, whitespace is added to fill out to
18380 this number. (Buffer names can and often should be longer than 12
18381 characters; this length works well in a typical 80 column wide
18382 window.)
18383
18384 @code{:eval} says to evaluate the following form and use the result as
18385 a string to display. In this case, the expression displays the first
18386 component of the full system name. The end of the first component is
18387 a @samp{.} (`period'), so I use the @code{string-match} function to
18388 tell me the length of the first component. The substring from the
18389 zeroth character to that length is the name of the machine.
18390
18391 @need 1250
18392 This is the expression:
18393
18394 @smallexample
18395 @group
18396 (:eval (substring
18397 (system-name) 0 (string-match "\\..+" (system-name))))
18398 @end group
18399 @end smallexample
18400
18401 @samp{%[} and @samp{%]} cause a pair of square brackets
18402 to appear for each recursive editing level. @samp{%n} says `Narrow'
18403 when narrowing is in effect. @samp{%P} tells you the percentage of
18404 the buffer that is above the bottom of the window, or `Top', `Bottom',
18405 or `All'. (A lower case @samp{p} tell you the percentage above the
18406 @emph{top} of the window.) @samp{%-} inserts enough dashes to fill
18407 out the line.
18408
18409 Remember, ``You don't have to like Emacs to like it'' --- your own
18410 Emacs can have different colors, different commands, and different
18411 keys than a default Emacs.
18412
18413 On the other hand, if you want to bring up a plain `out of the box'
18414 Emacs, with no customization, type:
18415
18416 @smallexample
18417 emacs -q
18418 @end smallexample
18419
18420 @noindent
18421 This will start an Emacs that does @emph{not} load your
18422 @file{~/.emacs} initialization file. A plain, default Emacs. Nothing
18423 more.
18424
18425 @node Debugging, Conclusion, Emacs Initialization, Top
18426 @chapter Debugging
18427 @cindex debugging
18428
18429 GNU Emacs has two debuggers, @code{debug} and @code{edebug}. The
18430 first is built into the internals of Emacs and is always with you;
18431 the second requires that you instrument a function before you can use it.
18432
18433 Both debuggers are described extensively in @ref{Debugging, ,
18434 Debugging Lisp Programs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18435 In this chapter, I will walk through a short example of each.
18436
18437 @menu
18438 * debug:: How to use the built-in debugger.
18439 * debug-on-entry:: Start debugging when you call a function.
18440 * debug-on-quit:: Start debugging when you quit with @kbd{C-g}.
18441 * edebug:: How to use Edebug, a source level debugger.
18442 * Debugging Exercises::
18443 @end menu
18444
18445 @node debug, debug-on-entry, Debugging, Debugging
18446 @section @code{debug}
18447 @findex debug
18448
18449 Suppose you have written a function definition that is intended to
18450 return the sum of the numbers 1 through a given number. (This is the
18451 @code{triangle} function discussed earlier. @xref{Decrementing
18452 Example, , Example with Decrementing Counter}, for a discussion.)
18453 @c xref{Decrementing Loop,, Loop with a Decrementing Counter}, for a discussion.)
18454
18455 However, your function definition has a bug. You have mistyped
18456 @samp{1=} for @samp{1-}. Here is the broken definition:
18457
18458 @findex triangle-bugged
18459 @smallexample
18460 @group
18461 (defun triangle-bugged (number)
18462 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive."
18463 (let ((total 0))
18464 (while (> number 0)
18465 (setq total (+ total number))
18466 (setq number (1= number))) ; @r{Error here.}
18467 total))
18468 @end group
18469 @end smallexample
18470
18471 If you are reading this in Info, you can evaluate this definition in
18472 the normal fashion. You will see @code{triangle-bugged} appear in the
18473 echo area.
18474
18475 @need 1250
18476 Now evaluate the @code{triangle-bugged} function with an
18477 argument of 4:
18478
18479 @smallexample
18480 (triangle-bugged 4)
18481 @end smallexample
18482
18483 @noindent
18484 In a recent GNU Emacs, you will create and enter a @file{*Backtrace*}
18485 buffer that says:
18486
18487 @noindent
18488 @smallexample
18489 @group
18490 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18491 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function 1=)
18492 (1= number)
18493 (setq number (1= number))
18494 (while (> number 0) (setq total (+ total number))
18495 (setq number (1= number)))
18496 (let ((total 0)) (while (> number 0) (setq total ...)
18497 (setq number ...)) total)
18498 triangle-bugged(4)
18499 @end group
18500 @group
18501 eval((triangle-bugged 4))
18502 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18503 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18504 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18505 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18506 @end group
18507 @end smallexample
18508
18509 @noindent
18510 (I have reformatted this example slightly; the debugger does not fold
18511 long lines. As usual, you can quit the debugger by typing @kbd{q} in
18512 the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.)
18513
18514 In practice, for a bug as simple as this, the `Lisp error' line will
18515 tell you what you need to know to correct the definition. The
18516 function @code{1=} is `void'.
18517
18518 @ignore
18519 @need 800
18520 In GNU Emacs 20 and before, you will see:
18521
18522 @smallexample
18523 Symbol's function definition is void:@: 1=
18524 @end smallexample
18525
18526 @noindent
18527 which has the same meaning as the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer line in
18528 version 21.
18529 @end ignore
18530
18531 However, suppose you are not quite certain what is going on?
18532 You can read the complete backtrace.
18533
18534 In this case, you need to run a recent GNU Emacs, which automatically
18535 starts the debugger that puts you in the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer; or
18536 else, you need to start the debugger manually as described below.
18537
18538 Read the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer from the bottom up; it tells you
18539 what Emacs did that led to the error. Emacs made an interactive call
18540 to @kbd{C-x C-e} (@code{eval-last-sexp}), which led to the evaluation
18541 of the @code{triangle-bugged} expression. Each line above tells you
18542 what the Lisp interpreter evaluated next.
18543
18544 @need 1250
18545 The third line from the top of the buffer is
18546
18547 @smallexample
18548 (setq number (1= number))
18549 @end smallexample
18550
18551 @noindent
18552 Emacs tried to evaluate this expression; in order to do so, it tried
18553 to evaluate the inner expression shown on the second line from the
18554 top:
18555
18556 @smallexample
18557 (1= number)
18558 @end smallexample
18559
18560 @need 1250
18561 @noindent
18562 This is where the error occurred; as the top line says:
18563
18564 @smallexample
18565 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function 1=)
18566 @end smallexample
18567
18568 @noindent
18569 You can correct the mistake, re-evaluate the function definition, and
18570 then run your test again.
18571
18572 @node debug-on-entry, debug-on-quit, debug, Debugging
18573 @section @code{debug-on-entry}
18574 @findex debug-on-entry
18575
18576 A recent GNU Emacs starts the debugger automatically when your
18577 function has an error.
18578
18579 @ignore
18580 GNU Emacs version 20 and before did not; it simply
18581 presented you with an error message. You had to start the debugger
18582 manually.
18583 @end ignore
18584
18585 Incidentally, you can start the debugger manually for all versions of
18586 Emacs; the advantage is that the debugger runs even if you do not have
18587 a bug in your code. Sometimes your code will be free of bugs!
18588
18589 You can enter the debugger when you call the function by calling
18590 @code{debug-on-entry}.
18591
18592 @need 1250
18593 @noindent
18594 Type:
18595
18596 @smallexample
18597 M-x debug-on-entry RET triangle-bugged RET
18598 @end smallexample
18599
18600 @need 1250
18601 @noindent
18602 Now, evaluate the following:
18603
18604 @smallexample
18605 (triangle-bugged 5)
18606 @end smallexample
18607
18608 @noindent
18609 All versions of Emacs will create a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer and tell
18610 you that it is beginning to evaluate the @code{triangle-bugged}
18611 function:
18612
18613 @smallexample
18614 @group
18615 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18616 Debugger entered--entering a function:
18617 * triangle-bugged(5)
18618 eval((triangle-bugged 5))
18619 @end group
18620 @group
18621 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18622 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18623 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18624 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18625 @end group
18626 @end smallexample
18627
18628 In the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer, type @kbd{d}. Emacs will evaluate
18629 the first expression in @code{triangle-bugged}; the buffer will look
18630 like this:
18631
18632 @smallexample
18633 @group
18634 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18635 Debugger entered--beginning evaluation of function call form:
18636 * (let ((total 0)) (while (> number 0) (setq total ...)
18637 (setq number ...)) total)
18638 * triangle-bugged(5)
18639 eval((triangle-bugged 5))
18640 @end group
18641 @group
18642 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18643 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18644 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18645 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18646 @end group
18647 @end smallexample
18648
18649 @noindent
18650 Now, type @kbd{d} again, eight times, slowly. Each time you type
18651 @kbd{d}, Emacs will evaluate another expression in the function
18652 definition.
18653
18654 @need 1750
18655 Eventually, the buffer will look like this:
18656
18657 @smallexample
18658 @group
18659 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18660 Debugger entered--beginning evaluation of function call form:
18661 * (setq number (1= number))
18662 * (while (> number 0) (setq total (+ total number))
18663 (setq number (1= number)))
18664 @group
18665 @end group
18666 * (let ((total 0)) (while (> number 0) (setq total ...)
18667 (setq number ...)) total)
18668 * triangle-bugged(5)
18669 eval((triangle-bugged 5))
18670 @group
18671 @end group
18672 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18673 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18674 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18675 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18676 @end group
18677 @end smallexample
18678
18679 @need 1500
18680 @noindent
18681 Finally, after you type @kbd{d} two more times, Emacs will reach the
18682 error, and the top two lines of the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer will look
18683 like this:
18684
18685 @smallexample
18686 @group
18687 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18688 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function 1=)
18689 * (1= number)
18690 @dots{}
18691 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18692 @end group
18693 @end smallexample
18694
18695 By typing @kbd{d}, you were able to step through the function.
18696
18697 You can quit a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer by typing @kbd{q} in it; this
18698 quits the trace, but does not cancel @code{debug-on-entry}.
18699
18700 @findex cancel-debug-on-entry
18701 To cancel the effect of @code{debug-on-entry}, call
18702 @code{cancel-debug-on-entry} and the name of the function, like this:
18703
18704 @smallexample
18705 M-x cancel-debug-on-entry RET triangle-bugged RET
18706 @end smallexample
18707
18708 @noindent
18709 (If you are reading this in Info, cancel @code{debug-on-entry} now.)
18710
18711 @node debug-on-quit, edebug, debug-on-entry, Debugging
18712 @section @code{debug-on-quit} and @code{(debug)}
18713
18714 In addition to setting @code{debug-on-error} or calling @code{debug-on-entry},
18715 there are two other ways to start @code{debug}.
18716
18717 @findex debug-on-quit
18718 You can start @code{debug} whenever you type @kbd{C-g}
18719 (@code{keyboard-quit}) by setting the variable @code{debug-on-quit} to
18720 @code{t}. This is useful for debugging infinite loops.
18721
18722 @need 1500
18723 @cindex @code{(debug)} in code
18724 Or, you can insert a line that says @code{(debug)} into your code
18725 where you want the debugger to start, like this:
18726
18727 @smallexample
18728 @group
18729 (defun triangle-bugged (number)
18730 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive."
18731 (let ((total 0))
18732 (while (> number 0)
18733 (setq total (+ total number))
18734 (debug) ; @r{Start debugger.}
18735 (setq number (1= number))) ; @r{Error here.}
18736 total))
18737 @end group
18738 @end smallexample
18739
18740 The @code{debug} function is described in detail in @ref{Debugger, ,
18741 The Lisp Debugger, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18742
18743 @node edebug, Debugging Exercises, debug-on-quit, Debugging
18744 @section The @code{edebug} Source Level Debugger
18745 @cindex Source level debugger
18746 @findex edebug
18747
18748 Edebug is a source level debugger. Edebug normally displays the
18749 source of the code you are debugging, with an arrow at the left that
18750 shows which line you are currently executing.
18751
18752 You can walk through the execution of a function, line by line, or run
18753 quickly until reaching a @dfn{breakpoint} where execution stops.
18754
18755 Edebug is described in @ref{edebug, , Edebug, elisp, The GNU Emacs
18756 Lisp Reference Manual}.
18757
18758 @need 1250
18759 Here is a bugged function definition for @code{triangle-recursively}.
18760 @xref{Recursive triangle function, , Recursion in place of a counter},
18761 for a review of it.
18762
18763 @smallexample
18764 @group
18765 (defun triangle-recursively-bugged (number)
18766 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
18767 Uses recursion."
18768 (if (= number 1)
18769 1
18770 (+ number
18771 (triangle-recursively-bugged
18772 (1= number))))) ; @r{Error here.}
18773 @end group
18774 @end smallexample
18775
18776 @noindent
18777 Normally, you would install this definition by positioning your cursor
18778 after the function's closing parenthesis and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}
18779 (@code{eval-last-sexp}) or else by positioning your cursor within the
18780 definition and typing @kbd{C-M-x} (@code{eval-defun}). (By default,
18781 the @code{eval-defun} command works only in Emacs Lisp mode or in Lisp
18782 Interaction mode.)
18783
18784 @need 1500
18785 However, to prepare this function definition for Edebug, you must
18786 first @dfn{instrument} the code using a different command. You can do
18787 this by positioning your cursor within or just after the definition
18788 and typing
18789
18790 @smallexample
18791 M-x edebug-defun RET
18792 @end smallexample
18793
18794 @noindent
18795 This will cause Emacs to load Edebug automatically if it is not
18796 already loaded, and properly instrument the function.
18797
18798 After instrumenting the function, place your cursor after the
18799 following expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e} (@code{eval-last-sexp}):
18800
18801 @smallexample
18802 (triangle-recursively-bugged 3)
18803 @end smallexample
18804
18805 @noindent
18806 You will be jumped back to the source for
18807 @code{triangle-recursively-bugged} and the cursor positioned at the
18808 beginning of the @code{if} line of the function. Also, you will see
18809 an arrowhead at the left hand side of that line. The arrowhead marks
18810 the line where the function is executing. (In the following examples,
18811 we show the arrowhead with @samp{=>}; in a windowing system, you may
18812 see the arrowhead as a solid triangle in the window `fringe'.)
18813
18814 @smallexample
18815 =>@point{}(if (= number 1)
18816 @end smallexample
18817
18818 @noindent
18819 @iftex
18820 In the example, the location of point is displayed with a star,
18821 @samp{@point{}} (in Info, it is displayed as @samp{-!-}).
18822 @end iftex
18823 @ifnottex
18824 In the example, the location of point is displayed as @samp{@point{}}
18825 (in a printed book, it is displayed with a five pointed star).
18826 @end ifnottex
18827
18828 If you now press @key{SPC}, point will move to the next expression to
18829 be executed; the line will look like this:
18830
18831 @smallexample
18832 =>(if @point{}(= number 1)
18833 @end smallexample
18834
18835 @noindent
18836 As you continue to press @key{SPC}, point will move from expression to
18837 expression. At the same time, whenever an expression returns a value,
18838 that value will be displayed in the echo area. For example, after you
18839 move point past @code{number}, you will see the following:
18840
18841 @smallexample
18842 Result: 3 (#o3, #x3, ?\C-c)
18843 @end smallexample
18844
18845 @noindent
18846 This means the value of @code{number} is 3, which is octal three,
18847 hexadecimal three, and @sc{ascii} `control-c' (the third letter of the
18848 alphabet, in case you need to know this information).
18849
18850 You can continue moving through the code until you reach the line with
18851 the error. Before evaluation, that line looks like this:
18852
18853 @smallexample
18854 => @point{}(1= number))))) ; @r{Error here.}
18855 @end smallexample
18856
18857 @need 1250
18858 @noindent
18859 When you press @key{SPC} once again, you will produce an error message
18860 that says:
18861
18862 @smallexample
18863 Symbol's function definition is void:@: 1=
18864 @end smallexample
18865
18866 @noindent
18867 This is the bug.
18868
18869 Press @kbd{q} to quit Edebug.
18870
18871 To remove instrumentation from a function definition, simply
18872 re-evaluate it with a command that does not instrument it.
18873 For example, you could place your cursor after the definition's
18874 closing parenthesis and type @kbd{C-x C-e}.
18875
18876 Edebug does a great deal more than walk with you through a function.
18877 You can set it so it races through on its own, stopping only at an
18878 error or at specified stopping points; you can cause it to display the
18879 changing values of various expressions; you can find out how many
18880 times a function is called, and more.
18881
18882 Edebug is described in @ref{edebug, , Edebug, elisp, The GNU Emacs
18883 Lisp Reference Manual}.
18884
18885 @need 1500
18886 @node Debugging Exercises, , edebug, Debugging
18887 @section Debugging Exercises
18888
18889 @itemize @bullet
18890 @item
18891 Install the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} function and then cause it to
18892 enter the built-in debugger when you call it. Run the command on a
18893 region containing two words. You will need to press @kbd{d} a
18894 remarkable number of times. On your system, is a `hook' called after
18895 the command finishes? (For information on hooks, see @ref{Command
18896 Overview, , Command Loop Overview, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
18897 Manual}.)
18898
18899 @item
18900 Copy @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} into the @file{*scratch*} buffer,
18901 instrument the function for Edebug, and walk through its execution.
18902 The function does not need to have a bug, although you can introduce
18903 one if you wish. If the function lacks a bug, the walk-through
18904 completes without problems.
18905
18906 @item
18907 While running Edebug, type @kbd{?} to see a list of all the Edebug commands.
18908 (The @code{global-edebug-prefix} is usually @kbd{C-x X}, i.e.@:
18909 @kbd{@key{CTRL}-x} followed by an upper case @kbd{X}; use this prefix
18910 for commands made outside of the Edebug debugging buffer.)
18911
18912 @item
18913 In the Edebug debugging buffer, use the @kbd{p}
18914 (@code{edebug-bounce-point}) command to see where in the region the
18915 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} is working.
18916
18917 @item
18918 Move point to some spot further down the function and then type the
18919 @kbd{h} (@code{edebug-goto-here}) command to jump to that location.
18920
18921 @item
18922 Use the @kbd{t} (@code{edebug-trace-mode}) command to cause Edebug to
18923 walk through the function on its own; use an upper case @kbd{T} for
18924 @code{edebug-Trace-fast-mode}.
18925
18926 @item
18927 Set a breakpoint, then run Edebug in Trace mode until it reaches the
18928 stopping point.
18929 @end itemize
18930
18931 @node Conclusion, the-the, Debugging, Top
18932 @chapter Conclusion
18933
18934 We have now reached the end of this Introduction. You have now
18935 learned enough about programming in Emacs Lisp to set values, to write
18936 simple @file{.emacs} files for yourself and your friends, and write
18937 simple customizations and extensions to Emacs.
18938
18939 This is a place to stop. Or, if you wish, you can now go onward, and
18940 teach yourself.
18941
18942 You have learned some of the basic nuts and bolts of programming. But
18943 only some. There are a great many more brackets and hinges that are
18944 easy to use that we have not touched.
18945
18946 A path you can follow right now lies among the sources to GNU Emacs
18947 and in
18948 @ifnotinfo
18949 @cite{The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18950 @end ifnotinfo
18951 @ifinfo
18952 @ref{Top, , The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual, elisp, The GNU
18953 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18954 @end ifinfo
18955
18956 The Emacs Lisp sources are an adventure. When you read the sources and
18957 come across a function or expression that is unfamiliar, you need to
18958 figure out or find out what it does.
18959
18960 Go to the Reference Manual. It is a thorough, complete, and fairly
18961 easy-to-read description of Emacs Lisp. It is written not only for
18962 experts, but for people who know what you know. (The @cite{Reference
18963 Manual} comes with the standard GNU Emacs distribution. Like this
18964 introduction, it comes as a Texinfo source file, so you can read it
18965 on-line and as a typeset, printed book.)
18966
18967 Go to the other on-line help that is part of GNU Emacs: the on-line
18968 documentation for all functions and variables, and @code{find-tag},
18969 the program that takes you to sources.
18970
18971 Here is an example of how I explore the sources. Because of its name,
18972 @file{simple.el} is the file I looked at first, a long time ago. As
18973 it happens some of the functions in @file{simple.el} are complicated,
18974 or at least look complicated at first sight. The @code{open-line}
18975 function, for example, looks complicated.
18976
18977 You may want to walk through this function slowly, as we did with the
18978 @code{forward-sentence} function. (@xref{forward-sentence, The
18979 @code{forward-sentence} function}.) Or you may want to skip that
18980 function and look at another, such as @code{split-line}. You don't
18981 need to read all the functions. According to
18982 @code{count-words-in-defun}, the @code{split-line} function contains
18983 102 words and symbols.
18984
18985 Even though it is short, @code{split-line} contains expressions
18986 we have not studied: @code{skip-chars-forward}, @code{indent-to},
18987 @code{current-column} and @code{insert-and-inherit}.
18988
18989 Consider the @code{skip-chars-forward} function. (It is part of the
18990 function definition for @code{back-to-indentation}, which is shown in
18991 @ref{Review, , Review}.)
18992
18993 In GNU Emacs, you can find out more about @code{skip-chars-forward} by
18994 typing @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}) and the name of the
18995 function. This gives you the function documentation.
18996
18997 You may be able to guess what is done by a well named function such as
18998 @code{indent-to}; or you can look it up, too. Incidentally, the
18999 @code{describe-function} function itself is in @file{help.el}; it is
19000 one of those long, but decipherable functions. You can look up
19001 @code{describe-function} using the @kbd{C-h f} command!
19002
19003 In this instance, since the code is Lisp, the @file{*Help*} buffer
19004 contains the name of the library containing the function's source.
19005 You can put point over the name of the library and press the RET key,
19006 which in this situation is bound to @code{help-follow}, and be taken
19007 directly to the source, in the same way as @kbd{M-.}
19008 (@code{find-tag}).
19009
19010 The definition for @code{describe-function} illustrates how to
19011 customize the @code{interactive} expression without using the standard
19012 character codes; and it shows how to create a temporary buffer.
19013
19014 (The @code{indent-to} function is written in C rather than Emacs Lisp;
19015 it is a `built-in' function. @code{help-follow} takes you to its
19016 source as does @code{find-tag}, when properly set up.)
19017
19018 You can look at a function's source using @code{find-tag}, which is
19019 bound to @kbd{M-.} Finally, you can find out what the Reference
19020 Manual has to say by visiting the manual in Info, and typing @kbd{i}
19021 (@code{Info-index}) and the name of the function, or by looking up the
19022 function in the index to a printed copy of the manual.
19023
19024 Similarly, you can find out what is meant by
19025 @code{insert-and-inherit}.
19026
19027 Other interesting source files include @file{paragraphs.el},
19028 @file{loaddefs.el}, and @file{loadup.el}. The @file{paragraphs.el}
19029 file includes short, easily understood functions as well as longer
19030 ones. The @file{loaddefs.el} file contains the many standard
19031 autoloads and many keymaps. I have never looked at it all; only at
19032 parts. @file{loadup.el} is the file that loads the standard parts of
19033 Emacs; it tells you a great deal about how Emacs is built.
19034 (@xref{Building Emacs, , Building Emacs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
19035 Reference Manual}, for more about building.)
19036
19037 As I said, you have learned some nuts and bolts; however, and very
19038 importantly, we have hardly touched major aspects of programming; I
19039 have said nothing about how to sort information, except to use the
19040 predefined @code{sort} function; I have said nothing about how to store
19041 information, except to use variables and lists; I have said nothing
19042 about how to write programs that write programs. These are topics for
19043 another, and different kind of book, a different kind of learning.
19044
19045 What you have done is learn enough for much practical work with GNU
19046 Emacs. What you have done is get started. This is the end of a
19047 beginning.
19048
19049 @c ================ Appendix ================
19050
19051 @node the-the, Kill Ring, Conclusion, Top
19052 @appendix The @code{the-the} Function
19053 @findex the-the
19054 @cindex Duplicated words function
19055 @cindex Words, duplicated
19056
19057 Sometimes when you you write text, you duplicate words---as with ``you
19058 you'' near the beginning of this sentence. I find that most
19059 frequently, I duplicate ``the''; hence, I call the function for
19060 detecting duplicated words, @code{the-the}.
19061
19062 @need 1250
19063 As a first step, you could use the following regular expression to
19064 search for duplicates:
19065
19066 @smallexample
19067 \\(\\w+[ \t\n]+\\)\\1
19068 @end smallexample
19069
19070 @noindent
19071 This regexp matches one or more word-constituent characters followed
19072 by one or more spaces, tabs, or newlines. However, it does not detect
19073 duplicated words on different lines, since the ending of the first
19074 word, the end of the line, is different from the ending of the second
19075 word, a space. (For more information about regular expressions, see
19076 @ref{Regexp Search, , Regular Expression Searches}, as well as
19077 @ref{Regexps, , Syntax of Regular Expressions, emacs, The GNU Emacs
19078 Manual}, and @ref{Regular Expressions, , Regular Expressions, elisp,
19079 The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
19080
19081 You might try searching just for duplicated word-constituent
19082 characters but that does not work since the pattern detects doubles
19083 such as the two occurrences of `th' in `with the'.
19084
19085 Another possible regexp searches for word-constituent characters
19086 followed by non-word-constituent characters, reduplicated. Here,
19087 @w{@samp{\\w+}} matches one or more word-constituent characters and
19088 @w{@samp{\\W*}} matches zero or more non-word-constituent characters.
19089
19090 @smallexample
19091 \\(\\(\\w+\\)\\W*\\)\\1
19092 @end smallexample
19093
19094 @noindent
19095 Again, not useful.
19096
19097 Here is the pattern that I use. It is not perfect, but good enough.
19098 @w{@samp{\\b}} matches the empty string, provided it is at the beginning
19099 or end of a word; @w{@samp{[^@@ \n\t]+}} matches one or more occurrences of
19100 any characters that are @emph{not} an @@-sign, space, newline, or tab.
19101
19102 @smallexample
19103 \\b\\([^@@ \n\t]+\\)[ \n\t]+\\1\\b
19104 @end smallexample
19105
19106 One can write more complicated expressions, but I found that this
19107 expression is good enough, so I use it.
19108
19109 Here is the @code{the-the} function, as I include it in my
19110 @file{.emacs} file, along with a handy global key binding:
19111
19112 @smallexample
19113 @group
19114 (defun the-the ()
19115 "Search forward for for a duplicated word."
19116 (interactive)
19117 (message "Searching for for duplicated words ...")
19118 (push-mark)
19119 @end group
19120 @group
19121 ;; This regexp is not perfect
19122 ;; but is fairly good over all:
19123 (if (re-search-forward
19124 "\\b\\([^@@ \n\t]+\\)[ \n\t]+\\1\\b" nil 'move)
19125 (message "Found duplicated word.")
19126 (message "End of buffer")))
19127 @end group
19128
19129 @group
19130 ;; Bind `the-the' to C-c \
19131 (global-set-key "\C-c\\" 'the-the)
19132 @end group
19133 @end smallexample
19134
19135 @sp 1
19136 Here is test text:
19137
19138 @smallexample
19139 @group
19140 one two two three four five
19141 five six seven
19142 @end group
19143 @end smallexample
19144
19145 You can substitute the other regular expressions shown above in the
19146 function definition and try each of them on this list.
19147
19148 @node Kill Ring, Full Graph, the-the, Top
19149 @appendix Handling the Kill Ring
19150 @cindex Kill ring handling
19151 @cindex Handling the kill ring
19152 @cindex Ring, making a list like a
19153
19154 The kill ring is a list that is transformed into a ring by the
19155 workings of the @code{current-kill} function. The @code{yank} and
19156 @code{yank-pop} commands use the @code{current-kill} function.
19157
19158 This appendix describes the @code{current-kill} function as well as
19159 both the @code{yank} and the @code{yank-pop} commands, but first,
19160 consider the workings of the kill ring.
19161
19162 @menu
19163 * What the Kill Ring Does::
19164 * current-kill::
19165 * yank:: Paste a copy of a clipped element.
19166 * yank-pop:: Insert element pointed to.
19167 * ring file::
19168 @end menu
19169
19170 @node What the Kill Ring Does, current-kill, Kill Ring, Kill Ring
19171 @ifnottex
19172 @unnumberedsec What the Kill Ring Does
19173 @end ifnottex
19174
19175 @need 1250
19176 The kill ring has a default maximum length of sixty items; this number
19177 is too large for an explanation. Instead, set it to four. Please
19178 evaluate the following:
19179
19180 @smallexample
19181 @group
19182 (setq old-kill-ring-max kill-ring-max)
19183 (setq kill-ring-max 4)
19184 @end group
19185 @end smallexample
19186
19187 @noindent
19188 Then, please copy each line of the following indented example into the
19189 kill ring. You may kill each line with @kbd{C-k} or mark it and copy
19190 it with @kbd{M-w}.
19191
19192 @noindent
19193 (In a read-only buffer, such as the @file{*info*} buffer, the kill
19194 command, @kbd{C-k} (@code{kill-line}), will not remove the text,
19195 merely copy it to the kill ring. However, your machine may beep at
19196 you. Alternatively, for silence, you may copy the region of each line
19197 with the @kbd{M-w} (@code{kill-ring-save}) command. You must mark
19198 each line for this command to succeed, but it does not matter at which
19199 end you put point or mark.)
19200
19201 @need 1250
19202 @noindent
19203 Please invoke the calls in order, so that five elements attempt to
19204 fill the kill ring:
19205
19206 @smallexample
19207 @group
19208 first some text
19209 second piece of text
19210 third line
19211 fourth line of text
19212 fifth bit of text
19213 @end group
19214 @end smallexample
19215
19216 @need 1250
19217 @noindent
19218 Then find the value of @code{kill-ring} by evaluating
19219
19220 @smallexample
19221 kill-ring
19222 @end smallexample
19223
19224 @need 800
19225 @noindent
19226 It is:
19227
19228 @smallexample
19229 @group
19230 ("fifth bit of text" "fourth line of text"
19231 "third line" "second piece of text")
19232 @end group
19233 @end smallexample
19234
19235 @noindent
19236 The first element, @samp{first some text}, was dropped.
19237
19238 @need 1250
19239 To return to the old value for the length of the kill ring, evaluate:
19240
19241 @smallexample
19242 (setq kill-ring-max old-kill-ring-max)
19243 @end smallexample
19244
19245 @node current-kill, yank, What the Kill Ring Does, Kill Ring
19246 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
19247 @appendixsec The @code{current-kill} Function
19248 @findex current-kill
19249
19250 The @code{current-kill} function changes the element in the kill ring
19251 to which @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points. (Also, the
19252 @code{kill-new} function sets @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} to point
19253 to the latest element of the kill ring. The @code{kill-new}
19254 function is used directly or indirectly by @code{kill-append},
19255 @code{copy-region-as-kill}, @code{kill-ring-save}, @code{kill-line},
19256 and @code{kill-region}.)
19257
19258 @menu
19259 * Code for current-kill::
19260 * Understanding current-kill::
19261 @end menu
19262
19263 @node Code for current-kill, Understanding current-kill, current-kill, current-kill
19264 @ifnottex
19265 @unnumberedsubsec The code for @code{current-kill}
19266 @end ifnottex
19267
19268
19269 @need 1500
19270 The @code{current-kill} function is used by @code{yank} and by
19271 @code{yank-pop}. Here is the code for @code{current-kill}:
19272
19273 @smallexample
19274 @group
19275 (defun current-kill (n &optional do-not-move)
19276 "Rotate the yanking point by N places, and then return that kill.
19277 If N is zero, `interprogram-paste-function' is set, and calling it
19278 returns a string, then that string is added to the front of the
19279 kill ring and returned as the latest kill.
19280 @end group
19281 @group
19282 If optional arg DO-NOT-MOVE is non-nil, then don't actually move the
19283 yanking point; just return the Nth kill forward."
19284 (let ((interprogram-paste (and (= n 0)
19285 interprogram-paste-function
19286 (funcall interprogram-paste-function))))
19287 @end group
19288 @group
19289 (if interprogram-paste
19290 (progn
19291 ;; Disable the interprogram cut function when we add the new
19292 ;; text to the kill ring, so Emacs doesn't try to own the
19293 ;; selection, with identical text.
19294 (let ((interprogram-cut-function nil))
19295 (kill-new interprogram-paste))
19296 interprogram-paste)
19297 @end group
19298 @group
19299 (or kill-ring (error "Kill ring is empty"))
19300 (let ((ARGth-kill-element
19301 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
19302 (length kill-ring))
19303 kill-ring)))
19304 (or do-not-move
19305 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))
19306 (car ARGth-kill-element)))))
19307 @end group
19308 @end smallexample
19309
19310 Remember also that the @code{kill-new} function sets
19311 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} to the latest element of the kill
19312 ring, which means that all the functions that call it set the value
19313 indirectly: @code{kill-append}, @code{copy-region-as-kill},
19314 @code{kill-ring-save}, @code{kill-line}, and @code{kill-region}.
19315
19316 @need 1500
19317 Here is the line in @code{kill-new}, which is explained in
19318 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}.
19319
19320 @smallexample
19321 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
19322 @end smallexample
19323
19324 @node Understanding current-kill, , Code for current-kill, current-kill
19325 @ifnottex
19326 @unnumberedsubsec @code{current-kill} in Outline
19327 @end ifnottex
19328
19329 The @code{current-kill} function looks complex, but as usual, it can
19330 be understood by taking it apart piece by piece. First look at it in
19331 skeletal form:
19332
19333 @smallexample
19334 @group
19335 (defun current-kill (n &optional do-not-move)
19336 "Rotate the yanking point by N places, and then return that kill."
19337 (let @var{varlist}
19338 @var{body}@dots{})
19339 @end group
19340 @end smallexample
19341
19342 This function takes two arguments, one of which is optional. It has a
19343 documentation string. It is @emph{not} interactive.
19344
19345 @menu
19346 * Body of current-kill::
19347 * Digression concerning error:: How to mislead humans, but not computers.
19348 * Determining the Element::
19349 @end menu
19350
19351 @node Body of current-kill, Digression concerning error, Understanding current-kill, Understanding current-kill
19352 @ifnottex
19353 @unnumberedsubsubsec The Body of @code{current-kill}
19354 @end ifnottex
19355
19356 The body of the function definition is a @code{let} expression, which
19357 itself has a body as well as a @var{varlist}.
19358
19359 The @code{let} expression declares a variable that will be only usable
19360 within the bounds of this function. This variable is called
19361 @code{interprogram-paste} and is for copying to another program. It
19362 is not for copying within this instance of GNU Emacs. Most window
19363 systems provide a facility for interprogram pasting. Sadly, that
19364 facility usually provides only for the last element. Most windowing
19365 systems have not adopted a ring of many possibilities, even though
19366 Emacs has provided it for decades.
19367
19368 The @code{if} expression has two parts, one if there exists
19369 @code{interprogram-paste} and one if not.
19370
19371 @need 2000
19372 Let us consider the `if not' or else-part of the @code{current-kill}
19373 function. (The then-part uses the @code{kill-new} function, which
19374 we have already described. @xref{kill-new function, , The
19375 @code{kill-new} function}.)
19376
19377 @smallexample
19378 @group
19379 (or kill-ring (error "Kill ring is empty"))
19380 (let ((ARGth-kill-element
19381 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
19382 (length kill-ring))
19383 kill-ring)))
19384 (or do-not-move
19385 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))
19386 (car ARGth-kill-element))
19387 @end group
19388 @end smallexample
19389
19390 @noindent
19391 The code first checks whether the kill ring has content; otherwise it
19392 signals an error.
19393
19394 @need 1000
19395 Note that the @code{or} expression is very similar to testing length
19396 with an @code{if}:
19397
19398 @findex zerop
19399 @findex error
19400 @smallexample
19401 @group
19402 (if (zerop (length kill-ring)) ; @r{if-part}
19403 (error "Kill ring is empty")) ; @r{then-part}
19404 ;; No else-part
19405 @end group
19406 @end smallexample
19407
19408 @noindent
19409 If there is not anything in the kill ring, its length must be zero and
19410 an error message sent to the user: @samp{Kill ring is empty}. The
19411 @code{current-kill} function uses an @code{or} expression which is
19412 simpler. But an @code{if} expression reminds us what goes on.
19413
19414 This @code{if} expression uses the function @code{zerop} which returns
19415 true if the value it is testing is zero. When @code{zerop} tests
19416 true, the then-part of the @code{if} is evaluated. The then-part is a
19417 list starting with the function @code{error}, which is a function that
19418 is similar to the @code{message} function
19419 (@pxref{message, , The @code{message} Function}) in that
19420 it prints a one-line message in the echo area. However, in addition
19421 to printing a message, @code{error} also stops evaluation of the
19422 function within which it is embedded. This means that the rest of the
19423 function will not be evaluated if the length of the kill ring is zero.
19424
19425 Then the @code{current-kill} function selects the element to return.
19426 The selection depends on the number of places that @code{current-kill}
19427 rotates and on where @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points.
19428
19429 Next, either the optional @code{do-not-move} argument is true or the
19430 current value of @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is set to point to the
19431 list. Finally, another expression returns the first element of the
19432 list even if the @code{do-not-move} argument is true.
19433
19434 @node Digression concerning error, Determining the Element, Body of current-kill, Understanding current-kill
19435 @ifnottex
19436 @unnumberedsubsubsec Digression about the word `error'
19437 @end ifnottex
19438
19439 In my opinion, it is slightly misleading, at least to humans, to use
19440 the term `error' as the name of the @code{error} function. A better
19441 term would be `cancel'. Strictly speaking, of course, you cannot
19442 point to, much less rotate a pointer to a list that has no length, so
19443 from the point of view of the computer, the word `error' is correct.
19444 But a human expects to attempt this sort of thing, if only to find out
19445 whether the kill ring is full or empty. This is an act of
19446 exploration.
19447
19448 From the human point of view, the act of exploration and discovery is
19449 not necessarily an error, and therefore should not be labeled as one,
19450 even in the bowels of a computer. As it is, the code in Emacs implies
19451 that a human who is acting virtuously, by exploring his or her
19452 environment, is making an error. This is bad. Even though the computer
19453 takes the same steps as it does when there is an `error', a term such as
19454 `cancel' would have a clearer connotation.
19455
19456 @node Determining the Element, , Digression concerning error, Understanding current-kill
19457 @ifnottex
19458 @unnumberedsubsubsec Determining the Element
19459 @end ifnottex
19460
19461 Among other actions, the else-part of the @code{if} expression sets
19462 the value of @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} to
19463 @code{ARGth-kill-element} when the kill ring has something in it and
19464 the value of @code{do-not-move} is @code{nil}.
19465
19466 @need 800
19467 The code looks like this:
19468
19469 @smallexample
19470 @group
19471 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
19472 (length kill-ring))
19473 kill-ring)))
19474 @end group
19475 @end smallexample
19476
19477 This needs some examination. Unless it is not supposed to move the
19478 pointer, the @code{current-kill} function changes where
19479 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points.
19480 That is what the
19481 @w{@code{(setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))}}
19482 expression does. Also, clearly, @code{ARGth-kill-element} is being
19483 set to be equal to some @sc{cdr} of the kill ring, using the
19484 @code{nthcdr} function that is described in an earlier section.
19485 (@xref{copy-region-as-kill}.) How does it do this?
19486
19487 As we have seen before (@pxref{nthcdr}), the @code{nthcdr} function
19488 works by repeatedly taking the @sc{cdr} of a list---it takes the
19489 @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr} @dots{}
19490
19491 @need 800
19492 The two following expressions produce the same result:
19493
19494 @smallexample
19495 @group
19496 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer (cdr kill-ring))
19497
19498 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer (nthcdr 1 kill-ring))
19499 @end group
19500 @end smallexample
19501
19502 However, the @code{nthcdr} expression is more complicated. It uses
19503 the @code{mod} function to determine which @sc{cdr} to select.
19504
19505 (You will remember to look at inner functions first; indeed, we will
19506 have to go inside the @code{mod}.)
19507
19508 The @code{mod} function returns the value of its first argument modulo
19509 the second; that is to say, it returns the remainder after dividing
19510 the first argument by the second. The value returned has the same
19511 sign as the second argument.
19512
19513 @need 800
19514 Thus,
19515
19516 @smallexample
19517 @group
19518 (mod 12 4)
19519 @result{} 0 ;; @r{because there is no remainder}
19520 (mod 13 4)
19521 @result{} 1
19522 @end group
19523 @end smallexample
19524
19525 @need 1250
19526 In this case, the first argument is often smaller than the second.
19527 That is fine.
19528
19529 @smallexample
19530 @group
19531 (mod 0 4)
19532 @result{} 0
19533 (mod 1 4)
19534 @result{} 1
19535 @end group
19536 @end smallexample
19537
19538 We can guess what the @code{-} function does. It is like @code{+} but
19539 subtracts instead of adds; the @code{-} function subtracts its second
19540 argument from its first. Also, we already know what the @code{length}
19541 function does (@pxref{length}). It returns the length of a list.
19542
19543 And @code{n} is the name of the required argument to the
19544 @code{current-kill} function.
19545
19546 @need 1250
19547 So when the first argument to @code{nthcdr} is zero, the @code{nthcdr}
19548 expression returns the whole list, as you can see by evaluating the
19549 following:
19550
19551 @smallexample
19552 @group
19553 ;; kill-ring-yank-pointer @r{and} kill-ring @r{have a length of four}
19554 ;; @r{and} (mod (- 0 4) 4) @result{} 0
19555 (nthcdr (mod (- 0 4) 4)
19556 '("fourth line of text"
19557 "third line"
19558 "second piece of text"
19559 "first some text"))
19560 @end group
19561 @end smallexample
19562
19563 @need 1250
19564 When the first argument to the @code{current-kill} function is one,
19565 the @code{nthcdr} expression returns the list without its first
19566 element.
19567
19568 @smallexample
19569 @group
19570 (nthcdr (mod (- 1 4) 4)
19571 '("fourth line of text"
19572 "third line"
19573 "second piece of text"
19574 "first some text"))
19575 @end group
19576 @end smallexample
19577
19578 @cindex @samp{global variable} defined
19579 @cindex @samp{variable, global}, defined
19580 Incidentally, both @code{kill-ring} and @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}
19581 are @dfn{global variables}. That means that any expression in Emacs
19582 Lisp can access them. They are not like the local variables set by
19583 @code{let} or like the symbols in an argument list.
19584 Local variables can only be accessed
19585 within the @code{let} that defines them or the function that specifies
19586 them in an argument list (and within expressions called by them).
19587
19588 @ignore
19589 @c texi2dvi fails when the name of the section is within ifnottex ...
19590 (@xref{Prevent confusion, , @code{let} Prevents Confusion}, and
19591 @ref{defun, , The @code{defun} Special Form}.)
19592 @end ignore
19593
19594 @node yank, yank-pop, current-kill, Kill Ring
19595 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
19596 @appendixsec @code{yank}
19597 @findex yank
19598
19599 After learning about @code{current-kill}, the code for the
19600 @code{yank} function is almost easy.
19601
19602 The @code{yank} function does not use the
19603 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable directly. It calls
19604 @code{insert-for-yank} which calls @code{current-kill} which sets the
19605 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
19606
19607 @need 1250
19608 The code looks like this:
19609
19610 @c in GNU Emacs 22
19611 @smallexample
19612 @group
19613 (defun yank (&optional arg)
19614 "Reinsert (\"paste\") the last stretch of killed text.
19615 More precisely, reinsert the stretch of killed text most recently
19616 killed OR yanked. Put point at end, and set mark at beginning.
19617 With just \\[universal-argument] as argument, same but put point at
19618 beginning (and mark at end). With argument N, reinsert the Nth most
19619 recently killed stretch of killed text.
19620
19621 When this command inserts killed text into the buffer, it honors
19622 `yank-excluded-properties' and `yank-handler' as described in the
19623 doc string for `insert-for-yank-1', which see.
19624
19625 See also the command \\[yank-pop]."
19626 @end group
19627 @group
19628 (interactive "*P")
19629 (setq yank-window-start (window-start))
19630 ;; If we don't get all the way thru, make last-command indicate that
19631 ;; for the following command.
19632 (setq this-command t)
19633 (push-mark (point))
19634 @end group
19635 @group
19636 (insert-for-yank (current-kill (cond
19637 ((listp arg) 0)
19638 ((eq arg '-) -2)
19639 (t (1- arg)))))
19640 (if (consp arg)
19641 ;; This is like exchange-point-and-mark,
19642 ;; but doesn't activate the mark.
19643 ;; It is cleaner to avoid activation, even though the command
19644 ;; loop would deactivate the mark because we inserted text.
19645 (goto-char (prog1 (mark t)
19646 (set-marker (mark-marker) (point) (current-buffer)))))
19647 @end group
19648 @group
19649 ;; If we do get all the way thru, make this-command indicate that.
19650 (if (eq this-command t)
19651 (setq this-command 'yank))
19652 nil)
19653 @end group
19654 @end smallexample
19655
19656 The key expression is @code{insert-for-yank}, which inserts the string
19657 returned by @code{current-kill}, but removes some text properties from
19658 it.
19659
19660 However, before getting to that expression, the function sets the value
19661 of @code{yank-window-start} to the position returned by the
19662 @code{(window-start)} expression, the position at which the display
19663 currently starts. The @code{yank} function also sets
19664 @code{this-command} and pushes the mark.
19665
19666 After it yanks the appropriate element, if the optional argument is a
19667 @sc{cons} rather than a number or nothing, it puts point at beginning
19668 of the yanked text and mark at its end.
19669
19670 (The @code{prog1} function is like @code{progn} but returns the value
19671 of its first argument rather than the value of its last argument. Its
19672 first argument is forced to return the buffer's mark as an integer.
19673 You can see the documentation for these functions by placing point
19674 over them in this buffer and then typing @kbd{C-h f}
19675 (@code{describe-function}) followed by a @kbd{RET}; the default is the
19676 function.)
19677
19678 The last part of the function tells what to do when it succeeds.
19679
19680 @node yank-pop, ring file, yank, Kill Ring
19681 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
19682 @appendixsec @code{yank-pop}
19683 @findex yank-pop
19684
19685 After understanding @code{yank} and @code{current-kill}, you know how
19686 to approach the @code{yank-pop} function. Leaving out the
19687 documentation to save space, it looks like this:
19688
19689 @c GNU Emacs 22
19690 @smallexample
19691 @group
19692 (defun yank-pop (&optional arg)
19693 "@dots{}"
19694 (interactive "*p")
19695 (if (not (eq last-command 'yank))
19696 (error "Previous command was not a yank"))
19697 @end group
19698 @group
19699 (setq this-command 'yank)
19700 (unless arg (setq arg 1))
19701 (let ((inhibit-read-only t)
19702 (before (< (point) (mark t))))
19703 @end group
19704 @group
19705 (if before
19706 (funcall (or yank-undo-function 'delete-region) (point) (mark t))
19707 (funcall (or yank-undo-function 'delete-region) (mark t) (point)))
19708 (setq yank-undo-function nil)
19709 @end group
19710 @group
19711 (set-marker (mark-marker) (point) (current-buffer))
19712 (insert-for-yank (current-kill arg))
19713 ;; Set the window start back where it was in the yank command,
19714 ;; if possible.
19715 (set-window-start (selected-window) yank-window-start t)
19716 @end group
19717 @group
19718 (if before
19719 ;; This is like exchange-point-and-mark,
19720 ;; but doesn't activate the mark.
19721 ;; It is cleaner to avoid activation, even though the command
19722 ;; loop would deactivate the mark because we inserted text.
19723 (goto-char (prog1 (mark t)
19724 (set-marker (mark-marker)
19725 (point)
19726 (current-buffer))))))
19727 nil)
19728 @end group
19729 @end smallexample
19730
19731 The function is interactive with a small @samp{p} so the prefix
19732 argument is processed and passed to the function. The command can
19733 only be used after a previous yank; otherwise an error message is
19734 sent. This check uses the variable @code{last-command} which is set
19735 by @code{yank} and is discussed elsewhere.
19736 (@xref{copy-region-as-kill}.)
19737
19738 The @code{let} clause sets the variable @code{before} to true or false
19739 depending whether point is before or after mark and then the region
19740 between point and mark is deleted. This is the region that was just
19741 inserted by the previous yank and it is this text that will be
19742 replaced.
19743
19744 @code{funcall} calls its first argument as a function, passing
19745 remaining arguments to it. The first argument is whatever the
19746 @code{or} expression returns. The two remaining arguments are the
19747 positions of point and mark set by the preceding @code{yank} command.
19748
19749 There is more, but that is the hardest part.
19750
19751 @node ring file, , yank-pop, Kill Ring
19752 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
19753 @appendixsec The @file{ring.el} File
19754 @cindex @file{ring.el} file
19755
19756 Interestingly, GNU Emacs posses a file called @file{ring.el} that
19757 provides many of the features we just discussed. But functions such
19758 as @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} do not use this library, possibly
19759 because they were written earlier.
19760
19761 @node Full Graph, Free Software and Free Manuals, Kill Ring, Top
19762 @appendix A Graph with Labeled Axes
19763
19764 Printed axes help you understand a graph. They convey scale. In an
19765 earlier chapter (@pxref{Readying a Graph, , Readying a Graph}), we
19766 wrote the code to print the body of a graph. Here we write the code
19767 for printing and labeling vertical and horizontal axes, along with the
19768 body itself.
19769
19770 @menu
19771 * Labeled Example::
19772 * print-graph Varlist:: @code{let} expression in @code{print-graph}.
19773 * print-Y-axis:: Print a label for the vertical axis.
19774 * print-X-axis:: Print a horizontal label.
19775 * Print Whole Graph:: The function to print a complete graph.
19776 @end menu
19777
19778 @node Labeled Example, print-graph Varlist, Full Graph, Full Graph
19779 @ifnottex
19780 @unnumberedsec Labeled Example Graph
19781 @end ifnottex
19782
19783 Since insertions fill a buffer to the right and below point, the new
19784 graph printing function should first print the Y or vertical axis,
19785 then the body of the graph, and finally the X or horizontal axis.
19786 This sequence lays out for us the contents of the function:
19787
19788 @enumerate
19789 @item
19790 Set up code.
19791
19792 @item
19793 Print Y axis.
19794
19795 @item
19796 Print body of graph.
19797
19798 @item
19799 Print X axis.
19800 @end enumerate
19801
19802 @need 800
19803 Here is an example of how a finished graph should look:
19804
19805 @smallexample
19806 @group
19807 10 -
19808 *
19809 * *
19810 * **
19811 * ***
19812 5 - * *******
19813 * *** *******
19814 *************
19815 ***************
19816 1 - ****************
19817 | | | |
19818 1 5 10 15
19819 @end group
19820 @end smallexample
19821
19822 @noindent
19823 In this graph, both the vertical and the horizontal axes are labeled
19824 with numbers. However, in some graphs, the horizontal axis is time
19825 and would be better labeled with months, like this:
19826
19827 @smallexample
19828 @group
19829 5 - *
19830 * ** *
19831 *******
19832 ********** **
19833 1 - **************
19834 | ^ |
19835 Jan June Jan
19836 @end group
19837 @end smallexample
19838
19839 Indeed, with a little thought, we can easily come up with a variety of
19840 vertical and horizontal labeling schemes. Our task could become
19841 complicated. But complications breed confusion. Rather than permit
19842 this, it is better choose a simple labeling scheme for our first
19843 effort, and to modify or replace it later.
19844
19845 @need 1200
19846 These considerations suggest the following outline for the
19847 @code{print-graph} function:
19848
19849 @smallexample
19850 @group
19851 (defun print-graph (numbers-list)
19852 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
19853 (let ((height @dots{}
19854 @dots{}))
19855 @end group
19856 @group
19857 (print-Y-axis height @dots{} )
19858 (graph-body-print numbers-list)
19859 (print-X-axis @dots{} )))
19860 @end group
19861 @end smallexample
19862
19863 We can work on each part of the @code{print-graph} function definition
19864 in turn.
19865
19866 @node print-graph Varlist, print-Y-axis, Labeled Example, Full Graph
19867 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
19868 @appendixsec The @code{print-graph} Varlist
19869 @cindex @code{print-graph} varlist
19870
19871 In writing the @code{print-graph} function, the first task is to write
19872 the varlist in the @code{let} expression. (We will leave aside for the
19873 moment any thoughts about making the function interactive or about the
19874 contents of its documentation string.)
19875
19876 The varlist should set several values. Clearly, the top of the label
19877 for the vertical axis must be at least the height of the graph, which
19878 means that we must obtain this information here. Note that the
19879 @code{print-graph-body} function also requires this information. There
19880 is no reason to calculate the height of the graph in two different
19881 places, so we should change @code{print-graph-body} from the way we
19882 defined it earlier to take advantage of the calculation.
19883
19884 Similarly, both the function for printing the X axis labels and the
19885 @code{print-graph-body} function need to learn the value of the width of
19886 each symbol. We can perform the calculation here and change the
19887 definition for @code{print-graph-body} from the way we defined it in the
19888 previous chapter.
19889
19890 The length of the label for the horizontal axis must be at least as long
19891 as the graph. However, this information is used only in the function
19892 that prints the horizontal axis, so it does not need to be calculated here.
19893
19894 These thoughts lead us directly to the following form for the varlist
19895 in the @code{let} for @code{print-graph}:
19896
19897 @smallexample
19898 @group
19899 (let ((height (apply 'max numbers-list)) ; @r{First version.}
19900 (symbol-width (length graph-blank)))
19901 @end group
19902 @end smallexample
19903
19904 @noindent
19905 As we shall see, this expression is not quite right.
19906
19907 @need 2000
19908 @node print-Y-axis, print-X-axis, print-graph Varlist, Full Graph
19909 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
19910 @appendixsec The @code{print-Y-axis} Function
19911 @cindex Axis, print vertical
19912 @cindex Y axis printing
19913 @cindex Vertical axis printing
19914 @cindex Print vertical axis
19915
19916 The job of the @code{print-Y-axis} function is to print a label for
19917 the vertical axis that looks like this:
19918
19919 @smallexample
19920 @group
19921 10 -
19922
19923
19924
19925
19926 5 -
19927
19928
19929
19930 1 -
19931 @end group
19932 @end smallexample
19933
19934 @noindent
19935 The function should be passed the height of the graph, and then should
19936 construct and insert the appropriate numbers and marks.
19937
19938 @menu
19939 * print-Y-axis in Detail::
19940 * Height of label:: What height for the Y axis?
19941 * Compute a Remainder:: How to compute the remainder of a division.
19942 * Y Axis Element:: Construct a line for the Y axis.
19943 * Y-axis-column:: Generate a list of Y axis labels.
19944 * print-Y-axis Penultimate:: A not quite final version.
19945 @end menu
19946
19947 @node print-Y-axis in Detail, Height of label, print-Y-axis, print-Y-axis
19948 @ifnottex
19949 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{print-Y-axis} Function in Detail
19950 @end ifnottex
19951
19952 It is easy enough to see in the figure what the Y axis label should
19953 look like; but to say in words, and then to write a function
19954 definition to do the job is another matter. It is not quite true to
19955 say that we want a number and a tic every five lines: there are only
19956 three lines between the @samp{1} and the @samp{5} (lines 2, 3, and 4),
19957 but four lines between the @samp{5} and the @samp{10} (lines 6, 7, 8,
19958 and 9). It is better to say that we want a number and a tic mark on
19959 the base line (number 1) and then that we want a number and a tic on
19960 the fifth line from the bottom and on every line that is a multiple of
19961 five.
19962
19963 @node Height of label, Compute a Remainder, print-Y-axis in Detail, print-Y-axis
19964 @ifnottex
19965 @unnumberedsubsec What height should the label be?
19966 @end ifnottex
19967
19968 The next issue is what height the label should be? Suppose the maximum
19969 height of tallest column of the graph is seven. Should the highest
19970 label on the Y axis be @samp{5 -}, and should the graph stick up above
19971 the label? Or should the highest label be @samp{7 -}, and mark the peak
19972 of the graph? Or should the highest label be @code{10 -}, which is a
19973 multiple of five, and be higher than the topmost value of the graph?
19974
19975 The latter form is preferred. Most graphs are drawn within rectangles
19976 whose sides are an integral number of steps long---5, 10, 15, and so
19977 on for a step distance of five. But as soon as we decide to use a
19978 step height for the vertical axis, we discover that the simple
19979 expression in the varlist for computing the height is wrong. The
19980 expression is @code{(apply 'max numbers-list)}. This returns the
19981 precise height, not the maximum height plus whatever is necessary to
19982 round up to the nearest multiple of five. A more complex expression
19983 is required.
19984
19985 As usual in cases like this, a complex problem becomes simpler if it is
19986 divided into several smaller problems.
19987
19988 First, consider the case when the highest value of the graph is an
19989 integral multiple of five---when it is 5, 10, 15, or some higher
19990 multiple of five. We can use this value as the Y axis height.
19991
19992 A fairly simply way to determine whether a number is a multiple of
19993 five is to divide it by five and see if the division results in a
19994 remainder. If there is no remainder, the number is a multiple of
19995 five. Thus, seven divided by five has a remainder of two, and seven
19996 is not an integral multiple of five. Put in slightly different
19997 language, more reminiscent of the classroom, five goes into seven
19998 once, with a remainder of two. However, five goes into ten twice,
19999 with no remainder: ten is an integral multiple of five.
20000
20001 @node Compute a Remainder, Y Axis Element, Height of label, print-Y-axis
20002 @appendixsubsec Side Trip: Compute a Remainder
20003
20004 @findex % @r{(remainder function)}
20005 @cindex Remainder function, @code{%}
20006 In Lisp, the function for computing a remainder is @code{%}. The
20007 function returns the remainder of its first argument divided by its
20008 second argument. As it happens, @code{%} is a function in Emacs Lisp
20009 that you cannot discover using @code{apropos}: you find nothing if you
20010 type @kbd{M-x apropos @key{RET} remainder @key{RET}}. The only way to
20011 learn of the existence of @code{%} is to read about it in a book such
20012 as this or in the Emacs Lisp sources.
20013
20014 You can try the @code{%} function by evaluating the following two
20015 expressions:
20016
20017 @smallexample
20018 @group
20019 (% 7 5)
20020
20021 (% 10 5)
20022 @end group
20023 @end smallexample
20024
20025 @noindent
20026 The first expression returns 2 and the second expression returns 0.
20027
20028 To test whether the returned value is zero or some other number, we
20029 can use the @code{zerop} function. This function returns @code{t} if
20030 its argument, which must be a number, is zero.
20031
20032 @smallexample
20033 @group
20034 (zerop (% 7 5))
20035 @result{} nil
20036
20037 (zerop (% 10 5))
20038 @result{} t
20039 @end group
20040 @end smallexample
20041
20042 Thus, the following expression will return @code{t} if the height
20043 of the graph is evenly divisible by five:
20044
20045 @smallexample
20046 (zerop (% height 5))
20047 @end smallexample
20048
20049 @noindent
20050 (The value of @code{height}, of course, can be found from @code{(apply
20051 'max numbers-list)}.)
20052
20053 On the other hand, if the value of @code{height} is not a multiple of
20054 five, we want to reset the value to the next higher multiple of five.
20055 This is straightforward arithmetic using functions with which we are
20056 already familiar. First, we divide the value of @code{height} by five
20057 to determine how many times five goes into the number. Thus, five
20058 goes into twelve twice. If we add one to this quotient and multiply by
20059 five, we will obtain the value of the next multiple of five that is
20060 larger than the height. Five goes into twelve twice. Add one to two,
20061 and multiply by five; the result is fifteen, which is the next multiple
20062 of five that is higher than twelve. The Lisp expression for this is:
20063
20064 @smallexample
20065 (* (1+ (/ height 5)) 5)
20066 @end smallexample
20067
20068 @noindent
20069 For example, if you evaluate the following, the result is 15:
20070
20071 @smallexample
20072 (* (1+ (/ 12 5)) 5)
20073 @end smallexample
20074
20075 All through this discussion, we have been using `five' as the value
20076 for spacing labels on the Y axis; but we may want to use some other
20077 value. For generality, we should replace `five' with a variable to
20078 which we can assign a value. The best name I can think of for this
20079 variable is @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}.
20080
20081 @need 1250
20082 Using this term, and an @code{if} expression, we produce the
20083 following:
20084
20085 @smallexample
20086 @group
20087 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20088 height
20089 ;; @r{else}
20090 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20091 Y-axis-label-spacing))
20092 @end group
20093 @end smallexample
20094
20095 @noindent
20096 This expression returns the value of @code{height} itself if the height
20097 is an even multiple of the value of the @code{Y-axis-label-spacing} or
20098 else it computes and returns a value of @code{height} that is equal to
20099 the next higher multiple of the value of the @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}.
20100
20101 We can now include this expression in the @code{let} expression of the
20102 @code{print-graph} function (after first setting the value of
20103 @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}):
20104 @vindex Y-axis-label-spacing
20105
20106 @smallexample
20107 @group
20108 (defvar Y-axis-label-spacing 5
20109 "Number of lines from one Y axis label to next.")
20110 @end group
20111
20112 @group
20113 @dots{}
20114 (let* ((height (apply 'max numbers-list))
20115 (height-of-top-line
20116 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20117 height
20118 @end group
20119 @group
20120 ;; @r{else}
20121 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20122 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
20123 (symbol-width (length graph-blank))))
20124 @dots{}
20125 @end group
20126 @end smallexample
20127
20128 @noindent
20129 (Note use of the @code{let*} function: the initial value of height is
20130 computed once by the @code{(apply 'max numbers-list)} expression and
20131 then the resulting value of @code{height} is used to compute its
20132 final value. @xref{fwd-para let, , The @code{let*} expression}, for
20133 more about @code{let*}.)
20134
20135 @node Y Axis Element, Y-axis-column, Compute a Remainder, print-Y-axis
20136 @appendixsubsec Construct a Y Axis Element
20137
20138 When we print the vertical axis, we want to insert strings such as
20139 @w{@samp{5 -}} and @w{@samp{10 - }} every five lines.
20140 Moreover, we want the numbers and dashes to line up, so shorter
20141 numbers must be padded with leading spaces. If some of the strings
20142 use two digit numbers, the strings with single digit numbers must
20143 include a leading blank space before the number.
20144
20145 @findex number-to-string
20146 To figure out the length of the number, the @code{length} function is
20147 used. But the @code{length} function works only with a string, not with
20148 a number. So the number has to be converted from being a number to
20149 being a string. This is done with the @code{number-to-string} function.
20150 For example,
20151
20152 @smallexample
20153 @group
20154 (length (number-to-string 35))
20155 @result{} 2
20156
20157 (length (number-to-string 100))
20158 @result{} 3
20159 @end group
20160 @end smallexample
20161
20162 @noindent
20163 (@code{number-to-string} is also called @code{int-to-string}; you will
20164 see this alternative name in various sources.)
20165
20166 In addition, in each label, each number is followed by a string such
20167 as @w{@samp{ - }}, which we will call the @code{Y-axis-tic} marker.
20168 This variable is defined with @code{defvar}:
20169
20170 @vindex Y-axis-tic
20171 @smallexample
20172 @group
20173 (defvar Y-axis-tic " - "
20174 "String that follows number in a Y axis label.")
20175 @end group
20176 @end smallexample
20177
20178 The length of the Y label is the sum of the length of the Y axis tic
20179 mark and the length of the number of the top of the graph.
20180
20181 @smallexample
20182 (length (concat (number-to-string height) Y-axis-tic)))
20183 @end smallexample
20184
20185 This value will be calculated by the @code{print-graph} function in
20186 its varlist as @code{full-Y-label-width} and passed on. (Note that we
20187 did not think to include this in the varlist when we first proposed it.)
20188
20189 To make a complete vertical axis label, a tic mark is concatenated
20190 with a number; and the two together may be preceded by one or more
20191 spaces depending on how long the number is. The label consists of
20192 three parts: the (optional) leading spaces, the number, and the tic
20193 mark. The function is passed the value of the number for the specific
20194 row, and the value of the width of the top line, which is calculated
20195 (just once) by @code{print-graph}.
20196
20197 @smallexample
20198 @group
20199 (defun Y-axis-element (number full-Y-label-width)
20200 "Construct a NUMBERed label element.
20201 A numbered element looks like this ` 5 - ',
20202 and is padded as needed so all line up with
20203 the element for the largest number."
20204 @end group
20205 @group
20206 (let* ((leading-spaces
20207 (- full-Y-label-width
20208 (length
20209 (concat (number-to-string number)
20210 Y-axis-tic)))))
20211 @end group
20212 @group
20213 (concat
20214 (make-string leading-spaces ? )
20215 (number-to-string number)
20216 Y-axis-tic)))
20217 @end group
20218 @end smallexample
20219
20220 The @code{Y-axis-element} function concatenates together the leading
20221 spaces, if any; the number, as a string; and the tic mark.
20222
20223 To figure out how many leading spaces the label will need, the
20224 function subtracts the actual length of the label---the length of the
20225 number plus the length of the tic mark---from the desired label width.
20226
20227 @findex make-string
20228 Blank spaces are inserted using the @code{make-string} function. This
20229 function takes two arguments: the first tells it how long the string
20230 will be and the second is a symbol for the character to insert, in a
20231 special format. The format is a question mark followed by a blank
20232 space, like this, @samp{? }. @xref{Character Type, , Character Type,
20233 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a description of the
20234 syntax for characters. (Of course, you might want to replace the
20235 blank space by some other character @dots{} You know what to do.)
20236
20237 The @code{number-to-string} function is used in the concatenation
20238 expression, to convert the number to a string that is concatenated
20239 with the leading spaces and the tic mark.
20240
20241 @node Y-axis-column, print-Y-axis Penultimate, Y Axis Element, print-Y-axis
20242 @appendixsubsec Create a Y Axis Column
20243
20244 The preceding functions provide all the tools needed to construct a
20245 function that generates a list of numbered and blank strings to insert
20246 as the label for the vertical axis:
20247
20248 @findex Y-axis-column
20249 @smallexample
20250 @group
20251 (defun Y-axis-column (height width-of-label)
20252 "Construct list of Y axis labels and blank strings.
20253 For HEIGHT of line above base and WIDTH-OF-LABEL."
20254 (let (Y-axis)
20255 @group
20256 @end group
20257 (while (> height 1)
20258 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20259 ;; @r{Insert label.}
20260 (setq Y-axis
20261 (cons
20262 (Y-axis-element height width-of-label)
20263 Y-axis))
20264 @group
20265 @end group
20266 ;; @r{Else, insert blanks.}
20267 (setq Y-axis
20268 (cons
20269 (make-string width-of-label ? )
20270 Y-axis)))
20271 (setq height (1- height)))
20272 ;; @r{Insert base line.}
20273 (setq Y-axis
20274 (cons (Y-axis-element 1 width-of-label) Y-axis))
20275 (nreverse Y-axis)))
20276 @end group
20277 @end smallexample
20278
20279 In this function, we start with the value of @code{height} and
20280 repetitively subtract one from its value. After each subtraction, we
20281 test to see whether the value is an integral multiple of the
20282 @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}. If it is, we construct a numbered label
20283 using the @code{Y-axis-element} function; if not, we construct a
20284 blank label using the @code{make-string} function. The base line
20285 consists of the number one followed by a tic mark.
20286
20287 @need 2000
20288 @node print-Y-axis Penultimate, , Y-axis-column, print-Y-axis
20289 @appendixsubsec The Not Quite Final Version of @code{print-Y-axis}
20290
20291 The list constructed by the @code{Y-axis-column} function is passed to
20292 the @code{print-Y-axis} function, which inserts the list as a column.
20293
20294 @findex print-Y-axis
20295 @smallexample
20296 @group
20297 (defun print-Y-axis (height full-Y-label-width)
20298 "Insert Y axis using HEIGHT and FULL-Y-LABEL-WIDTH.
20299 Height must be the maximum height of the graph.
20300 Full width is the width of the highest label element."
20301 ;; Value of height and full-Y-label-width
20302 ;; are passed by `print-graph'.
20303 @end group
20304 @group
20305 (let ((start (point)))
20306 (insert-rectangle
20307 (Y-axis-column height full-Y-label-width))
20308 ;; @r{Place point ready for inserting graph.}
20309 (goto-char start)
20310 ;; @r{Move point forward by value of} full-Y-label-width
20311 (forward-char full-Y-label-width)))
20312 @end group
20313 @end smallexample
20314
20315 The @code{print-Y-axis} uses the @code{insert-rectangle} function to
20316 insert the Y axis labels created by the @code{Y-axis-column} function.
20317 In addition, it places point at the correct position for printing the body of
20318 the graph.
20319
20320 You can test @code{print-Y-axis}:
20321
20322 @enumerate
20323 @item
20324 Install
20325
20326 @smallexample
20327 @group
20328 Y-axis-label-spacing
20329 Y-axis-tic
20330 Y-axis-element
20331 Y-axis-column
20332 print-Y-axis
20333 @end group
20334 @end smallexample
20335
20336 @item
20337 Copy the following expression:
20338
20339 @smallexample
20340 (print-Y-axis 12 5)
20341 @end smallexample
20342
20343 @item
20344 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
20345 want the axis labels to start.
20346
20347 @item
20348 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
20349
20350 @item
20351 Yank the @code{graph-body-print} expression into the minibuffer
20352 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
20353
20354 @item
20355 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the expression.
20356 @end enumerate
20357
20358 Emacs will print labels vertically, the top one being @w{@samp{10 -@w{
20359 }}}. (The @code{print-graph} function will pass the value of
20360 @code{height-of-top-line}, which in this case will end up as 15,
20361 thereby getting rid of what might appear as a bug.)
20362
20363 @need 2000
20364 @node print-X-axis, Print Whole Graph, print-Y-axis, Full Graph
20365 @appendixsec The @code{print-X-axis} Function
20366 @cindex Axis, print horizontal
20367 @cindex X axis printing
20368 @cindex Print horizontal axis
20369 @cindex Horizontal axis printing
20370
20371 X axis labels are much like Y axis labels, except that the ticks are on a
20372 line above the numbers. Labels should look like this:
20373
20374 @smallexample
20375 @group
20376 | | | |
20377 1 5 10 15
20378 @end group
20379 @end smallexample
20380
20381 The first tic is under the first column of the graph and is preceded by
20382 several blank spaces. These spaces provide room in rows above for the Y
20383 axis labels. The second, third, fourth, and subsequent ticks are all
20384 spaced equally, according to the value of @code{X-axis-label-spacing}.
20385
20386 The second row of the X axis consists of numbers, preceded by several
20387 blank spaces and also separated according to the value of the variable
20388 @code{X-axis-label-spacing}.
20389
20390 The value of the variable @code{X-axis-label-spacing} should itself be
20391 measured in units of @code{symbol-width}, since you may want to change
20392 the width of the symbols that you are using to print the body of the
20393 graph without changing the ways the graph is labeled.
20394
20395 @menu
20396 * Similarities differences:: Much like @code{print-Y-axis}, but not exactly.
20397 * X Axis Tic Marks:: Create tic marks for the horizontal axis.
20398 @end menu
20399
20400 @node Similarities differences, X Axis Tic Marks, print-X-axis, print-X-axis
20401 @ifnottex
20402 @unnumberedsubsec Similarities and differences
20403 @end ifnottex
20404
20405 The @code{print-X-axis} function is constructed in more or less the
20406 same fashion as the @code{print-Y-axis} function except that it has
20407 two lines: the line of tic marks and the numbers. We will write a
20408 separate function to print each line and then combine them within the
20409 @code{print-X-axis} function.
20410
20411 This is a three step process:
20412
20413 @enumerate
20414 @item
20415 Write a function to print the X axis tic marks, @code{print-X-axis-tic-line}.
20416
20417 @item
20418 Write a function to print the X numbers, @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}.
20419
20420 @item
20421 Write a function to print both lines, the @code{print-X-axis} function,
20422 using @code{print-X-axis-tic-line} and
20423 @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}.
20424 @end enumerate
20425
20426 @node X Axis Tic Marks, , Similarities differences, print-X-axis
20427 @appendixsubsec X Axis Tic Marks
20428
20429 The first function should print the X axis tic marks. We must specify
20430 the tic marks themselves and their spacing:
20431
20432 @smallexample
20433 @group
20434 (defvar X-axis-label-spacing
20435 (if (boundp 'graph-blank)
20436 (* 5 (length graph-blank)) 5)
20437 "Number of units from one X axis label to next.")
20438 @end group
20439 @end smallexample
20440
20441 @noindent
20442 (Note that the value of @code{graph-blank} is set by another
20443 @code{defvar}. The @code{boundp} predicate checks whether it has
20444 already been set; @code{boundp} returns @code{nil} if it has not. If
20445 @code{graph-blank} were unbound and we did not use this conditional
20446 construction, in a recent GNU Emacs, we would enter the debugger and
20447 see an error message saying @samp{@w{Debugger entered--Lisp error:}
20448 @w{(void-variable graph-blank)}}.)
20449
20450 @need 1200
20451 Here is the @code{defvar} for @code{X-axis-tic-symbol}:
20452
20453 @smallexample
20454 @group
20455 (defvar X-axis-tic-symbol "|"
20456 "String to insert to point to a column in X axis.")
20457 @end group
20458 @end smallexample
20459
20460 @need 1250
20461 The goal is to make a line that looks like this:
20462
20463 @smallexample
20464 | | | |
20465 @end smallexample
20466
20467 The first tic is indented so that it is under the first column, which is
20468 indented to provide space for the Y axis labels.
20469
20470 A tic element consists of the blank spaces that stretch from one tic to
20471 the next plus a tic symbol. The number of blanks is determined by the
20472 width of the tic symbol and the @code{X-axis-label-spacing}.
20473
20474 @need 1250
20475 The code looks like this:
20476
20477 @smallexample
20478 @group
20479 ;;; X-axis-tic-element
20480 @dots{}
20481 (concat
20482 (make-string
20483 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
20484 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20485 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
20486 ? )
20487 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
20488 X-axis-tic-symbol)
20489 @dots{}
20490 @end group
20491 @end smallexample
20492
20493 Next, we determine how many blanks are needed to indent the first tic
20494 mark to the first column of the graph. This uses the value of
20495 @code{full-Y-label-width} passed it by the @code{print-graph} function.
20496
20497 @need 1250
20498 The code to make @code{X-axis-leading-spaces}
20499 looks like this:
20500
20501 @smallexample
20502 @group
20503 ;; X-axis-leading-spaces
20504 @dots{}
20505 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? )
20506 @dots{}
20507 @end group
20508 @end smallexample
20509
20510 We also need to determine the length of the horizontal axis, which is
20511 the length of the numbers list, and the number of ticks in the horizontal
20512 axis:
20513
20514 @smallexample
20515 @group
20516 ;; X-length
20517 @dots{}
20518 (length numbers-list)
20519 @end group
20520
20521 @group
20522 ;; tic-width
20523 @dots{}
20524 (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20525 @end group
20526
20527 @group
20528 ;; number-of-X-ticks
20529 (if (zerop (% (X-length tic-width)))
20530 (/ (X-length tic-width))
20531 (1+ (/ (X-length tic-width))))
20532 @end group
20533 @end smallexample
20534
20535 @need 1250
20536 All this leads us directly to the function for printing the X axis tic line:
20537
20538 @findex print-X-axis-tic-line
20539 @smallexample
20540 @group
20541 (defun print-X-axis-tic-line
20542 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces X-axis-tic-element)
20543 "Print ticks for X axis."
20544 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
20545 (insert X-axis-tic-symbol) ; @r{Under first column.}
20546 @end group
20547 @group
20548 ;; @r{Insert second tic in the right spot.}
20549 (insert (concat
20550 (make-string
20551 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20552 ;; @r{Insert white space up to second tic symbol.}
20553 (* 2 (length X-axis-tic-symbol)))
20554 ? )
20555 X-axis-tic-symbol))
20556 @end group
20557 @group
20558 ;; @r{Insert remaining ticks.}
20559 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
20560 (insert X-axis-tic-element)
20561 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics))))
20562 @end group
20563 @end smallexample
20564
20565 The line of numbers is equally straightforward:
20566
20567 @need 1250
20568 First, we create a numbered element with blank spaces before each number:
20569
20570 @findex X-axis-element
20571 @smallexample
20572 @group
20573 (defun X-axis-element (number)
20574 "Construct a numbered X axis element."
20575 (let ((leading-spaces
20576 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20577 (length (number-to-string number)))))
20578 (concat (make-string leading-spaces ? )
20579 (number-to-string number))))
20580 @end group
20581 @end smallexample
20582
20583 Next, we create the function to print the numbered line, starting with
20584 the number ``1'' under the first column:
20585
20586 @findex print-X-axis-numbered-line
20587 @smallexample
20588 @group
20589 (defun print-X-axis-numbered-line
20590 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces)
20591 "Print line of X-axis numbers"
20592 (let ((number X-axis-label-spacing))
20593 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
20594 (insert "1")
20595 @end group
20596 @group
20597 (insert (concat
20598 (make-string
20599 ;; @r{Insert white space up to next number.}
20600 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing) 2)
20601 ? )
20602 (number-to-string number)))
20603 @end group
20604 @group
20605 ;; @r{Insert remaining numbers.}
20606 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
20607 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
20608 (insert (X-axis-element number))
20609 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
20610 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics)))))
20611 @end group
20612 @end smallexample
20613
20614 Finally, we need to write the @code{print-X-axis} that uses
20615 @code{print-X-axis-tic-line} and
20616 @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}.
20617
20618 The function must determine the local values of the variables used by both
20619 @code{print-X-axis-tic-line} and @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}, and
20620 then it must call them. Also, it must print the carriage return that
20621 separates the two lines.
20622
20623 The function consists of a varlist that specifies five local variables,
20624 and calls to each of the two line printing functions:
20625
20626 @findex print-X-axis
20627 @smallexample
20628 @group
20629 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list)
20630 "Print X axis labels to length of NUMBERS-LIST."
20631 (let* ((leading-spaces
20632 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? ))
20633 @end group
20634 @group
20635 ;; symbol-width @r{is provided by} graph-body-print
20636 (tic-width (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing))
20637 (X-length (length numbers-list))
20638 @end group
20639 @group
20640 (X-tic
20641 (concat
20642 (make-string
20643 @end group
20644 @group
20645 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
20646 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20647 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
20648 ? )
20649 @end group
20650 @group
20651 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
20652 X-axis-tic-symbol))
20653 @end group
20654 @group
20655 (tic-number
20656 (if (zerop (% X-length tic-width))
20657 (/ X-length tic-width)
20658 (1+ (/ X-length tic-width)))))
20659 @end group
20660 @group
20661 (print-X-axis-tic-line tic-number leading-spaces X-tic)
20662 (insert "\n")
20663 (print-X-axis-numbered-line tic-number leading-spaces)))
20664 @end group
20665 @end smallexample
20666
20667 @need 1250
20668 You can test @code{print-X-axis}:
20669
20670 @enumerate
20671 @item
20672 Install @code{X-axis-tic-symbol}, @code{X-axis-label-spacing},
20673 @code{print-X-axis-tic-line}, as well as @code{X-axis-element},
20674 @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}, and @code{print-X-axis}.
20675
20676 @item
20677 Copy the following expression:
20678
20679 @smallexample
20680 @group
20681 (progn
20682 (let ((full-Y-label-width 5)
20683 (symbol-width 1))
20684 (print-X-axis
20685 '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16))))
20686 @end group
20687 @end smallexample
20688
20689 @item
20690 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
20691 want the axis labels to start.
20692
20693 @item
20694 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
20695
20696 @item
20697 Yank the test expression into the minibuffer
20698 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
20699
20700 @item
20701 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the expression.
20702 @end enumerate
20703
20704 @need 1250
20705 Emacs will print the horizontal axis like this:
20706 @sp 1
20707
20708 @smallexample
20709 @group
20710 | | | | |
20711 1 5 10 15 20
20712 @end group
20713 @end smallexample
20714
20715 @node Print Whole Graph, , print-X-axis, Full Graph
20716 @appendixsec Printing the Whole Graph
20717 @cindex Printing the whole graph
20718 @cindex Whole graph printing
20719 @cindex Graph, printing all
20720
20721 Now we are nearly ready to print the whole graph.
20722
20723 The function to print the graph with the proper labels follows the
20724 outline we created earlier (@pxref{Full Graph, , A Graph with Labeled
20725 Axes}), but with additions.
20726
20727 @need 1250
20728 Here is the outline:
20729
20730 @smallexample
20731 @group
20732 (defun print-graph (numbers-list)
20733 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
20734 (let ((height @dots{}
20735 @dots{}))
20736 @end group
20737 @group
20738 (print-Y-axis height @dots{} )
20739 (graph-body-print numbers-list)
20740 (print-X-axis @dots{} )))
20741 @end group
20742 @end smallexample
20743
20744 @menu
20745 * The final version:: A few changes.
20746 * Test print-graph:: Run a short test.
20747 * Graphing words in defuns:: Executing the final code.
20748 * lambda:: How to write an anonymous function.
20749 * mapcar:: Apply a function to elements of a list.
20750 * Another Bug:: Yet another bug @dots{} most insidious.
20751 * Final printed graph:: The graph itself!
20752 @end menu
20753
20754 @node The final version, Test print-graph, Print Whole Graph, Print Whole Graph
20755 @ifnottex
20756 @unnumberedsubsec Changes for the Final Version
20757 @end ifnottex
20758
20759 The final version is different from what we planned in two ways:
20760 first, it contains additional values calculated once in the varlist;
20761 second, it carries an option to specify the labels' increment per row.
20762 This latter feature turns out to be essential; otherwise, a graph may
20763 have more rows than fit on a display or on a sheet of paper.
20764
20765 @need 1500
20766 This new feature requires a change to the @code{Y-axis-column}
20767 function, to add @code{vertical-step} to it. The function looks like
20768 this:
20769
20770 @findex Y-axis-column @r{Final version.}
20771 @smallexample
20772 @group
20773 ;;; @r{Final version.}
20774 (defun Y-axis-column
20775 (height width-of-label &optional vertical-step)
20776 "Construct list of labels for Y axis.
20777 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
20778 WIDTH-OF-LABEL is maximum width of label.
20779 VERTICAL-STEP, an option, is a positive integer
20780 that specifies how much a Y axis label increments
20781 for each line. For example, a step of 5 means
20782 that each line is five units of the graph."
20783 @end group
20784 @group
20785 (let (Y-axis
20786 (number-per-line (or vertical-step 1)))
20787 (while (> height 1)
20788 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20789 @end group
20790 @group
20791 ;; @r{Insert label.}
20792 (setq Y-axis
20793 (cons
20794 (Y-axis-element
20795 (* height number-per-line)
20796 width-of-label)
20797 Y-axis))
20798 @end group
20799 @group
20800 ;; @r{Else, insert blanks.}
20801 (setq Y-axis
20802 (cons
20803 (make-string width-of-label ? )
20804 Y-axis)))
20805 (setq height (1- height)))
20806 @end group
20807 @group
20808 ;; @r{Insert base line.}
20809 (setq Y-axis (cons (Y-axis-element
20810 (or vertical-step 1)
20811 width-of-label)
20812 Y-axis))
20813 (nreverse Y-axis)))
20814 @end group
20815 @end smallexample
20816
20817 The values for the maximum height of graph and the width of a symbol
20818 are computed by @code{print-graph} in its @code{let} expression; so
20819 @code{graph-body-print} must be changed to accept them.
20820
20821 @findex graph-body-print @r{Final version.}
20822 @smallexample
20823 @group
20824 ;;; @r{Final version.}
20825 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list height symbol-width)
20826 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
20827 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
20828 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
20829 SYMBOL-WIDTH is number of each column."
20830 @end group
20831 @group
20832 (let (from-position)
20833 (while numbers-list
20834 (setq from-position (point))
20835 (insert-rectangle
20836 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
20837 (goto-char from-position)
20838 (forward-char symbol-width)
20839 @end group
20840 @group
20841 ;; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
20842 (sit-for 0)
20843 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))
20844 ;; @r{Place point for X axis labels.}
20845 (forward-line height)
20846 (insert "\n")))
20847 @end group
20848 @end smallexample
20849
20850 @need 1250
20851 Finally, the code for the @code{print-graph} function:
20852
20853 @findex print-graph @r{Final version.}
20854 @smallexample
20855 @group
20856 ;;; @r{Final version.}
20857 (defun print-graph
20858 (numbers-list &optional vertical-step)
20859 "Print labeled bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
20860 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
20861 @end group
20862
20863 @group
20864 Optionally, VERTICAL-STEP, a positive integer,
20865 specifies how much a Y axis label increments for
20866 each line. For example, a step of 5 means that
20867 each row is five units."
20868 @end group
20869 @group
20870 (let* ((symbol-width (length graph-blank))
20871 ;; @code{height} @r{is both the largest number}
20872 ;; @r{and the number with the most digits.}
20873 (height (apply 'max numbers-list))
20874 @end group
20875 @group
20876 (height-of-top-line
20877 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20878 height
20879 ;; @r{else}
20880 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20881 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
20882 @end group
20883 @group
20884 (vertical-step (or vertical-step 1))
20885 (full-Y-label-width
20886 (length
20887 @end group
20888 @group
20889 (concat
20890 (number-to-string
20891 (* height-of-top-line vertical-step))
20892 Y-axis-tic))))
20893 @end group
20894
20895 @group
20896 (print-Y-axis
20897 height-of-top-line full-Y-label-width vertical-step)
20898 @end group
20899 @group
20900 (graph-body-print
20901 numbers-list height-of-top-line symbol-width)
20902 (print-X-axis numbers-list)))
20903 @end group
20904 @end smallexample
20905
20906 @node Test print-graph, Graphing words in defuns, The final version, Print Whole Graph
20907 @appendixsubsec Testing @code{print-graph}
20908
20909 @need 1250
20910 We can test the @code{print-graph} function with a short list of numbers:
20911
20912 @enumerate
20913 @item
20914 Install the final versions of @code{Y-axis-column},
20915 @code{graph-body-print}, and @code{print-graph} (in addition to the
20916 rest of the code.)
20917
20918 @item
20919 Copy the following expression:
20920
20921 @smallexample
20922 (print-graph '(3 2 5 6 7 5 3 4 6 4 3 2 1))
20923 @end smallexample
20924
20925 @item
20926 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
20927 want the axis labels to start.
20928
20929 @item
20930 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
20931
20932 @item
20933 Yank the test expression into the minibuffer
20934 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
20935
20936 @item
20937 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the expression.
20938 @end enumerate
20939
20940 @need 1250
20941 Emacs will print a graph that looks like this:
20942
20943 @smallexample
20944 @group
20945 10 -
20946
20947
20948 *
20949 ** *
20950 5 - **** *
20951 **** ***
20952 * *********
20953 ************
20954 1 - *************
20955
20956 | | | |
20957 1 5 10 15
20958 @end group
20959 @end smallexample
20960
20961 @need 1200
20962 On the other hand, if you pass @code{print-graph} a
20963 @code{vertical-step} value of 2, by evaluating this expression:
20964
20965 @smallexample
20966 (print-graph '(3 2 5 6 7 5 3 4 6 4 3 2 1) 2)
20967 @end smallexample
20968
20969 @need 1250
20970 @noindent
20971 The graph looks like this:
20972
20973 @smallexample
20974 @group
20975 20 -
20976
20977
20978 *
20979 ** *
20980 10 - **** *
20981 **** ***
20982 * *********
20983 ************
20984 2 - *************
20985
20986 | | | |
20987 1 5 10 15
20988 @end group
20989 @end smallexample
20990
20991 @noindent
20992 (A question: is the `2' on the bottom of the vertical axis a bug or a
20993 feature? If you think it is a bug, and should be a `1' instead, (or
20994 even a `0'), you can modify the sources.)
20995
20996 @node Graphing words in defuns, lambda, Test print-graph, Print Whole Graph
20997 @appendixsubsec Graphing Numbers of Words and Symbols
20998
20999 Now for the graph for which all this code was written: a graph that
21000 shows how many function definitions contain fewer than 10 words and
21001 symbols, how many contain between 10 and 19 words and symbols, how
21002 many contain between 20 and 29 words and symbols, and so on.
21003
21004 This is a multi-step process. First make sure you have loaded all the
21005 requisite code.
21006
21007 @need 1500
21008 It is a good idea to reset the value of @code{top-of-ranges} in case
21009 you have set it to some different value. You can evaluate the
21010 following:
21011
21012 @smallexample
21013 @group
21014 (setq top-of-ranges
21015 '(10 20 30 40 50
21016 60 70 80 90 100
21017 110 120 130 140 150
21018 160 170 180 190 200
21019 210 220 230 240 250
21020 260 270 280 290 300)
21021 @end group
21022 @end smallexample
21023
21024 @noindent
21025 Next create a list of the number of words and symbols in each range.
21026
21027 @need 1500
21028 @noindent
21029 Evaluate the following:
21030
21031 @smallexample
21032 @group
21033 (setq list-for-graph
21034 (defuns-per-range
21035 (sort
21036 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
21037 (directory-files "/usr/local/emacs/lisp"
21038 t ".+el$"))
21039 '<)
21040 top-of-ranges))
21041 @end group
21042 @end smallexample
21043
21044 @noindent
21045 On my old machine, this took about an hour. It looked though 303 Lisp
21046 files in my copy of Emacs version 19.23. After all that computing,
21047 the @code{list-for-graph} had this value:
21048
21049 @smallexample
21050 @group
21051 (537 1027 955 785 594 483 349 292 224 199 166 120 116 99
21052 90 80 67 48 52 45 41 33 28 26 25 20 12 28 11 13 220)
21053 @end group
21054 @end smallexample
21055
21056 @noindent
21057 This means that my copy of Emacs had 537 function definitions with
21058 fewer than 10 words or symbols in them, 1,027 function definitions
21059 with 10 to 19 words or symbols in them, 955 function definitions with
21060 20 to 29 words or symbols in them, and so on.
21061
21062 Clearly, just by looking at this list we can see that most function
21063 definitions contain ten to thirty words and symbols.
21064
21065 Now for printing. We do @emph{not} want to print a graph that is
21066 1,030 lines high @dots{} Instead, we should print a graph that is
21067 fewer than twenty-five lines high. A graph that height can be
21068 displayed on almost any monitor, and easily printed on a sheet of paper.
21069
21070 This means that each value in @code{list-for-graph} must be reduced to
21071 one-fiftieth its present value.
21072
21073 Here is a short function to do just that, using two functions we have
21074 not yet seen, @code{mapcar} and @code{lambda}.
21075
21076 @smallexample
21077 @group
21078 (defun one-fiftieth (full-range)
21079 "Return list, each number one-fiftieth of previous."
21080 (mapcar '(lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) full-range))
21081 @end group
21082 @end smallexample
21083
21084 @node lambda, mapcar, Graphing words in defuns, Print Whole Graph
21085 @appendixsubsec A @code{lambda} Expression: Useful Anonymity
21086 @cindex Anonymous function
21087 @findex lambda
21088
21089 @code{lambda} is the symbol for an anonymous function, a function
21090 without a name. Every time you use an anonymous function, you need to
21091 include its whole body.
21092
21093 @need 1250
21094 @noindent
21095 Thus,
21096
21097 @smallexample
21098 (lambda (arg) (/ arg 50))
21099 @end smallexample
21100
21101 @noindent
21102 is a function definition that says `return the value resulting from
21103 dividing whatever is passed to me as @code{arg} by 50'.
21104
21105 @need 1200
21106 Earlier, for example, we had a function @code{multiply-by-seven}; it
21107 multiplied its argument by 7. This function is similar, except it
21108 divides its argument by 50; and, it has no name. The anonymous
21109 equivalent of @code{multiply-by-seven} is:
21110
21111 @smallexample
21112 (lambda (number) (* 7 number))
21113 @end smallexample
21114
21115 @noindent
21116 (@xref{defun, , The @code{defun} Special Form}.)
21117
21118 @need 1250
21119 @noindent
21120 If we want to multiply 3 by 7, we can write:
21121
21122 @c !!! Clear print-postscript-figures if the computer formatting this
21123 @c document is too small and cannot handle all the diagrams and figures.
21124 @c clear print-postscript-figures
21125 @c set print-postscript-figures
21126 @c lambda example diagram #1
21127 @ifnottex
21128 @smallexample
21129 @group
21130 (multiply-by-seven 3)
21131 \_______________/ ^
21132 | |
21133 function argument
21134 @end group
21135 @end smallexample
21136 @end ifnottex
21137 @ifset print-postscript-figures
21138 @sp 1
21139 @tex
21140 @center @image{lambda-1}
21141 %%%% old method of including an image
21142 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
21143 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/lambda-1.eps}}
21144 % \catcode`\@=0 %
21145 @end tex
21146 @sp 1
21147 @end ifset
21148 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
21149 @iftex
21150 @smallexample
21151 @group
21152 (multiply-by-seven 3)
21153 \_______________/ ^
21154 | |
21155 function argument
21156 @end group
21157 @end smallexample
21158 @end iftex
21159 @end ifclear
21160
21161 @noindent
21162 This expression returns 21.
21163
21164 @need 1250
21165 @noindent
21166 Similarly, we can write:
21167
21168 @c lambda example diagram #2
21169 @ifnottex
21170 @smallexample
21171 @group
21172 ((lambda (number) (* 7 number)) 3)
21173 \____________________________/ ^
21174 | |
21175 anonymous function argument
21176 @end group
21177 @end smallexample
21178 @end ifnottex
21179 @ifset print-postscript-figures
21180 @sp 1
21181 @tex
21182 @center @image{lambda-2}
21183 %%%% old method of including an image
21184 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
21185 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/lambda-2.eps}}
21186 % \catcode`\@=0 %
21187 @end tex
21188 @sp 1
21189 @end ifset
21190 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
21191 @iftex
21192 @smallexample
21193 @group
21194 ((lambda (number) (* 7 number)) 3)
21195 \____________________________/ ^
21196 | |
21197 anonymous function argument
21198 @end group
21199 @end smallexample
21200 @end iftex
21201 @end ifclear
21202
21203 @need 1250
21204 @noindent
21205 If we want to divide 100 by 50, we can write:
21206
21207 @c lambda example diagram #3
21208 @ifnottex
21209 @smallexample
21210 @group
21211 ((lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) 100)
21212 \______________________/ \_/
21213 | |
21214 anonymous function argument
21215 @end group
21216 @end smallexample
21217 @end ifnottex
21218 @ifset print-postscript-figures
21219 @sp 1
21220 @tex
21221 @center @image{lambda-3}
21222 %%%% old method of including an image
21223 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
21224 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/lambda-3.eps}}
21225 % \catcode`\@=0 %
21226 @end tex
21227 @sp 1
21228 @end ifset
21229 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
21230 @iftex
21231 @smallexample
21232 @group
21233 ((lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) 100)
21234 \______________________/ \_/
21235 | |
21236 anonymous function argument
21237 @end group
21238 @end smallexample
21239 @end iftex
21240 @end ifclear
21241
21242 @noindent
21243 This expression returns 2. The 100 is passed to the function, which
21244 divides that number by 50.
21245
21246 @xref{Lambda Expressions, , Lambda Expressions, elisp, The GNU Emacs
21247 Lisp Reference Manual}, for more about @code{lambda}. Lisp and lambda
21248 expressions derive from the Lambda Calculus.
21249
21250 @node mapcar, Another Bug, lambda, Print Whole Graph
21251 @appendixsubsec The @code{mapcar} Function
21252 @findex mapcar
21253
21254 @code{mapcar} is a function that calls its first argument with each
21255 element of its second argument, in turn. The second argument must be
21256 a sequence.
21257
21258 The @samp{map} part of the name comes from the mathematical phrase,
21259 `mapping over a domain', meaning to apply a function to each of the
21260 elements in a domain. The mathematical phrase is based on the
21261 metaphor of a surveyor walking, one step at a time, over an area he is
21262 mapping. And @samp{car}, of course, comes from the Lisp notion of the
21263 first of a list.
21264
21265 @need 1250
21266 @noindent
21267 For example,
21268
21269 @smallexample
21270 @group
21271 (mapcar '1+ '(2 4 6))
21272 @result{} (3 5 7)
21273 @end group
21274 @end smallexample
21275
21276 @noindent
21277 The function @code{1+} which adds one to its argument, is executed on
21278 @emph{each} element of the list, and a new list is returned.
21279
21280 Contrast this with @code{apply}, which applies its first argument to
21281 all the remaining.
21282 (@xref{Readying a Graph, , Readying a Graph}, for a explanation of
21283 @code{apply}.)
21284
21285 @need 1250
21286 In the definition of @code{one-fiftieth}, the first argument is the
21287 anonymous function:
21288
21289 @smallexample
21290 (lambda (arg) (/ arg 50))
21291 @end smallexample
21292
21293 @noindent
21294 and the second argument is @code{full-range}, which will be bound to
21295 @code{list-for-graph}.
21296
21297 @need 1250
21298 The whole expression looks like this:
21299
21300 @smallexample
21301 (mapcar '(lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) full-range))
21302 @end smallexample
21303
21304 @xref{Mapping Functions, , Mapping Functions, elisp, The GNU Emacs
21305 Lisp Reference Manual}, for more about @code{mapcar}.
21306
21307 Using the @code{one-fiftieth} function, we can generate a list in
21308 which each element is one-fiftieth the size of the corresponding
21309 element in @code{list-for-graph}.
21310
21311 @smallexample
21312 @group
21313 (setq fiftieth-list-for-graph
21314 (one-fiftieth list-for-graph))
21315 @end group
21316 @end smallexample
21317
21318 @need 1250
21319 The resulting list looks like this:
21320
21321 @smallexample
21322 @group
21323 (10 20 19 15 11 9 6 5 4 3 3 2 2
21324 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4)
21325 @end group
21326 @end smallexample
21327
21328 @noindent
21329 This, we are almost ready to print! (We also notice the loss of
21330 information: many of the higher ranges are 0, meaning that fewer than
21331 50 defuns had that many words or symbols---but not necessarily meaning
21332 that none had that many words or symbols.)
21333
21334 @node Another Bug, Final printed graph, mapcar, Print Whole Graph
21335 @appendixsubsec Another Bug @dots{} Most Insidious
21336 @cindex Bug, most insidious type
21337 @cindex Insidious type of bug
21338
21339 I said `almost ready to print'! Of course, there is a bug in the
21340 @code{print-graph} function @dots{} It has a @code{vertical-step}
21341 option, but not a @code{horizontal-step} option. The
21342 @code{top-of-range} scale goes from 10 to 300 by tens. But the
21343 @code{print-graph} function will print only by ones.
21344
21345 This is a classic example of what some consider the most insidious
21346 type of bug, the bug of omission. This is not the kind of bug you can
21347 find by studying the code, for it is not in the code; it is an omitted
21348 feature. Your best actions are to try your program early and often;
21349 and try to arrange, as much as you can, to write code that is easy to
21350 understand and easy to change. Try to be aware, whenever you can,
21351 that whatever you have written, @emph{will} be rewritten, if not soon,
21352 eventually. A hard maxim to follow.
21353
21354 It is the @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line} function that needs the
21355 work; and then the @code{print-X-axis} and the @code{print-graph}
21356 functions need to be adapted. Not much needs to be done; there is one
21357 nicety: the numbers ought to line up under the tic marks. This takes
21358 a little thought.
21359
21360 @need 1250
21361 Here is the corrected @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}:
21362
21363 @smallexample
21364 @group
21365 (defun print-X-axis-numbered-line
21366 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces
21367 &optional horizontal-step)
21368 "Print line of X-axis numbers"
21369 (let ((number X-axis-label-spacing)
21370 (horizontal-step (or horizontal-step 1)))
21371 @end group
21372 @group
21373 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
21374 ;; @r{Delete extra leading spaces.}
21375 (delete-char
21376 (- (1-
21377 (length (number-to-string horizontal-step)))))
21378 (insert (concat
21379 (make-string
21380 @end group
21381 @group
21382 ;; @r{Insert white space.}
21383 (- (* symbol-width
21384 X-axis-label-spacing)
21385 (1-
21386 (length
21387 (number-to-string horizontal-step)))
21388 2)
21389 ? )
21390 (number-to-string
21391 (* number horizontal-step))))
21392 @end group
21393 @group
21394 ;; @r{Insert remaining numbers.}
21395 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21396 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
21397 (insert (X-axis-element
21398 (* number horizontal-step)))
21399 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21400 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics)))))
21401 @end group
21402 @end smallexample
21403
21404 @need 1500
21405 If you are reading this in Info, you can see the new versions of
21406 @code{print-X-axis} @code{print-graph} and evaluate them. If you are
21407 reading this in a printed book, you can see the changed lines here
21408 (the full text is too much to print).
21409
21410 @iftex
21411 @smallexample
21412 @group
21413 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list horizontal-step)
21414 @dots{}
21415 (print-X-axis-numbered-line
21416 tic-number leading-spaces horizontal-step))
21417 @end group
21418 @end smallexample
21419
21420 @smallexample
21421 @group
21422 (defun print-graph
21423 (numbers-list
21424 &optional vertical-step horizontal-step)
21425 @dots{}
21426 (print-X-axis numbers-list horizontal-step))
21427 @end group
21428 @end smallexample
21429 @end iftex
21430
21431 @ifnottex
21432 @smallexample
21433 @group
21434 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list horizontal-step)
21435 "Print X axis labels to length of NUMBERS-LIST.
21436 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21437 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
21438 each column."
21439 @end group
21440 @group
21441 ;; Value of symbol-width and full-Y-label-width
21442 ;; are passed by `print-graph'.
21443 (let* ((leading-spaces
21444 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? ))
21445 ;; symbol-width @r{is provided by} graph-body-print
21446 (tic-width (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing))
21447 (X-length (length numbers-list))
21448 @end group
21449 @group
21450 (X-tic
21451 (concat
21452 (make-string
21453 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
21454 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21455 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
21456 ? )
21457 @end group
21458 @group
21459 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
21460 X-axis-tic-symbol))
21461 (tic-number
21462 (if (zerop (% X-length tic-width))
21463 (/ X-length tic-width)
21464 (1+ (/ X-length tic-width)))))
21465 @end group
21466
21467 @group
21468 (print-X-axis-tic-line
21469 tic-number leading-spaces X-tic)
21470 (insert "\n")
21471 (print-X-axis-numbered-line
21472 tic-number leading-spaces horizontal-step)))
21473 @end group
21474 @end smallexample
21475
21476 @smallexample
21477 @group
21478 (defun print-graph
21479 (numbers-list &optional vertical-step horizontal-step)
21480 "Print labeled bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
21481 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
21482 @end group
21483
21484 @group
21485 Optionally, VERTICAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21486 specifies how much a Y axis label increments for
21487 each line. For example, a step of 5 means that
21488 each row is five units.
21489 @end group
21490
21491 @group
21492 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21493 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
21494 each column."
21495 (let* ((symbol-width (length graph-blank))
21496 ;; @code{height} @r{is both the largest number}
21497 ;; @r{and the number with the most digits.}
21498 (height (apply 'max numbers-list))
21499 @end group
21500 @group
21501 (height-of-top-line
21502 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21503 height
21504 ;; @r{else}
21505 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21506 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
21507 @end group
21508 @group
21509 (vertical-step (or vertical-step 1))
21510 (full-Y-label-width
21511 (length
21512 (concat
21513 (number-to-string
21514 (* height-of-top-line vertical-step))
21515 Y-axis-tic))))
21516 @end group
21517 @group
21518 (print-Y-axis
21519 height-of-top-line full-Y-label-width vertical-step)
21520 (graph-body-print
21521 numbers-list height-of-top-line symbol-width)
21522 (print-X-axis numbers-list horizontal-step)))
21523 @end group
21524 @end smallexample
21525 @end ifnottex
21526
21527 @c qqq
21528 @ignore
21529 Graphing Definitions Re-listed
21530
21531 @need 1250
21532 Here are all the graphing definitions in their final form:
21533
21534 @smallexample
21535 @group
21536 (defvar top-of-ranges
21537 '(10 20 30 40 50
21538 60 70 80 90 100
21539 110 120 130 140 150
21540 160 170 180 190 200
21541 210 220 230 240 250)
21542 "List specifying ranges for `defuns-per-range'.")
21543 @end group
21544
21545 @group
21546 (defvar graph-symbol "*"
21547 "String used as symbol in graph, usually an asterisk.")
21548 @end group
21549
21550 @group
21551 (defvar graph-blank " "
21552 "String used as blank in graph, usually a blank space.
21553 graph-blank must be the same number of columns wide
21554 as graph-symbol.")
21555 @end group
21556
21557 @group
21558 (defvar Y-axis-tic " - "
21559 "String that follows number in a Y axis label.")
21560 @end group
21561
21562 @group
21563 (defvar Y-axis-label-spacing 5
21564 "Number of lines from one Y axis label to next.")
21565 @end group
21566
21567 @group
21568 (defvar X-axis-tic-symbol "|"
21569 "String to insert to point to a column in X axis.")
21570 @end group
21571
21572 @group
21573 (defvar X-axis-label-spacing
21574 (if (boundp 'graph-blank)
21575 (* 5 (length graph-blank)) 5)
21576 "Number of units from one X axis label to next.")
21577 @end group
21578 @end smallexample
21579
21580 @smallexample
21581 @group
21582 (defun count-words-in-defun ()
21583 "Return the number of words and symbols in a defun."
21584 (beginning-of-defun)
21585 (let ((count 0)
21586 (end (save-excursion (end-of-defun) (point))))
21587 @end group
21588
21589 @group
21590 (while
21591 (and (< (point) end)
21592 (re-search-forward
21593 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*"
21594 end t))
21595 (setq count (1+ count)))
21596 count))
21597 @end group
21598 @end smallexample
21599
21600 @smallexample
21601 @group
21602 (defun lengths-list-file (filename)
21603 "Return list of definitions' lengths within FILE.
21604 The returned list is a list of numbers.
21605 Each number is the number of words or
21606 symbols in one function definition."
21607 @end group
21608
21609 @group
21610 (message "Working on `%s' ... " filename)
21611 (save-excursion
21612 (let ((buffer (find-file-noselect filename))
21613 (lengths-list))
21614 (set-buffer buffer)
21615 (setq buffer-read-only t)
21616 (widen)
21617 (goto-char (point-min))
21618 @end group
21619
21620 @group
21621 (while (re-search-forward "^(defun" nil t)
21622 (setq lengths-list
21623 (cons (count-words-in-defun) lengths-list)))
21624 (kill-buffer buffer)
21625 lengths-list)))
21626 @end group
21627 @end smallexample
21628
21629 @smallexample
21630 @group
21631 (defun lengths-list-many-files (list-of-files)
21632 "Return list of lengths of defuns in LIST-OF-FILES."
21633 (let (lengths-list)
21634 ;;; @r{true-or-false-test}
21635 (while list-of-files
21636 (setq lengths-list
21637 (append
21638 lengths-list
21639 @end group
21640 @group
21641 ;;; @r{Generate a lengths' list.}
21642 (lengths-list-file
21643 (expand-file-name (car list-of-files)))))
21644 ;;; @r{Make files' list shorter.}
21645 (setq list-of-files (cdr list-of-files)))
21646 ;;; @r{Return final value of lengths' list.}
21647 lengths-list))
21648 @end group
21649 @end smallexample
21650
21651 @smallexample
21652 @group
21653 (defun defuns-per-range (sorted-lengths top-of-ranges)
21654 "SORTED-LENGTHS defuns in each TOP-OF-RANGES range."
21655 (let ((top-of-range (car top-of-ranges))
21656 (number-within-range 0)
21657 defuns-per-range-list)
21658 @end group
21659
21660 @group
21661 ;; @r{Outer loop.}
21662 (while top-of-ranges
21663
21664 ;; @r{Inner loop.}
21665 (while (and
21666 ;; @r{Need number for numeric test.}
21667 (car sorted-lengths)
21668 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range))
21669
21670 ;; @r{Count number of definitions within current range.}
21671 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
21672 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
21673 @end group
21674
21675 @group
21676 ;; @r{Exit inner loop but remain within outer loop.}
21677
21678 (setq defuns-per-range-list
21679 (cons number-within-range defuns-per-range-list))
21680 (setq number-within-range 0) ; @r{Reset count to zero.}
21681
21682 ;; @r{Move to next range.}
21683 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges))
21684 ;; @r{Specify next top of range value.}
21685 (setq top-of-range (car top-of-ranges)))
21686 @end group
21687
21688 @group
21689 ;; @r{Exit outer loop and count the number of defuns larger than}
21690 ;; @r{ the largest top-of-range value.}
21691 (setq defuns-per-range-list
21692 (cons
21693 (length sorted-lengths)
21694 defuns-per-range-list))
21695
21696 ;; @r{Return a list of the number of definitions within each range,}
21697 ;; @r{ smallest to largest.}
21698 (nreverse defuns-per-range-list)))
21699 @end group
21700 @end smallexample
21701
21702 @smallexample
21703 @group
21704 (defun column-of-graph (max-graph-height actual-height)
21705 "Return list of MAX-GRAPH-HEIGHT strings;
21706 ACTUAL-HEIGHT are graph-symbols.
21707 The graph-symbols are contiguous entries at the end
21708 of the list.
21709 The list will be inserted as one column of a graph.
21710 The strings are either graph-blank or graph-symbol."
21711 @end group
21712
21713 @group
21714 (let ((insert-list nil)
21715 (number-of-top-blanks
21716 (- max-graph-height actual-height)))
21717
21718 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-symbols}.}
21719 (while (> actual-height 0)
21720 (setq insert-list (cons graph-symbol insert-list))
21721 (setq actual-height (1- actual-height)))
21722 @end group
21723
21724 @group
21725 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-blanks}.}
21726 (while (> number-of-top-blanks 0)
21727 (setq insert-list (cons graph-blank insert-list))
21728 (setq number-of-top-blanks
21729 (1- number-of-top-blanks)))
21730
21731 ;; @r{Return whole list.}
21732 insert-list))
21733 @end group
21734 @end smallexample
21735
21736 @smallexample
21737 @group
21738 (defun Y-axis-element (number full-Y-label-width)
21739 "Construct a NUMBERed label element.
21740 A numbered element looks like this ` 5 - ',
21741 and is padded as needed so all line up with
21742 the element for the largest number."
21743 @end group
21744 @group
21745 (let* ((leading-spaces
21746 (- full-Y-label-width
21747 (length
21748 (concat (number-to-string number)
21749 Y-axis-tic)))))
21750 @end group
21751 @group
21752 (concat
21753 (make-string leading-spaces ? )
21754 (number-to-string number)
21755 Y-axis-tic)))
21756 @end group
21757 @end smallexample
21758
21759 @smallexample
21760 @group
21761 (defun print-Y-axis
21762 (height full-Y-label-width &optional vertical-step)
21763 "Insert Y axis by HEIGHT and FULL-Y-LABEL-WIDTH.
21764 Height must be the maximum height of the graph.
21765 Full width is the width of the highest label element.
21766 Optionally, print according to VERTICAL-STEP."
21767 @end group
21768 @group
21769 ;; Value of height and full-Y-label-width
21770 ;; are passed by `print-graph'.
21771 (let ((start (point)))
21772 (insert-rectangle
21773 (Y-axis-column height full-Y-label-width vertical-step))
21774 @end group
21775 @group
21776 ;; @r{Place point ready for inserting graph.}
21777 (goto-char start)
21778 ;; @r{Move point forward by value of} full-Y-label-width
21779 (forward-char full-Y-label-width)))
21780 @end group
21781 @end smallexample
21782
21783 @smallexample
21784 @group
21785 (defun print-X-axis-tic-line
21786 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces X-axis-tic-element)
21787 "Print ticks for X axis."
21788 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
21789 (insert X-axis-tic-symbol) ; @r{Under first column.}
21790 @end group
21791 @group
21792 ;; @r{Insert second tic in the right spot.}
21793 (insert (concat
21794 (make-string
21795 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21796 ;; @r{Insert white space up to second tic symbol.}
21797 (* 2 (length X-axis-tic-symbol)))
21798 ? )
21799 X-axis-tic-symbol))
21800 @end group
21801 @group
21802 ;; @r{Insert remaining ticks.}
21803 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
21804 (insert X-axis-tic-element)
21805 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics))))
21806 @end group
21807 @end smallexample
21808
21809 @smallexample
21810 @group
21811 (defun X-axis-element (number)
21812 "Construct a numbered X axis element."
21813 (let ((leading-spaces
21814 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21815 (length (number-to-string number)))))
21816 (concat (make-string leading-spaces ? )
21817 (number-to-string number))))
21818 @end group
21819 @end smallexample
21820
21821 @smallexample
21822 @group
21823 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list height symbol-width)
21824 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
21825 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
21826 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
21827 SYMBOL-WIDTH is number of each column."
21828 @end group
21829 @group
21830 (let (from-position)
21831 (while numbers-list
21832 (setq from-position (point))
21833 (insert-rectangle
21834 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
21835 (goto-char from-position)
21836 (forward-char symbol-width)
21837 @end group
21838 @group
21839 ;; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
21840 (sit-for 0)
21841 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))
21842 ;; @r{Place point for X axis labels.}
21843 (forward-line height)
21844 (insert "\n")))
21845 @end group
21846 @end smallexample
21847
21848 @smallexample
21849 @group
21850 (defun Y-axis-column
21851 (height width-of-label &optional vertical-step)
21852 "Construct list of labels for Y axis.
21853 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
21854 WIDTH-OF-LABEL is maximum width of label.
21855 @end group
21856 @group
21857 VERTICAL-STEP, an option, is a positive integer
21858 that specifies how much a Y axis label increments
21859 for each line. For example, a step of 5 means
21860 that each line is five units of the graph."
21861 (let (Y-axis
21862 (number-per-line (or vertical-step 1)))
21863 @end group
21864 @group
21865 (while (> height 1)
21866 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21867 ;; @r{Insert label.}
21868 (setq Y-axis
21869 (cons
21870 (Y-axis-element
21871 (* height number-per-line)
21872 width-of-label)
21873 Y-axis))
21874 @end group
21875 @group
21876 ;; @r{Else, insert blanks.}
21877 (setq Y-axis
21878 (cons
21879 (make-string width-of-label ? )
21880 Y-axis)))
21881 (setq height (1- height)))
21882 @end group
21883 @group
21884 ;; @r{Insert base line.}
21885 (setq Y-axis (cons (Y-axis-element
21886 (or vertical-step 1)
21887 width-of-label)
21888 Y-axis))
21889 (nreverse Y-axis)))
21890 @end group
21891 @end smallexample
21892
21893 @smallexample
21894 @group
21895 (defun print-X-axis-numbered-line
21896 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces
21897 &optional horizontal-step)
21898 "Print line of X-axis numbers"
21899 (let ((number X-axis-label-spacing)
21900 (horizontal-step (or horizontal-step 1)))
21901 @end group
21902 @group
21903 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
21904 ;; line up number
21905 (delete-char (- (1- (length (number-to-string horizontal-step)))))
21906 (insert (concat
21907 (make-string
21908 ;; @r{Insert white space up to next number.}
21909 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21910 (1- (length (number-to-string horizontal-step)))
21911 2)
21912 ? )
21913 (number-to-string (* number horizontal-step))))
21914 @end group
21915 @group
21916 ;; @r{Insert remaining numbers.}
21917 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21918 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
21919 (insert (X-axis-element (* number horizontal-step)))
21920 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21921 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics)))))
21922 @end group
21923 @end smallexample
21924
21925 @smallexample
21926 @group
21927 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list horizontal-step)
21928 "Print X axis labels to length of NUMBERS-LIST.
21929 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21930 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
21931 each column."
21932 @end group
21933 @group
21934 ;; Value of symbol-width and full-Y-label-width
21935 ;; are passed by `print-graph'.
21936 (let* ((leading-spaces
21937 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? ))
21938 ;; symbol-width @r{is provided by} graph-body-print
21939 (tic-width (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing))
21940 (X-length (length numbers-list))
21941 @end group
21942 @group
21943 (X-tic
21944 (concat
21945 (make-string
21946 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
21947 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21948 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
21949 ? )
21950 @end group
21951 @group
21952 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
21953 X-axis-tic-symbol))
21954 (tic-number
21955 (if (zerop (% X-length tic-width))
21956 (/ X-length tic-width)
21957 (1+ (/ X-length tic-width)))))
21958 @end group
21959
21960 @group
21961 (print-X-axis-tic-line
21962 tic-number leading-spaces X-tic)
21963 (insert "\n")
21964 (print-X-axis-numbered-line
21965 tic-number leading-spaces horizontal-step)))
21966 @end group
21967 @end smallexample
21968
21969 @smallexample
21970 @group
21971 (defun one-fiftieth (full-range)
21972 "Return list, each number of which is 1/50th previous."
21973 (mapcar '(lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) full-range))
21974 @end group
21975 @end smallexample
21976
21977 @smallexample
21978 @group
21979 (defun print-graph
21980 (numbers-list &optional vertical-step horizontal-step)
21981 "Print labeled bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
21982 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
21983 @end group
21984
21985 @group
21986 Optionally, VERTICAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21987 specifies how much a Y axis label increments for
21988 each line. For example, a step of 5 means that
21989 each row is five units.
21990 @end group
21991
21992 @group
21993 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21994 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
21995 each column."
21996 (let* ((symbol-width (length graph-blank))
21997 ;; @code{height} @r{is both the largest number}
21998 ;; @r{and the number with the most digits.}
21999 (height (apply 'max numbers-list))
22000 @end group
22001 @group
22002 (height-of-top-line
22003 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
22004 height
22005 ;; @r{else}
22006 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
22007 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
22008 @end group
22009 @group
22010 (vertical-step (or vertical-step 1))
22011 (full-Y-label-width
22012 (length
22013 (concat
22014 (number-to-string
22015 (* height-of-top-line vertical-step))
22016 Y-axis-tic))))
22017 @end group
22018 @group
22019
22020 (print-Y-axis
22021 height-of-top-line full-Y-label-width vertical-step)
22022 (graph-body-print
22023 numbers-list height-of-top-line symbol-width)
22024 (print-X-axis numbers-list horizontal-step)))
22025 @end group
22026 @end smallexample
22027 @c qqq
22028 @end ignore
22029
22030 @page
22031 @node Final printed graph, , Another Bug, Print Whole Graph
22032 @appendixsubsec The Printed Graph
22033
22034 When made and installed, you can call the @code{print-graph} command
22035 like this:
22036 @sp 1
22037
22038 @smallexample
22039 @group
22040 (print-graph fiftieth-list-for-graph 50 10)
22041 @end group
22042 @end smallexample
22043 @sp 1
22044
22045 @noindent
22046 Here is the graph:
22047 @sp 2
22048
22049 @smallexample
22050 @group
22051 1000 - *
22052 **
22053 **
22054 **
22055 **
22056 750 - ***
22057 ***
22058 ***
22059 ***
22060 ****
22061 500 - *****
22062 ******
22063 ******
22064 ******
22065 *******
22066 250 - ********
22067 ********* *
22068 *********** *
22069 ************* *
22070 50 - ***************** * *
22071 | | | | | | | |
22072 10 50 100 150 200 250 300 350
22073 @end group
22074 @end smallexample
22075
22076 @sp 2
22077
22078 @noindent
22079 The largest group of functions contain 10 -- 19 words and symbols each.
22080
22081 @node Free Software and Free Manuals, GNU Free Documentation License, Full Graph, Top
22082 @appendix Free Software and Free Manuals
22083
22084 @strong{by Richard M. Stallman}
22085 @sp 1
22086
22087 The biggest deficiency in free operating systems is not in the
22088 software---it is the lack of good free manuals that we can include in
22089 these systems. Many of our most important programs do not come with
22090 full manuals. Documentation is an essential part of any software
22091 package; when an important free software package does not come with a
22092 free manual, that is a major gap. We have many such gaps today.
22093
22094 Once upon a time, many years ago, I thought I would learn Perl. I got
22095 a copy of a free manual, but I found it hard to read. When I asked
22096 Perl users about alternatives, they told me that there were better
22097 introductory manuals---but those were not free.
22098
22099 Why was this? The authors of the good manuals had written them for
22100 O'Reilly Associates, which published them with restrictive terms---no
22101 copying, no modification, source files not available---which exclude
22102 them from the free software community.
22103
22104 That wasn't the first time this sort of thing has happened, and (to
22105 our community's great loss) it was far from the last. Proprietary
22106 manual publishers have enticed a great many authors to restrict their
22107 manuals since then. Many times I have heard a GNU user eagerly tell me
22108 about a manual that he is writing, with which he expects to help the
22109 GNU project---and then had my hopes dashed, as he proceeded to explain
22110 that he had signed a contract with a publisher that would restrict it
22111 so that we cannot use it.
22112
22113 Given that writing good English is a rare skill among programmers, we
22114 can ill afford to lose manuals this way.
22115
22116 Free documentation, like free software, is a matter of freedom, not
22117 price. The problem with these manuals was not that O'Reilly Associates
22118 charged a price for printed copies---that in itself is fine. The Free
22119 Software Foundation @uref{http://shop.fsf.org, sells printed copies} of
22120 free @uref{http://www.gnu.org/doc/doc.html, GNU manuals}, too.
22121 But GNU manuals are available in source code form, while these manuals
22122 are available only on paper. GNU manuals come with permission to copy
22123 and modify; the Perl manuals do not. These restrictions are the
22124 problems.
22125
22126 The criterion for a free manual is pretty much the same as for free
22127 software: it is a matter of giving all users certain
22128 freedoms. Redistribution (including commercial redistribution) must be
22129 permitted, so that the manual can accompany every copy of the program,
22130 on-line or on paper. Permission for modification is crucial too.
22131
22132 As a general rule, I don't believe that it is essential for people to
22133 have permission to modify all sorts of articles and books. The issues
22134 for writings are not necessarily the same as those for software. For
22135 example, I don't think you or I are obliged to give permission to
22136 modify articles like this one, which describe our actions and our
22137 views.
22138
22139 But there is a particular reason why the freedom to modify is crucial
22140 for documentation for free software. When people exercise their right
22141 to modify the software, and add or change its features, if they are
22142 conscientious they will change the manual too---so they can provide
22143 accurate and usable documentation with the modified program. A manual
22144 which forbids programmers to be conscientious and finish the job, or
22145 more precisely requires them to write a new manual from scratch if
22146 they change the program, does not fill our community's needs.
22147
22148 While a blanket prohibition on modification is unacceptable, some
22149 kinds of limits on the method of modification pose no problem. For
22150 example, requirements to preserve the original author's copyright
22151 notice, the distribution terms, or the list of authors, are ok. It is
22152 also no problem to require modified versions to include notice that
22153 they were modified, even to have entire sections that may not be
22154 deleted or changed, as long as these sections deal with nontechnical
22155 topics. (Some GNU manuals have them.)
22156
22157 These kinds of restrictions are not a problem because, as a practical
22158 matter, they don't stop the conscientious programmer from adapting the
22159 manual to fit the modified program. In other words, they don't block
22160 the free software community from making full use of the manual.
22161
22162 However, it must be possible to modify all the technical content of
22163 the manual, and then distribute the result in all the usual media,
22164 through all the usual channels; otherwise, the restrictions do block
22165 the community, the manual is not free, and so we need another manual.
22166
22167 Unfortunately, it is often hard to find someone to write another
22168 manual when a proprietary manual exists. The obstacle is that many
22169 users think that a proprietary manual is good enough---so they don't
22170 see the need to write a free manual. They do not see that the free
22171 operating system has a gap that needs filling.
22172
22173 Why do users think that proprietary manuals are good enough? Some have
22174 not considered the issue. I hope this article will do something to
22175 change that.
22176
22177 Other users consider proprietary manuals acceptable for the same
22178 reason so many people consider proprietary software acceptable: they
22179 judge in purely practical terms, not using freedom as a
22180 criterion. These people are entitled to their opinions, but since
22181 those opinions spring from values which do not include freedom, they
22182 are no guide for those of us who do value freedom.
22183
22184 Please spread the word about this issue. We continue to lose manuals
22185 to proprietary publishing. If we spread the word that proprietary
22186 manuals are not sufficient, perhaps the next person who wants to help
22187 GNU by writing documentation will realize, before it is too late, that
22188 he must above all make it free.
22189
22190 We can also encourage commercial publishers to sell free, copylefted
22191 manuals instead of proprietary ones. One way you can help this is to
22192 check the distribution terms of a manual before you buy it, and prefer
22193 copylefted manuals to non-copylefted ones.
22194
22195 @sp 2
22196 @noindent
22197 Note: The Free Software Foundation maintains a page on its Web site
22198 that lists free books available from other publishers:@*
22199 @uref{http://www.gnu.org/doc/other-free-books.html}
22200
22201 @node GNU Free Documentation License, Index, Free Software and Free Manuals, Top
22202 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
22203
22204 @cindex FDL, GNU Free Documentation License
22205 @include doclicense.texi
22206
22207 @node Index, About the Author, GNU Free Documentation License, Top
22208 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
22209 @unnumbered Index
22210
22211 @ignore
22212 MENU ENTRY: NODE NAME.
22213 @end ignore
22214
22215 @printindex cp
22216
22217 @iftex
22218 @c Place biographical information on right-hand (verso) page
22219
22220 @tex
22221 \par\vfill\supereject
22222 \ifodd\pageno
22223 \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
22224 \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
22225 %\page\hbox{}\page
22226 \else
22227 % \par\vfill\supereject
22228 \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
22229 \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
22230 %\page\hbox{}%\page
22231 %\page\hbox{}%\page
22232 \fi
22233 @end tex
22234
22235 @c page
22236 @w{ }
22237
22238 @c ================ Biographical information ================
22239
22240 @w{ }
22241 @sp 8
22242 @center About the Author
22243 @sp 1
22244 @end iftex
22245
22246 @ifnottex
22247 @node About the Author, , Index, Top
22248 @unnumbered About the Author
22249 @end ifnottex
22250
22251 @quotation
22252 Robert J. Chassell has worked with GNU Emacs since 1985. He writes
22253 and edits, teaches Emacs and Emacs Lisp, and speaks throughout the
22254 world on software freedom. Chassell was a founding Director and
22255 Treasurer of the Free Software Foundation, Inc. He is co-author of
22256 the @cite{Texinfo} manual, and has edited more than a dozen other
22257 books. He graduated from Cambridge University, in England. He has an
22258 abiding interest in social and economic history and flies his own
22259 airplane.
22260 @end quotation
22261
22262 @c @page
22263 @c @w{ }
22264 @c
22265 @c @c Prevent page number on blank verso, so eject it first.
22266 @c @tex
22267 @c \par\vfill\supereject
22268 @c @end tex
22269
22270 @c @iftex
22271 @c @headings off
22272 @c @evenheading @thispage @| @| @thistitle
22273 @c @oddheading @| @| @thispage
22274 @c @end iftex
22275
22276 @bye